SB,
\ UNITED STATESrENVlRONMENTAL PR^e^FfON AGENCY
WASHINGTON. D.C. 20460
MAY 7
843B87100
OFF.ICE OF
MEMORANDUM
SUBJECT: Field Testing Wetland Ident1f1ca£ien-fend Delineation Manual
FROM: David G. Dayts, Acting
Office of Wetlands Protection
TO: Water Division Directors, Regions I, II, IV, V, VIII, X
Environmental Service Division Directors, Regions I'M, VI
Assistant Regional Administrators, Regions VII, iX
For the past few years, the Corps of Engineers' Waterways Experiment
Station and EPA Headquarters have been independently developing ^etland
delineation manuals. In 1985, our agencies agreed to try to mer$e the
two draft documents into one joint Federal 404 jurisdictional toaijuat.
Although this joint document h^s not been developed to date, both agencies
have progressed substantially on their manuals since 1985, and on February
3, 1987, agreed to field test the manuals for a one-year period (ending
January 31, 1988) before further consideration is given to consolidation
into a unified procedure (Attachment 1). Please note also the enclosed
February 3, 1987 supplemental letter from EPA to the Corps, which clarifies
EPA's enforcement authority in relation to special cases (Attainment 2).
Ten copies of EPA's manual and four copies of the Corps' manual are
attached (Attachments 3 and 4).
The Regional .wetland coordinators and their staffs are familiar with
this effort to develop a wetland jurisdiction^ mantiaT. They have seen
earlier drafts and staff from Regions 3, 4, 5, 6* and 7 were represented
on EPA's Regional Bottomland Hardwood Wetland Deliirgation Review team that
field tested the basic rationale underlying the field methodology at a
number of bottomland hardwood sites in 1986. Actually, the overall field
methodology is not all that different from what EPA's field people are
already doing when they get involved in jurisdictional determinations.
Thus, the manual -just formalizes, to a large extent,, what is already
being done on an ad hoc basis.
EPA's irtaruial H in two volumes. Volume I presents EPA's rationale on
wetland jurisdiction, elaborates on the three wetland parameters generally
considered when making jurisdictional determinations, and presents an
overview of the j,urisdictional approaches developed in Volume II, the field
methodology. *As a training document, Volume I would benefit from additional
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Feeion 5, Library (5PL-16)
230 S. learborn St-eet, Room 1670
Chicago, IL 60604
-------
4
-------
-2-
conceptual foundation. However, the focus of the effort up to this point
has been on the field methodology. If the methodology proves problematic,
then it would be premature to fully develop Volume I. Furthermore, the
nature of this effort will change if, after the field testing, EPA and the
Corps merge their manuals. Although Volume II, the field methodology,
should not be utilized in isolation from Volume I, it was designed as a
separate document to facilitate its use in the field. It contains a simple
approach and a detailed approach for making wetland jurisdictional determi-
nations. Both approaches are aided by a diagnostic key and a flow chart,
two tools that will expedite and conceptually guide decisions about juris-
diction for sample plots and vegetation units once the field data have
been collected. Either of these tools can be used with the same results.
An extra set of the data forms, as well as an extra copy of the key and flow
chart, is also attached (Attachment 5).
The purpose of this memorandum is to inform you of the field test
agreement and to encourage each Region to test EPA's manual, as well as
the Corps' manual, if time allows. If for some reason the approaches in
EPA's manual appear inappropriate for a given site, please have your staff
contact Bill Sipple, the author of the manual, to discuss any perceived
problems prior to applying an alternate jurisdictional approach in an
official capacity (vs. a purely "R&D" test situation). Obviously, certain
Regions (i .e., tnose with special cases under the Corps-EPA Memorandum of
Understanding on Geographic Jurisdiction) will have more opportunity than
others to apply the manual to official jurisdictional determinations.
However, Regions without special cases sometimes jointly participate with
the Corps in making wetland jurisdictional determinations, make jurisdic-
tional determinations in conjunction with enforcement actions, or verify
for their own purposes Corps' determinations. In all these instances,
even when formal jurisdictional determinations are not required, the
approaches presented in this manual (and if possible, the Corps' manual
for comparison) should be followed.
A comparison of the major differences between EPA's and the Corps'
manuals is attached (Attachment 6). I realize that it may take some
time for Regional staffs to familiarize themselves with EPA's and the
Corps' manual. However, I would like the Regions to initiate their
field testing by at least June 1, 1987, to take advantage of the 1987
growing season. Preferably, the manual should be tested in a range of
wetland types across the United States. Thus, each Region should attempt
to test the manual over a range of wetland communities, hydrologic con-
ditions, and geographic conditions. While we are not establishing any
SPMS or other "bean counts" for this work, we would appreciate each
Region attempting to complete at least five field tests during this period.
We are also simultaneously providing copies of EPA's manual to the Corps
of Engineers, U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, National Marine Fisheries
Service, and Soil Conservation Service for their review and/or testing.
Please test both the simple approach and the detailed approach in EPA's
method. Although you should concentrate on undisturbed sites, about 20
percent of your determinations should be for significantly disturbed
sites.
-------
-------
-3-
Although we would be interested in any comments or suggestions that
you might have relating to the rationale or the assumptions underlying
the basic jurisdictional approaches given in Volume I, our primary interest
is in having the methodology (Volume II) field tested. To help you in
your evaluation of the effort, we have attached an evaluation form
(Attachment 7) that should be filled out for each jurisdictional deter-
mination (official or unofficial) made and an overall evaluation form
(Attachment 8) for the manual itself. The completed site forms, the
related field data sheets, the overall evaluation form, and any other
comments or suggestions for each site, should be submitted to Bill Sipple
in the Office of Wetlands Protection as they are completed, but in any
case not later than February 28, 1988. Bill also expects to conduct
some field testing of his own periodically this spring through fall. He
will coordinate this with the Regions involved.
The Regions should feel free to distribute copies of the manual to
others on request. However, it should be clarified that the manual is
an interim final document that is being field tested by agency personnel
and that we are not undergoing public review (i.e., it is being provided
as a courtesy copy for information purposes only).
Again, I strongly encourage each Region to field test EPA's and,
if possible, the Corps' wetland jurisdictional manuals. Such field
testing is vital to our efforts to develop a technically sound, useable
joint jurisdictional manual with the Corps. If you have general questions,
please contact me. If your staff has specific/technical questions, please
ask them to contact Bill Sipple on FTS 382-5066.
Thank you for your cooperation.
Attachments
cc: Rebecca Hanmer (w/o Attachments)
Gail Cooper, OGC
Eric Preston, Corvallis ERL
Bernie Goode, OCE (w/o Attachment 4)
-------
-------
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF ENGINEERS
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20314-1000 .
UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460
SUBJECT: Wetland Delineation Procedures
SEE DISTRIBUTION
1. Headquarters, Army Corps of Engineers (Corps) and the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) have been working together during the last year in an
effort to develop a unified procedure for delineating the boundary line in
wetlands subject to Section 404 (Clean Water Act) jurisdiction. Each agency
has drafted a method which utilizes soils, hydrology and vegetation to
characterize wetlands.
2. While the two methods are founded on the same fundamental theory (i.e.,
that use of the three parameters of soils, hydrology and vegetation gives the
best indication of the wetland status of an area) and have many similarities,
there are some differences between the two. After consideration of the
methods, the agencies have concluded that both should be field-tested for a
one-year period before further consideration is given to consolidation into a
unified procedure.
3. During the implementation period, each agency will be required to test its
own method. The specific directions and requirements for your agency's test
are enclosed with this letter. Copies of each method will be sent directly to
you under separate cover. We are exchanging both methods for informational
purposes only. At the conclusion of the test period, we will utilize your
data sheets and comments to evaluate the two methods.
4. The fact that each agency is testing its own method for wetland
delineation in no way affects the current agreement on jurisdictional calls.
Until specifically notified to the contrary, the Corps will make all
jurisdictional determinations unless an area falls within a defined special
case category.
-------
SUBJECT: Wetland Delineation Procedures
5. Although we have not reached a complete consensus at this time, we remain
optimistic that we will conclude this test period with the information
necessary to finalize a unified method. We encourage all of you to work
together cooperatively during this period so that we can successfully attain
that goal.
FOR THE CHIEF OF ENGINEERS:
Works
REBECCA HAMMER
Deputy Assistant
Administrator for Water
End
DISTRIBUTION:
(See pg. 3)
-------
UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
WASHINGTON. D.C. 20460
FEB 3 1987 OFFICE OF
WATER
General Peter J. Offringa
Brigadier General, U.S. Army
Deputy Director of Civil Works
Attn: DAEM-CWO-N
Office of the Chief of Engineers
Department of the Army
Washington, D.C. ?0314-1000
Dear General Offringa:
Enclosed please find the joint memorandum on wetland delineation
procedures, which I hava signed. I look forward to the ultimate completion
of this effort, a joint Section 404 wetlands delineation methodology,
following the year of field tests.
I would like to take the opportunity to clarify my understanding of
paragraph 4 of this memorandum. The statement that "the Corps will make
all jurisdictional determinations unless an area falls within a defined
special case category" refers to the permitting procass permit applica-
tions and pre-application inquiries. It is not intended to affect EPA's
authority to make jurisdictional determinations as part of an enforcement
action, regardless of whether the site is located within a special case.
My staff have verified with your staff that this is the mutually intended
meaning of paragraph 4.
I appreciate your interest in coordinating on this and other areas
of concern to both of us, and I look forward to a positive, effective
working relationship.
Sincerely,
i
Rebecca W. Hanmer
Deputy Assistant Administrator
for Water
-------
DATA FORM C-l: HERBACEOUS SPECIES DATA
FOR SIMPLE JURISDICTIONAL DETERMINATION
EPA Region: Recorder: Date:
Project/Site: State: County:
Applicant/Owner: Vegetation Unit I/Name:
r*********************i
Percent Midpoi nt
Indicator Area!Cover of Cover
Species Status Cover Class Class Rank
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
Sum of Midpoints
50% X Sum of Midpoints
************************
1. Note; Herbaceous species include all graminoids, forbs, ferns, fern allies,
bryophytes, woody seedings, and herbaceous vines.
2. Cover classes (midpoints): T<1% (none); 1=1-5% (3.0); 2=6-15% (10.5); 3=16-25% (20.5);
4=26-50% (38.0); 5=51-75% (63.0); 6=76-95% (85.5); 7=96-100% (98.0).
3. To determine the dominants, first rank the species by their midpoints. Then cumula-
tively sum the midpoints of the ranked species until 50% of the total for all species
midpoints is reached or initially exceeded. All species contributing to that cumula-
tive total should be considered dominants and indicated with an asterisk above.
4. Do the dominant herbaceous species indicate that the vegetation unit supports
hydrophytic vegetation? Yes No Inconlusive .
5. Note: Inconclusive should be checked when only facultative (i.e., facultative
wetland, straight facultative, and/or facultative upland) species dominate.
6. Comments:
-------
DATA FORM C-2: SHRUB AND WOODY VINE DATA
FOR SIMPLE JURISDICTIONAL DETERMINATION
EPA Region: Recorder: Date:
Project/Site: State: County:
Applicant/Owner: Vegetation Unit I/Name:
*******************************************************
SHRUBS
Percent Midpoint
Indicator Area!Cover of Cover
Species Status Cover Class Class Rank
1.
2. nzzn nnn
3.
4. ZZZZZ ZZZZ
5.
6.
7.
Sum of Midpoints
50% X Sum of Midpoints
******
WOODY VINES
Percent Midpoint
Indicator Areal Cover of Cover
Species Status Cover Class Class Rank
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Sum of Midpoints
50% X Sum of Midpoints
************************
1. Note: A shrub is usually less than 6.1 meters (20 feet) tall and generally exhibits
several erect, spreading or prostrate stems and has a bushy appearance. Percent cover
of woody vines should be estimated independent of strata and exclusive of seedlings.
2. Cover classes (midpoints): T<1% (none); 1=1-5% (3.0); 2=6-15% (10.5); 3=16-25% (20.5)
4=26-50% (38.0); 5=51-75% (63.0); 6=76-95% (85.5); 7=96-100% (98.0).
3. To determine the dominants, first rank the shrub species by their midpoints. Then
cumulatively sum the midpoints of the ranked shrub species until 50% of the total
for all shrub species midpoints is reached or initially exceeded. Do the same for
woody vines. All species contributing to these cumulative totals should be con-
sidered dominants and marked with an asterisk above.
4. Do the dominant shrub species indicate that the vegetation unit supports hydrophytic
vegetation? Yes No Inconlusive .
5. Do the dominant woody vine species indicate that the vegetation unit supports hydro-
phytic vegetation? Yes No Inconclusive .
6. Note; Inconclusive should be checked when only facultative (i.e., facultative wet-
1 and, straight facultative, and/or facultative upland) species dominate.
7. Comments:
-------
DATA FORM C-3: TREE AND SAPLING DATA
FOR SIMPLE JURISDICTIONAL DETERMINATION
EPA Region: _
Project/Site:
Applicant/Owner:
Species
1.
2. _
3.
4.
Recorder:
Date:
State: County:
Vegetation Unit #/Name:
TREES
Indicator
Status
Relative
ItasaT
Area (%)
Rank
6.
7-
8.
Total Relative Basal Area Equals 100%
r ***********
SAPLINGS
Percent
Species
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Indicator
Status
Cover
Class
Midpoint
of Cover
Class
Rank
7.
Sum of Midpoints
50% X Sum of Midpoints
************************
Note: A tree is greater than 10 centimeters (4 inches) diameter breast height (dbh).
A sapling is from 1-10 centimeters (0.4-4 inches) dbh.
Cover classes (midpoints): T<1% (none); 1=1-5% (3.0); 2=6-15% (10.5); 3=16-25% (20.5);
4=26-50% (38.0); 5=51-75% (63.0); 6=76-95% (85.5); 7=96-100% (98.0).
To determine the dominants, first rank the tree species by relative basal area.
Then cumulatively sum the relative basal area of the ranked tree species until 50%
of the total relative basal area for all tree species is reached or initially exceeded.
Do the same for saplings using the sum of midpoints. All species contributing to these
cumulative totals should be considered dominants and marked with an asterisk above.
Do the dominant trees indicate that the vegetation unit supports hydrophytic vegetation
Yes No Inconlusive .
Do the dominant saplings indicate that the vegetation unit supports hydrophytic
vegetation? Yes No __^_^ Inconclusive
Note: Inconclusive should be checked when only facultative (i.e., facultative wetland,
straight facultative, and/or facultative upland) species dominate.
Comments:
-------
EPA Region:
Project/Site:
Applicant/Owner:
DATA FORM C-4: SOIL/HYDROLOGY DATA
FOR SIMPLE JURISDICTION DETERMINATION
Recorder:
Date:
State: _ _ _ ^_ County:
Vegetation Unit If/Name:
SOILS
Is the soil on the national or state hydric soils list?
Series/phase: Subgroup:
Is the soil a Histosol or is a histic epipedon present?"
Is the soil:
Mottled? Yes
Gleyed? Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Other Indicators
No
No
ors
Matrix Color:
Mottle Color:
Note; Soils should be sample at about 25 centimeters (10 inches) or immediately
below the A horizon, whichever comes first. If desired, use the back of the form
to diagram or describe the soil profile.
Does the sampling indicate that the vegetation unit has hydric soils?
Yes No Inconclusive .
Rationale:
Comments:
1.
2.
3.
HYDROLOGY
Is the ground surface inundated? Yes
Is the soil saturated? Yes No
No
Depth of water:
_ _
Depth to free-standing water:
_ _
List other field evidence of surface inundation or soil saturation
4. Are hydrology Indicators present in the vegetation unit?
Yes No Inconclusive .
Note: It may be necessary to rely on supplemental historical data (e.g., soil
surveys) during a dry season or drought year as long as a site has not been
significantly modified hydro!ogically since data collection.
Rationale:
5. Comments:
-------
DATA FORM C-5: SUMMARY OF DATA
FOR SIMPLE JURISDICTION DETERMINATION
EPA Region: Recorder: Date:
Project/Site: State: County: _
Applicant/Owner: Vegetation Unit I/Name:
Dominant Species Indicator Status
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
1. Is hydrophytic vegetation present? Yes No Inconclusive
2. Are hydric soils present? Yes No Inconclusive
3. Are hydrology indicators present? Yes No Inconclusive
4. Overall, is the vegetation unit wetland? Yes No Inconclusive
5. Comments:
-------
DATA FORM 0-1: HERBACEOUS SPECIES DATA
FOR DETAILED JURISDICTION DETERMINATION
EPA Region: Recorder: Date:
Project/Site: State: County:
Applicant/Owner: Transect #: Plot #:
PERCENT AREAL COVER
Species Status Ql Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 08 X" Rank
1. _______
2.
3. nmzzzzzizzzziiz _ _ n z z z ~~
4.
5. mmzziiiiiiiziiiiiiiin _
6. _ _ _
7- zmzzzzzzzzzzzz zzzzi ~~ ~ ~
s. ZIZZZZZZIZZZZZZ
9. ZZZZHZZZZZ^ZHZ ZZZZ] Z ~ ~ Z H ~ ~
10. _
11. ~~~~~~~~~~~'
12. ~ZZZZZZHZZIZZZZ ZZZZI Z Z Z ~~ ""
13. ZZZZZHHZZZZZZZZ _______
14.
15. ZZZZZZZZHZZZZZZ ZZZZ^ Z Z Z Z Z Z H
16. _ _ _
17. _______
18.
19. zzzzzzzizzzzzziii muzz _ _ _ ~ ~ ~ n
20.
Total of Averages (X's) of Percent Area! Cover
50% X Total of Averages (X's) of Percent Areal Cover
1. Note: Herbaceous species include all graminoids, forbs, ferns, fern allies,
bryophytes, woody seedlings, and herbaceous vines.
2. To determine the dominants, first rank the species by their average percent areal
cover. Then cumulatively sum the percent areal cover averages (X's) of the
ranked species until 50% of the total of all the species averages is reached or
initially exceeded. All species contributing to that cumulative total should be
considered dominants and indicated with an asterisk above.
3. Do the dominant herbaceous species indicate that the vegetation unit supports
hydrophytic vegetation? Yes No Inconclusive .
4. Note: Inconclusive should be checked when only facultative (facultative wetland,
straight facultative, and/or facultative upland) species dominate.
5. Comments:
-------
DATA FORM 0-2: SHRUB AND WOODY VINE
DATA FOR DETAILED JURISDICTIONAL DETERMINATION
EPA Region: Recorder: Date:
Project/Site: State: County:
Applicant/Owner: _ Transects #: _ Plot I: ^^^
************************************************************
SHRUBS
Indicator Percent Area! Cover Midpoint of
Species Status Cover Class Cover Class Rank
1. _ ~~~_
2. zzzzzzzzzuzzzzz _ mmum
3. _ _ '
4. i~iiii~iii~zziizzr zzzzz nmznz
5. _ _ '
6. _ _ _
7. IZZZZ '
8. _ _ _
9. _ _ _
Sum of Midpoints _ ._
50% X Sum of Midpoints _
*********************************************************************************
WOODY VINES
Indicator Percent Area! Cover Midpoint of
Species Status Cover Class Cover Class" Rank
1. _ _ _
2. _ _ _
3. _ _ _
4. _ _ _
5. _ _ _
6. _ _ _
7.
9.
Sum of Midpoints
50% X Sum of Midpoints
1. Note: A shrub usually is less than 6.1 meters (20 feet) tall and generally exhibits
several erect, spreading or prostrate stems and has a bushy appearance. Percent cover
of woody vines should be estimated independent of strata and exclusive of seedlings.
2. Cover classes (midpoints): T=<1% (none); 1=1-5% (3.0); 2=6-15% (10.5); 3=16-25% (20.5)
4=26-50% (38.0); 5=51-75% (63.0); 6=76-95% (85.5); 7=96-100% (98.0).
3. To determine dominants, first rank the shrub species by their midpoints. Then
cumulatively sum the midpoints of the ranked shrub species until 50% of the total
for all shrub species midpoints is reached or initially exceeded. Do the same for
woody vines. All species contributing to these cumulative totals should be considered
dominants and marked with an asterisk above.
4. Do the dominant shrubs indicate that the vegetation unit supports hydrophytic
vegetation? Yes _ No _ Inconclusive _ .
5. Do the dominant woody vine species indicate that the vegetation unit supports
hydrophytic vegetation? Yes _ No _ Inconclusive _ .
6. Note: Inconclusive should be checked when only facultative (i.e., facultative
wetland, straight facultative, and/or facultative upland) species dominate.
7. Comments:
-------
DATA FORM D-3: TREE AND SAPLING DATA
FOR DETAILED JURISDICTIONAL DETERMINATION
EPA Region:
Project/Site:
Applicant/Owner:
Recorder:
Date:
State:
Transect #:
County:
PTotTT
Individual Tree
(Species Name)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
TREES (Bitter!ich Method)
Indicator DBH
Status Tcm/ft)
Basal
Area
Per Tree
Basal Area
Per Specfes
(sq ft) (sq ft) Ran
50% X
Total
Total
Basal
Basal
Area
Area
of
of
All
All
J_
Species
Species
Combi ned
Combined
SAPLINGS
Species
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Indicator
Status
Percent
Areal Cover
Cover
Class
Midpoint
of Cover
Class
Rank
4.
7.
Sum of Midpoints
50% X Sum of Midpoints
r****************4
Note; A tree is greater than 10 centimeters (4 inches) diameter breast height (dbh).
A sapling is from 1-10 centimeters (0.4-4 inches) dbh.
Cover classes (midpoints): T<1% (none); 1=1-5% (3.0); 2=6-15% (10.5); 3=16-25% (20.5);
4=26-50% (38.0); 5=51-75% (63.0); 6=76-95 (85.5); 7=96-100% (98.0).
To determine the dominants, first rank the tree species by their basal areas. Then
cumulatively sum the basal areas of the ranked tree species until 50% of the total
basal area for all tree species is reached or initially exceeded. Do the same for
saplings using the sum of midpoints. All species contributing to these cumulative
totals should be considered dominants and marked with an asterisk above.
Do the dominant trees indicate that the vegetation unit supports hydrophytic vegetation
Yes No Inconlusive .
Do the dominant samplings indicate that the vegetation unit supports hydrophytic
vegetation? Yes No Inconclusive
Note: Inconclusive should be checked when only facultative (i.e., facultative wetland,
straight facultative, and/or facultative upland) species dominate.
Comments:
-------
DATA FORM D-4: SOIL/HYDROLOGY DATA FOR
DETAILED JURISDICTION DETERMINATION
EPA Region: Recorder: Date:
Project/Site: State: County:
Applicant/Owner: Transect #: Plot #:
SOILS
Is the soil on the national or state hydric soils list? Yes No
Series/phase: Subgroup:
Is the soil a Histosol or is a histic epipedon present? Yes No
Is the soil:
Mottled? Yes No Matrix Color: Mottle Color: _
Gl eyed? Yes No
Other Indicators
1. Note; Soils should be sampled at about 25 centimeters (10 inches) or immediately
below the A horizon, whichever comes first. If desired, use the back of the
form to diagram or describe the soil profile.
2. Does the sampling indicate that the vegetation unit has hydric soils?
Yes __^ No Inconclusive
3. Rationale:
4. Comments:
HYDROLOGY
1. Is the ground surface inundated? Yes No Depth of water:
2. Is the soil saturated? Yes No Depth of free-standing water:
3. List other field evidence of surface inundation of soil saturation
4. Are nydrology indicators present in tne vegetation unit?
Yes No Inconclusive
Note; It may be necessary to rely on supplemental historical data (e.g., soil
surveys) during a dry season or drought year as long as a site has not been
significantly modified hydrologically since data collection.
Rationale:
5. Comments:
-------
EPA Region:
Project/Site:
Applicant/Owner:
DATA FORM D-5: SUMMARY OF DATA
FOR DETAILED JURISDICTION DETERMINATION
Recorder:
Date:
State:
County:
Transect #:
Plot #:
Dominant Species
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Indicator
Status
1. Is hydrophytic vegetation present? Yes
2. Are hydric soils present? Yes No
3. Are hydrology indicators present? Yes _
4. Overall, is the vegetation unit wetland"?
5. Comments:
_ Inconclusive
usive
Inconclusive
lo Inconclusive
-------
CC
O
8
00
(X
«c
o
o
» I
00
14
o
LU
o
vol
o
A
I
I
CD 4->
O C
V
4-> CO
C (U
(_
C Q.
r-
§10
0)
O -r-
O
£_
O
10
r-
O
00
u
^
o
>*
I
o
A
1
1
o"
t 1
CO
TJ
(C
Q.
«^
"c
-
r**
0) CO
CO OJ TJ
OJ >, > c
C- Ol'i- 1C
Q- O 4-»
1 r 1C +J
1 O O OJ
v t_ - 3
O X3
CO >> C <4-
00 I
o_
C
I
s:
LU
O
OL
<
Q-
TJ
C
CO C
O 0)
C C.
(O Q.
C
i- 10
§ u. o
o --^> to E co
C r (U -I C
4J 0) 4J OO O
!-
-
^^
t-H
>^^
CO
0 T3
4-> (C
C CO i
C t- O)
r- U S -^
JO) ID
f"»
OO 4J O
C^v
^-,
t- C I/I A
O -«/)
0 0 C
i a; >, o
at co a. t_ i-
c o oo o co
O 3
T3 >> i
en c o
>_ , > o >S
D.-I- -^
= 4-> -O t-
(Q C (Q
_lr- c£ ,
CO 0) !
o ce co E
fll CBIB
OJ »f
4-> C 4J OO
C C !-
(C CO C-
C L. O OJ
i- 3 t_ O1
E U U I-
O O *r- 1C
Q o s: i
i
i
i
V
CO
ft )
W
«O O OJ 3
p O T3 t Olr-"
E a; i o c_ o
O Q. tt) i- (C C
"C. oo *^^ y t ^-4
l
i
V
CO
4->
C
fO
* ^
^
o---
E
T; ** o
coo
mrt i
w
1 C -
CO O
O TJ OJ
C Q.
^: < oo
1 »
O T3^~
DO C TJ
r (C
1 4-> i
CO flJ CL
O 3t Z3
|
1
V
CO
^_
^«^
CM
CO
c
1C
^*
4->
a>
3
CO
I 1
o
z.
A
CO 1
4-> OO
0) (C
O^ ^" O
« -r-
rt- > 4-> (-
-i- T3
C >>
CO ^3 1C
TJ 1
CO
>-
^^_
^
PO
CO
o
c
1C
+3
^
1C CO
co E co
ft) -f- C C
(-> OO O > (C
r- -I- CO i
CO t_ CO T5 4J
O HI 3 C OJ
t. CT^ (o r~
O «- O i
^ (C C Q. CO
-------
t_
re
a.
to
41
O
4->
O
O
4J
o >>
T3 E
4)
4-> 4->
C ,
co c
COO)
f- JZ
cn c o
o o
F O CO
O 41
«- «- E
-O O 4=
>>^- 4->
JZ "C
c c
a re f-
c re
re co 4J
4) c.
CO Q. 41
F- >, O
O | *
co -c re
c
re 4J
C F- CO
o 4-> re
F- O! 41
4-> X F-
re
4J C +J
41 -F- re
cn re
4) 4J >
4) F^
c o 3
o o
41 -I-
>>«-«*-
F re 14-
re 41 -o
u t-
F- 41 to
JZ JZ (-
O 4-> 4J
re 41
t-x-s £
4) r^ re
F- 00 i-
jz eft re
i-i CL
4)
re o
4J <_ _
c o
41 tO LL.
E 41
O t
i- cnx
F- IO
> tO 4->
c CL re
41 c_ i
o <*-
c o
F- -c
Ol 4)
CO JZ 4->
c l re
O 4->
F- O)
4-> cn
re to 01
i- 4-> >
u c
re 41 TS
> > c
41 re
re F *
3 re to
c c. 01
c 3 F
re 4-> c
re jz
t- c 4->
o o
o
re jz O)
c Q.-F-
o o t-
co t- i-
re 4-> re
41 co u
to re a.
re
o to
T3
t_ c
o re
o
to
re
41
co 41
c- 01*0
X O
o
cn 41
c t-
O «-
re
QJ C»
JZ CL
C
o
r CO
re re
c 41
c O co
O -F-
F- 4-> cn
4->
F- enti-
re c o
o
cn E -
re
<- to
3 i-
41
to ^i
4J 1-
re i
3 4->
SI
4) i-
4-> >
re 41
41
cnj2
c o
3 C
tO TJ
re F
3
C
o re o
c E *-
X <- (-
O O O
F- 4-> Q.
41 re
JD cn re
<*- 4J cn
O to c
41 !-
CO > L.
t- C 3
re i- TJ
41
C 41 41
F- T- CO
<*- 41
C (-
O re CL
to
re « >>
4> to F
to 4) F
u re
en c E
c re C
>, o c re
F X i- 4J
to 4->
o 41 4)
c
o c
o
t_ -F-
re 4->
41 re
F- t- 4->
41 O
t- 4-> <4-
£re o
re o 01
t- J2 (-
cn re o
re _J E
F-
TT F- L.
re o
O C 4)
i 4) C
t- E O
CO O M-
£4:°
4J > CO
C t-
C LU O
re
p co o
4) t- -F-
4J 41 TJ
C 41 C
4J C -
CO i-
t~ c o
CLUJ
jo 5
O 4->
i to re
O Q. O
-o t- -i-
O O F-
JZ O CL
4> 41 re
E jz
4-> 4)
41 J*
jz >» re
r-J= E
a; -F- F-
3 > re
Q .F- C
4J O
CO O CO
F- re re
4)
4J C CO
i- re
E
" 3 tO
(- JZ C
4) i-
JZ C i
4-> re E
re jz 3
a: 4-> «-
o
41 C
> JZ
re 4^
o o to
F- ^y
a. to c
>> 4) re
4-> to F
re 3 4->
re 4>
"S °3
t- E"
41 O C
O t- O
to 4J
c 4-> re
O r- 3
O 3 4J
tO -F-
41 41 to
J2 (-
CO
O re Jz
c jz 4->
o «t-
F CO O
3 C
O O to
_ t- 4)
tO 4J F
F- a.
to T3 E
i- c re
j= O x
I o 41
CL Oi
re en
41
>> >
re
E
C JZ
re CL
F- O
Q. c-
&to c
E
«- 5 41
cn o t-
(- re
41 i-
jz o to
41 O
14- to 4->
o 41 re
u
4->
tO T3
o t- c
E 4) f-
re jz
3
C "«-
C O
re
>> o
-O 4->
re
TJ o
4J -O
re c
c -F-
^
E c
O re
to to
4-1 41
re o
F C
<*- re
o to
4) E
4-> 3
re u
4-> C-
O1 -F-
cn o
4)
> JZ
u
« 3
41 to
"a. L.
E 41
re -D
S5^
en c -o
C Z3 C
F- re
t_
3 4->
D 4-> 4)
c X
to 41
F CO 4-)
i- J3 O
o re c
co
41 (-
g-0 °
4_> -O t-
re F 41
(- 3 JZ
3 O 4->
4-» X 41
re jz
co (- x
o
4- 4-> 41
o re -o
O -F-
T3 M- O
Ol -O Ol
4J c -a
re i-
c >> to
3 cn 3
C O E
^~ "o c
41 (- O
re .
jz jz re
c
4-j re -r-
O E
c t-
CO 41
>> 3 4->
=3 E
re jz 41
t- -0
re
a.
o
C-
41
E'
41 '
O
en o
O O-'F-
41
tO
t.
Oi
4-»
re
X
<+.
0
c
r
I *
f~
3
to
Ol
O
C
re
4->
en to
o
o<
r""
3
to
4>
(-
re
41
t_
re E
Q
Ol C-
JZ«*_
Ol
>
re
JZ
o
4-*
O -i-
tO T-
C- 4->
O O
4-> re
re
u c
r- re
o E
O) 4J
t- C
O 41
E U
Ol
o
41
to o
E 4)
re c
o
to
D O
C to
3 F
o re
r- t- i -r- re
Oi O
c.
O CO
JZ U
O 4<
X 4)
C 41
i- JZ
U
o
CO
c
to O
£ 4->
4J -r-
tO TJ
>> C
to o
u
4)
re c
c t-
t- 4J
re to
t- -r-
o x
4)
I
CO 4)
4> (-
41
en c
Ol *r-
-4->
U
CO 3
4-> C_
C 4->
Ol co
Ol O
»
t- re
o t- jz
o i-
r- o re
il_ o>
o X re
»
41
O 4> 4->
*Z 4-> O
CO CO
-a 4> c
c jz o
re 4-> t-
r 4-»
CL c re
"~ 4)
re c F
41
4)
t- (_ to
O 4) C
JZ O
4> O
4-> J3
41
T3 O O
C t- JZ
re TO to
01.
en
en
c
re en
4-J 4J 41 4)
CO O
X
O> Ol
3
o -C
co
re
re
to
c
o
F- re
re
41
r- O
re c
41 f- O
JZ 4J -F-
4)
o
u o jz
i£*
*" o
re to c
011-
t_ (_
0£ 3 f"
J C
re
o o
4) O ^
4-> 4-> 4->
re c
<4- 4-> OJ
en cu
01 41 t.
o >
c o
c c
re re 41
4) E F- 3
3
O
to
re
o
O.-D
o
4-> C
re re
o>
to
tO 4->
c to
o 01
c
4) i-
U 4> f- C- 4)
C E O JZ
re -o >>4-> X
JD c cn re
3 O r f- C
4-» CL o -c !-
to E u c £
Q. X to
o
C 3
to
re
CO >
' tO
4-> JZ i 4->
41 C T- 41
4J 4-> C CO
i- re o
O 41 O 4->
4-> > C 1-
T3 O t- '
4J X "~
re u
i 41 41
41 4-> 4->
to re
41
to
re
c
41
to
41
(.
CL
4>
4)
JZ
o
to 41 T-
f- C C i-
> re re c_
>- re jz o
4)
3
O C_
o
to
4-> -O
C C
r- re
o
CL to
O -O E T3
re c 3 41
re o 4-»
D f «- to
N 41 O X
F- X Oi
«- JZ
en
en o)
>
41
W O
JZ CO
4->
«- O
3 -i-
CO >t
CLJZ
O
CJ C
o
Ol f
JZ 4->
l re
o>
01
41
3 4) F-
C O 41 41
3 "OX
i C
41 i-
F- C- 4->
Q. 41 O
E 4-> >, C
re re en
x E O c_
41 o
F O
C- F C- t-
O - -O 41
U. <«- >,JZ
JZ 4->
t- 4)
O t- JZ
co 41 X
4-* ^3 4-1
C 41 F- 41
4i en re c
> T3 T-
4) 4) >> E
F "O 4-> 41
re c 4J
c_ «i_ re 41
3 O O -O
co re
C F
O 4J
4J X
D 4->
O 4)
U
3 re
O JZ
C 4->
r
I CO
c c
re o
E i-
4->
a re
C 3
re 4->
41 -
CL-O
o c
41 U
>
4) -O
O 4)
U
> -0
4-> C
41 re
>> E
4-> TJ
O C
c re
>> co
re 4->
E c
4>
re >
Ol Ol
re i
re
4> C.
JZ 3
4) i
> re
re o
41 t-
J=> CL
ȣ>
J2 «
41
>
4) 41
x
O i-
c -o
« -r- O
CO C t-
§o -c co
O >)
O JZ i-
(-41 O
U 4)
4-> CL O
r CO O T-
|= E ^ TJ
O -O 4) JZ
s re to
i 4-> re
41 4.) 4)
jz 41 >> en
M J c
X re O c
o co
c to -r-
re to 4->
41 re u
t- cnjz c
re c 3
r- 4-* <»-
4-> c re
re o jz 4>
JZ i- 4-> (-
4-> 4J re
4) 3 O re
cn<«- - jz
C 4-> 4->
re x re
jz o en co
o c f- ,
c to t- o
r- -r- f (/>
O
co
4!
41
to
C
re
o
CO
41
r
O
41
CL
to
41
re
CL r
3
4-> U
c re
re «-
c
r- 4->
§C
re
o c
i -i-
c
c
re
"a.
3
a.
41
o
X
4)
C
4<
to
4)
CL
4)
CO CO
en 41
O JZ
i 4J
O O
C-
^ CO
jz to
41
T3 cn
c cn
re 3
r CO
4) 41
X U
C
4) re
to 3
CO 4->
re co
to
41 «*-
f- O
o
4) 41
CL u
to c
41
a -p
re >
r 4J
4) to
X to
41
41 i
4-> C
« 3
cn
r ^"^
r CO
-O C
o o
F
j-> to
C 3
re F
c u
i- C
o t-
re
4)
t- -r-
1^
to
O l~
4)
4) cn
C (-
O re
o t.
o
41 ~^
O -O
C C
4) re
co
41 CO
4)
41 CO
JZ O
4-> t-
O
C -r-
-i E
-------
CO
^^
-o
3
C
r
4J
C
o
u
«t
4J
c.
1C
Q.
c_
0
<4-
00
O)
4->
0
c
4->
O
o
u_
4->
T- JC 4J
C 00 3
3 t- O 00
r- i T- 3 > O
4-> > t_ i- »« S-
O) , «;
ot aj in 1C Ol O
01 OIJC JC 4J
Ol i- 4-> O
E OJ r- i- >>
> Q.
* -
4-> 1C «C f- 00 >>
t_ r 4-> Ol
JC £ TJ C
CL4-> C C (-
W T- -a < 1C 0)
0> C 4->
"C (O OO i
C «i Ol X> C
i 4-» t
ai ai CL ai
4-> T3 JC a> a>
r- {_ -r- jQ 4J
i 3 -o Ol'i-
JD 4J "O OO
O 00 1C r O)
r- 3 » U
4-> T3 O O
C « JC C
C
E «- * 0 3
O 3 33
T3 0 >> l_ -O 0>
Or- O JC
T5 O i »* L. 4->
c (o o a.
>C >> t_ Lft
i3 «- o ic -a a)
i- c C Ol
O T3 C t- (C C
O) i 3 3 1C
CL 3 U <- JC
00 O l_ O O t>
JC O 0 01
O OO !- C
C ^-» 00 > O
(C ^. 0) 0) -i-
^- oo in o O) 4J
4-> Q> T- T3 0)
X C 4-> 4-> O>
1C r '^- Ol
O) 4->
(-> 00 > C C >
i> T-
Ol 3 r- JC E "*-
i- O 3 /C O
i *- 0) c
O O 00 O
--^ O T-
4-> C O O14J 4->
C O 4-> C U
1C i -r O) OJ
C OO O) T3 -Q t-
i- 3 3 -O XJ
O C r-
O C 4-> t- 3 0)
-in O JC
JC ^ V 00 X 4J
4-> O> t_ 0.'
O 4-> O 4-J 00 «»-
X5 -i- t»- (O 0) O
00 OI4J
O O> >- -r- C
C t- c i in O
O O -r- JD -
F- -f- CL O -O 4-> i
4-> E O) O X
3 C C 00 M-
4-> O Ol -0 t- O 4->
JC C C C O O i-
1 3 i-
C
(D
00
Ol
(_
o.
C
(C
c
'i
o
TJ
A
00
O>
U
C
1C
4->
00
E
o
L.
I
0
0)
00
0)
JC
4->
c_
> 00
C JC !-
0! 0> -
t- o; c
O.JD 3
>> 00 0)
(C JC
«- JC 4->
3 4-> O
4-» f- C
1C 00
C t_
0) O
0) JC
«- 4-> L.
(C 0)
<4- JC
OO i 4->
(_ 0)
O JC
4-> X
(O 00
o -o oi
r- C C
TJ 1-
O !-
t- C -0
D 3 O)
>> <-
JC OJ Ol
JC T3
-C 4-> -
c in
O
4-> O O
O) C
X 0)
«- JD
4-) "f"
O 4->
C OO
00 3
<_ -D E
O C
1C 0)
t- . 0
0) 4J C
JC O) (C
4-1 X JD
(U (-
JC 00 3
X-«- 4J
00
OJ 4-> -i-
o *- -o
1- C
U 3 Ol
O> JC
C C 4J
O
4-> T- M-
00 4-> O
3 > O
1C !-
Ol OJ <*-
- JC -r-
4-» 4J C >>
00 Oli
Q) - p-
> 4-> oo «O
C C O
f- Ol O) f
00 JC Ol
D a> 4-> o
i c. >
QJ CL O
i- TJ *-
<4- 0) O< T>
«- JD >>
tC 1C C- JC
3
" QJ 4J OO
4-> «- 00 T3
C 0 .- C
r- E -O ,4->
0 O 1- i
Ol-r-
4J<4- O 4J
Ct 1 1 i 00
^-
r- 1
o
c
(O
^_
4->
Q.
CU
U
X
QJ
4->
C
O)
00
o>
C-
CL Ol
00
00 t-
i- X
>> 0)
OIJC
O 4->
i O
0
i- 4->
^ oo
>, O)
JC Ol
Ol
O 3
C 00
1C
Oi
CL O
3 C
in oo
1C !-
T3
t
00 <4-
O) O
r
(J 0)
O) U
0. C
00 O)
T3
T3 t-
C >
C O)
Q. 00
3 00 OO
O> 4->
Ol r- C
4-> C i-
o t- ai
O) -0
o; oi
t. c. -a
o
O 1C QJ
i X
ai -r-
c E cu
O-r^ t.
OO 1C
H-
o t. ^^
o cvj
a> "^. rH
o x> «»
c c
0) 1C 1
00
Q) 00 ^->
t- QJ f-H
O.4-> >
P-
ai oo
JC 0
4-> t- 01
U 4->
C !- O
-" E Z
*>^
»|
a>
c >
C !- ^O
i
OJ r- Q.
X 3 3
U
QJ ic a>
> «- >
r- »^
0> 4J 4-> 4J
4-> 1C JC 1C
Ol4->
Oli i- r-
t- 3 (C 3
O *~ O
J2
-------
col
- o
to
*
ro
O
3
O
CNJ I
O
O
o
to
UJ
*
O
UJ
0.
to
A
I
c
o
CO CO
t. >> co t_ c
C O -^ O (O i
re +J «I
i to (O «j t_
Q. 0) i -r- t_ (O
3 i- 0) SC O
o cc ^>.-f-
-1 ,-c E
CO Q. C tJ C -r-
O CO O Q< CO
I
I
1
V
CO
o»-
CJ
UJ
Q
n
X
14
o
z
UJ
Q-
Ou
<2 -D
- Ifl s >,
4-> Z CO
=3 Z 00
to
D
T3
C C <"
± - Z
V
CO
X ..
te o» i- en
c t. t->_
R «c -M
>c to
to co Z -D
,O) C C
U-> O « (O
'c- -r- to i
CO CO "C 4->
O 3 C O)
«- re 3
o o i
t C Q. CO
a: «=;-,
0)
en t_
> OJ t. 3
3 i 4-> 0) i
O tt) <- O» O
O > CO 1_ C
O !- O ro ii
O _l C O
Ol L. CO
»* f O)
c c re 3*
C tf> 4-> -C
re o i c
tt> I eo re
H to O i
_P t- OJ CX
3 t_ J= J= 3
0.1 4J
-IE 01
CO O «*- CO CC
O O O -O-
co
- rji .
>-
C C. 4->
I «t -r- ^
C CM
CO CO 3
tV C CO
4_> o "-' CO
r- T- tO "D
to co -D X C
o 3 c t- re
c. i re c_ ,
O U r- 4J +J
i^ c o._re oi
ro
co
o
c
re
4->
^
-------
c
a1
^J
<4-
0
x:
0!
N
i
pH
P*
4-1
Ol
X)
4-^
O
C
r~
^*
f-
^>
t_
fO
.C
o
5
0
r*-
t^-
^
p
4->
C
O)
3
cr
0)
in
c
O
0
LO C-
1 3
«C 0
0
o
E
o
XJ
p
QJ
4-^
re
in 3
QJ 4->
^J *PK
o «/i
c
4-> <
c
o ^*».
4->
3 in
O >>-
rex:
X> E 1
OJ
c re .
i- XT C
o 4-> re
O. Ol
v> >>
tn c
<: o QJ
i- x:
4-* ( *
'p-
>>X! ^*X. +^
x: XJ
C C
^3 "0 *^*
C 10
(0 I/) +J
OJ C-
to CL OJ
r~ ^» c)
r* +J
0 4->
in xj re
c
re 4->
c r- tn
o 4-> re
p- QJ 0)
4-> 5 r-
re
4J C | *
O) -r- re
oi re
QJ 4-> >
> t- 4_>
OJ p
C 0 3
0 0
QJ T-
^"} ^~ **~
p re it-
P *i
re QJ xJ
o t-
r- QJ tn
x: x: i.
O 4-> OJ
t. ( *
re > QJ
t_ x- « E
O) r^ re
p- 00 t_
f ^s |PJ
p-l Q.
in
ai > 01
p» >^x:
p t 4-J
Ol O
t- 4-> <4-
IO O
E t~
re o a.'
t- XJ t-
CT re o
re i E
p-
x; r c_
re o
2 4-^
O C QJ
QJ C
*- E 0
C
CO O 14-
p- t_ 0
x: i-
4J > CO
c f~
C LU O
re
XJ m o
01 t- -r-
4J 0) XJ
C Ol C
O) C M-
in *p*
O) CT<4-
t- c o
Q-UU
c
>,<«- 0
CT O -p-
0 4J
r~- t/) *O
O O. 0
XJ (-<-
O O p-
x: C.J Q.
4-> a.
QJ QJ re
E -c
4-> OJ
Ol _*
x: >» re
H-X) E
^^
tn
c
O
P"
| ^
p-
^J
C
o
o
p
re
4J
c
QJ
E
C
o
t
p-
>
c
OJ
c
in
c
o
f
4_}
re
p-
t
re
>
P«
re
3
C
C
re
c_
O
p
re
c
o
in
re
Ol
in
P
re
o
c
o
4->
QJ
3
XJ
in
p-
4*3
p-
t
0)
x:
4^
re
Of
P
re
o
P-
ex
>>
re
a
QJ
l_
0)
XJ
p-
in
c
o
o
QJ
Xi
J_>
O
c
^J
r
3
C
x:
to
XI
QJ
4 | %
o re
to Q) x:
OJ CT O
r- Ol 3
a. > m
E
re « i-
X QJ QJ
Ol P- XJ
Q. C
«- E =3
3 re
o x
W- QJ .
c
to U O
QJ O CO
> u- re
CT to
in » CT
CL to c
1
a> re
> c
re T-
x: E
c.
4_> OJ
o re 4->
C 01
XJ
>» «/)
re 3 c
Ex: o
r- f-
01 4->
r- O
o «-
x: c X!
4-1 o m
O -r- «
O.4-) (-
re 3
O) i * i}
p. -r-
t. CL re
r *r*
c
o
in
re
OJ
in
CT
c
p-
^
o
t-
CT
QJ
x:
4->
i_ 4-> i- re o CTH-
o re $
o n- o
c_
O) XJ CT
x: QJ c
1 4-> O
re c
4»>
QJ QJ
co CTX:
4-* QJ 4-3
C >
Ol CT
> XJ C
Ol C !-
re (_
r- 3
re «XJ
(_ in
3 QJ in
re O re
c x: i
O O XJ
r- CL 3
x: E
CL 0)
o *p" x:
&- t- Qj
4-> T- 4->
in re re
re «- 4->
4-> Q. QJ
re CT
0 " QJ
to >
t- XJ C
o c 3
re
in i in
QJ 4-> re
4J 2 ^)
p- p
> < C
r- re o
i % p-
O O t-
re m re
re O)
C QJ CL
re in a.
E re
3
x: tn >,
c re
C i- E
re e
x: E to
4-> 3 4J
1- C
t- xi re
Ol r
x: c: CL
4-> t-
O i
in to
tn XJ 3
Ol C C
tn re c
3 re
re 4->
0 01 >>
2 xi
O XJ
t- C QJ
<4- O 4->
T- re
4-> 4-> C
p- re -r-
3 3 E
tn 4-> o
O) -i- XJ
c- tn
in
4-> m 4->
re -r- re
x: x: P-
4^ 4^ It
t- QJ C
CL t_ i-
^ v^
re re
p- E
re
QJ e <-
to C O
r- O ->
$ c re
Ol CT
^^ 2 *p
i- O 4->
I , in
QJ Ol
£> >
C
4J It- 1-
c o
01 -C
^3 (/) fM.
T- t_ re »-
OJ Ol **
>,
QJ re
Xi C
4-> I/)
O C Ol
coo
in C
xj re re
Ol 4J
3 in in
O E
$ CT 3
C 0
C !- (-
o »-
r- O O
4-> (-
re CT 01
4-> I/I
QJ QJ QJ
CTX: x:
Ol f ' 4«)
>
It- t-
0 o QJ
r~ XJ
4-> 4J C
>> in 3
-c o
Q-E
O
t- CJ) 4*^
xJ c c
>»-r- OJ
x: {_ in
3 Xi
if- xj re
0
tn QJ
c- p- X)
0-r-
4J O XJ
re m r
0 3
|- XJ O
X3 QJ »
C 4->
i- re *-
(. O
C 3 4J
re 4-> re
re o
tn "-
in xj
O) c- c
0 O-i-
c
re xJ ^^
4-> Ol CT
tO 4J O
§re r
XJ 0
0 C t~
t- 3XJ
r- C >>
o t-x:
O
C
o
4->
C.
o
CL
re
CT
r-
(-
3
1 *
C
a>
i«
O)
c_
CL
^>^
P«
P^
re
O
c
01
{_
re
in
L-
o
re
o
XJ
c
p-
XJ
re
i *
QJ
+J
O
C
(.
o
c.
Ol
x:
4->
0)
x:
QJ
XJ
O
Ol
1 *
in
3
E
C
O
p-
4->
re
0
p
i *
^^
x:
CL
O
XJ
x:
14-
o
in
O
re
o
p-
XJ
c
p-
01
£.
o
E
t_
o
Ol
c
0
x:
o
r
x:
^
c
r
4.J
m
P-
x
OJ
o
in
P_
re
^^
re
E
CO
c
0
p-
1 *
re
3
4-»
p-
tn
P»
re
0
a.
>^
^>
*o
^_)
Ol
O
QJ
*^_
O
in
4->
QJ
'i
ai
QJ
i *
o
OJ
3
XJ
3
O
Ol
1 t
o
c
c
re
o
V,
0?
o
Q
L.
XJ
x:
XJ
re
i »
QJ
f.
l^
O
^j
C
re
in
pi
P-
o
in
0
p*
t
XJ
Q.X:
0
o
QJ
x:
I
«
c
o
f
1 <
re
1 »
QJ
CT
QJ
4-> 1 4J XJ
C !- i QJ Ol
ai it- 3 to 4-> re >
E -i- m QJ r QJ re
QJ C 0)*O3t- XT
o CT o t-CTCi/ireE
reT-4J<*- creai oo
i tn OO-i-4->t.QJt_4_l
Q. >> m x> w x: it-
4->t-4->lOEQJ4-> XJ
oirerecreo3> cai
x: x: in 01 p-^ o re 4-> re t-
4j 4-> /> E >><*- «- x: o x: QJ
QJ XJ re M- c 4-> XJ
^ ^ in o c E o o re 'P
CV £ QJ 3 4-> QJ ^ L. to
^ * re c o ^*^ o t- o QJ c
XJ <"** c C 2 re p* o
> I/IEOO-M c.4->o
C t_ -P- -P- M- T- OJ Ol O
oo . 4-> t- c- x: x: - QJ
f- in o o. QJ 4-> 4-> xJ
4-) C 3 4-> Ol>>
retooo)t-io4->ox: CTXJ
OIOI4->OI«/>Cp- p-3
CT 4-> -p- < c re in xj O O
QJ co xJ OP-OICCC.X:
> >> c c/> o CL-C o re xj in
in o 4-> 3 4J -r- >»
t- OC>> 4-»O)X:CT
o QJ QJ re in c re CT c
CT CT > Xre**- t- CXJ-P"
i re c QJ x: 5 QJ re c xJ
re c -i- CT 4-> 4-> x: re o
>-p-4Jp--p-x:cpo o
oremrex:orere Cr
§t_ -r- t- -f- 4-> QJ O <4-
XJ X 3 O *~ t« Q) p" «p
{- QJ4->4->JOX:4->4->4->
i re CL4-> re c
t- to QJ c QJ re E <4- 4-> QJ
O QJ t- 3 QJ -r- 4-> O QJ O
Ol CL4J XJ C. O CT OJ
c> c re co c QJ QJ t-
O QJ QJ QJ 4-> - O >
t-r-x:occ uc o
4-> 4->QjQJre4->OQJXJ4-)
re it- ce E "-1 c c
t- o M- x?c u re re QJ
Ol O C-p- OJEp-3
4->c «3 «x:C4-»XJ
r OCO)O>,tn4JQJQJ
re-p-oo CL CT t- QJ CL S to
1 * >p_ C E O O f~ O
QJ O 4~) re *P~ p^- 4-^ }E Ol P" *p*
x: 3 re x) ore > 4_> 4_>
4-> t- CD t- 4-> t. O QJ - -P- tn
4->'P- 3 CXJ'"- C4-> X-P-
x-s tn 4-> 4-> QJ >>"O -p- re c_
Ep^ O) 0)
QJ 4.) 4-J
O>XJQJXJ O)t- c p 4J i/ire
re 01 *P" o) xJ re *p 01 01 L»
x: x: re o xi x: «t re
x: 4-> c 4-> c c co ( x:
o re T- o o o
3*-* o -p-O4->=
inro *4J «4J-p- *XJp~
^-» in re *- *-~ in o> -p-
tn QJ C_ CT4->XJ to QJ t- O
QJ XI O O QJ >, C O QJ CO
p- c c -p- a> CTX: o c xj
4-> re re c_ QJ >p- re >p- o
"P | ' CL > XJ 4-^ | * (^ »p-
> CO CO QJ -p- tO C L.
p-XJ EXJ CXJO-XJ EOXJ I/I
4->C3O)OCOC3o >~><
o re o 4J *P* re p" o o x: *p-
rep-t-t04->p-QJOt-Q) O
4-> -P- -P- -P- 4_> > -P- XI XJ 1/1
XJOIOXXJOlQJXJO Ol
QJ 5 OICSXJQJ 4->O.O
N x: o OP-I/IO-P-
«- 3c o>x>EE"oixJ
Ot-mrexJQjrect- >>>
4->>t-4JOit- Tccx;
3OQJOI30J4->C= re in
re XJZXJ oire p-4-»re
Cp-C C 4-> >> E QJ 4-> QJ
3 re => re -p- re X:OI>>CT
p- i x: 4J x> +> X c
(. 4-> c 4-> o c: 4-> -P-
QJ QJ o re c re $ re o c
p-4J>>cEtn o co
CL re CT c >-, to c tn -p-
EEOt-XJOre4j re to 4J
re P-OC-P-ECOJ reo
x P o re 4-> 01 «- CTX: c
Qjp-c-t- re re > re c 3
p- XJ QJ <*~*^ 3 QJ Ol "P^ | * *|
i. it- >>x: c_ 4J t, 4-> c re
o xi4_>Q).p-rer-reox:Qj
u,c. QJ > to rex:>p-4->t-
o t- x: re QJ t_ 4-> 4J re
QJ 5 QJ p ^f* 3 O **"**
XJ 4J xjre4^4->mcc4->
to g; r QJ o re QJ 3 o re
4->CT»-p- *CCTIt-T-x:
cxJ -p-xjo-t- e 4->4->
QJ QJ >> E >> ^ re j re
> t_ t C i_ 4-1 > x: o CT to
QJ xi 4-) oi cu re QJ QJOC-P-P
C | % | * J S *p-
p t- re ojrecO'p-ci/it- o
re o o xj 3c *p- s *"* -p- -p- i/»
P
P^
QJ
S
in
re
4_>
C
QJ
CO
QJ
L.
O.
0)
X)
^J
«j]
El
^
^3
^^
U-
t-
o
c
c
re
o
^£
^,
*
2
0
3
in t>-
to o
re
Ol
o
4-> C
p- QJ
C X3
3 -P-
^
OJ QJ
x:
4-> tn
in
C OJ
P" p
c
XJ 3
QJ
3 in
XJ C
p- O
t- *p-
4-> in
m 3
p~ p
XJ O
1 C
p_
Ol t.
X re
Q) f
(- E
re -P-
to
4^
re t_
x: QJ
4-> CT
t_
to re
Ol r
P"
O C-
QJ 0
in xj
c
XJ re
c
re in
p- Ol
0
re -P-
CT E
p-
p- X!
XJ C
o re
4->rcL
C 3
re
c t-
p- 0
§it-
XJ 4->
i CL
C QJ
0 0
C X
QJ
O) ^ " O)
c- to
O 4J -P-
t- tn 01
o oi x:
t i *
QJ CL o
c
o in in
p- 4J
<*- in
O >> QJ
CT CT
QJ O CT
OP- 3
com
OJ (-
in XJ O)
QJ >» 0
Q. re
XJ X3
QJ C U
x: re 3
4->P- 4J
4V tO
C QJ .P-
*' 5 XJ
»-^
4^
c
QJ
in
QJ
t-
Q.
QJ
1 <
i/l
3
E
I/I
QJ
O
QJ
CL
tn
^^
O
^£
t.L
L.
0
"O
c
fO
A
^J
^£
u.
*
3
CJ
<£
U.
i '
C
re
c
p-
E
O
XJ
1
c
o
c
,
in
QJ
O
C
re
i »
tn
E
3
O
C-
p-
o
01
in
QJ
x:
4^
t_
Ol
XJ
c
IO
~%»
fO
LO
-------
VC
.*-**
T3
01
3
r
1 *
C
O
o
CO
t
IO
Q.
(_
O
<+-
in
0)
4->
O
C
1 *
0
u_
1 in
O (O Ol
^ ^"* ^*)
O « IO 01 IO
r- O1JC E
E Ol*» 4->
l>i -CO
c cu JQ o o 4->
O O 4-> t-
C JC >>
>,TJ Oi f r-
t. C > Q.
O) r- O.
TJ *O r +J ^^ IO
C t- 4-> ic in
3 3 d) C O) >>
4-> X <- C IO
4-> i
C 4-> r- CL CU
3 t- !- (O (O >
0) X 01 f-
C JC C 4->
o 4J TJ ^ "o 10
r- -i- C C C
4-> O) IO IO C-
ie r- cu
4-* * I * TJ on +)
Oi 01 O) 0) Oli
O) 4-> X T- C (O
Oi T- 11-
> C TJ O.I
3 0) Q-TJ i-
cu jc 10 o; jc
E "O O CU H-
cu in
JD i- JD
O) 3 TJ 01
f 4J IO r- Ol 4-*
4-> m 3 f-
r- « O 01 Ol
C T5 JC -
r- Ol Ol t-
C CO
01 T- QU CU O
d) 'r -i 4J
- >, 3 4J v-
O f >> t. O C
0) C i 33
O. O i *£ TJ
in 10 C O Oi
O t- Lf> t- JC
TJ C 3 Q.4J
C
i >> c « 10
0.. C I- C-
3 4-> 3 3 O CU
COO)
CU CU I- O C_ C
4-> 3 O O O IO
IO O" O1JC
O) CD . - «/) -r- O
«- 1- Oi 0> >
r- <*- VI O C
JO C !- -C Ol O
O M- C_ CO -r-
4J g- 4J
T3 (_ r !- 4-> IO
C CU CO 4->
IO JC > C Ol CU
4-> o> a; c o>
in 10 r JC <- OJ
CU ^ j* e >
*r ^3 fO
O t- CU X <-
CU 3 in O> O
Q. 0 ^
OO O O O> O C
O 4-> C 4-> O
T3 «t" »^
C "O CU "C O> 4->
Or- 3 IO J3 CU
4-> O C TJ 4-
CU JC 4-> i- i -
X in (A 3 "O
CU *^ C. CU X CU
4_> on o -4-> JC
10 CU 14- ic in 4->
^J) l>) O^l CU
T- C CU *r* 4-3 *t~
i (O C i !- O r-
-C 4-> i JO in r
o in o. O c cu
E T3 0 f.
JC 3 IO ^C CU f-
4-> O C 4-) *-> 00
o (- 01 tv *^ ^0
O 3 O T3 D
C C 10 «»- C 4->
O O > "O -r- T~
r- -r- C C t- in
4J (/I »r~ IO O ^D
o 3 O3
>-> o in 3 cu 01 o
r- C t_ O r- CU
00 i- IO 3 C_ IO
00 Oi 4-> C CU J2
r- 4J i r- *% > t~
r* *^» (^ >^ f^ «r" 3J
H oo oo ^3 if) Ol j**
vo |
4-^
-r-
4-> C
C 3
CU
m c Oi
CU CU JC
t_ CU 4->
t** ^"1
4->
>> oo o
F~" IO C
^_ _^"
IO C_
t- Oi O
3 4->
4-» -I- t_
IT3 00 Ol
C JC
CU 4->
CU JC CU
t- 4-> JT
on »-i 01
t- c
O 1-
4-» T3
IO 01 -r-
o T; o
i- C CU
"O IO TJ
C i
i- D. C
3 T-
r- OO "O
Ol-r- CU
O t_
r- 4J CU
O i- T3
I- C -r-
T3 3 01
>> C
JC CU O
JC 0
C CU
«3 J3
i 4->
4-> O 4->
CU C on
X 3
<»- E
o cu
C > (J
m c
t- -C (O
O C JD
(O (-
«- r- 3
Oi 4_> i *
JC d) on
4-> f i-
01 -O
_^ t/1
2 *'"* ^U
^
CU 4-> 4J
TJ Br~
r- C <4-
O 3 O
O)
TJ C CU
0 0
4-» -r- C
OO 4J IO
3 IO O
E -U M-
> Ol
IO -f- >>
01 cu in r
M- JC i
4-> 4J CU «O
00 JC O
CU > 4-> i-
^ 1 * Ol
c c o
T- CU TJ r
in cu o
TJ CU JD t-
p t» * TJ
CU O. 3 >)
V \ * C"
M- 0) 00
t. -r- OO
(O IO TJ TJ
C
CU >, IO
4-> C- r-?r-
C O i 4->
T- E 10 co
O 0 5
Q. t- -i-
O Olr-
01 O r
t- CU t -r-
JC C O 4->
4-> O (- in
TJ
< I JC i-
|^T|
T;
c
IO
o. cu
3 O
C
CU IO
E JO
oo 3
in 4->
10 in
P-
* TJ
4.)
f- '*-
C O
3
CU
CU 0
JC C
4») CU
"D
C i-
1- >
cu
cu in
4-> 01
3 O)
r- C
L. 3
tn *-*
1- 01
TJ C
1 0
r Ol
CU 3
O
CU C
C_ !-
IO
^
40 d>
IO Ol
JC f-
4-> IO
in
CU i-
i- IO
O r
cu
o. E
01 -r-
01
TJ
C (.
IO O
p_ ^^
Q.TJ
3 C
IO
CU
4J Ol
IO CU 00
Ol 4^ 4>^
i- (- C
r 01 -r-
J2 0 0
0 t- Q.
O
4J <- C
C E 0
IO i-
C TJ 4->
^- C E
1 CU C
C X CU
O 4->
C (- CU
0 TJ
CU **
t- TJ
O 4-> C
E Q. 10
t- O 4->
OX CU
CU X
cu ^^
c cu
O 4-> (-
C 10
4- CU CU
O ol oo **
Oi -r- i-H
CU t- X rH
o Q. C
c cu
cu tn jc i
(/! -r- 4-»
cu o *-»
t- >> -
Q. Oi in *~*
0 4J
CU r- 01
JC O CU
4-> t- Ol CU
T3 01 4J
C >> 3 O
i i JC 01 Z
«*!
fl^
TJ >
C i- T3
C
r IO IO
4J 4J r-
CU i O.
X 3 3
O
CU IO CU
> «*- >
r- -r-
CU 4^ 4-> 4^
4J (O JC IO
10 4-> 014->
Oil i- f
t- 3 IO 3
r- U 1_ U
^Q fQ +J (O
O «- 01 o<_
II II II II
2 =2
_l C_> O O
03
-------
APPENDIX B: JURISDICTION
DECISION DIAGNOSTIC KEY V
la. Vegetation units are dominated by one or more plant species. Non-dominant
species may also be present.
2a. One or more dominant obligate wetland plant species are present in the
vegetation unit (or site if it is a monotypic site). Facultative species
(facultative wetland, straight facultative and/or facultative upland) may
occur as dominants as well._£/
3a. Obligate upland dominants (one or more) are present.
4a. Dominant obligate upland species occur on relatively dry
microsites (e.g., live tree bases, decaying tree stumps,
mosquito ditch spoil piles, small earth hummocks) and/or
on larger similar inclusions occurring in an otherwise
topographically uniform unit containing dominant obligate
wetland species. Under such circumstances, you should check
to see if you correctly horizontally stratified the site and
adjust accordingly by either: (a) showing these microsites
and inclusions as local UPLANDS in a WETLANDS matrix or by
(b) considering the unit to be all WETLANDS, but acknowledging
the presence of the local UPLANDS in a written description
of the site.(l)3/
4b. Dominant obligate upland species do not occur on relatively
dry microsites and/or larger similar inclusions; they occur
rather uniformly intermixed with the dominant obligate wetland
species. Under such circumstances, the unit and/or site is
probably significantly hydrologically disturbed (naturally or
by man) and successional vegetation changes are occurring ._V
5a. 50% or more of the total dominant obligate species (both
obligate wetland species and obligate upland species) are
obligate wetland species WETLANDS (2)
5b. Less than 50% of the total dominant obligate species are
obligate wetland species UPLANDS (3)
3b. Obligate upland dominants are not present WETLANDS (4)
2b. One or more dominant obligate wetland plant species are not present in
the vegetation unit (or site if it is a monotypic site). Facultative
species (facultative wetland, straight facultative and/or facultative
upland) may occur as dominants as well.
6a. Obligate upland dominants (one or more) are present.
7a. One or more dominant facultative species (facultative wetland,
straight facultative and/or facultative upland) are present.
-------
B-2
8a. Dominant obligate upland species occur on relatively dry
microsites and/or larger similar inclusions. Under such
circumstances, you should check to see if you correctly
horizontally stratified the site and determine whether
the vegetation unit matrix (the area dominated by the
facultative species in this instance) is wetlands by
examining soils.^/
9a. Vegetation unit matrix has hydric soils.
lOa. Hydrology of vegetation unit matrix is indicative
of wetlands Microsites and inclusions are
UPLANDS; matrix is WETLANDS (5).5/
lOb. Hydrology of vegetation unit matrix is not indica-
tive of wetlands....Microsites, inclusions and
matrix are UPLANDS (6).
9b. Vegetation unit matrix does not have hydric soils...Micro-
sites, inclusions, and matrix are UPLANDS (7).
8b. Dominant obligate upland species do not occur on relatively dry
microsites and/or larger similar inclusions UPLANDS
7b. One or more facultative species are not present UPLANDS
6b. Obligate upland dominants are not present; one or more dominant
facultative species (facultative wetland, straight facultative
and/or facultative upland) are present.^/
lla. Hydric soils are present
8a. Hydrology is indicative of wetlands WETLANDS (10).
8b. Hydrology is not indicative of wetlands...UPLANDS (11).
lib. Hydric soils are mrt present UPLANDS (12).
Ib. Vegetation units are not dominated by one or more plant species.^/
12a. One or more obligate wetland species are present.
13a. Obligate wetland species are well-distributed in un1t.£/
14a. One or more obligate upland species are present.
15a. Obligate upland species occur on relatively dry
microsites and/or larger similar inclusions. Under
these circumstances, the microsites and inclusions
are UPLANDS and the vegetation unit matrix is
WETLANDS (13).
-------
8-3
15b. Obligate upland species do not occur on relatively dry
microsites and/or larger similar inclusions; they occur
rather uniformly intermixed with the obligate wetland
species. Under such circumstances, the unit and/or
entire site is probably significantly hydro!ogically
disturbed (naturally or by man) and successional changes
are occurring.f/
16a. 50% or more of the total obligate species (both
obligate upland and obligate wetland) are obligate
wetland species WETLANDS (14).
16b. Less than 50% of the total obligate species are
obligate wetland species...UPLANDS (15).
14b. One or more obligate upland species are not present...WETLANDS (16)
13b. Obligate wetland species are not well-distributed in unit.
17a. Hydric soils are present.
18a. Hydrology is indicative of wetlands WETLANDS (17).£/
18b. Hydrology is not indicative of wetlands...UPLANDS (18).
17b. Hydric soils are mrt present...UPLANDS (19).
12b. One or more obligate wetland species are not present.
19a. One or more obligate upland species are present.
20a. Facultative species (facultative wetland, straight facultative
and/or facultative upland) are present.
21a. Obligate upland species occur on relatively dry microsites
and/or larger similar inclusions.
22a. Vegetation unit matrix has hydric soils...Microsites
and inclusions are UPLANDS; matrix is WETLANDS (20).
22b. Vegetation unit matrix does not have hydric soils...
...Microsites, inclusions and matrix are UPLANDS (21).
21b. Obligate upland species do not occur on relatively dry micro-
sites and/or larger similar inclusions UPLANDS (22).10/
20b. Facultative species are not present UPLANDS (23).10/
19b. One or more obligate upland species are not present; one or more
facultative species (facultative wetland, straight facultative
and/or facultative upland) are presently
23a. Hydric soils are present.
-------
8-4
24a. Hydrology is indicative of wetlands WETLANDS (24).£/
24b. Hydrology is not indicative of wetlands...UPLANDS (25).
23b. Hydric soils are mrt present UPLANDS (26).
Footnotes for Key
I/ The methodology presented in this diagnostic key relies hierarchically on
vegetation, soils and hydrology. As pointed out by the Corps of Engineers
(Environmental Laboratory, 1987), there are certain wetland types and/or
conditions that may make application of indicators of one or more of the
parameters difficult, at least at certain times of the year. This should
not be considered atypical. Rather, it is due to normal seasonal or annual
variations in environmental conditions that result from causes other than
human activities or catastrophic natural events. The Corps gives four
examples of this situation (wetlands in drumlins, seasonal wetlands, prairie
potholes, and vegetated flats). For example, vegetated flats dominated by
annual plants may appear only as unvegetated mudflats during the nongrowing
season. Under such circumstances, an indicator of hydrophytic vegetation
would not be evident. Likewise, a prairie pothole may not have inundated or
saturated soils during most of the growing season in years of below normal
precipitation. Thus, a hydrology indicator would be absent. Under these
circumstances, a field investigator making a jurisdictional determination must
decide whether or not wetland indicators are normally present during a portion
of the growing season.
The Corps further points out that atypical situations may also exist in
which one or more indicators of hydrophytic vegetation, hydric soils and/or
wetland hydrology cannot be found due to the effects of recent human activities
or natural events. For example, unauthorized activities such as (1) the altera-
tion or removal of vegetation, (2) the placement of dredged or fill material
over a wetland, and (3) the construction of levees, drainage systems, or dams
that significantly alter hydrology. Under such circumstances, an investigation
of the preexisting conditions is necessary to determine whether or not a wetland
existed prior to the disturbance. Recent natural events (e.g., impoundment of
water by beaver) and man-induced conditions (e.g., inadvertent impoundment due
to highway construction) may also result in atypical situations that effect
wetland vegetation and hydrology in an area which was uplands prior to flooding.
However, the area may not yet have developed hydric soil indicators. It is
important in the latter two circumstances (i.e., natural events and man-induced
conditions) to determine whether or not the alterations to the area have resulted
in changes that are now the "normal circumstances." The relative permanence of
the change and whether or not the area is now functioning as a wetland must be
considered. A site with wetland vegetation and hydrology (other than from
irrigation) that has not yet developed hydric soil characteristics due to
recent flooding should be considered to have soils that are functioning as
hydric soils.
-------
B-5
Footnotes for Key (continued)
£/ In the presence of one or more dominant obligate wetland species, assume wetland
hydrology is present (except for upland microsites and/or larger similar inclusions)
unless evidence of disturbance suggests otherwise.
2/ Numbers in parentheses represent jurisdictional decision points in the key.
f/ Where significant drainage has occurred, soils usually will not be diagnostic
either since soil wetness characteristics (e.g., gleying and mottling) generally
take many years to respond to hydrologic changes. Therefore, a 50% rule should
be applied to the vegetation. An alternative to this 50% rule for forested sites
would be to examine tree vigor and reproduction (e.g., seedlings and saplings),
which may give a good indication of the direction of vegetation change at the
unit or site. This alternative may apply to herbaceous sites as well.
V At this point, a field investigator must decide whether or not wetland hydrologic
indicators are naturally present. If one or more are present, the vegetation unit
is wetlands; if not, the unit is uplands. If the site has been hydro!ogically
disturbed, the significance of the disturbance must be considered in deciding
whether or not the unit is still wetlands hydrologically.
6/ In the presence of one or more dominant obligate upland species, assume upland
hydrology is present, (except for wetland microsites and/or larger, similar
inclusions) unless evidence of disturbance suggests otherwise.
]_/ Because facultative species are not diagnostic of wetlands or uplands, an examina-
tion of soil and hydrologic parameters is necessary to help determine whether the
vegetation unit is a wetland.
£/ A situation without one or more dominants will seldom occur. Consequently, this
part of the key should seldom be used.
jV In the presence of one or more non-dominant obligate wetland species that are
well-distributed in the vegetation unit, assume wetland hydrology is present
(except for upland microsites and/or larger similar inclusions) unless evidence
of disturbance suggests otherwise.
10/ In the presence of one or more non-dominant obligate upland species that are
well-distributed in the vegetation unit, assume upland hydrology is present
(except for wetland microsites and/or larger similar inclusions) unless evidence
of disturbance suggests otherwise.
-------
Attachment 6
Major Differences Between
EPA's and the Corps' Wetland
Jurisdictional Manuals
1. Situation involving the depth of the root zone and hydrologic
modifications.
a. Because of information in the Corps' manual on page 38 (visual
observation of soil saturation), page 27 (paragraph 38), and
page All (root zone definition), the Corps seems to be saying
that if the water table drops greater than 12 inches below the
ground surface, a site does not meet the hydrology criterion.
EPA's manual acknowledges that in some instances certain wetland
plants (particularly trees) may have significant roots deeper
than 12 inches. The EPA manual (page 19, Volume I) reads "For
most plant species occurring in wetlands, particularly herbaceous
plants, the majority of the roots and rhizomes generally occur
within the upper 30 centimeters (12 inches) of soil."The under-
lined words allow flexibility, acknowledging that some wetland
plants have significant roots/rhizomes below 12 inches.
b. EPA's manual considers secondary plant succession, where feasible,
in determining the significance of hydrologic disturbance as
opposed to picking an arbitrary depth to water table cutoff
(threshold). Actually, the Corps' manual on page 27 would tend
to support this to a large extent, but the impression Headquarters
has gotten when dealing with the Corps generically and for a
specific wetland type more recently is that the 12-inch threshold
is fixed in concrete and very inflexible.
2. Determining what constitutes hydrophytic vegetation.
a. In determining whether hydrophytic vegetation is present, the Corps'
manual says that more than 50% of the dominant species must be OBL,
FACW or FAC. EPA's manual, on the other hand, acknowledges that on
a site-by-site basis a combination of species drier than this (other
than having OBL upland dominants) could, in fact, be occurring under
wetland hydrologic/soil conditions (i.e., even FACU species can have
a relatively high, 1-33%, probability occurrence in wetlands). In
other words, EPA's manual allows for soils/hydrology to indicate
whether the plants in question (i.e., any combination of facultative
dominants) are occurring under inundated or saturated soil con-
ditions rather than arbitrarily ruling out certain combinations via
the 50% cutoff (threshold). How often the two approaches will
result in different conclusions for the same site remains to be
seen. From limited field data, Headquarters has found some
differences.
-------
-2-
b. As explained on page 23 and elsewhere in their manual, the Corps
has a FAC neutral option (disregard all straight facultative species)
for deciding whether hydrophytic vegetation is present. EPA's manual
does not have this option.
3. Sample protocols.
EPA's vegetation sampling protocol (i.e., sample plot details, etc.)
is different from the Corps. This may not necessarily be a problem,
however, since there are a number of ways to effectively sample
vegetation.
4. Hydrologic indicators.
EPA's manual (page 20, Volume I) considers plant morphological adapta-
tions (e.g., tree buttressing) to be hydrologic indicators in the
absence of significant hydrological modifications. The Corps' manual
does not.
5. Overall format.
EPA's manual is in two volumes; The Corps' is in one. EPA's intent
here is to develop a field tool (the methodology itself) that stands
alone in terms of field application with back-up information, rationale,
etc. being in a separate volume. However, the Corps' back-up information
is much more comprehensive than EPAs. The Corps' manual has two basic
jurisdictional approaches: Routine, which has three different levels,
and comprehensive. EPA's manual has an analogous simple approach and
detailed approach. The Corps' manual also has specific sections on
atypical situations and problem areas. These situations are covered
in less detail in EPA's manual. EPA's manual has two additional
tools (a diagnostic key and a flow chart), both of which were produced
to expedite and conceptually guide decisions about jurisdictional
decisions for sample plots and vegetation units once the field data
have been collected. Either can be used with the same results.
-------
Attachment 7
Site Specific Evaluation Form for
EPA's Wetland Identification and Delineation Manual
(Interim Draft-April 1987) V
A. Background Information
1. Site/Project Description
a. Name:
b. Location (County & State)
c. Date of Site Visit:
d Physiographic Setting:
e. Wetland Type(s):
f. Extent of Disturbance:
2. Jurisdictional Approach Utilized (Simple or Detailed):
3. Jurisdictional Decision (wetland or upland)
4. Duration (time necessary to make determination)
a. Field Time:
b. Office Time:
B. Overall Effectiveness of the Field Methodology at the Site
1. Was the method effective at the site? If it was not, please
explain.
-------
, J
-2-
C. Specific Items to Evaluate for Each Site
1. Was the sequence of steps in the field methodology appropriate
and logical? If not, why wasn't it?
2. Was the vegetation sampling protocol effective? If not, why
wasn't it?
3. Was the soil sampling protocol effective? If not, why wasn't it?
4. Was the hydrology sampling protocol effective? If not, why wasn't
it?
5. Were the flow chart and diagnostic key helpful in making the juris-
dictional decision? If not why weren't they? Where they problem-
atic in any way? Please explain.
6. Were there any problems with any of the data forms? Please
explain.
7. Any additional comments:
V Fill out this form for each official or unofficial jurisdictional
determination made. Each completed form, along with the appropriate
data sheets and any additional comments or recommendations should be
sent to Headquarters (Bill Sipple, Office of Wetlands Protection,
FTS 382-5066) preferably as soon as possible after a determination
has been made and at least no later than February 28, 1988.
-------
'
Attachment 8
Overall Evaluation Form
for EPA's Wetland Identification
and Delineation Manual
(Interim Draft-April 1987) 1/2/
1. Was the field methodology effective overall? (Please explain
the conditions under which it was and/or was not effective).
2. Were there geographical or hydrological settings in which the
field methodology did not work well? If so, indicate the circum-
stances involved.
t
3. Were there certain wetland types in which the field methodology
did not work well? If so, indicate the wetland types and describe
the circumstances involved.
4. Did the field methodology work for disturbed sites?
If not, please explain why.
5. Were the sequences of steps in the two jurisdictional approaches
(simple and detailed) appropriate and logical? If not, please
explain.
-------
-2-
t
6. Was the vegetation sampling protocol a problem in specific geo-
graphic areas, hydrologic settings or wetland types? If so,
please explain.
7. Were there any problems with the soil or hydrology protocols in
specific geographic areas, hydrologic settings or wetland types?
If so, please explain.
8. Were the flow chart and diagnostic key helpful in making jurisdic-
tional decisions? If not, please explain.
9. Did you encounter any problems with the various data forms?
Please explain.
10. Other comments on EPA's manual:
V The purpose of this evaluation form is to obtain an overall evaluation
of the manual. Thus, only one form should be filled out by each Region.
£/ If you review or field test the Corps manual, please submit a similar
overall evaluation. Pay particular attention to how it differs from
EPA's manual (see comparison between the two that was developed by EPA
Headquarters). If you have evaluated any of the differences between
EPA's and the Corps' manuals, please elaborate on any preferences you
may have and why.
-------
WETLAND IDENTIFICATION
AND DELINEATION MANUAL
VOLUME I
RATIONALE, WETLAND PARAMETERS,
OVERVIEW OF JURISDICTIONAL APPROACH
April, 1987
Interim Final
-------
WETLAND IDENTIFICATION
AND DELINEATION MANUAL
VOLUME I
RATIONALE, WETLAND PARAMETERS,
AND OVERVIEW OF JURISDICTIONAL APPROACH
by
William S. Sipple
Office of Wetlands Protection
Office of Water
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Washington, D.C. 20460
April , 1987
Interim Final
-------
-2-
PREFACE
According to Corps of Engineers and Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) regulations (33 CFR Section 328.3 and 40 CFR Section 230.3,
respectively), wetlands are ". . . areas that are inundated or saturated
with surface or ground water at a frequency and duration sufficient to
support, and that under normal circumstances do support, a prevalence
of vegetation typically adapted for life in saturated soil conditions.
Wetlands generally include swamps, marshes, bogs and similar areas."
Although this definition has been in effect since 1977, the development
of formal guidance for implementing it has been slow, despite the fact
that such guidance could help assure regional and national consistency
in making wetland jurisdictional determinations. Moreover, a consistent,
repeatable operational methodology for determining the presence and
boundaries of wetlands as defined under the federal regulations cited
above would alleviate some concerns of the regulated public and various
private interest groups; it would also substantially reduce interagency
disputes over wetland jurisdictional determinations. Therefore, this
Wetland Identification and Delineation Manual was developed to address
the need for operational jurisdictional guidance.
The basic rationale behind EPA's wetland jurisdictional approach was
initially conceived in 1980 with the issuance of interim guidance for
identifying wetlands under the 404 program (Environmental Protection
Agency, 1980). In 1983 the rationale was expanded and a draft juris-
dictional approach was developed consistent with the revised rationale.
EPA distributed the 1983 draft rationale and approach to about forty
potential peer reviewers. Because the responses were, for the most part,
favorable, further revisions were made and a second draft was circulated
to about sixty potential peer reviewers in 1984. Individuals receiving
the drafts for review were associated with federal, state, and regional
governmental agencies, academic institutions, consulting firms, and
private environmental organizations; they represented a wide range
of wetland technical expertise. The 1984 draft also went though EPA
regional review, as well as formal Interagency review by the U.S. Fish
-------
-3-
and Wildlife Service, Corps of Engineers, National Marine Fisheries
Service, and Soil Conservation Service. Based upon the 1984 peer review
comments, the comments from the federal agencies, and EPA field testing
over the last few years in bottomland hardwoods, pocosins, and East
Coast marshes and swamps, the document was further developed into this
2-volume Wetland Identification and Delineation Manual. Volume I presents
EPA's rationale on wetland jurisdiction, elaborates on the three wetland
parameters generally considered when making wetland jurisdictional
determinations, and presents an overview of the jurisdictional approaches
developed by EPA in Volume II, the Field Methodology. Thus, it lays the
foundation for the "simple" and "detailed" jurisdictional approaches
presented in Volume II.
This Wetland Identification and Delineation Manual has been approved
by EPA as an interim final document to be field tested by EPA regional and
headquarters' personnel for a one year period. During this same review
period, the Corps of Engineers has agreed to conduct field review of its
wetland delineation manual (Environmental Laboratory, 1987). After the
respective reviews, both agencies have agreed to meet, consider the
comments received, and attempt to merge the two documents into one 404
wetland jurisdictional methodology for use by both agencies.
The author truly appreciates the efforts of the many peer reviewers
who commented on one or both of the drafts that preceded this interim
final document, including Greg Auble, Barbara Bedford, Virginia Carter,
Harold Cassell, Lew Cowardin, Bill Davis, Dave Davis, Doug Davis, Frank
Dawson, Mike Gantt, Mike Gilbert, Frank Golet, Dave Hardin, Robin Hart,
John Hefner, Wayne Klockner, Bill Kruczynski, Lyndon Lee, Dick Macomber,
Ken Metsler, John Organ, Greg Peck, Don Reed, Charlie Rhodes, Charlie
Roman, Dana Sanders, Bill Sanville, Hank Sather, Jim Schmid, Joe Shisler,
Pat Stuber, Carl Thomas, Doug Thompson, Ralph Tiner, Fred Weinmann, and
Bill Wilen. Their many constructive comments and recommendations have
been very helpful in refining this document. The author also appreciates
the help of EPA's Regional Bottomland Hardwood Wetland Delineation Review
Team (Tom Glatzel, Lyndon Lee, Randy Pomponio, Susan Ray, Charlie Rhodes,
-------
-4-
Bill Sipple, Norm Thomas, and Tom Welborn) in field testing the basic
rationale underlying the Field Methodology at a number of bottomland
hardwood sites in 1986. The vegetation sampling protocol in the Field
Methodology is to a large extent an outgrowth of that effort. Helpful
review and administrative guidance was provided by Suzanne Schwartz,
John Meagher, and Dave Davis of EPA's Office of Wetlands Protection.
Comments and suggestions received during the federal interagency review
were also instrumental in further refining the manual. In fact, in
addressing the soil and hydrology parameters in this manual, the author
relied heavily upon materials already developed by the Corps of Engineers
in their wetland delineation manual cited above. Stan Franczak ably
handled the huge typing load associated with the interim final, as well
as the earlier drafts.
-------
-5-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Section I. Introduction 6
Section II. Rationale 7
Section III. The Three Parameters: Hydrophytic Vegetation, Hydric
Soils, and Wetland Hydrology 8
A. Hydrophytic Vegetation 8
B. Hydric Soils 12
C. Wetland Hydrology 17
Section IV. Overview of Jurisdictional Approach 21
A. General 21
B. Basic Steps for Jurisdictional Approaches 21
Section V. Literature Cited 27
Appendix A. Glossary Al
-------
-6-
SECTION I: INTRODUCTION
Thi s volume of the Wetland Identification and Delineation Manual was
developed as a companion document to Volume II, the Field Methodology. It
presents EPA's rationale on wetland jurisdiction (Section II), elaborates
on the three parameters generally considered in making wetland jurisdictional
determinations (Section III), and presents an overview of the jurisdictional
approaches developed by EPA in Volume II, the Field Methodology (Section IV).
Anyone using the Field Methodology, should first become familiar with
Volume I, since it lays the foundation for the jurisdictional approaches
presented in Volume II. Thus, Volume I should be thought of, in part, as
a prerequisite training document on the use of the Field Methodology. It
is particularly important to thoroughly review the glossary in Appendix A,
since a good understanding of the terms used in the methodology is imperative.
In utilizing this Field Identification and Delineation Manual, keep in
mind that wetland jurisdictional determinations frequently have both technical
and administrative components. Sometimes the latter component will play an
important role in jurisdictional determinations. For example, because of
cyclic hydrologic changes, some isolated wetlands (e.g., prairie potholes)
do not have "fixed" boundaries. What vegetation boundary to choose (e.g.,
that established under high water conditions, low water conditions or average
water conditions) is an agency administrative decision beyond the scope of
this document. A second administrative decision beyond the scope of this
document is a determination as to whether or not an isolated wetland meets
the commerce test and is thus a "water of the United States." Therefore,
to the extent practicable, this Wetland Identification and Delineation
Manual emphasizes the technical aspects of jurisdiction.
-------
SECTION II: RATIONALE
Although the three parameters mentioned in the Corps-EPA regulatory
definition of wetlands (vegetation, soils and hydrology) are determinative
factors in terms of whether or not a site is a wetland, it does not follow
that all three parameters have to be evaluated or measured in every instance
in order to determine the presence and boundaries of a wetland. Frequently,
vegetation alone, which is a reflection of hydrologic and soil conditions,
will suffice. Specifically, in the presence of one or more dominant obligate
wetland species and in the absence of significant hydrologic modifications,
it can be assumed that soils would, with some exceptions (e.g., where
obligate wetland plants have recently become established, but hydric soils
have not yet developed), be hydric. In other words, there is generally no
need to collect data on soils and hydrology in a vegetation unit dominated
by one or more obligate wetland plant species. Likewise, there is generally
no need to collect soils and hydrology data for a vegetation unit dominated
by one or more obligate upland species. However, if vegetation alone is
not diagnostic, such as when only facultative species occur, soils and
hydrology must be considered in determining the extent of wetlands and/or
uplands at a site.
-------
-8-
SECTION III: THE THREE WETLAND PARAMETERS: HYDROPHYTIC
VEGETATION, HYDRIC SOILS, AND WETLAND HYDROLOGY
A. Hydrophyt 1 c Vegetati_on
i.. Characteristics of Hydrophytic Vegetation
As used in this manual, hydrophyte is a broad term that includes
both aquatic plants and wetland plants. Therefore, hydrophytic vegetation
includes any macroscopic plant life growing in water or on a substrate
that is a least periodically deficient of oxygen as a result of excessive
water content. Aquatic habitats are areas, other than wetlands, that
generally have shallow or deep water; the shallow water areas sometimes
support non-emergent macroscopic hydrophytes (e.g., submerged aquatic,
unattached-floating, and attached-floating plant species). "Swamps,
marshes, bogs and similar areas" were mentioned in the Corps-EPA wetland
regulatory definition (33 CFR Section 328.3 and 40 CFR Section 230.3)
as examples of areas commonly considered wetlands and to distinguish
them from other waters of the United States, such as aquatic habitats,
and uplands. The hydrophytes that usually dominate wetlands as defined
in this document are emergent plant species (erect, rooted non-woody
species such as the common cattail, Typha 1 atifolia) or woody species,
such as the bald cypress (Taxodium distichurn). As opposed to submerged
species such as water milfoil (Myriophyl1um spicatum). unattached-floating
species such as duckweed (Lenina minor), and attached-floating species such
as water lily (Nymphaea odorata), emergent species may be permanently or
temporarily flooded at their bases, but do not tolerate prolonged inundation
of the entire plants (or if tolerant, do not flower when submerged). Wet-
land hydrophytes are usually also vascular plants. Thus, most wetlands
are dominated by emergent vascular plant species, which may or may not
occur in association with vascular or non-vascular submergent, unattached-
floating, and/or attached-floating plant species. When these non-emergent
macroscopic hydrophytes do occur interspersed with emergent plants in a
vegetation unit, the unit should be considered wetlands if 50% or more
of the total percent areal cover is comprised of emergent species. Small
-------
areas of bare yroutid or open water may occur interspersed with wetland
vegetation. Under such circumstances, the bare ground (unless it is an
upland inclusion) and open water should be considered part of the wetland
system.
2 . Preval ent Vegetation
The Corps-EPA regulatory definition of wetlands includes the phrase
"a prevalence of vegetation." As used in this manual, the term prevalence
is considered equivalent to dominance. Thus, the prevalent vegetation is
the dominant vegetation. In an ecological sense, a dominant plant species
is one that by virtue of its size, number, production, or other activities,
exerts a controlling influence on ^ts environment and therefore determines
to a large extent what, other kinds of organisms are present in the ecosystem
(Odum, 1971). In this document, however, dominance strictly refers to the
spatial extent of a species because the extent is directly discernible or
measurable in the field. Spatially dominant plant species are character-
istically the most comrron species (i.e., those having numerous individuals
or a large biomass in comparison to uncommon or rare species). In this
sense, a dominant species is either rhe predominant species (the only
species dominating a unit) or a coJonnrirnt species (when two or more
species dominate a unit). In the juris Jict ional approaches presented in
this Manual , percent area! cover is the standard measure of spatial
extent, except for trees in which case basal area is used. _Note_: Because
this Manual relies heavi1y__pn_-v_e_g_etjitT_onJ___ijn_ its absence (
the non-growing season, particularly when dealing with annual species,
or jifter clearing or filling) historical dat a (e.g., aerial photographs)
will have to be utilized.
3 Typi call y Adapted PJjrrts
The words "typically adapted" are also present in the Corps-EPA wetland
definition. Something that is typical is normal, usual or common in occur-
rence (Environmental Laboratory, 1987). An adaptation is a condition of
showing fitness for a particular environnent, as applied to characteristics
-------
-10-
of a structure, function, or entire organism (Mayr, 1970). These character-
istics make the organism more fit (adapted) for reproduction and/or existence
under conditions of its environment. For example, plant species that gain
a competitive advantage in saturated soil conditions are typically adapted
for such conditions. Various morphological, physiological, and reproductive
adaptations for inundation or saturated soil conditions are given in A4b
(page 11).
4. Indicators of Hydrophytic Vegetation
There are a number of indicators of the presence of hydrophytic
vegetation. Some indicators are diagnostic under natural conditions
(i.e., obligate wetland species); others are, for the most part,
diagnostic (i.e., morphological, physiological, and reproductive
adaptations); still others (i.e., facultative species) are indicative
of hydrophytic vegetation in the presence of hydric soils and hydro-
logic indicators. These indicators of hydrophytic vegetation are
elaborated below.
a. Obligate wetland species. The U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service
(1986) has prepared a national list and a series of regional
lists of plants that occur in wetlands. Some of the species
on these lists are obligate wetland species which, under natural
conditions, always occur in wetlands. The presence of obligate
wetland species, particularly as dominants, in a vegetation unit
should be considered diagnostic of wetlands as long as the unit
has not been significantly modified hydrologically. Facultative
species may be present as well, but obligate upland species can
not be present.
The U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service plant lists were developed
in cooperation with a national panel and regional panels
comprised of personnel from the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service,
Environmental Protection Agency, Corps of Engineers, and Soil
Conservation Service. There are three points that should be
kept in mind when utilizing the lists.
(1) Because the plant lists were developed for use with the
Classification of Wetlands and Deepwater Habitats o_f ;the_
United States (Cowardin, etTaT, 1979), they include
plant species that occur in a number of habitat types
that are not considered wetlands under the Corps-EPA
regulatory program. However, most of these areas are at
least potentially othef waters of the United States
(e.g., shallow open water, mud flats, and submerged
-------
aquatic beds), which are frequently dominated by macro-
scopic, non-emergent species (e.g., the various submerged,
unattached-floating, and rooted-floating plants) and/or
microscopic algae.
(2) Because the plant lists include only vascular plants,
alternate taxonomic or ecological reference sources will
have to be utilized for determining the indicator status
of non-vascular plants (e.g., bryophytes). This will
be particularly applicable to bogs and swamps in the
Northeast, Pacific Northwest, Alaska, and Hawaii.
(3) It has been suggested by some users of the plant lists
that they are too awkward (i.e., they contain too many
species, too many uncommon species, too many unfamiliar
species). This apparently reflects a misunderstanding
of how the lists will likely be used in a jurisdictional
sense. The fact that a field investigator may not know
all the species on a regional list is irrelevant, since
not all the species on a list will occur in a generic
wetland type (e.g., a bog) let alone at a given site.
Thus, at any one time, the field investigator will be
dealing with a small subset of the plants on the list --
a subset determined by the investigator at the site,
not the list.The field investigator will then check
the dominants found against their indicator status on
the list and make the jurisdictional decision. If field
investigators find that their level of unfamiliarity
with the plants at a given site precludes a scientifically
sound and defensible determination, additional expertise
should be sought, Furthermore, because there are many
wetland types in each region and a determination of
all of the dominants for each type has riot been made,
potential dominants should not be eliminated by rule
(i.e., a complete list of species that occur in
wetlands will allow for all possibilities).
b. Plants with adaptations for s o i1 s at u rat ion and/o r i n undat i on.
(1) Pliant s with morphpl ogi cal ad apt at i pns. Plants manifest a
hum b e r o f mo r p h o To g"i c a 1 adaptations to inundation and/or
saturated soil conditions such as pneumatophores, buttressed
tree trunks, adventitious roots, shallow root systems,
floating stems, floating leeves, polymorphic leaves, multiple
trunks, hypertrophied lenticels, and inflated leaves,
stems or roots. Note: Although a given wetland plant
species may have one or more"morphological adaptati ons,
Tn other wetland species~Tn"ey may not be' as evident or
may even be non-existent.
-------
-12-
(2) Plants with physiological adaptations. Although they are
not as useful because they cannot be observed in the field,
known physiological adaptations, such as the accumulation
of malate in the swamp tupelo (Nyssa sylvatica var. biflora)
and increased levels of nitrate reductase in the eastern
larch (Larix laricina), are associated with inundation and/or
soil saturation.
(3) Plants with reproductive adaptations. Many wetland plants
have reproductive strategies that allow them to exist and
reproduce under inundated or saturated soil conditions.
Some can germinate under low oxygen concentrations; other
have flood-tolerant seedlings. Many species also manifest
prolonged seed viability, remaining dormant until soil moisture
conditions are right for germination.
c. Facultative species. Any combination of the three categories of
facultative species (i.e., facultative wetland, straight facultative,
and/or facultative upland) should be considered indicative of
hydrophytic vegetation if the vegetation unit in which they occur
has hydric soils and one or more hydrologic indicators are at
least periodically present during the growing season. In addition,
obligate upland species must either be absent or present only on
microsites and/or larger similar inclusions. In other words,
facultative species, even as dominants, are not in themselves
diagnostic of wetlands or uplands. However, an examination of
the soils and hydrology should give an indication as to whether
the facultative species are, in fact, occurring under conditions
that would require them to be adapted for life in saturated soils.
Note: This latter statement may not be applicable to existing
wetlands that have been hydrologically disturbed (e.g., ditched).
Because of the inherent difficulty in establishing how much the
water table in the disturbed wetland would have to drop to no
longer be a wetland hydrologically, it may be more appropriate to
judge the significance of the hydrologic impact on the vegetation
by evaluating the nature and direction of secondary plant succession
to determine whether the site still functions, or has the potential
to function, as a wetland.
B. Hydric Soils
1. Definition
A hydric soil is a soil that is saturated, flooded, or ponded long
enough during the growing season to develop anaerobic conditions in the
upper part (Soil Conservation Service, 1987). Such soils usually support
hydrophytic plants.
-------
2. Criteria for Hydric Soils
Consistent with the above definition, the Soil Conservation Service
(1987) in cooperation with the National Technical Committee for Hydric
Soils developed the following hydric soil criteria.
a. All Histosols except Folists, or
b. Soils in Aquic suborders, Aquic subgroups, Albolls suborder,
Salorthids great group, or Pell great groups of Vertisols that
are:*
(1) Somewhat poorly drained and have water table less than
15 centimeters (0.5 foot) from the surface for a
significant period (usually a week or more) during
the growing season, or
(2) poorly drained or very poorly drained and have either:
(a) water table at less than 30 centimeters (1.0
foot) from the surface for a significant period
(usually a week or more) during the growing
season if permeability is equal to or greater
than 15 centimeters/hour (6.0 inches/hour) in
all layers within 50 centimeters (20 inches), or
(b) water table at less than 45 centimeters (1.5
feet) from the surface for a significant period
(usually a week or more) during the growing season
if permeability is less than 15 centimeters/hour
(6.0 inches/hour) in any layer within 50 centi-
meters (20 inches), or
c. Soils that are ponded for long duration or very long duration
during the growing season, or
d. Soils that are frequently flooded for long duration or very long
duration during the growing season.
* For an elaboration of these terms, see Soil Taxonomy (Soil Survey Staff,
1975) or Keys to Soil Taxonomy (Department of Agriculture, 1985).
-------
-14-
3. Classification of Hydric Soils
Under the current soil classification system published in Soil Taxonomy
(Soil Survey Staff, 1975), there are two broad categories of hydric soils:
Organic soils (Histosols) and mineral soils. All organic soils are hydric
except for the Folists, which occur mostly in very humid climates from the
Tropics to high latitudes. In the United States, Folists are found mainly
in Hawaii and Alaska (Soil Survey Staff, 1975). Folists are more or less
freely drained Histosols that consist primarily of plant litter that has
accumulated over bedrock. Those Histosols that are hydric are commonly
known as peats and mucks. Mineral soils, on the other hand, consist pre-
dominantly of mineral matter, and contain less than 20% organic matter
by weight (Buckman and Brady, 1969). Mineral soils that are hydric are
saturated long enough to significantly affect various physical and chemical
soil properties. They are usually either gray, mottled immediately below
the surface horizon, or have thick, dark-colored surface layers overlying
gray or mottled subsurface horizons (Environmental Laboratory, 1987).
4. Indicators of Hydric Soils
Indicators of hydric soils can be placed into two categories: Soil
series and phases on the national and state hydric soils lists and field
indicators of hydric soils. These indicators are elaborated below.
a. Soil series and phases considered hydric. The Soil Conservation
Service (1987) has developed national and state lists of hydric
soils in conjunction with the National Technical Committee for
Hydric Soils. In practice, it is always best to verify in the
field that the soil series or phase listed as hydric has been
correctly mapped and that the area in question is not an inclusion
of another series or phase that is not hydric. Note: Some mapping
units (e.g., tidal marsh) may be hydric but will not, be on the list
of hydric soils because they do not yet have series names for the
area in question. In addition, a hydric soil that has been drained
to tfie extent that it no longer meets the hydric soil criteria in
B2 (page 13} is no longer considered hydric.
-------
Field evidence of hydric soils.
(1) Organic soi 1 s (Histoso'i*). Histosols are organic soils
^mostly peats and mucks) that have organic materials in more
than half (by volume) the upper 80 centimeters (32 inches),
unless the depth to rock or to fragmental materials in less
than 80 centimeters, or the bulk density is very low (Soil
Survey Staff, 1975). A more detailed definition can be found
in Soil laxonomy (Soil Survey Staff, 1975), Except for Folists,
all organic soils are hydric.
(2) Histic epipedons. A histic epipedon is an 8-16 inch (20-40
centimeter) soil layer at or near the surface that is saturated
for 30 consecutive days or more during the growing season in
most years and contains a minimum of 20% organic matter when
no clay is present or a minimum of 30% organic matter when
60% or greater clay is present (Environmental Laboratory,
1987). In general, a histic epipedon is a thin horizon of
peat or muck if the sod has not been plowed (Soil Survey
Staff, 1975).
(3) Mineral soils with mottling and/or gleying. Soil colors can
be very useful indicators of hydric mineral soils. Because
of the anaerobic conditions associated with waterlogging,
soils generally become chemically reduced and gleyed. With
chemical reduction, elements such as iron and manganese change
from the oxidized (ferric and manganic) state to the reduced
(ferrous and manganous) state. Such changes are manifested
in bluish, greenish or grayish colors characteristic of gleying.
Gleyed soil conditions can be determined by comparing a soil
sample with the gley char*- in Munse] Spin Color Charts
(Kollmorgen Corporation. 1975). Gleying can occur in both
mottled and unmottled soils.
Mineral soils tnat are periodically saturated for long
periods during the growing season also are usually hydric.
Under such alternating raturated and unsaturated conditions,
mottles commonly develop. Mottles are spots or blotches of
different color or shades of color interspersed with the
dominant color (Buckman and Brady, 1969). The dominant color
is called the soil matrix. Although the soil matrix is usually
greater than 50% of a given soil layer, the term soil matrix
can refer to a soil layer that has no mottles at all. When
the soil matrix in a mottled soil is gleyed, it is considered
a hydric soil. When the matrix is not gleyed, it is still
considered hydric if it has a chroma of <_ 2. Likewise, an
unmottled gleyed soil is considered hydric, as are unmottled
soils that are not gleyed, but have a chroma of <_ 1. Soil
chroma should be determined using the Munsel Soil Color Charts
(Kollmorgen Corporation, 1975). Note: Because soil color ij;
generally not a good indicator in sandy soTls '(e.g., barrieF~
islands)., other Tndi'cator'L of hydrTc soils may have to be used.
-------
-16-
(4) Aquic or peraquic moisture regime. The aquic moisture regime
is a reducing regime that is virtually free of dissolved
oxygen because the soil is saturated by ground water or by
water of the capillary fringe (Soil Survey Staff, 1975). The
soil is considered saturated if water stands in an unlined
borehole at shallow enough depths that the capillary fringe
reaches the soil surface except in non-capillary pores.
Because dissolved oxygen is removed from ground water by
microorganism, root, and soil fauna! respiration, it is
implicit in the concept of aquic moisture regime that the
soil temperature is above biologic zero (5 degrees centigrade)
at some time while the soil or soil horizon is saturated
(Soil Survey Staff, 1975).
There are also soils (e.g., saltmarsh soils) in which
the ground water is always at or very close to the surface.
The moisture regimes for these soils is termed peraquic
(Soil Survey Staff, 1975). Although soils with peraquic
moisture regimes would always be hydric under natural
conditions, those with aquic moisture regimes would be
hydric only if they meet the hydric soil criteria specified
B2 (page 13).
(5) Sulfldic materials. Sulfidic materials accumulate in soils
that are permanently saturated, generally with brackish
water. Under saturated conditions, the sulfates in water
are biologically reduced to sulfides as the soil materials
accumulate (Soil Survey Staff, 1975). The presence of
sulfidic materials is generally evidenced by the smell of
hydrogen sulfide, which has a rotten egg odor.
(6) Iron and manganese concretions. Concretions are local con-
centrations of chemical compounds (e.g., iron oxide) in
the form of a grain or nodule of varying size, shape,
hardness, and color (Buckman and Brady, 1969). Iron and
manganese concretions are usually black or dark brown and
occur as small aggregates near the soil surface. Iron and
manganese concretions greater than 2 millimeters (0.08
inches) in diameter that occur within 7.5 centimeters (3.0
inches) of the soil surface are evidence that the soil is
saturated for long periods near the surface (Environmental
Laboratory, 1987).
(7) Anaerobic soil conditions. Most wetlands manifest at least
periodic soil saturation (waterlogging). When saturation
is long enough, an anaerobic environment develops, which
can result in a highly reduced soil. Under these conditions,
ferric iron, the oxidized form of oxygen, is converted to the
reduced form, ferrous iron. The presence of reduced iron
in the soil can be detected by the use of a colorimetric
field test kit.
-------
-17-
(8) Other organi c materi al s . In sandy soils (e.g., on barrier
islands), organic materials in the soil profile under the
conditions described below are considered evidence of hydric
soils (Environmental Laboratory, 1987).
(a) High organic matter in the surface horizon. Because
prolonged inundation and soil saturation result in
anaerobic conditions, organic matter tends to accumulate
above or in the surface horizon of sandy soils. The
mineral surface layer generally appears darker than
the mineral material immediately below it due to
organic matter interspersed among or adhearing to
sand particles particles. Note: Because organic
matter also accumulates on upland soils, in some
Tnstances it may be difficult to distinguish a surface
organic ''layer associated with a wetland site from
litter and duff associated with an upland site unless
the species composition of the organic materials is
determineHT
(b) Organic pans. As organic matter moves downward through
sandy soils, it tends to accumulate and become slightly
cemented with aluminum at a point in the soil profile
representing the most commonly occurring depth to the
water table. This thin layer of hardened organic matter
is called an organic pan or spodic horizon.
(c) Dark vertical streaking in subsurface horizons. This is
the result of the downward movement of organic materials
from the soil surface. When the soil from a vertical
streak is rubbed between the fingers, a dark stain will
result.
M
C. Wet! and Hydro! ogy
1. Characteristics of Wetland Hydrology
Wetland hydrology is the sum total of wetness characteristics in
areas that are inundated or have saturated soils for a sufficient duration
to support hydrophytic vegetation (Environmental Laboratory, 1987). This
inundation or saturation can come from many sources, such as direct precipi-
tation, surface runoff, ground water, tidal influence, and overland flooding,
Thus, if there is anything that all wetlands have in common, they are at
least periodically wet (Cowardin, &t_ a]_, 1979).
-------
-18-
2. Hydro!ogic Indicators
Although the hydrology parameter may at times be quite evident and
dramatic in the field (e.g., overbank flooding), more often than not this
parameter and its various indicators are usually very difficult to observe.
Furthermore, as opposed to the vegetation and soil parameters, which are
relatively stable, the hydrology parameter exhibits substantial spatial and
temporal variation, making it generally impracticable for delineating
wetland boundaries. Rather, hydrologic indicators are most useful in
confirming that a site with hydrophytic vegetation and hydric soils still
exhibits hydrologic conditions typically associated with such vegetation
and soils (i.e., that the vegetation unit has not been significantly
hydrologically modified to the extent that it supports only remnant,
generally stressed and/or dying, hydrophytic vegetation and drained hydric
soils). In other words, whereas hydrologic indicators can sometimes be
diagnostic of the presence of wetlands, they are generally either opera-
tionally impracticable (in the case of recorded data) or technically
inaccurate (in the case of field indicators) for delineating wetland
boundaries. In the former case, surveying the wetland boundary is generally
too time consuming (even if a given elevation corresponds with the "wetland
hydrologic boundary," which is unlikely); in the latter case, it should be
jvious that indicators of flooding frequently extend well beyond the
wetland boundary. Consequently, in the jurisdictional approaches presented
in this Manual, hydrophytic plants and hydric soils are used to spatially
bound wetlands. Note: In some instances, however, the successional responses
ii.e vegetation at a known wetland site that has been hydrologically
>,j_dj_fiad (e.g., ditched) may be more useful than a documented hydrologic
rh::nge, such as an arbitrarily established drop in water table, in determining
.i-ther the site is still a wetland.
drologic indicators associated with wetlands fall under two categories:
Corded data and field data. These indicators are elaborated below.
Recorded data. Recorded data can be obtained from tide gauges,
stream gauges, flood predictions, historical data (e.g., aerial
photographs and soil surveys), etc. The U.S. Geological Survey
and the Corps of Engineers are two good sources of recorded
hydrologic data.
-------
b. Field data.
(1) Vi sual observation of inundatioru An obvious hydro!ogic
indicator is inunddtiorT~(TTooding or ponding). Although
visual evidence of inundation is most commonly obtained
for wetlands along estuaries, rivers, streams, and lakes,
inundation can sometimes be observed In wetlands occurring
at other geomorphological settings as well, including isolated
depressional wetlands.
(2) Visual observation of soil saturation. Evidence of soil
saturation can"be obtained frofp~examfning a soil pit after
sufficient time has passed to allow water to drain into the
hole. The amount of time required will depend upon the
texture of the soil. For example, water will drain more
slowly into a soil pit dug in a clayey soil as opposed to a
sandy one. In some heavy clay soils, however, water may not
rapidly move into the hole even when the soil is saturated.
Under these circumstances, it may be necessary to examine
the sides of the soil pit for seepage. Not e: The depth to
saturated soil will always be somewhat higher in the soil
profile than the standing water due to the upward movement
of water in the capil1a?y zone.
For soil saturation to have a significant impact on the
plants in a vegetation unit, it must occur within the major
portion of the root zone (Environmental Laboratory, 1987).
For most species occurring in wetlands, particularly herbaceous
plants, the majority of the roots end rhizomes generally
occur within the upper 30 centimeters (12 inches) of soil.
Note: When examining for this indicator in the field, both
antecedent wea^heTToliditjOTij' (£.9.,' the significance recent
s t ortnis and 1 ong-1erm droughtT]_ gncf"the time of the year
should be taken into~ consideration,
(3) Sed i me nt d e po si t s. Tidal flooding in estuaries and flooding
along non-tidal rivers, streams, and lakes frequently results
in the deposition of inorganic or organic sediments on live
vegetation, debris, and stationary man-made structures. This
is frequently manifested as a fine layer of silt. Silt is also
sometimes evident at the so1'] surface on small debris.
(4) Drift lines. Like watermarks and sediment deposits, drift lines
are commonly found along rivers, streams and lakes. Debris (e.g.,
plant parts, sediment, and assorted litter) is frequently left
stranded in plants, on man-made structures, and at other obstruc-
tions as the flood-waters recede.
(5) Surface scouring. Surface scouring occurs along floodplains where
overbank flooding erodes sediments (e.g., at the bases of trees).
The absence of leaf litter from the soil surface is also sometimes
an indication of surface scouring. M
-------
-20-
(6) Wetland drainage patterns. Many wetlands (e.g., tidal marshes
and floodplain wetlands) have characteristic meandering or braided
drainage patterns that are readily recognized in the field or on
aerial photographs and occasionally on togographic maps.
(7) Morphological plant adaptations. Many plants have developed
morphological adaptations in response to inundation and/or soil
saturation (see A4b, page 11). As long as there is no evidence
of significant hydrological modifications, these adaptations
can be used as hydrologic indicators.
-------
-21-
SECTION IV: OVERVIEW OF JURISDICTION APPROACHES
A. General
Prior to making a jurisdictional determination, it is generally necessary
to gather preliminary data and scope out the delineation effort. This will
allow the field investigator to decide whether the simple or detailed juris-
dictional approach presented in Volume II is applicable to the project or site
in question. The simple jurisdictional approach is for routine situations
wherein a field investigator needs only to traverse the majority of the site
and record data from ocular inspection. The detailed jurisdictional approach
is generally for large and/or controversial sites or projects; it entails
establishing transects and sample plots. In addition to traversing the
majority of the site (simple approach) and establishing transects and sample
plots (detailed approach), both of these jurisdictional approaches involve a
number of specific steps. Four of these steps, which are basic to both
approaches, are elaborated below. The entire sequence of steps, including
the sampling protocols, are presented in Volume II.
There are a number of ways to effectively sample vegetation. Many
procedures will produce essentially the same results and some procedures may
be appropriate for certain vegetation types but not for others. The procedure
presented in Volume II has been effective in the field, but may have to be
adjusted in some instances because of site conditions and the nature of the
vegetation. Other information on vegetation sampling is included in books
by Barbour, Burk and Pitts (1987), Cain and Castro (1959), Curtis (1971),
Daubenmire (1968), Greig-Smith (1983), Hueller-Dombois and Ellenberg (1974),
Costing (1956), and Smith (1974).
B. Basic Steps for Jurisdictional Approaches
1. Horizontal stratification of the site into vegetation units.
Vegetation units (i.e., patches, groupings, or zones of plants that
are evident in overall plant cover and which appear distinct from other
such units) should be distinguished in the field based upon an examination
-------
-22-
of vegetation structure and floristic composition. Vegetation units can
also be determined through analysis of "vegetation signatures" on aerial
photographs as long as a representative number of units are verified by
field checking. Once this step is complete, a field investigator should
h?vo, either in his/her mind or on a vegetation map, topographic map, or
annotated aerial photograph, a good indication of the various vegetation
units at the site.
2. Determination of the dominant plant species.
This Manual relies heavily on the presence of dominant plant species.
The spatially dominant species in a vegetation unit are characteristically
the most common species (i.e., those having numerous individuals or a large
biomass in comparison to uncommon or rare species). Percent areal cover is
the standard measure of spatial extent and dominance used in this Manual,
except for trees in which basal area is assessed. Percent areal cover is
an estimate of the area covered by the foliage of a plant species projected
onto the ground. Because of species overlap, each species should be treated
separately in sampling, and the total areal cover of all species will
frequently exceed 100%. Basal area is a measure of dominance in forests
expressed as the area of a trunk of a tree at diameter breast height or as
the total of such areas for all trees in a given space (Curtis, 1971).
Whether a species is dominant or not in a vegetation unit will depend
upon the nature of the vegetation. In a monotypic vegetation type, the
species present is clearly predominant and thus the dominant species in
this instance. More frequently, however, two or more species will codominate
a vegetation unit in which case all of the codominants should be considered
dominant species. It is not uncommon to have a number of species dominating
a vegetation unit, especially at forested sites where a few species may
dominate each vertical stratum. Thus, the percent areal cover or the basal
area necessary for a species to be a dominant should be flexible because
of the naturally occurring spatial heterogeneity of some vegetation.
-------
-23-
The approach taken in this Manual for determining the dominant species
in a vegetation unit is an inductive one in which the dominant plants are
determined after the data are collected, as opposed to collecting data
on only what are considered the dominant plants based upon some a priori
threshold. Although vegetation sampling protocols for the simple and
detailed approaches vary somewhat, the basic procedure for determining
the dominant plants in a vertical stratum can best be explained using the
herbaceous stratum of a forested site as an example. Under the detailed
approach, this first entails quantifying the average percent area! cover
of each herbaceous species. Next, the herbaceous species are ranked
according to their average percent areal cover; then the average percent
area! cover values for all the herbaceous species are summed. Lastly, the
average percent areal cover values of the ranked herbaceous species are
cumulatively summed until 50% of the total average percent areal cover
values for all herbaceous species is reached or initially exceeded. Any
herbaceous species contributing to this 50% threshold are considered
dominants. An essentially similar procedure is applied to any shrubs,
woody vines, saplings and trees at the forested site. A more detailed
explanation of this procedure is given in Volume II. Note: The 50% rule
used in this Manual is for determining the dominant species in a vegetation
unit. It should not be confused with two other 50% rules that have been
suggested for determining what constitutes a "prevalence of vegetation
typically adapted for life in saturated soil conditions" and "hydrophytic
vegetation." Under the 50% rule for determining a "prevalence of vegetation
typically adapted for life in saturated soil conditions," wetland plants
must comprise at least 50% of the dominant species within the "plant
community" at the site in question. Under the 50% rule for determining
"hydrophytic vegetation," greater than 50% of the dominant plant species
in a vegetation unit must be obligate wetland species, facultative wetland
species, or straight facultative species.
3. Determination of the indicator status of the dominant species in the
vegetation unit using the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service's national
or appropriate regional list of plants that occur in wetlands.
Species on the lists are classified either as obligate wetland species
or one of the three categories of facultative species (facultative wetland,
-------
-24-
straight facultative, and facultative upland). Unless there is a good
technical reason to believe otherwise for a given species, any vascular plant
species not on the lists should be considered an obligate upland species.
However, because the national and regional lists are based upon the National
List of Scientific Plant Names (Soil Conservation Service, 1982), the
scientific names of some species listed may not be readily recognized by a
field investigator (i.e., the investigator may be more familiar with a
more commonly used taxonomic synonym). It is particularly important for
the field investigator to be aware of this since a species may appear to
be not on the list and therefore be considered an obligate upland species
by the investigator, whereas it may really be on the list under its currently
accepted scientific name. A brief check of the synonyms listed in Volume II
of the National List of Scientific Plant Names should prevent this problem.
4. Decision on which vegetation units at the site are wetlands and
delineation of the wetland boundaries.
The geographical extent of wetlands at a site will coincide with
the spatial distribution of the wetland vegetation units. Two tools (a
Jurisdictional Decision Flow Chart and a Jurisdictional Decision Diagnostic
Key) presented in Volume II will expedite and conceptually guide decisions
about jurisdiction for sample plots and vegetation units once the field
data have been collected. Two approaches were developed to allow user
flexibility, since some field investigators may feel more comfortable
using one over the the other; however, they closely track each other and
will lead to the same Jurisdictional decisions. For example, the flow
chart and key both indicate that the presence of dominant obligate plant
species, whether obligate wetland or obligate upland, is generally diagnostic
in itself. Specifically, if one or more dominant plant species in a vegeta-
tion unit is an obligate wetland species, the vegetation unit (and the site
if it is a monotypic site) is a wetland and there is no need to consider
soils and hydrology, other than to verify that there have been no significant
hydrologic modifications. Likewise, the presence of one or more dominant
obligate upland plant species is conclusive evidence of the presence of
uplands. On the other hand, by definition, the presence of one or more
-------
-25-
dominant facultative species in a vegetation unit, even the presence of
all facultative wetland dominants, is not truly diagnostic despite the
fact the latter situation in particular would strongly suggest that the
unit is a wetland. Therefore, if only facultative species dominate a
vegetation unit, the flow chart and key direct investigators to the soil
and hydro!ogic parameters to help determine whether the vegetation unit is
wetland.
In some instances a mix of dominant obligate wetland species and
dominant obligate upland species will occur in the same vegetation unit.
These exceptions are reflected in the flow chart and key. They are either
a consequence of (1) relatively dry microsites and/or larger similar
inclusions (which support the upland species), (2) relative wet microsites
and/or larger similar inclusions (which support the wetland species), or
(3) plant succession resulting from natural or man-induced disturbances
(e.g., the landward edge of a tidal marsh that is encroaching on an
adjacent upland forest due to sea level and a site that has been drained
but at which wetland plant species still persist but upland species are
invading, respectively). When a mix of dominant obligate wetland species
and dominant obligate upland species occurs, it is necessary to check to
see if the site has been appropriately horizonally stratified and to
adjust accordingly. If the obligate upland plants occur on dry microsites
or similar larger inclusions, it is necessary to either show these local
areas as individual upland units or consider the site to be wetlands but
acknowledge the presence of local upland areas in a written description
of the site. (A comparable procedure should be used for local low areas
in an otherwise upland site.) As long as there are definable vegetation
units, however, they should be handled individually. The minimum size
treatable (i.e., the minimal mapping unit) will depend upon site
conditions (e.g., size and access), plant physiognomy, and the tools
available (e.g., type and quality of aerial photographs). Nevertheless,
every attempt should be made to separately treat small units (i.e., to
finely horizontally stratify) in order to segregate any discrete upland
units in a wetland matrix (or vice versa) that could otherwise bias a
jurisdictional determination.
-------
-26-
If there is a rather uniform intermixed distribution of dominant
obligate wetland species and dominant obligate upland species (the
various subcategories of facultative species may be present too), then
the unit is probably a naturally or unnaturally disturbed one where
successional changes are occurring. Under these circumstances, either
a 50% rule will have to be applied to the obligate species, or as an
alternative for forested sites, tree vigor and reproduction (e.g., seedlings
and saplings) may give a good indication of the direction of vegetation
change at the unit or site. In some instances, the vegetation may be so
heterogeneous that nothing appears to dominate. A situation in which no
species is dominant will seldom occur, however, if the site has been
appropriately horizontally stratified. Nevertheless, this situation is
addressed in both the flow chart and the key.
-------
-27-
SECTION V: LITERATURE CITED
American Society of Agricultural Engineers. 1967. Glossary of soil and
and water terms. Special Publication SP-04-67. 45 pp.
Avery, E.T. 1967. Forest measurements. McGraw-Hill Book Company, N.Y.
Barbour, M.G., J.H. Burk and W.D. Pitts. 1987. Terrestrial plant ecology.
The Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Company, Inc., Menlo Park, California.
634 pp.
Buckman, H.O. and N.C. Brady. 1969. The nature and properties of soils.
The Macmillan Company, Ontario, Canada.
Cain, S.A. and G.M. de Oliveira Castro. 1959. Manual of vegetation analysis.
Harper & Row, N.Y. 325 pp.
Cowardin, L.M., V. Carter, F.C. Golet and E.T. LaRoe. 1979. Classification
of wetlands and deepwater habitats of the United States. FWS/OBS-79-31.
103 pp.
Curtis, J.T. 1971. The vegetation of Wisconsin. The Univ. of Wisconsin Press.
657 pp.
Daubenmire, R.F. 1968. Plant communities. Harper & Row, N.Y. 300 pp.
Department of Agriculture. 1985. Keys to soil taxonomy. Soil Management
Support Services Technical Monograph No. 6. 244 pp.
Dilworth, J.R. and J.F. Bell. 1978. Variable plot samplingvariable plot
and three-p. O.S.U. Book Stores, Inc., Corvallis, Oregon.
Environmental Laboratory, 1987. Corps of Engineers Wetlands Delineation Manual.
Technical Report, Y-87-1. U.S. Army Engineers Waterways Experiment
Station, Vicksburg, Mississippi.
Environmental Protection Agency. 1980. Environmental Protection Agency
rationale for identifying wetlands. 5 pp.
Greig-Smith, P. 1983. Quantitative plant ecology. The Univ. of California
Press.
Kollmorgen Corporation. 1975. Munsel soil color charts. Baltimore, Maryland.
Kuchler, A.W. 1967. Vegetation mapping. The Ronald Press Company, N.Y. 472 pp.
Mayr, E. 1970. Populations, species and evolution. Harvard Univ. Press.
453 pp.
Mueller-Dombois, D. and H. Ellenberg. 1974. -Vims and methods of vegetation
ecology. John Wiley & Sons, N.Y. 547 pp.
-------
-28-
Odun, E.P. 1971. Fundamentals of ecology. W.8. Saunders Company,
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. 574 pp.
Costing, H.J. 1956. A study of plant communities. W.H. Freeman & Company,
San Francisco. 440 pp.
Sipple, W.S. 1985. Peat analysis for coastal wetland enforcement cases.
Wetlands 5:147-154.
Smith, R.L. 1974. Ecology and field biology. Harper & Row, N.Y. 850 pp.
Soil Conservation Service. 1982. National List of scientific plant names.
Vol. I. List of plant names. Vol. II. Synonomy. SCS-TP-159.
Soil Conservation Service. 1987. Hydric soils of the United States. In
cooperation with the National Technical Committee for Hydric Soils.
Soil Survey Staff. 1975. Soil Taxonomy. Agricultural Handbook No. 436,
Soil Conservation Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture. 754 pp.
U.S. Fish & Wildlife Service. 1986. Wetland plants of the United States
of America 1986. In cooperation with the National Wetland Plant
List Review Panel.
-------
APPENDIX A
GLOSSARY
-------
APPENDIX A
GLOSSARY
AdaptationThe condition of showing fitness for a particular environment,
as applied to characteristics of a structure, function, or entire organism
(Mayr, 1970). These characteristics make the organism more fit (adapted)
for reproduction and/or existence under the conditions of its environment.
Plant species that gain a competitive advantage in saturated soil conditions
are typically adapted for such conditions.
AerobicA condition in which molecular oxygen is present in the environment.
Anaerobic--A condition in which molecular oxygen is absent from the environment
(Soil Conservation Service, 1987). This commonly occurs in wetlands when
soils are saturated by water.
Aquatic habitatsHabitats, other than wetlands, that generally have shallow
or deep water. The water can be intermittently or permanently present.
Shallow water areas sometimes support non-emergent hydrophytes.
Aquic moisture regimeA reducing regime in which the soil is virtually free
or dissolved oxygen because it is saturated by ground water or by water of
the capillary fringe. Some soils (e.g., salt marshes) are so wet that the
ground water is always at or very close to the soil surface and they are
considered to have a peraquic moisture regime (Soil Survey Staff, 1975). m
Basal areaA measure of dominance in forests expressed as the area of a
trunk of a tree at diameter breast height (dbh) or as the total of such
areas for all trees in a given space (Curtis, 1971).
BaselineA line, generally a highway, unimprove road, or some other evident
feature, from which transects extend into a site for which a wetland juris-
dictional determination is to be made.
E?ryophytesA major taxonomic group of non-vascular plants comprised of
liverworts, horned liverworts, and true mosses.
Capillary zoneThe zone of soil essentially saturated with water, in which
pores become filled as a result of surface tension (American Society of
Agricultural Engineering, 1967).
Chemical reductionAny process by which one compound or ion acts as an
electron donor. In such cases, the valence state of the electron donor is
decreased (Environmental Laboratory, 1987).
Cover classAs' used in this Manual, a category into which plant species
would fit based upon their percent areal cover. The cover classes used
(midpoints in parenthesis) are T=
-------
A-2
Diameter breast height (dbh)The diameter of a tree trunk at 1.37 meters
(4.5 feet) above the ground.
Dominant In a ecological sense, a dominant plant species is one that by
virtue of its size, number, production, or other activities, exerts a
controlling influence on its environment and therefore determines to a
largo extent what other kinds of organisms are present in the ecosystem
(Odum, 1971). In this document, however, dominance strictly refers to the
spatial extent of a species because spatial extent is directly discernible
or measurable in the field. In this sense, a dominant species is either
the predominant species (i.e., the only species dominating a unit) or a
codominant species (i.e., when two or more species dominant a unit). The
measures of spatial extent utilized in this Manual (percent areal cover
and basal area) are defined elsewhere in the glossary.
Facultative speciesSpecies that can occur both in wetlands and uplands.
There are three subcategories of facultative species (facultative wetland,
straight facultative, and facultative upland). Under natural conditions,
a facultative wetland species is usually (estimated probability of 67-99%)
found in wetlands, but is occasionally found in uplands; a straight facul-
tative species has basically a similar likelihood (estimated probability
of 34-66%) of occurring in both wetlands and uplands; a facultative upland
species is usually (estimated probability of 67-99%) found in uplands, but
is occasionally found in wetlands.
Fern alliesA group of non-flowering vascular plants comprised of clubmosses
(Lycopodiaceae), small clubmosses (Selaginellaceae), horsetails (Equisetaceae),
and quill worts (Isoetaceae).
FloodedA condition in which the soil surface is temporarily covered with
flowing water from any source, such as streams overflowing their banks,
runoff from adjacent or surrounding slopes, inflow from high tides, or any
combination of sources (Soil Conservation Service, 1987).
Flora^A list of plant taxa in a geographic area of any size. This could be
a simple list or a more detailed one that includes taxonomic descriptions,
diagnostic keys, distribution data, etc. Compare this term with the term
"vegetation."
FolistA more or less freely drained Histosol that consists primarily of
plant litter that has accumulated over bedrock (Soil Survey Staff, 1975).
ForbsBroadleaf herbaceous plants, in contrast to bryophytes, ferns, fern
allies, and graminoids.
Frequently floodedA class of flooding in which flooding is likely to occur
often under usual weather conditions (more than 50% change of flooding in
any year, or more than 50 times in 100 years) (Soil Conservation Service,
1987),
Graminoids--Grasses (Gramineae) and grasslike plants, such as sedges
(Cyperaceae) and rushes (Juncaceae).
-------
A-3
Growing seasonThe portion of the year when soil temperatures are above
biologic zero (5 degrees C), as defined in Soil Taxonomy (Soil Survey Staff,
1975). The following growing season months are assumed by the Soil Conser-
vation Service (1987) for each of the soil temperature regimes:
Isohyperthermic: January-December
Hyperthermic: February-December
Isothermic: January-December
Thermic: February-October
Isomesic: January-December
Mesic: March-October
Frigid: May-September
Cryic: June-August
Pergelic: July-August
HabitatAn environment occupied by plants and animals.
Herbaceous plantsPlants without persistent woody stems above the ground.
Herbaceous plants are commonly called herbs.
Histic epipedonAn 8-16 inch (20-40 centimeter) soil layer at or near the
surface that is saturated for 30 consecutive days or more during the growing
season in most years and contains a minimum of 20% organic matter when no
clay is present or a minimum of 30% organic matter when 60% or greater
clay is present (Environmental Laboratory, 1987). In general, a thin
horizon of peat or muck if the soil has not been plowed (Soil Survey Staff,
1975).
HistosolAn order in Soil Taxonomy composed of organic soils (mostly peats
and mucks) that have organic materials in well over half the upper 80
centimeters (32 inches) unless the depth to rock or to fragmental materials
is less than 80 centimeters (a rare condition), or the bulk density is
very low (Soil Survey Staff, 1975).
Horizontal stratif icationThe division of the vegetation at a site into
vegetation units (i.e., various patches, groupings, or zones).
Hydric soilA soil that is saturated, flooded, or ponded long enough during
the growing season to develop anaerobic conditions in the upper part (Soil
Conservation Service, 1987).
HydrophytesLarge plants (macrophytes), such as aquatic mosses, liverworts,
non-microscopic algae and vascular plants, that grow in permanent water
or on a substrate that is at least periodically inundated and/or saturated
with water.
Hydrophytic vegetation--Macrophytic plant life growing in water or on a
substrate that is at least periodically deficient in oxygen as a result of
excessive water content.
InundatedA condition in which a soil is periodically or permanently flooded
or ponded by water.
-------
A-4
Long durationA duration class in which inundation for a single event
ranges from 7 days to 1 month (Soil Conservation Service, 1987).
Mineral soil--A soil consisting predominantly of, and having its properties
determined predominantly by, mineral matter. Mineral soils usually contain
less than 20% organic matter by weight (Buckman and Brady, 1969).
hnnotypic vegetationVegetation that is dominated by only one plant species.
MottlingSpots or blotches of different color or shades of color interspersed
with the dominant color (Buckman and Brady, 1969). The dominant color is
called the soil matrix.
MuckHighly decomposed organic material in which the original plant parts
are not recognizable (Buckman and Brady, 1969).
Obligate upland speciesSpecies that, under natural conditions, always
occur in uplands (i.e., greater than 99% of the time). The less than 1%
is to allow for anomalous wetland occurrences (i.e., occurrences that are
the result of man-induced disturbances and transplants).
Obligate wetland speciesSpecies that, under natural conditions, always
occur in wetlands (i.e., greater than 99% of time). The less than 1% is
to allow for anomalous upland occurrences (i.e., occurrences that are the
result of man-induced disturbances and transplants).
Organic pajrA layer (i.e., spodic horizon), usually occurring at 30-75
centimeters (12-30 inches) below the soil surface in coarse-textured soils,
in which organic matter and aluminum (with or without iron) accumulated at
the point where the top of the water table most often occurs (Environmental
Laboratory, 1987).
PeatThe sod layer at and near the surface of a wetland, as well as the
deeper, partially decomposed, vegetation into which the sod eventually
grades (Sipple, 1985).
Percent areal coverAn estimate of the area covered by the foliage of a
plant species projected onto the ground. It is determined independent of
other species, and because of species overlap, the total areal cover for
^11 species will frequently exceed 100%, particularly for forested sites.
PeriodicOccurring or recurring at intervals which need not be regular or
predictable. Used here in reference to inundation or saturation of a
wetland soil.
Permeabi1ity The quality of the soil that enables water to move downward
"through the profile, measured as the number of inches per hour that water
moves downward through the saturated soil (Soil Conservation Service,
1987).
PhysiognomyA terra referring to the overall appearance of the vegetation,
a<; opposed~to its floristic composition. This is the result of the various
life forms (e.g., trees, shrubs, and herbs) and their distribution in each
stratum (Kuchler; 1967).
-------
Ponded--A condition in wnich water stands in a closed depression. The
water is removed only by percolation, evaporation, or transpiration (Soil
Conservation Service, 1°87).
Poorly dr_a_ijied--A condition in which water is removed from the soil so
slowly that the soil is saturated periodically during the growing season
or remains wet for long periods (Soil Conservation Service, 1987).
PrevalenceThis term is equivalent to dominance. Thus, the prevalent
vegetation is the dominant vegetation.
Quadrats--Sampling units or plots that may vary in size, shape, number,
and arrangement, depending upon the nature of the vegetation and the
objectives of the study (Smith, 1974).
Root zone--That part of the soil profile that is or can be occupied by plant
roots and rhizomes. For most plant species occurring in wetlands, particu-
larly herbaceous pi ants, the majority of the roots and rhizomes generally
occur within the upper 30 centimeters (12 inches) of soil.
SaplingA young tree between 1 and 10 centimeters (0.4 and 4 inches) in
diameter 1.37 meters (4.5 feet) above the ground surface.
Saturated--A condition in which all voids (pores) between soil particles in m
the root zone are filled with water to a level at or near the soil surface ^
(maximum water retention capacity). Saturation may be periodic or permanent.
Seed!ing--A young tree that is smaller than a sapling and generally less than
1 meter (3.?8 feet) high.
ShrubA woody plant that at maturity is usually less than 6.1 meters (20
feet) tall and generally exhibits several erect, spreading or prostrate
stems and has a bushy appearance (e.g,, smooth alder, Alnus serrulata)
(Cowardin, et_ al_, 1979).
_S_oi 1A dynamic nature1 body on the surface of the earth in which plants
grow, composed of mineral and organic materials and living forms. Also
the collection of natural bodies occupying parts of the earth's surface
that support plants and that have properties due to the integrated effect
of climate and living matter acting upon parent material, as conditioned
by relief, over periods of time (Buckman and Brady, 1969).
joil colorA characteristic of soil that has three variables: chroma,
hue, and Value. The hu£ notation of a color indicates its relationship to
red, yellow, green, blue, and purple; the value notation indicates its
lightness; and the chroma notation indicates its strength or departure
from a neutral of the same lightness (Kollmorgen Corporation, 1975).
Soil horizonA layer of soil, approximately parallel to the soil surface,
With distinct characteristics produced by soil-forming processes (Buckman
and Brady, 1969). For exanple, the A horizon is the upper-most mineral
horizon. It lies at or near the soil surface and is where maximum soil
leaching occurs.
-------
A-6
Soil matrixThe portion (usually greater than 50%) of a given soil layer
that has the dominant color (Environmental Laboratory, 1987).
Soil phaseA subdivision of a soil series based on features such as slope,
surface texture, stoniness, and thickness (Soil Conservation Service,
1987).
Soil profileA verticle section of the soil through all the horizons and
extending into the parent material (Buckman and Brady, 1969).
Soil seriesA group of soils having horizons similar in differentiating
characteristics and arrangements in the soil profile, except for texture
of the surface layer (Soil Conservation Service, 1987).
Somewhat poorly drainedA condition in which water is removed slowly enough
that the soil is wet for significant periods during the growing season
(Soil Conservation Service, 1987).
Species area curveAs used in this Manual, the curve on a graph produced
when plotting the cumulative number of plant species found in a series of
quadrats against the cumulative number or area of those quadrats. It is
used here in the detailed jurisdictional approach to determine the number
of quadrats sufficient to adequately survey the herbaceous understory.
Topographic contourAn imaginery line of constant elevation along the
ground (Environmental Laboratory, 1987). A contour line is the corres-
ponding line on a topographic map.
Transect--As used in this Manual, a line along which sample plots are
established for collecting vegetation, soil, and hydrology data.
Tree--A woody plant that at maturity is usually 6.1 meters (20 feet) or
more in height and generally has a single trunk, unbranched to about three
feet above the ground, and more or less definite crown (e.g., red maple,
Acer rubrum) (Cowardin, et_ aj_, 1979). As distinguished from a sapling,
a tree is greater than 10 centimeters (4 inches) diameter breast height.
TypicalThat which normally, usually or commonly occurs (Environmental
Laboratory, 1987).
Under natural conditionsThis phrase refers to situations in which plant
species occur in the native state at sites "undisturbed" by man as opposed
to those species occurring as transplants or on sites significantly disturbed
by man's activities (e.g., dredging, filling, draining, and impounding).
Under normal circumstancesThis phrase was placed in the regulatory defini-
tion of wetlands to respond, for example, to those situations in which an
individual has attempted to eliminate permit requirements by destroying
the wetland vegetation (e.g., a de-vegetated wetland could normally support
wetland vegetation) and those areas that are not wetlands but experience
the abnormal presence of wetland vegetation (e.g., marsh spoil piles
-------
\- 7
placed under upland C'jnciitioos, but temporarily supporting marsh plants
due to remnant plant propagules). Under the former situation, an area
would still remain a part of the overall wetland system protected by the
Section 404 program. Conversely, the abnormal presence of wetland vegetation
in a non-wetland are* voulc! not be sufficient to include that area within
the jurisdiction of the Section 404 program. Legal alterations to the
hydrologic regime, as opposed to mere removal of vegetation, may alter
"normal circumstances" if they in fact change the nature of a wetland
area so that it no longer functions as part of waters of the United States.
Uplands--Areas that, under normal circumstances, support a prevalence of
plants that are not typically adapted for life in saturated soil conditions.
Uplands include all areas, other than aquatic habitats, that are not
wetlands.
Upland-wetland boundaryThe line established in jurisdictional determinations
that separate wetland areas from adjacent upland areas.
VegetationThe plant life as it exists on the ground (i.e., the mosaic of
plant communities on a landscape) (Kuchler, 1967).
Vegetation signatureA unique spectral reflectance or emission response
transmitted or received by a sensor (e.g., the photographic appearance of
vegetation units on color filci).
Vegetation structure--The division of a plant community into strata and the
distribution of the~~varicus life forcr. In each of these strata (Kuchler,
1967).
Vegetation unitA patch, grouping, or zone of plants evident in overall
plant cover which appears distinct from other such units because of the
vegetation's structure and floristic composition. A given unit is typically
topographically distinct and typicary has a rather uniform soil, except
possibly for relatively dry microsites in an otherwise wet area (e.g.,
tree bases, old tree stumps, mosquito -ditch spoil piles, and small earth
hummocks) or relatively wet micrornt^i in an otherwise dry area (e.g.,
small depressions).
Very long durationA duration class in which inundation for a single event
is greater than 1 month (Soil Conservation Service, 1987).
Very poorly drainedA condition in which water is removed from the soil so
slowly that~Tree~wa"ter regains at or on the surface during most of the
growing season (Soil Conservation Service, 1987).
Water t able--The zone of saturation at the highest average depth during the
wetteYf~season. It is at least 15 centimeters (6 inches) thick and persists
in the soil for more than a few weeks (Soil Conservation Service, 1987).
-------
A-8
Wetland hydro!ogy--The sum total of wetness characteristics in areas that
are inundated or have saturated soils for a sufficient duration to support
hydrophytic vegetation (Environmental Laboratory, 1987).
Wetland indicator statusThe exclusiveness or fidelity with which a plant
species occurs in wetlands. The different indicator categories (i.e.,
facultative species, obligate wetland species, and obligate upland species)
are defined elsewhere in this glossary.
Wet1ands--Areas that are inundated or saturated by surface or ground water
at a frequency and duration sufficient to support, and that under normal
circumstances do support, a prevalence of vegetation typically adapted for
life in saturated soil conditions (33 CFR Section 328.3 and 40 CFR Section
230.3).
-------
1
I
WETLAND IDENTIFICATION
AND DELINEATION MANUAL
VOLUME II
FIELD METHODOLOGY
April, 1987
Interim Final
-------
WETLAND IDENTIFICATION
AND DELINEATION MANUAL
VOLUME II
FIELD METHODOLOGY
by
William S. Sipple
Office of Wetlands Protection
Office of Water
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Washington, D.C. 20460
April, 1987
Interim Final
-------
-2-
PREFACE
According to Corps of Engineers and Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) regulations (33 CFR Section 328.3 and 40 CFR Section 230.3,
respectively), wetlands are ". . . areas that are inundated or saturated
with surface or ground water at a frequency and duration sufficient to
support, and that under normal circumstances do support, a prevalence
of vegetation typically adapted for life in saturated soil conditions.
Wetlands generally include swamps, marshes, bogs and similar areas."
Although this definition has been in effect since 1977, the development
of formal guidance for implementing it has been slow, despite the fact
that such guidance could help assure regional and national consistency
in making wetland jurisdictional determinations. Moreover, a consistent,
repeatable operational methodology for determining the presence and
boundaries of wetlands as defined under the federal regulations cited
above would alleviate some concerns of the regulated public and various
private interest groups; it would also substantially reduce interagency
disputes over wetland jurisdictional determinations. Therefore, this
Wetland Identification and Delineation Manual was developed to address
the need for operational jurisdictional guidance.
The basic rationale behind EPA's wetland jurisdictional approach was
initially conceived in 1980 with the issuance of interim guidance for
identifying wetlands under the 404 program (Environmental Protection
Agency, 1980). In 1983 the rationale was expanded and a draft juris-
dictional approach was developed consistent with the revised rationale.
EPA distributed the 1983 draft rationale and approach to about forty
potential peer reviewers. Because the responses were, for the most part,
favorable, further revisions were made and a second draft was circulated
to about sixty potential peer reviewers in 1984. Individuals receiving
the drafts for review were associated with federal, state, and regional
governmental agencies, academic institutions, consulting firms, and
private environmental organizations; they represented a wide range
of wetland technical expertise. The 1984 draft also went through EPA
regional review, as well as formal interagency review by the U.S. Fish
-------
-3-
and Wildlife Service, Corps of Engineers, National Marine Fisheries
Service, and Soil Conservation Service. Based upon the 1984 peer review
comments, the comments from the federal agencies, and EPA field testing
over the last few years in bottomland hardwoods, pocosins, and East
Coast marshes and swamps, the document was further developed into this
2-volume Wetland Identification and Delineation Manual. Volume I presents
EPA's rationale on wetland jurisdiction, elaborates on the three wetland
parameters generally considered when making wetland jurisdictional
determinations, and presents an overview of the jurisdictional approaches
developed by EPA in Volume II, the Field Methodology. Thus, it lays the
foundation for the "simple" and "detailed" jurisdictional approaches
presented in Volume II.
This Wet!and Identification and Delineation Manual has been approved
by EPA as an interim final document to be field tested by EPA regional and
headquarters' personnel for a one year period. During this same review
period, the Corps of Engineers has agreed to conduct field review of its
wetland delineation manual (Environmental Laboratory, 1987). After the
respective reviews, both agencies have agreed to meet, consider the
comments received, and attempt to merge the two documents into one 404
wetland jurisdictional methodology for use by both agencies.
The author truly appreciates the efforts of the many peer reviewers
who commented on one or both of the drafts that preceded this interim
final document, including Greg Auble, Barbara Bedford, Virginia Carter,
Harold Cassell, Lew Cowardin, Bill Davis, Dave Davis, Doug Davis, Frank
Dawson, Mike Gantt, Mike Gilbert, Frank Golet, Dave Hardin, Robin Hart,
John Hefner, Wayne Klockner, Bill Kruczynski, Lyndon Lee, Dick Macomber,
Ken Metsler, John Organ, Greg Peck, Don Reed, Charlie Rhodes, Charlie
Roman, Dana Sanders, Bill Sanville, Hank Sather, Jim Schmid, Joe Shisler,
Pat Stuber, Carl Thomas, Doug Thompson, Ralph Tiner, Fred Weinmann, and
Bill Wilen. Their many constructive comments and recommendations have
been very helpful in refining this document. The author also appreciates
the help of EPA's Regional Bottomland Hardwood Wetland Delineation Review
Team (Tom Glatzel, Lyndon Lee, Randy Pomponio, Susan Ray, Charlie Rhodes,
-------
-4-
B111 Sipple, Norm Thomas, and Tom Welborn) in field testing the basic
rationale underlying the Field Methodology at a number of bottomland
hardwood sites in 1986. The vegetation sampling protocol in the Field
Methodology is to a large extent an outgrowth of that effort. Helpful
review and administrative guidance was provided by Suzanne Schwartz,
John Meagher, and Dave Davis of EPA's Office of Wetlands Protection.
Comments and suggestions received during the federal interagency review
were also instrumental in further refining the manual. In fact, in
addressing the soil and hydrology parameters in this manual, the author
relied heavily upon materials already developed by the Corps of Engineers
in their wetland delineation manual cited above. Stan Franczak ably
handled the huge typing load associated with the interim final, as well
as the earlier drafts.
-------
-5-
TA8LE OF CONTENTS
Page
Section I. Introduction 6
Section II. Scoping and Preliminary Data Gathering 7
A. General 7
B. Steps for Preliminary Data Gathering and Scoping 7
Section III. Simple Jurisdictional Approach 8
A. General 8
B. Steps for Implementing Simple Jurisdictional Approach 9
Section IV. Detailed Jurisdictional Approach 16
A. General 16
B. Steps for Implementing Detailed Jurisdictional Approach 16
Appendix A. Jurisdictional Decision Flow Chart A-l
Appendix B. Jurisdiction Decision Diagnostic Key B-l
Appendix C. Data Forms for Simple Jurisdictional Determination C-l
Appendix D. Data Forms for Detailed Jurisdictional Determination.... D-l
Appendix E. Equipment Necessary for Making Wetland Jurisdictional
Determinations E-l
-------
-6-
SECTION I: INTRODUCTION
This Field Methodology is intended for use by Environmental Protection
Agency field personnel in making wetland jurisdictional determinations. It
was developed as a separate volume to facilitate its use in the field. The
Field Methodology includes four sections and five appendices. Section I is
an introduction which indicates the purpose of the document, outlines its
contents, and explains its relationship to Volume I (Rationale, Wetland
Parameters, and Overview of Jurisdictional Approaches). Section II addresses
scoping and preliminary data gathering, two steps that are generally necessary
prior to making jurisdictional determinations. A simple approach for making
more or less routine jurisdictional determinations is outlined in Section
III. A detailed approach for making jurisdictional determinations for large
and/or controversial sites or projects is presented in Section IV. Appendix A
is a Jurisdictional Decision Flow Chart; Appendix B is a Jurisdictional
Decision Diagnostic Key. Both of these appendices are tools that will expedite
and conceptually guide decisions about jurisdiction for vegetation units and
sample plots once the field data have been collected. They closely track
each other and will lead to the same conclusions; one's preference for use
will be solely a matter of choice. Some field investigators may find the
flow chart easier to use than the key, especially if they have had limited
experience using diagnostic keys. Appendices C and D include field data forms
for the simple and detailed approaches, respectively. Lists of necessary and
optional equipment for both approaches are included in Appendix E.
Volume II should not be utilized in isolation from Volume I. Users
should first become very familiar with the rationale, wetland parameters,
and overview of the jurisdictional approaches presented in Volume I. It is
also very important to thoroughly review the glossary in Volume I, since a
good understanding of the terms used in the methodology is imperative.
Thus, Volume I should be thought of, in part, as a prerequisite training
document on the use of Volume II, in that an understanding of the former
will help assure the proper use of the jurisdictional approaches presented
in the latter.
-------
-7-
SECTION II: SCOPING AND PRELIMINARY DATA GATHERING
A. General
Prior to making a wetland jurisdictional determination, it is generally
necessary to gather preliminary data on the site or project and scope out the
task. This will allow the field investigator to determine whether the simple
or detailed jurisdictional approach is appropriate.
B. Steps for Preliminary Data Gathering and Scoping
1. Obtain and review any aerial photographs, vegetation maps,
wetland maps, topographic maps, soil surveys, technical
reports, or other pertinent information depicting and/or
describing the site.
2. Estimate the size of the site.
3. Determine the site's geomorphological setting (e.g., floodplain,
isolated depression, ridge and swale complex) and its habitat or
vegetative complexity (i.e., the range of habitat or vegetation
types).
4. Determine whether a permit situation or an enforcement situation
is involved.
5. If necessary, do a field reconnaissance to complete Steps 2-4.
6. Based upon Steps 1-5, determine whether the simple jurisdictional
approach (Section III) or the detailed jurisdictional approach
(Section IV) is appropriate. This step assumes that a field
investigator is already faniliar with the simple and detailed
jurisdictional approaches and the types of projects or sites that
would generally be applicable to them as described in Sections
III A and IV A of this Field Methodology.
-------
-8-
SECTION III: SIMPLE JURISDICTIONAL APPROACH
A. General
The simple jurisdictional approach is generally applicable to sites or
projects that are small in extent (e.g., a narrow fringe marsh along a shore-
line or a small depressional wetland) and/or non-controversial in terms of
public or private interests, ecological significance, potential jurisdictional
challenges, enforcement status, etc. Discretion must be exercised in deciding
whether a project is simple, however, since even small sites may be so vege-
tatively complex to require detailed examination; larger sites nay be so
uniform to allow for a simple examination. Significantly altered sites and
controversial sites, particularly enforcement situations, will generally
entail conducting a detailed field examination regardless of size.
The simple jurisdictional approach involves inspecting the majority of
the site and making ocular vegetation estimates for the vegetation units as
a whole (as opposed to detailed sampling along transects), and when appro-
priate, examining soil and hydrologic conditions as well. Because fourteen
steps are potentially involved in the simple jurisdictional approach, on the
surface it appears more complex than it really is. Actually, many juris-
dictional determinations can be made without going through all fourteen steps.
The simple jurisdictional approach will generally be applied only to smaller
sites, which probably will have only one or at most, a few vegetation units.
Furthermore, a field investigator will only have to proceed through Step 6
for any vegetation units dominated by one or more obligate plant species,
assuming there is no evidence of significant hydrologic modifications.
And if a vegetation unit is comprised of only herbaceous plants, which is
the situation with most marshes, dominants will have to be determined just
for those species. Thus, jurisdictional determinations for small herbaceous
wetlands, especially those with dominant obligate wetland species, should be
rather easy to conduct.
All sites or projects for which the simple jurisdictional approach
is not appropriate, should be examined using the detailed jurisdictional
approach (Section IV). Field data forms are included in Appendix C. A
list of necessary and optional equipment is given in Appendix E.
-------
B. Steps for Implementing Simple Jurisdictional Approach
1. Decide how the Jurisdictional determination will be presented (e.g.,
ground delineation, delineation on aerial photographs or topographic
maps, or written description in a technical report). Proceed to
Step 2.
2. Inspect the entire site and horizontally stratify it into
different vegetation units either mentally, or on an aerial
photograph or a topographic map. Proceed to Step 3.
3. Determine the dominant plant species for each vegetation unit.
a. Visually estimate the percent areal cover (by species) of the
graminoids, forbs, ferns, fern allies, bryophytes, woody
seedlings, and non-woody vines in the herbaceous understory
and record it on Data Form C-l. This should be done by
estimating the area of the vegetation unit covered by the
foliage of a given plant species projected onto the ground.
b. Indicate the cover class into which each herbaceous species
falls and its corresponding midpoint. The cover classes
(and midpoints) are: T=<1% (none); 1=1-5% (3.0); 2=6-15%
(10.5); 3=16-25% (20.5); 4=26-50% (38.0); 5=51-75% (63.0);
6=76-95% (85.5); 7=96-100% (98.0).
c. Rank the herbaceous species according to midpoints. If two or
more species have the same midpoints, use the actual recorded
percent areal cover as a tie-breaker. If two or more species
have the same midpoints and actual recorded percent areal cover,
equally rank them.
d. Sum the midpoint values of all herbaceous species.
e. Multiply the total midpoint values by 50%.
f. Compile the cumulative total of the ranked species in the
herbaceous understory until 50% of the sum of the midpoints for
all herbaceous species is reached or initially exceeded. All
species contributing cover to the cumulative 50% threshold
should be considered dominants. If two or more of these
species have the same midpoints and actual recorded areal
cover, consider them all dominants.
-------
-10-
g. Visually estimate the percent areal cover of the shrub species
and record it on Data Form C-2. Follow the same procedure used
for herbaceous species in Step 3a-f (page 9).
h. Visually estimate the percent areal cover of the woody vines
(other than seedlings) independent of the strata in which they
occur and record it on Data Form C-2. Follow the same procedure
used for herbaceous species in Step 3a-f (page 9).
i. Visually estimate the percent area! cover of the saplings and
record it on Data Form C-3. Follow the same procedure used
for herbacecous species in Step 3a-f (page 9).
j. Visually estimate the relative basal area of the tree species
(exclusive of saplings) and record it on Data Form C-3. This
should be done by considering both the size and number of
individuals of a tree species and comparing that species to
other tree species in the vegetation unit. Note: The total
relative basal area for all the species in a vegetation unit
will always equal 100%.~~
k. Rank the trees species by relative basal area.
1. Compile the cumulative sum of the ranked tree species until
50% of the total relative basal area for all tree species
is reached or initially exceeded. All species contributing
relative basal area to the cumulative 50% threshold should be
considered dominants. If the threshold is reached by two or
more species with equal relative basal area values, consider
them all dominants, along with any higher ranking species. If
all the species have equal relative basal area values, consider
them all dominants. Proceed to Step 4.
4. Determine the indicator status of the dominant plant species
in each vegetation unit using the appropriate regional list
of plants that occur in wetlands. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Determine whether the vegetation units have been hydrologically
modified (e.g., whether a vegetation unit with dominant obligate
wetland species has been ditched or a vegetation unit with dominant
obligate upland species has been impounded).
In the presence of one or more dominant obligate wetland species
or one or more dominant obligate upland species in a vegetation
unit, and in the absence of hydro!ogical modifications, a juris-
dictional determination can be made without further consideration
of hydrology. If hydrological modifications are evident, however,
the significance of these modifications must be determined before
making the jurisdictional determination. Proceed to Step 6.
-------
-11-
b. In the presence of only dominant facultative species (i.e.,
facultative wetland, straight facultative, and/or facultative
upland) in a vegetation unit, proceed to step 7.
c. If both situations exist at a site, steps 6 and_ 7 must be
completed.
6. Using the data summary sheets (Data Form C-5) and either the Juris-
dictional Decision Flow Chart (Appendix A) or the Jurisdictional
Decision Diagnostic Key (Appendix B), decide whether the vegetation
units supporting one or more dominant obligate wetland species or
one or more dominant obligate upland species, are wetland units.
Note: In a situation involving multiple vertical strata in which
the only dominants in a given stratum occur sparsely because the
total percent area! cover for that stratum is low, more weight
should be given to the dominants in any strata that have substan-
tially greater overall percent area! cover. For example, if a
vegetation unit in a herbaceous wetland (e.g., a marsh) has one
shrub species represented by a few scattered individuals, the shrub
species would be considered the dominant shrub species present
and thus a dominant under this methodology. However, that shrub
species should be given relatively little weight in comparison
with the dominant herbaceous species, which are obviously more
abundant overall. This can be particularly significant if the
shrub species is either an obligate wetland species or an obligate
upland species and its indicator status is inconsistent with the
indicator status of the herbaceous species that are more abundant
overall (i.e., both obligate wetland species and obligate upland
species occur as dominants in the same vegetation unit). This
situation would usually result from anomalous conditions (e.g.,
man-induced disturbance), natural disturbance, or the presence
of microsites. Proceed to Step 14.
7. If the dominant plant species in any vegetation units are all
facultative (i.e., facultative wetland, straight facultative,
and/or facultative upland), examine the soils and hydrology
as indicated in Steps 8-13.
-------
-12-
8. Check the appropriate county soil survey to determine the soil
series or phases for the vegetation units containing only
facultative species. Proceed to Step 9.
9. Check the national list of hydric soils or the pertinent state
hydric soils list to determine whether the soil series or phases
for the vegetation units are considered hydric. Proceed to Step 10.
10. Dig soil pits in the vegetation units and examine the soil profiles
to confirm whether they fit the soil series or phase descriptions
in the soil survey. This is necessary due to the possibility of
inclusions of other soil series or phases and to check for possible
mapping errors. Also some mapping units may be hydric (e.g., tidal
marsh) but will not be on the list of hydric soils because they do
not yet have series names for the area in question. Proceed to
Step 11.
11. Determine whether field indicators of hydric soil conditions exist
in the vegetation units and record them on Data Form C-4. The
presence of one or more of the following indicators is indicative
of the presence of hydric soils. Note: The soil examination can
be terminated when a hydric soil indicator is encountered.
a. Organic soils (Histosols) or mineral soils with a histic epipedon,
b. Gleying or mottling with a soil matrix chroma of < 2 in mineral
soi1s.Using Munsel Soil Color Charts, record the soil matrix
color and mottle color (i .e., the hue, value, and chroma) of a
soil sample by matching the sample with the appropriate color
chips. Note: The soil should be moistened if it is dry when
examined"For example, a soil sample with a hue of lOYR, a
value of 6, and a chroma of 2 would be recorded as 10YR6/2.
Also determine whether the soil is gleyed by matching the soil
sample with the color chips on the gley page of Munsel Soil
Color Charts. These samples should be taken at approximately
a 25 centimeter (10 inch) depth, or immediately below the A
horizon, whichever is higher in the soil profile. Apply the
following diagnostic soil key to confirm whether the colors in
the soil matrix are indicative of hydric soil conditions:
-------
-13-
la. Soil is mottled:
2a. Matrix is gleyed hydric.
2b. Matrix is not gleyed:
3a. Chroma of matrix is £ 2 hydric.
3b. Chroma of matrix is > 2 not hydric.
Ib. Soil is not mottled:
4a. Matrix is gleyed hydric.
4b. Matrix is not gleyed and chroma is £ 1 hydric.
4c_. Matrix is jiot gleyed and chroma is > l...not hydric.
Because of their high organic content, some mineral soils
(e.g., Mollisols) may not meet these hydric criteria. However,
in such dark (black) soils, the presence of gray mottles within
25 centimeters (10 inches) of soil surface is considered
indicative of hydric conditions. For the most part in the
United States, Mollisols are mainly the dark colored, base-rich
soils of the Prairie Region. Because of the color of the
parent material (e.g. the red soils of the Red River Valley)
some soils will not meet any of these color characteristics.
Soil color is also generally not a good indicator in sandy
soils (e.g., barrier islands). When problematic parent materials
or sandy soils are encountered, hydric soil indicators other
than color may have to be relied on in the field.
c. Sulfidic materials. The smell of hydrogen sulfide (rotten egg
odor) is indicative of the presence of sulfidic materials.
Hydrogen sulfide forms under extreme reducing conditions
associated with prolonged soil saturation or inundation.
d. Iron or manganese concretions. These are usually black or dark
brown and occur as small aggregates near the soil surface.
e. Ferrous iron. This is chemically reduced iron, the presence of
which can be determined using a colorimetric field test kit.
f. Other organic materials. In sandy soils (e.g., on barrier
islands) look for any of the indicators listed below.
(1) A layer of organic matter above the mineral surface or high
organic matter content in the surface horizon. The mineral
surface layer generally appears darker than the mineral
-------
-14-
material immediately below it due to organic matter
interspersed among or adhering to sand particles. Note:
Because organic matter also accumulates in upland soils,
in some instances it may be difficult to distinguish a
surface organic layer associated with a wetland site from
Titter and duff associated with an upland site unless the
plant species composition^ of the organic material is
determinein
(2) A thin organic layer of hardened soil (i.e., an organic pan
or spodic horizon) at 30-75 centimeter (12-30 inch) depths.
(3) Dark vertical streaking in subsurface horizons due to the
downward movement of organic materials from the surface.
When the soil from a vertical streak is rubbed between the
fingers, a dark stain will result.
Proceed to Step 12.
12. Make hydro!ogic observations in the vegetation units and record them
on Data Form C-4.
a. Record any evidence of surface inundation, such as drift lines,
water marks, sediment deposition, standing water, surface
scouring, drainage patterns, etc.
b. After sufficient time has passed to allow water to drain into
the soil pit dug in Step 10, examine the pit for evidence of
standing water. Note: Because of the capillary zone, the soil
will be saturated higher in the soil profile than the depth of
standing water in the soil pit.
c. Record any plant species that have morphological adaptations
(e.g., buttressed tree bases and adventitious roots) to saturated
soil conditions or surface inundation.
d. When necessary, additional information on hydrology should be
obtained from recorded sources, such as stream gauge data, tide
gauge data, flood predictions, soil surveys, and the national
or state lists of hydric soils.
Note; It is not necessary to directly demonstrate that wetland
hydrology is present. It is only necessary to show that the soil
or its surface are at least periodically saturated or inundated,
respectively. Specifically, with a vegetation unit dominated by
one or more dominant obligate wetland plant species, it is necessary
to show either (1) that there have been no significant hydro!ogic
modifications or (2) that there is one or more hydrologic indicators
-------
-15-
at least periodically present during the growing season. With a
vegetation unit dominated by only facultative species (i.e., facul-
tative wetland, straight facultative, and/or facultative upland)
occurring on a hydric soil, it is necessary to demonstrate that
there is one or more hydrologic indicators at least periodically
present during the growing season. Indicators of surface inundation
and the presence of saturated soils in the major portion of the
root zone are considered hydrology indicators. Plant morphological
adaptations are also considered hydrology indicators, unless the
vegetation unit has been significantly altered hydrologically.
Other hydrology indicators include the various recorded sources
listed in Step 12d (page 14). Proceed to Step 13.
13. Using the data summary sheets (Data Form C-5) and either the Juris-
dictional Decision Flow Chart (Appendix A) or the Jurisdictional
Decision Diagnostic Key (Appendix B), decide whether the vegetation
units dominated by facultative species (i.e., facultative wetland,
straight facultative and/or facultative upland) are wetland units.
See the note in Step 6 (page 11) and proceed to Step 14.
14. Indicate the extent of wetlands at the site either on a topographic
map or aerial photograph, in a written description, or by a ground
delineation (or any combination of the above). The geographic
extent of wetlands at the site will coincide with the distribution
of the various wetland vegetation units determined in Steps 6
and/or 13, as applicable. Therefore, any upland-wetland boundaries
at the site will coincide with the boundaries between the upland
vegetation units and the wetland vegetation units that are present.
-------
-16-
SECTION IV: DETAILED JURISDICTION APPROACH
A. General
The detailed jurisdictional approach is generally applicable to
sites or projects that are large (e.g., an extensive riverine bottomland
hardwood tract or a large depressional wetland) and/or controversial in
terms of public or private interests, ecological significance, potential
jurisdictional challenges, enforcement status, etc. In some instances,
the detailed jurisdictional approach might also be appropriate for smaller
sites or projects, especially those with complex vegetation. Likewise,
significantly altered sites, as well as enforcement situations, will
generally entail conducting a detailed field examination regardless of
size. Under some circumstances, such as enforcement cases involving filled
wetlands, it may be necessary to rely on alternative approaches. One
option is photointerpretation of vegetation units on pre-project aerial
photographs; another is peat analysis (Sipple, 1985; see Section V of
Volume I for full citation).
The detailed jurisdictional approach involves standard quantitative
vegetation sampling along transects and frequently an examination of the
soils and hydrology as well. Field data forms are included in Appendix D.
A list of necessary and optional equipment is given in Appendix E.
B. Steps for Implementing Detailed Jurisdictional Approach
1. Decide how the jurisdictional determination will be presented
(e.g., ground delineation, delineation on aerial photographs or
topographic maps, written description in a technical report).
Proceed to Step 2.
2. If a reconnaissance survey was not done in the preliminary data
gathering and scoping effort, it generally should be done here.
Proceed to Step 3.
-------
-17-
3. Horizontally stratify the site into different vegetation units. The
approach used to stratify the site will be contingent upon how the
jurisdictional determination will be presented. If the determination
is to be presented using aerial photographs, then vegetation units
should be tentatively delineated directly on the photographs or
on photographic overlays prior to going into the field. These
vegetation units should then be refined as appropriate in the
field. If a ground delineation is planned, vegetation units can
also be shown on aerial photographs or topographic maps, but the
upland-wetland boundary will also have to be delineated on the
ground using stakes or flagging tape. Proceed to Step 4.
4. Establish a baseline or baselines from which transects will extend
into the site. A baseline might be the boundary of the site, a
highway or unimproved road, or some other evident lineal feature.
It should extend more or less parallel to any major watercourse at
the site and/or perpendicular to the topographic gradient. Delineate
the baseline on an aerial photograph or a topographic map and record
its length and compass heading. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Establish transect locations. The number of transects necessary
to adequately characterize a site will vary with the size of the
site and the complexity of the vegetation. It is generally best
to divide the baseline into segments (e.g., 100 foot, 500 foot, or
1000 foot intervals depending on the size of the site) and randomly
select a point within each segment to begin a transect. Be sure,
however, that each vegetation unit is included within at least one
transect. Proceed to Step 6.
6. Establish each transect along a compass heading perpendicular to
the baseline. Transects should extend far enough into the site
to adequately characterize all of the vegetation units along the
heading.
-------
-18-
7. Following the compass heading, walk each transect to a point at
which all of the vegetation units along the transect have been
encountered. Frequently, this will be to the river or stream if
the site is a floodplain. In the process, make any necessary
adjustments to the tentatively delineated vegetation units or
establish such units if they were not delineated in Step 3. Also
record the length of the transects by either pacing or measuring.
If aerial photographs or topographic maps are used, delineate the
transects on them. Proceed to Step 8.
8. After a transect has been established and walked to its terminus,
it should be traversed again in the opposite direction to do the
quantitative sampling. The number of sample plots necessary will
depend upon the length of the transect and the complexity of the
vegetation. At least one 0.1 acre (0.04 hectare) circular sample
plot should be established in each vegetation unit along a transect.
Additional sample plots should be established within the unit at
91.5 meters (300 foot) intervals or sooner if a different vegetation
unit is encountered. With exceptionally large vegetation units,
however, a sampling interval larger than 91.5 meters may be more
appropriate. Thus, a field investigator should exercise discretion
in establishing sampling intervals. Sample plots should be shown
on either the aerial photographs or topographic maps, or their
distances from the baseline should be recorded in the absence of
photographs or maps. Proceed to Step 9.
9. Select a point along the transect in the ultimate vegetation unit
to center the first 0.1 acre sample plot. Flag the center of the
plot and the four cardinal compass points of the perimeter of the
circular plot. This will divide the plot into four quadrants, and
the plot will have a 10.9 meter (35.8 foot) radius. Proceed to
Step 10.
-------
-19-
10. Determine the dominant plant species for the sample plot. There are
a number of ways to effectively sample vegetation. Many procedures
will produce essentially the same results and some procedures may
be appropriate for certain vegetation types but not for others.
The following procedure has proven effective in the field, but may
have to be adjusted as appropriate depending upon site conditions
and the nature of the vegetation.
a. Randomly toss two 0,1m2 quadrat frames into the herbaceous
understory of each quadrant of the 0.1 acre plot. On Data
Form D-l, record the percent areal cover of each plant species
(graminoids, forbs, ferns, fern allies, bryophytes, woody
seedlings, and herbaceous vines) occurring soley within or
extending into each quadrat frame when viewed from directly
above it.
b. Construct a species area curve to determine whether the eight
O.lm2 quadrats are sufficient to adequately survey the
herbaceous understory. The number of quadrats necessary will
correspond to the point on the curve where it first levels off
(and remains essentially level), indicating that the quadrats
after that point added few if any additional species. If eight
O.lm2 quadrats are not sufficient, do additional quadrats in
increments of four (one in each quadrant) until the necessary
number of quadrats is reached.
c. For each species, sum the percent areal cover for all O.lm2
quadrats and divide the total by the total number of quadrats
sampled, which will give an average percent areal cover by
species.
d. Rank the species in the herbaceous understory by average
percent areal cover. If two or more species have the same
average percent areal cover, equally rank them.
e. Sum ohe average percent areal cover for all the species
in the herbaceous understory.
f. Multiply the total average percent areal cover by 50%.
g. Compile the cumulative sum of the ranked species in the
herbaceous understory until 50% of the total average percent
areal cover for all species is reached or initially exceeded.
All species contributing cover to the cumulative 50% threshold
should be considered dominants. If the threshold is reached
by two or more species with equal average percent areal cover
values, consider them all dominants, along with any higher
ranking species. If all species have equal average percent
areal cover values, consider them all dominants.
-------
-20-
h. Determine the percent area! cover of the shrubs within the
entire 0.1 acre sample plot and record the data on Data Form
D-2. This should be done by traversing the plot a number of
times, listing the shrub species present, and estimating the
percent areal cover by shrub species for the entire plot.
i. Indicate the cover class into which each shrub species falls
and its corresponding midpoint.
j. Rank the shrub species according to midpoints. If two or more
species have the same midpoints, use the actual recorded percent
areal cover as the tie-breaker. If two or more species have the
same midpoints and actual recorded percent area! cover, equally
rank them.
k. Sum the midpoint values of all shrub species.
1. Multiply the total midpoint values by 50%.
m. Compile the cumulative total of the ranked shrub species until
50% of the sum of the midpoints for all shrub species is reached
or initially exceeded. All species contributing cover to the
cumulative 50% threshold should be considered dominants. If
two or more of these species have the same midpoints and actual
recorded area! cover, consider them all dominants.
n. Determine the percent area! cover of the woody vine species
(other than seedlings) within the entire 0.1 acre sample plot
and record the data on Data Form D-2. This should be done by
traversing the plot a number of times, listing the woody vine
species present, and estimating the percent areal cover by
species for the entire plot independent of the strata in whicj
they occur. Follow the same procedure used for shrubs in Step
lOi-m (page 19).
o. Determine the percent areal cover of the saplings with the
entire 0.1 acre sample plot and record the data on Data Form
D-3. This should be done by traversing the plot a number of
times, listing the sapling species present, and estimating the
percent areal cover by species for the entire plot. Follow
the same procedure used for shrubs in Step lOi-m (page 19).
p. Determine the basal area of the trees (exclusive of saplings)
using the point sampling (Bitterlich) system (Avery, 1967;
Dill worth & Bell, 1978) and record the data on Data Form D-3.
Since the Bitterlich system is a plotless method, both trees
within and beyond the 0.1 acre plot should be tallied. This
should be done using either a prism or an angle gauge. Note:
An alternative plotless method for sampling trees is the point
quarter method.
-------
-21-
(1) Hold the prism or angle gauge directly over the center of
the 0.1 acre plot and record all individual trees by species
"sighted in" according to the prism or angle gauge while
rotating 360 degrees in one direction. In the process,
also measure the basal area of each individual tree using
a basal area tape. If a basal area tape is not available,
determine the diameter of each individual tree with a
diameter tape and compute its basal area by the formula
(2) Sum the individual tree basal areas by species.
(3) Rank the tree species by their basal areas.
(4) Sum the basal areas of all tree species.
(5) Multiply the summed (total) basal area by 50%.
(6) Compile the cumulative sum of the ranked tree species until
50% of the total basal area for all tree species is reached
or initially exceeded. All species contributing cover to
the cumulative 50% threshold should be considered dominants,
If the threshold is reached by two or more species with
equal basal area values, consider them all dominants, along
with any higher ranking species. If all species have equal
basal area values, consider them all dominants. If it is
felt that a representative sample of the trees has not been
obtained by the one Bitterlich tally, additional tallies
should be obtained by offsetting perpendicularly from the
center point of the plot in alternate directions and taking
additional tallies. Otherwise, proceed to step 11.
11. Determine the indicator status of the dominant plant species in
the vegetation unit using the appropriate regional list of plants
that occur in wetlands. Proceed to Step 12.
-------
-22-
12. Determine whether the vegetation unit has been hydro!ogically
modified (e.g., whether a vegetation unit with dominant obligate
wetland plants has been ditched or a vegetation unit with dominant
obligate upland plants has been impounded).
a. In the presence of one or more dominant obligate wetland species
or one or more dominant obligate upland species in a vegetation
unit and in the absence of hydrological modifications, a juris-
dictional determination can be made without further consideration
of hydrology. If hydrological modifications are evident, the
significance of these modifications must be determined before
making the jurisdictional determination. Proceed to Step 13.
b. In the presence of only dominant facultative species (i.e.,
facultative wetland, straight facultative, and/or facultative
upland) in a vegetation unit, proceed to step 14.
c. If both situations exist at the site, steps 13 and 14 must be
completed.
13. Using the sample plot data summary sheet (Data Form D-5) and either
the Jurisdictional Decision Flow Chart (Appendix A) or the Jurisdic-
tional Decision Diagnostic Key (Appendix B), decide whether the
vegetation unit supporting one or more dominant obligate wetland or
one or more dominant obligate upland species, is a wetland unit.
Note: In a multiple-strata setting in which the only dominants
in a given stratum occur sparsely in the sample plot because the total
percent area cover for that stratum in that plot is low, more weight
should be given to the dominants in any strata that have substantially
greater overall percent areal cover in the sample plot. For example,
if a sample plot in a herbaceous wetland (e.g., a marsh) has one
shrub species represented by a few scattered individuals, the shrub
species would be considered the dominant shrub species present and
thus a dominant under this methodology. However, it should be given
relatively little weight in comparison with the dominant herbaceous
species, which are obviously more abundant overall. This can be
particularly significant if the shrub species is either an obligate
wetland species or an obligate upland species and its indicator
status is inconsistent with the indicator status of the herbaceous
species that are more abundant overall (i.e., both obligate wetland
-------
-23-
species and obligate upland species occur as dominants in the same
plot). This situation would usually result from anomalous conditions
(e.g., man-induced disturbance) or the presence of microsites. A
second potential sampling problem may also occur. If a single large
tree is recorded in a sample plot, it may be determined to be dominant
for that plot under this methodology. Similarly to the example
above, this species may have an indicator status that is inconsistent
with the dominants in the other strata. Thus, when this situation
is encountered, it is important to determine whether the individual
tree is occurring under either anomalous conditions or on a microsite;
in either case, it should be given relatively little weight in com-
parison with any overall more abundant species in the vegetation
unit. Proceed to Step 21.
14. If the dominant plant species in the vegetation unit are all
facultative (i.e., facultative wetland, straight facultative,
and/or facultative upland), examine the soils and hydrology
as indicated in Steps 15-19.
15. Check the appropriate county soil survey to determine the soil series
or phases for the vegetation unit containing only facultative species.
Proceed to Step 16.
16. Check the national list of hydric soils or the pertinent state
hydric soils list to determine whether the soil series or phases
for the vegetation unit are considered hydric. Proceed to Step 17.
17. Dig a soil pit near the center of the 0.1 acre sample plot and
examine the soil profile in the vegetation unit to confirm whether
it fits the soil series or phase descriptions in the soil sjrvey.
This is necessary due to the possibility of inclusions of other
soil series or phases and to check for possible mapping errors.
Also, some mapping units may be hydric (e.g., tidal marsh) but
will not be on the list of hydric soils because they do not yet
have series names for the area in question. If it is felt that
-------
-24-
supplemental soil sampling should be done to adequately characterize
the soils at the plot, additional samples can be readily obtained
by randomly sampling in each quadrant with an Oakfield soil probe
or similar device. Proceed to Step 18.
18. Determine whether field indicators of hydn'c soil conditions exist
in the soil pits and record the data on Data Form D-4. The presence
of one or more of the following indicators is indicative of the
presence of hydric soils. Note: The soil examination can be
terminated when a hydric soil indicator is encountered.
a. Organic soils (Histosols) or mineral soils with a histic
epipedon.
b. Gleying or mottling with a soil matrix chroma of < 2 in mineral
soi 1 s. Using Munse] Soil Color Charts', record the soil matrix
col or and mottle color (i .e., the hue, value, and chroma) of a
soil sample by matching the sample with the appropriate color
chips. Note: The soil should be moistened if^ it is dry when
examined. For example, a soil sample with a hue of 10YR, a
value of 6, and a chroma of 2 would be recorded as 10YR6/2.
Also determine whether the soil is gleyed by matching the soil
sample with the color chips on the gley page of Munsel Soil
Color Charts. These samples should be taken at approximately
a 25 centimeter (10 inch) depth or immediately below the A
horizon, whichever is higher in the soil profile. Apply the
following diagnostic soil key to confirm whether the colors in
the soil matrix are indicative of hydric soil conditions:
la. Soil is mottled:
2a. Matrix is gleyed hydric.
2_b_. Matrix is not_ gleyed
ja_. Chroma of matrix is <_ 2 hydric.
3h. Chroma of matrix is > 2 not hydric.
Ib. Soil is not mottled:
4a. Matrix is gleyed hydric.
4b. Matrix is not gleyed and chroma is £ 1 hydric.
4_c. Matrix is not gleyed and chroma is > 1.. .not hydric.
-------
-25-
Because of their high organic content, some mineral soils
(e.g., Mollisols) may not meet these hydric criteria. However,
in such dark (black) soils, the presence of gray mottles within
25 centimeters (10 inches) of the soil surface is considered
indicative of hydric conditions. For the most part, in the
United States, Mollisols are mainly the dark colored, base-rich
soils of the Prairie Region. Because of the color of the
parent material (e.g., the red soil of the Red River Valley)
some soils will not meet any of these color characteristics.
Soil color is also generally not a good indicator in sandy soils
(e.g., barrier islands). When problematic parent materials or
sandy soils are encountered, hydric soil indicators other than
color may have to be relied on in the field.
c. Sulfidi c materials. The smell of hydrogen sulfide (rotten
egg odor) is indicative of the presence of sulfidic materials.
Hydrogen sulfide forms under extreme reducing conditions
associated with prolonged soil saturation or inundation.
d. Iron or manganese concretions. These are usually black or dark
brown and occur as small aggregates near the soil surface.
e. Ferrous iron. This is a chemically reduced iron, the presence
of which can be determined by using a calorimetric field test
kit.
f. Other organic materials. In sandy soils, look for any of the
indicators listed below.
(1) A layer of organic matter above the mineral surface or high
organic matter in the surface horizon. The mineral surface
layer generally appears darker than the mineral material
immediately below it due to organic matter interspersed
among or adhering to sand particles. Note: Because organic
matter also accumulates in upland soils, in some instances
it may be difficult to distinguish a surface organic layer
associated with a~ wetland site from litter and""duff associ-
ated with an upland site unless the plant species composition
of the organic material is determined.
(2) A thin organic layer of hardened soil (i.e., an organic pan
or spodic horizon) at 30-75 centimeter (12-30 inch) depths.
(3) Dark vertical streaking in subsurface horizons due to the
downward movement of organic materials from the surface.
When the soil from a vertical streak is rubbed between the
fingers, a dark stain will result.
Proceed to Step 19.
I
-------
-2fi-
19. Make hydrologic observations in the vegetation unit and record the
data on Data Form D-4.
a. Traverse the 0.1 acre sample plot a number of times and record
any evidence of surface inundation, such as drift lines, water
marks, sediment deposition, standing water, surface scouring,
drainage patterns, etc.
b. After sufficient time has passed to allow water to drain into
the soil pit dug in Step 17, examine the pit for evidence of
soil saturation. Note_: Because of the capillary zone, the
soil will be saturated hiffie> in the profile than the standing
water in the soil jrit.
c. Record any plant species found that have morphological adapta-
tions to saturated soil conditions or surface inundation.
d. When necessary, additional information on hydrology should be
obtained from recorded sources, such as stream gauge data, tide
gauge data, flood predictions, soil surveys, the national or
state lists of hydric soils.
Note: It is not necessary to directly demonstrate that wetland
hydrology is present. It is only necessary to show that the soil
or its surface are at least periodically saturated or inundated,
respectively. Specifically, with a vegetation unit dominated
by one or more dominant obligate wetland plant species, it is
necessary to show either (1) that there have been no significant
hydrologic modifications or (2) that there is one or more hydrologic
indicators at least periodically present during the growing season.
With a vegetation unit dominated by only facultative species (i.e.,
facultative wetland, straight facultative, and/or facultative
upland) occurring on a hydric soil, it is necessary to demonstrate
that there is one or more hydrologic indicators at least periodically
present during the growing season. Indicators of surface inundation
and the presence of saturated soils in the major portion of the
root zone are considered hydrology indicators. Plant morphological
adaptations are also considered hydrology indicators, unless the
vegetation unit has been significantly altered hydrologically.
Other hydrology indicators include the various recorded sources
listed in Step 19d (page 26). Proceed to Step 20.
-------
-27-
20. Using the sample plot data summary sheet (Data Form 0-5) and either
the Jurisdictional Decision Flow Chart or the Jurisdictional Decision
Diagnostic Key, decide whether the vegetation unit dominated by
facultative species (i.e., facultative wetland, straight facultative
and/or facultative upland) is a wetland unit. See the note in
Step 13 (page 22) and proceed to step 21.
21. Proceed along the transect towards the baseline until another
vegetation unit is encountered or 91.5 meters (300 feet), whichever
comes first. Establish a second 0.1 acre sampling plot (plot two)
at least 15.2 meters (50 feet) beyond the boundary of the new
vegetation unit or at a distance 91.5 meters from the first plot
if the same vegetation unit is encountered. Repeat the same pro-
cedures given in Steps 10-20. If the vegetation unit (including
soils and topography) at the second plot is the same as the first,
or if the second is different but they are either both wetlands or
both uplands, proceed to Step 23. If the vegetation unit at the
second plot is different and one of the units is upland and the
other is wetland, then an upland-wetland boundary has been traversed.
Proceed to Step 22.
22. Oetermine the upland-wetland boundary between the two plots.
a. Move back along the transect at least 15.2 meters (50 feet)
into what is obviously the vegetation unit encountered in the
first sample plot. Repeat the same procedures given in Steps
10-20 for this sample plot (plot three).
b. Look for a change in vegetation or topography between sample
plots two and three. Information from the data forms for
plots two and three will provide cues as to which parameters
have changed. In a forested area, this will frequently involve
changes in the shrubs or herbaceous plants. If there is a
vegetation or topographic change or break, sample the soil at
that point along the transect to see if it is hydric. If it
is hydric, proceed towards the upland plot until a more evident
change or break in the vegetation or topography is noted, and
examine the soil again to see if it is hydric. If no evident
change or break in vegetation or topography is initially noted,
-------
-28-
the soil should be examined half way between plots two and
three. If the soil is hydric at this point on the transect,
sample the soil again half way between this point and plot
two. By repeating either of these procedures, make as many
additional soil samples as necessary to determine the location
of the upland-wetland boundary (actually a point) along the
transect. A soil probe (e.g., an Oakfield soil probe) is very
helpful to do this intensified soil sampling. Note: At this
point in the overall procedure, soils generally become more
useful than vegetation in establishing the upland-wetland
boundary, particularly if there is no evident vegetation
change or break or when facultative species dominate two
adjacent vegetation units.Therefore, a Data Form D-4
should be filled out for each additional soil sample taken
between sample plots two and three. On the Data Form D-4's,
also include any hydrology observations made in the immediate
vicinity of the soil samples. Because quantitative vegetation
data have already been obtained for 0.1 acre plots (sample
plots two and three) centered approximately 15.2 meters
(50 feet) to each side of the upland-wetland boundary, further
detailed quantitative analysis of the vegetation is generally
not necessary. Any vegetation breaks or changes in species
composition in the immediate vicinity of the soil samples
should be recorded, however, on a Data Form D-5. Data Form
D-5's (including vegetation, soils and hydrology observations)
must be completed at least for the areas immediately to each
side of the upland-wetland boundary point (i.e., one form
should be completed for an upland unit and one form should
be completed for a wetland unit).
c. Once the upland-wetland boundary point is determined, indicate
its location on the aerial photograph or topographic nap with
the letters "BP" and record its distance from one of the two 0.1
acre sample plots or the baseline. Proceed to step 23.
23. Make additional wetland determinations along the transect in
accordance with Step 21. The procedure described in Step 22
should be applied at every place along the transect where a
wetland boundary occurs between successive 0.1 acre sampling
plots. Proceed to Step 24.
24. Establish all other necessary transects and repeat the procedures
in Steps 7-23. Proceed to Step 25.
-------
-29-
25. Synthesize the sample data for all of the transects to determine
the portion of the site that is wetlands.
a. Examine the sample plot data summary sheets (Data Form D-5)
and indicate on the aerial photograph or topographic map all
plots that are wetlands and all plots that are uplands.
b. If the sampling plots are all wetlands or all uplands, the
entire site is either entirely wetlands or entirely uplands,
respectively.
c. If some sampling plots are uplands and some are wetlands, then an
upland-wetland boundary is present. Connect the upland-wetland
boundary points ("BP's") on the aerial photograph or topographic
map by following either the vegetation break or the topographic
contour that corresponds with the upland-wetland boundary points.
This interpolated line passing through the "BP's" is the upland-
wetland boundary.
d. If the distances between transects are large or the vegetation
breaks or the topographic contours do not consistently correspond
with the upland-wetland boundary, it may be necessary to do
additional soil sampling across the boundary in the areas
between transects. The latter should done by walking the
approximate upland-wetland boundary and periodically sampling
across it. For each soil sample across the boundary, record soil
data (and hydrology observations from the immediate vicinity)
on a Data Form D-4. Data Form D-5's (including vegetation, soils
and hydrology observations) must be completed at least for the
areas immediately to each side of the upland-wetland boundary
point (i.e., one form should be completed for an upland unit
and one form should be completed for a wetland unit).
e. If the upland-wetland boundary is to be delineated on the ground,
place stakes or flagging tape at all transect boundary points,
as well as at any boundary points established by inter-transect
sampling.
-------
APPENDIX A
JURISOICTIONAL DECISION
FLOW CHART
-------
1
o.
of
o
IS
o
_J
u.
IZ
o
00
IH
{^
UJ
5 i- CT
Z. DC Q- O
1 r
A 1 O
1 V t_
I T^
1 CO >,
ea +J >-
0 c
+j co «».
c ai co |
re t
CO. O
i- Z
§co
CD A
Q -r- 1
C 0 1
2:
t- QL C C
o oo « x
c DD «r =3
O t- > U- O
C S" -4-> U-
- o u- oo «:
co c i
O OJ
C [_ CO
rQ CL, CJ ^
C >-
T- cn
§O)
r
a o
O "
QJ O.
t- CO -^^
^ .-1
£_ 00
O 0 -D
^y» ^ flm_ -- ^
OJ 4-> >O
C C CO i
O «3 <1J -i->
C T- OJ
i- o 3
~-. E «U
* o o.
o oo +j
co c
CJ Q> "O O
>- t- C CO
o
S i C_ co
0.0. a>
(_ r: !-
o o
«J GJ ^)
Oj CD CL t_
CO OO O
C
c >>
W1 C r-^
QJ ^ QJ f
>- i > O
Q.-1- ^->.
=: -u -D
* c:
1 r c
+J ^ II
-
O QJ Cv)
r- 3 rH
T3
C ^- CO
H ^^ Q) I CO
>- T3
C
<0
'-^ ^
LO 4->
^ a
ts
CO
o
c
to
^
CL
D3
-»^
^C ^*^
c cc |
to £»
^- C 0 0
t- t_ C (O A
_l ~ O «C i 1
CD O «- 1
C O >> CO E CO
C i 0) -r- C
4^ ai -u co o
C CO > !- !-
C >- !-> O OJ 3
r- O «J t- CDr
E O i O t- (j
O O. -
4->
as
t- c
O-r-
E
c *s o
coo
~^. tO LO
LD I- ,-
^ O)
t- h-
A J Q.
i cc E *-
i O Q. O
0 C 00 £T
S^
t «
L
rc
r
^
E
K !
X
t- -C QJ -
a; c t_ t_
O> 0 -
1 j - !- CO
1 ' CO CO tD
V O 3 C
co t_ i re
QJ I (^ (J r*-
> -i- C Q.
VO
hw*
CO
re
^~
o
D3
C
O
*~
4->
IT"!
»->
1 g
^- QJ
P *"
O CO
z: -o
c
A re
i f
I Q.
1 D3
1
_i CO
f*s\ ft\
UJ vU
_J C -t-
CO 0
O T3 QJ
C QL
J^
0 -G<
CQ C *O
-^ re c
re
J (->
cc QJ a.
o 3 Z5 ro
i
V CO
T3
CO C
QJ re
>-
+->
OJ -^~
^ '
1
,. 1
C/l J
"0
c j
,__ t
4-*
!
^ s-~*
r~~
* *^^-
CO CO
O c
r- «
CO .
3 O.
r- ^*
U
C QJ
i1 t.
^C
O "
z: co x
£r i \
CO 1 -i- 4-> V)
re i co re c
n: i o s: o
co 4. T-
X r O T3 CO
i- -r- !- C 3
r i-\ y f p_
^. ^J ^u. **. ^~*
^J 00 (J
>S O i t_
r- «C
!->«- i '
r- -O O CO X CC
C >, ^- QJ "- -
=> 3= QJ " 5-
1 > -I- J_) CO
1 !- A JCO « T)
i (-> ' o a: c
v re i t- re
O 1 O T5 r-
CO ' ^*^ \t~" C O.
QJ -cr-- pr «t =2
>- c !
cn re
O i
r 4-3
O QJ
t. 3
"O ~^~
3?0
1
1 X ^°""~
i T: t- OJ -i- a~i
v I c re f c ^.^
co ! -r- re co
QJ i/i E co 2: -c
>- OJ -i- C C
+j co o > re
1 ! CO i
CO t_ CO -C +J
' o QJ ry c fli
j \J \i> J ^- \U
1 1. cn r^ re ^s
U t_ CJ i
- re c ex co
s: _i «-i = 1-1
1
-------
4J
6 >,
ro
^O E
OJ
4-5 4-3
C (C
t- x: £_
O 4-5 ro
Q. QJ
CO >,
co c
5~O *4
en c o
0 0
r O CO
O OJ
«- t- E
"O O -i
^i"*""* 4-5
x: x;
c c
a re T-
c re
ro CO 4-5
OJ t-
CO Q. OJ
r- >> 0
0 4J
co -c re
c
« ro 4.3
C t CO
o 4-3 ro
t- C OJ
4J 3 r-
4-5 C 4-3
oj T- re
C7J (T3
OJ 4-5 «
> I- 4-3
OJ i
C 0 3
C 0
OJ -i-
^) ^ *+
i ro n-
r *^*
« OJ -O
O t_
1 QJ CO
x: x: t-
CvJ O 4-5 QJ
1 I- 4-5
^c re * QJ
<-^~- E
OJ r» ro
r- 00 S-
x: o^ ro
rH Q.
CO
OJ » QJ
'i~ ^t XT
r- t_ 4-3
OJ C
t- 4-5 14-
rc O
E i-
ro o oj
4 X- t
en re o
re I E
r-
-C I t-
re o
3 4-5
o c oj
i OJ C
4- E O
c
CO O <*-
i- £_ O
x: -r-
4-5 > CO
C t-
C LU O
I- 4-3
re
"O CO O
aj c. -i-
4-5 QJ T3
C OJ C
OJ C T-
CO T-
Q) C^ *4~r
t- c o
C O-LU
c
4J >>M- O
C. O) O -t-
fl3 O 4-3
Q- r co re
o a. o
C_ T3 t- -i-
O O O i
u_ x: o o.
4-5 Q.
(/) oj QJ re
OJ Ex:
4-3 4-3 QJ
O OJ j*
c x; >> re
4-> t-.e E
0
o ~v
U. i-H |
r
re
4_)
C
QJ
c:
C
C
l_
r-
>
C
OJ
c
r
co
c
o
r
4-5
re
r
C.
re
>
r
re
3
c
C
re
t.
o
f
re
c
c
CO
re
OJ
CO
i
re
E
O
c
o
4-3
a;
3
^j
CO
r-
4-5
r-
»
C-
OJ
x:
4J
ro
Of
f
re
0
r-
a.
>^
4-5
re
T3
OJ
t_
OJ
T?
CO
c
o
o
QJ
4_j
o
c
-a
3
O
x:
CO
CO
.,
x:
I
t_
3
O
n- s_
o
CO Lu
OJ
r-
cn. ~
CO
CO 4-5
0. ro
i. i
0 4-
"^
OJ OJ
x: 4-5
I «
4_J
QJ
cn
CO OJ
4-5 >
C
OJ T3
> C
QJ re
i *
ro co
C- QJ
3 i
4-5 C
ro x:
C 4-5
0
O CL
x: o;
CL'i-
o t-
4-5 ro
CO t_
re o.
4_>
re >
O co
-a
C- C
o ro
r
CO 4-5
a> ru
r- 3
i r
^ 'O
I- C
4-3 0
O CO
fO ^3
OJ
c: co
E "
3 CO
x: c
^ f»
O
QJ C
4-3
O CO
-o
CO C
re QJ
o 3
c
o c
£- O
1 >
4-5 ro
, 3
3 4-3
co !
OJ CO
CO
ro x:
[ »
14
co C
O CO
r- QJ
r- O_
c re
0 X
O OJ
c:
O
CO
ro
OJ
CO QJ
r C
CT> C O
c x: -r-
r 4-5 4-5
3 Q ro
O 0-4-5
£_ -r-
cn aj a.
C -i- <-
o t- o
C -r- QJ
ro t.
OJ C- CL
x: CL
4J r
ro ro
O) £
c t-
i- QJ O
£_ to C
3 !-
0 3 3
01 o
CO -i^ i
4-5 -r- QJ
ro J JD
<4- M~
o o
3 4-5
E c co
QJ t-
"O T^3 'O
QJ -r- QJ
4-5 >>>
ro QJ
4-5 C
QJ QJ -r-
cnjO
OJ C
> 4-5 O
c O co
3 c ro
OJ
CO T3 CO
ro
3 0)
>> o c
3 -
c 3
o c o
o s_
£_ -r- 0)
ro 4-3
oj ro oj
a.4-5 x:
a. QJ 4-3
OJ <4-
>> > 0
ro
E O 4J
r CO
CO 4-> O
4-3 >> E
c x:
re O- cn
r O C
CL 5- !-
"O «-
i >, 3
re JE -o
C t- CO
C O r
re ?-
t- o
>, O co
re "o
-o o QJ
QJ >- 4-5
4-5 -o re
re c t-
C -r- 3
E c re
o re co
co co o
4-5 OJ
re o T3
, C QJ
M- re 4-5
4-5 re
T3 CO T3
oj e c
4-533
re o c
4-5 t_ -^
QJ !-
cn o QJ
QJ >
> x: re
o x:
> 3
QJ CO 4-3
t O
O- t- C
E OJ
re "O >>
x c re
aj 3 E
r
re
c
o
r
4_>
O
r
T3
CO
r
L,
^
'* 3
re
cn
C
1
v
re
E
t_
C
ro
cn
r-
4_)
CO
GJ
>
C
'i
"O
r
QJ
*r
14
ro
«
CO
QJ
O
re
4-5
CO
c=
3
O
£_
r-
O
GJ
CO
QJ
r~
4-5
(_
QJ
c
C
4_>
r-
QJ
CO
jQ
re
OJ
x:
-^j
r
3
O
3
t_
O
re
o
r
o
C
r
>,
cn
0
o
j_
-^
>^
x:
re
*t
CO
^3
r
I
C
O
CO
re
QJ
CO
CO
c
1
3
0
cn
OJ
JC
4-5
<*-
o
C
O
4J
t_
O
Q.
ro
cn
c
i
t_
3
"Q
4-3
OJ
CO
QJ
t_
0-
>^
t
t»
re
o
c
OJ
t_
re
CO
i_
o
4-5
re
o
r
T3
C
r-
-^J
C
re
4_>
OJ
3
4->
O
C
5_
0
s_
1)
f
4-5
QJ
3
QJ
-a
<3
OJ
-o
4-5
CO
3
C
O
4.}
re
c
ez
C
QJ
a-
-a
o
i
4-3
>^
c~
CL
O
i_
^
>^
r~
14
O
oo
L_
O
4_J
rc
O
"C
c:
f
QJ
t-
O
s
t_
o
OJ
c
o
x:
o
1
f~
3
Cl
r
4-5
CO
r
X
OJ
o
CO
,_
re
>j
re
^
CO
c
0
r
4-5
re
3
4_>
r-
CO
P_
ro
o
r
CL
>^
4-5
re
4-3
ro
g"
4-5
4-3
3
O
to
4-3
C
1
o
t_
QJ
c~
4_>
C_
3
(4
CO
0.
t_
q
OJ
r
1
4-5
re
c
L-
o
CO
QJ
r
4-5
r
5>
i
4_>
0
re
c
re
E
3
x:
4-5
C
OJ
o
OJ
<4
o
CO
4-5
O
OJ
4-
14-
OJ
a:
x:
4_)
O
4-3
QJ
3
c
-^
C
3
O
QJ
-Q
4-5
O
C
C
re
0
^^
cn
O
r
O
£_
c
f~
T3
C
ro
4-5
QJ
3
t-
O
^^
-o
c
re
CO
r
O
to
O
r
t_
T3
x:
«i
c
O
4-5
re
4-5
a'
QJ
>
4-5
C
QJ 1 S_ "C
E *" OJ OJ OJ
QJ U 4_J CO 4-> re >
o-( red oji QJ re
re c 2 !- o 3 t- x:
i cn o c co re P=
O-T- 4-3 4 4J rn OJ CO
CO O ' 4-5 t- OJ t_ 4J
QJ X 3 CD X: **-
f | > ^_ j_> f/1 C F QJ 4-> ^
(-3 re re c QJ > 3 > c: QJ
-C co QJ i ~o o ro 4-5 re t
" ~ 4-5 CO ^ O t- _c~ O -C QJ
fXI QJ-cOO-i- C4-JT3
- cooccoi ore -i
E O> 3 i if- QJ5-I-CO
recore ot-oojc
ex; O- o3re x:c
O tO£>54->4-5 1-4JO
i t_ -i -r- re aj oj o
4-5O Et.'-xix: a;
re co * O QJ 4-5 4-3 r*>
4-5 ** C * ** - * 4-3 QJ ^^
QJ (/) O Cn c C- i * Q t r^n *^3
01 ^ *r-" o r"* re i ^ 3 o *
QJ QJ 4-5 QJ '^ r f 3
> 4-j > 4-3 co co T: o o
CO "O O "O OJ C C £- XT
<4->,cco3cx:ore-cco
OCOO4-5t-re4-3-I- >,
OC4J. 4-5QJx:cn
i QJ QjcocLcrecn c
re cncn> c 3'* c_ cx)reccjo ojrec~c
O C 'r O CO 4-3 4-3 -C ro O
£-4-:, TSCr-O O
Qjrecore>>3rere cr
i L- *r l_ re 4-3 QJ Q t4
TZJ X 3 3 ^" ^- QJ *^ "r
^- OJ { ' _C^ O O ^"* -f * ( ^ ( >
o "ireciT-CL4-5 roc
coQJc-r-x:E ^-4-30;
coji- xr3-'~4-3Oajo
O QJ O-4-) O Cn OJ
-> corecocojoji-
4->QJQJOJ4-5Q}-i- O>
ro r x: o £- t-c o
t- 4-5 QJ QJ ro 4-5 O OJ T2 4-5
QJ M- a: 3 >-i c c
4-3 o ^* ~o c i re re oj
o re QJ E i 3
re c 4-5 x: £- 4-5 *o
O C QJ C C CO 4-3 QJ Q,*
QJ T O O QJ *r L- QJ o 3 CO
x: 4-> -i- c E ox: o
4-3 O4-5 re~O >^4-3 3 QJXI''
3 re f~*. c cn ro > 4-3 4-3
---£_CnC-3COQJ V-M- CO
i 1 4-> - 3 C i -r- C 4-5 S-i-
> ' CO 4-3 4_) Q_ O "O 'r- ro t-
E^ QJ QJ
OJ 4-3 4-3
roo>T? >^ QJ t_ -r o
C 4-5 X: r 4-5 CO «
X:OJ-r-QJC -r-QJOJ t.
ox: x:QJT3OT3x: C '*~" ^^ r
OJ CO "C O t- - CO QJ !
i QJ C re > "C CO QJ t_ O
4-5 "o o o e 4-5 >} c o QJ co
r- c c -r- - re x: o c -o
>rerej_ 4-5 -i-re-r-o
1 4-5CL «aJ"O4-34-3CO'I
4-3 «co «cnOJT-coct-
O T3 E -o cn oj CL-O E O "O CO
reC3QJ *>OC3O >^r
reo4-3Qj i oo xr-r-
"C i i- 10 "O OJ O t- OJ O
QJ 4-3 !- .r- C > -r- _C TT CO
N OJ O X to re GJ "^3 O OJ
i-3 OJCi T3QJ 4-3O-O
s~ x: 04-5 OrcoO-r-
o re o ~c >r" QJ QJ 3 ro 3 ^ c.
x: 3CJ-53>"CEEO,'T3
4-3 C- CO re < 03 C *- >>»
3QJ r T34-3X:-i-O-COJX:
re>t-4-5CO ICC~G
COQJOJCOJ4-5CZ re co
3 ~^ 5 o *t^ QJ re r t * re
i r^ '[ ^v P QJ i ^ QJ
** re ro ~o oj x: QJ ^^ cn
QJ-i- QJ 4-5-O4-33 C
i t_ 4-3O4-5OC 4-5-1-
CLQJ -O3rec;re3rooc
E4->>>CT3X: O CO
rorecn C4-3>^cocco -i
x E o t_ ! re 4_5 re co 4_>
QJ r o i co E c QJ reo
r- O c c QJ t- cnx: c
c_i j_t_rooro>rec 3
O T- T3 OJ E - OJ QJ T- 4-5 11-
U- <4 >>x: 4-3 t- 4-> c re
f~ [ * ^3 re re r re o ^" QJ
t- QJC3 reX^-r 4-5C.
o t c~ re 4-5 oj t- 4-3 4_) re
co QJ 3 -r- x: 3 o '-^
4-5 "C 4-5 CO 4-3 4-5 CO C C 4-5
CQJ, Qj£- reo.'3Oro
QJcnrecQJi « c cnT3 T- > re t- c: 4-54-5
i>QJ>iEreoaj «ro3ro
t-i £_ajT-> -xrocnco
i -a 4-> ai-Q Q.QJ Qjuc-t-i
re C4-3 >,3« t-'t
t- i*- rc Qj>,40O-i Ccot-O
3 o o T? -C> re in ' ! -f < co
^~
i
QJ
3
CO
ro
4-5
C
QJ
CO
OJ
£_
a.
OJ
_a
>^|
rel
E|
CO
4-5
C
re
r
0.
4-5
C
ro
c
r
cr
d
-o
i
c
o
2:
"^x»
C,1 |
^
p^
OJ
3
CO
re
4-5
c
OJ
CO
0.1
(_
Q.
QJ
o
>^|
re
E|
S .
_^
CJ
^"
u_
t_
0
,
T3
C
re
0
<£
U-
»«
3
C_J
<£.
U_
V ^
CO
QJ
r
O
QJ
O-
co
QJ
>
r
4-5
re
4-3
r
3
O
re
14-
4-5
c
re
c
r-
E
O
C-
--^.
CO |
.^
c
ro
CL
3
^
C
1 »
O-
QJ
0
X
ai
4_)
C
a;
CO
OJ
O-
QJ
CO CO
I 'r
3
>, «-
en QJ
O x:
4-5
o o
t_
*O CO
>^ 4-5
x: co
QJ
"C? CO
c cn
re 3
r CO
4-3
QJ QJ
3 0
C
0) ^J
E -O
3 l_
CO 3
CO 4-5
re co
i
* "^
CO
QJ <4-
i- O
U
QJ QJ
C. 0
CO C
QJ
T3 T3
C -r-
re >
i QJ
4-5
QJ CO
3 co
OJ
QJ r
4-5 C
ro 3
cn
1 .V
r CO
JD C
O O
»^-
4-5 CO
C 3
ro r-
C 0
r- C
cr .,-
O
-C £-
re
QJ f
t_ -r
0 E
E -r-
co
O t.
QJ
QJ cn
C t-
o re
r
4
O U
O
QJ ~^.
U T=
C C
QJ re
CO
QJ CO
t- Q)
0-4-5
r
QJ CO
x: o
4-3 £-
O
C !-
E
^-^
^" 1
-------
^ *
-a
a>
3
C
i
*->
C
o
o
<
4J
t_
O
C
4->
0
o
U-
4->
1- JT 4->
c co 3
3 l_ O co
03 n3 "3
c E 01 QJ o
o *-> c i o a;
i- r -i- 3 > O
+-> (O >, l_ T- 03
O3 CO -o CHJ3
+J a* t_
a> o? to o >, a;
ai QJ en re -c
O! « 4J g
> ro OJ O
CD O1-C JC +->
G; 't 4-> o
E QJ r- -r- >,
« «_- JD O -G r
CO O 4-> 3 O-
>> 0-
OJ r "C QJ ""3
JC r- C >-
+-> 03 03 -r- CO >>
C- r +-> C7) O3
C 3 -M 10 C E
r- +J QJ C !-
03 3 t- i QJ
QJ jz +-> rc -r-
i t_ +J i co +J
O OJ -r- 03 03
<1) JC 3 "O C
QL+i C C £-
CO -r- T3 «£ rO OJ
01 c +j
TT 03 co >
C «i O> 03
03 co +j T3 c:
i +J QJ (U .,-(/)
CL T- 3 -r- r -r-
3 c -a jz
3 -C Q. 0) 1
as a; Q. T3 JC «3 10
re oj o
O5.Q 4J Ol « (U
i- t_ .^ J3 4->
i 3 -O CTv-
£ 4J T? ' I/I
O (/> (O r O>
r- 3 v - t_
4-J T3 O O
C _C C
«3 C Ol CO O 4J
C ! T !
r- 0.1 > S- -O
C 1T3 O Q.
1C >, t_ IT>
r- C > C O1
O T3 C £- «3 C
O) r 3 3 03
O. 3 O t- -C
CO O S_ O O O
x: o o cr>
T3 co -r- c:
C *-^ co > O
(o ^ av a) -i-
r CO CO O Ol 4->
4J a; -t- -o aj ns
0) O t_ t- 4->
2 C 4-> 4-> I)
OJ OJ (V
4-> CO > C C >
W £ O) OJ -r-
o> rs i _c: c= i»-
i- u 3 its o
i I- re X
js -i- a> a> c
o o co o
--~ O !-
4J C C C7) +J 4->
C O +J C O
TO T- T- a) a)
c co QJ -a -Q c_
r- 3 3 (O -r-
E r -a > -o -c
O O C r
T3 C +J T- 3 0)
r- CO O JC
JC -^ O) CO 2 +-»
+j ai 5_ a1
O 4-> O J-> co M-
ja -i- ii_ ro a) o
co cr>-i->
o a> -1- T- c
C t- C r CO O
O (J -r~ ^ -i- r
r- -I O. O T3 +J i
.(-> EE 0.' <0 O)
o s
3 C C CO -i-
*-> O CD W 0) T3 CO
r- CT C i 4- C (O
CO T- Q. O -r-
C- "n 3 ^ (/)
CO (!) (T3 T3 4)
r- T? > T3 £- O 4->
^ C C C 0 C -i-
1 3 T- ifl M C7> >J1
^
Lft 1
!->
C
O)
CO
d)
!~
Q.
11)
JD
+J
CO
3
E
CO
O)
r
O
cu
c.
CO
:o
C_3
«c
u.
t-
o
**.
o
c
ro
t
O
<;
U.
A
3
O
<
u_
-I--'
c
res
cr
i
E
O
T7
A
CO
a1
o
c
(C
4->
CO
^
^J
O
t_
r-
O
£_
0)
"O
c:
rs
^
CO
i
n
d
TT
+J >l CO
c x: -r-
V
(/i C J->
a.' 0 T-
«- 0.' C
CLX: 3
>, VI 4'
r- (T3 J3"
i JC .(_>
3 +-1 O
4-> -r- C
fO CO
C t_
Ol O
t-
t- 0)
C jr
+- 3
1O CO
o TT en
r- c: c:
c re -t
C r- -0
r- Q.-I-
3 O
o a'
i co -Q
01 -r-
o c
r -M -r-
O !-
«- c -c
c 3 ai
>> t-
^ o a>
-c- -c
-c -u T-
C CO
C O
a> c
2 a>
>t- JO
4-J !-
0 4->
c > en
CO 3
«- TJ e
0 C
(C CU
S- r- 0
ai +-- c
jC OJ re
!-> 3: J3
ai t-
J^ CO 3
3-r- 4J
in
QJ 4-J T
C !- -O
r- C
o 3 eu
a> _c:
T7 C +J
o
+J -r- <4_
CO -l-> O
3 03
ET -u QJ
> O
rc !-
en a; i*-
- JT T- «
-M 40 C >,
co oil
OJ . .,_ ,_
> 40 co rc
C C 0
r- ft! 0) -i-
co jr ai
T3 O) +J C
. 5- r
a> a. o
r- TT £-
M- OJ QJ TT
t- J2 >,
03 rc S_ -C
3
» OJ 4J CO
+-> 1- CO 13
C 0 -r- C
- = T: oj
O i
CL t- >,+J
C r QJ
CO ^-5
t- 5j m
JCT C U r
X-' O !- 1
C71T-
J-> <*- O +J
eC i i i en
^
1- 1
c
C
03
r
4->
QJ
3
(_
o
ti_
4-'
a.
OJ
o
X
QJ
».
+J
C
QJ
CO
QJ
t-
a. QJ
co
CO !
r- 3
«_
>^ , QJ
-C CT>
a>
T3 3
C (/)
03
r- OJ
Q. O
3 C
rc
OJ JO
ST i-
3 3
CO 4J
CO CO
03 -r-
T:
A
CO l(-
QJ O
0 0!
Q; o
Q. C
co a>
-o
T3 T-
C >
03 QJ
G. CO «
3 CO co
QJ +J
QJ r- C
+-> C T-
03 3 O
cn Q.
r ^ .
t CO C
JO C" O
CO -r-
r- +J
4-> co ro
C 3 c
03 r -r-
C O £
i C t_
E - OJ
Q +J
-C S- QJ
QJ -C
a> ai
t_ <_ T3
O 03 c
E r- ro
t- £_ .|_>
O 03 QJ
r- 3
QJ ..-
c E a;
O -r- I-
CO rrj
M-
C t- ^^
O CVJ
QJ -^ 1
O T3 ^
C C
QJ o; l
CO
a; co ^~~
i. QJ ^H
a.j-^ v_^
i
QJ CO
-C O
+J 5_ QJ
0 4->
C -r- 0
"- E Z.
^^
cc |
QJ
-c >
c «- -o
ro J-) c
F- 03 03
+J 4-» i
QJ r- CL
3=3
O
<*- >
-r- *r
QJ 4J 4J 4->
*J 03 -C 03
03
C If- CO M
II II II II
3 =
1 O O O
cc < cc <:
o u_ u. u_
-------
o
zr-
z
o
o
o
I«
oo
LU
Q
O
O
00
O
O
o
00
o
Q-
00
in
au
eo t/> A
c a<
O C-
'D cf Q_
-U U. I
r I
Z* * I
O 3 I
re o v
U- <
U. CO
o>-
CO I
o
A
I
c
o
in in
t_ >, a.' 5- 3
3 r 4J (11 i
o oj T- 01 o
c o > in t- c
c o ! c re "-1
re +J t 1
r- in re o t-
CL 01 i -r- t_ re
ZD ! Q; ST O i
o a: ~-^-r-
1/1
-o
-- c
Jo.
COO.CL.C-r-
o oo o o <: oo
i
V
o
z:
A
X
C - O
O «- !-
re
5"
o
i
z.
o
o
n:
o
T3
C
(0
O) -!->
3 C
0
_J en
CD *
o t-
o.
a>
t. in
O
u a>
o a.
00
(1)
x
a
LU
a.
a.
o:
CO
I
C£.
CL.
V A
I
in I
i I
r- +J
O C
00 3t: oo
in
ai-
o *J -o
r- «5 C
o o re
a>
in
eu-
o
c
re
^j
O)
3
CC
1-
"cu
3
(/)
OJ
f
(J
Q.
00
> i
0)
4->
J2
i
t_
I-!
^
C
A
1
P
C
~r
i
i
V
**^
^- 1
00
>-
1
Is
1
o
c
re
O r
O)
a; A 3
t- -c i
0 C 1
IT re i
i in 4-J
^ **" Q.' CT
C - OJ
u in
a _j a> ai -a
c cc Q. s_ c:
i i
i a.
i ^
V
i
in co
t.
^
o
o
00
a>
0
a;
Q.
IS\
>
0}
>
i
re
r
ai
a:
c
r~i
i
V)
ai
j->
r-
in
0
t^
o
T^
>->
<_
r^i
L.
OJ
CT5
)L.
re
j
t_
o
**-«,
T3
C
r re
er
t_ t
(C I/I
[in in ST -o
a> c c:
-\4-> O « (O
[r- -r- (/) i
in in "c +J
o 3 c Q)
t_ r- HJ 3
O O i
- C Q. W1
IS. -*
o
-z-
OJ C
in c. esc in
o> o a) -
o *~ _i c oo
T; c 're 3 -^
C LT> 4-> "C
re c i c
r- a; I cc re
+J V) C i
- Q) Q; CL
3 t- jC JC
_J E O
CO O 4- CC
O CJ O
C t- 4->
-- \-
>
in in ^
<1J c in
j_> o *'' m
'i- -i in "o
i in oo -c x c
o 3 c -r- re
s_ r re t- r
i
T- c: Q. re
-------
c
c.'
4-5
**
O
-c
o;
M
r..
F
>r.
4_)
3
o>
4J
O
C
1
r
>^_
3
4-J
t-
re
-C
o
3
O
p
4
VI
r
JC
4.?
i
>^
p
4-J
C
01
3
CT
CU
cn
C
o
o
Lf> f_
1 3
< O
O
0
E
O
a
"oj
V)
P_
p
r-
3
4-^
C
(C
C
r
E
O
c
V)
r
V)
O)
r-
0
a'
a.
V)
o
c
jr'
!J
r-
CO JT
3
4^
C_ C
(O -f-
a.
c
t- O
0 -r-
U- 4->
re
10 3
Q) 4-J
4-) -P-
O io
C
4-9 ^C
C
o ^,
~ in
C >,!-
C E P1
CU
4-) 4->
c re
r c~ c
O 4J ro
CL ai
in >,
in c
4->
r
>>-c 4-
cn c o
0 0
i O in
o cu
i- «- E
TJ O -i-
^">"^ 40
JC T3
C C
"O re -P-
c re
ro V) 4->
Ol S-
in Q. a*
>> O
r- 4->
C 4J
to TD (0
C
* re 4->
C r V)
o H ' re
r- at at
4~> 3r-
T3
4-> C 4-)
Ol -r- ro
cn (O
CU 4->
> <- -U
01 p-
C O 3
0 0
O1 -P-
>> t- 4-
i re 4-
r ?
re QJ T3
0 «-
p- QJ v)
JC -C S-
o 4-> QJ
t- 4->
ro * OJ
f * ^ c
at t-~ fo
r- CO I.
jn c^ re
i-l Q.
in
OJ « OJ
r- >,JZ
r- t- 4_>
O) O
{ 4-5 4
re o
E «-
fl3 C QJ
t- JO S_
cn ro o
re i E
r-
C r f_
re o
3 4^
C C 0)
r- 01 C
t- e o
c
10 O 4-
r- £_ 0
J3 <-"
4-> > in
c e
c: uj o
r- N ' 4.3
re
-O VI o
Ol f- -r-
4-7 QJ -r-i
C Ol C
CU C 'r
VI -I
at cniv
£- C C
O-UJ
C
>>14- O
cn o -i-
0 4->
i in ro
O GL (J
"O ^- *r
0 0 r-
JT CJ Q.
4-J O.
O OJ (0
E J=
CU ^
-C >> ro
H _r~? E
-~-
C
C
4-J
*r-
-D
C
o
o
f
re
4->
c
m
P^
E
o
f_
P-
>
c
0)
c
i
in
c
O
r-
4-J
re
r
(_
ro
>
r_
ro
3
C
C
re
{_
o
f.
re
c.
o
in
re
a>
in
p
re
E
c_
o
c
o
4->
QJ
-c
in
r-
4_>
r
f
cu
-C
4-j
re
<*y
p
re
0
r
a.
>-j
4->
re
^2
CU
t-
QJ
o
p-
VI
C
o
o
OJ
JD
4_>
O
e
"o
r
3
C
jr
V)
o
O)
14 4-J O1
o re >
4-3 ro
V) O) SI -C
Ol cn ij
i OJ 3 4->
Q. > in C
E C
ro S_
x QJ at >,
O' < -c re
a. c E
t- E =:
3 re cu
OX i
4-0) .O
C -C
V) C- C 4-J
Ol O V) C
> U- ro Q.
r- O'
cn in a>
*i
in . - cn (_
O. c >-
S_ 4-9 -p- re
o re 3 t-
O 4- O O-
c_
O) ^0 cn ro
JZ QJ C
r 4-9 O
re c a'
4-> in
« OJ O) T-
v) cnjc 3
4-) QJ 4-J QJ
C > -*
OJ C7^ T1"
5* ^3 C* i
at c -r-
re t_
r 3
IT3 " TJ 4_>
t- V) C
3 oi in cu
4-9 r 4-J T3
ro O ro 't
C J= i >
O O -O
r- CL 3 QJ
j= e js
a. oi
o -r- x: 4->
1- c- 0) O
4-> T- 4-> e
in re re
re t- 4-> TT
4-> Q. a1 i
re cn 3
o a> o
m > 3
t- -a c
o c 3 c
ro O
in r V) -r-
01 +j re 4->
r- O) re
4-> 3 >,4->
r- r- Oi
> r c cn
p- re o at
4-> C >
o o t_
re m ro o
re QJ -i
c Q) Q. 4->
rt3 VI O,_ "2>)
E re jz
3 * o
J= to >, 0
cr ro 5-
c -i- E -c
re i >5
-C E in JT
4-9 3 4J
5- e 4-
t- "C ro O
OJ P-
JZ C Q. £_
4-9 'i O
O i +->
in ro re
VI T3 3 O
OJ C C -r-
vi re c -o
3 r ro C
re 4-> <-
o at >,
3 J3 C
E - re
o -o
t_ C OJ «
>t O 4-> V)
p- ro Ot
4-9 +-> C O
P re -r- c
3 3 E re
V) 4-9 O 4~>
cu T- -c i"
t_ in c-
VI 3
4_> IO 4J O
ro ' re ^~-
JC JC p- -T-
4-) 4-J 4 O
1
re
c
P"
cl
Ol
Tj 4-J C
cu o
"C m
m re
3 C aj
-com
h- -p-
4-> cn
o c
«p- *r
c: -c 3
O l/l O
p- -r- r_
j_> i- cn
re ~
4-> "-J CU
p- JC
CL re 4_>
lf
o cn4-
01 c o
£_ -r-
CL-^ C
re o
r E >r~
(T5 4-9
Et- t.
C 0
o 4-9 a.
c re
cn !~
C 3
O
C 4->
in p- c
t- Ol O)
re <- m
at t- 01
^} t_
re n
^-
!-«>>
in p
C Ol i
o o re
in c E
ro re t_
cu 4-J o
in to c
^
cn 3 O)
C 0 I.
r- t- re
^ *r
O O V)
f_ t-
cn cu o
in 4-j
cu Oi re
jr .c o
T3
O OJ -r-
-o
4-J C -O
in ^ c
o re
E
1 1
cn4-> at
c c 3
r- 0)
L V) 4-J
3 jn O
-c re c
VI O) t_
p- JO 0
O "C t-
VI r 0)
3 _c
a o 4->
at 3 at
-)-J c~
ro t- 3
t_ O
3 4-9 O)
4-9 re -Q
T3 0 -r-
V) !- O
T3 OJ
5- - "O
O T-
4_)
T3 V> t/1
a1 cn 3
4-J O S
re i
-a o c
e t- o
3 "O -p
C >> 4-J
r- Jr rO
r
4_>
>^
J^
Q.
0
i_
"C
^
-Cr
*4
o
to
t^
0
4_>
fC
O
r
13
C
f
^
re
E
in
c
O
p-
4-J
re
3
>P-
V)
P..
re
o
*P_
Q.
>^
4_)
re
4_J
re
c~
4J
4^
3
O
in
4-J
C
i
O
OL
t_
at
jr
4-J
L.
3
4-
V)
Q.
t_
O
o
OJ
I
3
1 1
re
c
(^
o
l/l
Ol
4_>
*p-
>
'P-
4-J
O
re
c
re
E
3
-C
j <
c
cu
o
cu
f_
(4
o
in
o
QJ
4-
QJ
OJ
-C
4-J
0
O)
T3
-Q
C
3
O
Ol
4_j
O
c
c
re
0
>x
cn
O
O
-a
jz
T3
re
4-J
oi
3
t_
O
T3
C
re
in
P-
O
in
0
t
T3
_C
A
C
O
p-
4_)
re
4_j
QJ
cn
O)
>
4-> I 4-> "C
c -p- r- a- 0)
cu 4- 3 vi j-> re >
c .p. y> a> p- 5-CUt-4-J
CL ^ in -c '/i JC 4-
4J (_ J-J r O *-" O1 4-J "C
curerocroo5> ca:
_CJCT(/*OJ i orO4-Jret_
4J4_> io £ >i4 s_ _c ojr ai
a1 TJ re -P- c 4-> TJ
' ~ in o e E c. o re '
CVIEO13 4-J O)l_j_v>
- re c c ^^ o c- o cu c
~o CL ci i 3 re jn o
* VI E O O 4-J t 4-J O
c t- -p- -P- -i- -P- cu oi o
o o 4-9 c t_ _c JCT ^ cu
r- V) OQ.O14-J4-J J3
4-J*C»3 4-J CU>^
re i/i O cn c_ in 4-J O JCT cnT>
[ 1 P- *^ * -; ^ ^ r^J 4_J 3 O P ~
at ou 4-j at v) c i i 3
cn4_j-p- ere in-coo
QJ in "c? O r oj cr c t_ c
> >, c io o O.JT o re -a vi
t/) O 4-> 3 4-> -r- >,
4 O C >) 4-9 O1 _r*~ cn
OCU oiremcrecn c
cncn> 3re--- t_ c. -o <-
r re c ai -c: 3 airec-o
TO C *p~ O^ 4N-1 4--^ -fl^" *^J O
>-p-4-Jp--p-JTCp O O
oreviroj^orere CP
Ci_-p-(_ -p-4J OJO4
QJT3X 3O-C<_ CUJZ'p-
i re CL 4J re c
L- 'Ct_ O CnO'
c> c reiocoia''-
o a1 QJ oi 4-J -i- o >
P-P JCOCC t-C O
4-j 4-j a1 OJ re 4-j o a5 ~o 4-J
re 4- c£ E: >-i e c
C.O4- -oc i_rereo)
oi o C-P- aiEp-3
4-JC «3 «JZl-4-J"O
r o cr QJ o >% io 4-j a* QJ
re *f O O r"E cn L. QJ r"^ 3 ^O
_l ^ «^ f~ ^ o O _f~ o
QJ O4-J ro-p-p 4-J 3 QJjZ'p-
r ^3 ro jO O re > 4-J 4-J
4-J t- cn i_ 40 f_ o QJ'p--p-in
4-J -P- 3 C T3 T- C 4-J 3 T-
^ ^ in 4-J 4-J QJ >}*C3 'f~ re t-
icv)vi4->-C:c E QJ O)
- O O> -i t- -P- t_ O! 4-J 4-J
O>-OO)T3 ait--p-O
in c: >Ci 4-> inre
rO Q) 'r OJ TU re *P~ QJ OJ t
c- r ro O "O r~ ^! re
j=4-9e4-JCcin i j=
o re -r- o O o
in oo * 4-j » 4-j *p- "t3 p~
- in re f *~* in O1 !
in O't-cn4-j-ciinQjf c
O) ~o o o * QJ ^j e o ai in
p- e d 'p" at cnjn o c "0
4-j re re t_ QJ .p- ro T- o
i 4-9 Q. > "C^ 4-J 4-J IO 'r
> * in v> cu *p" in c 5^
P--C- EX5 CT3D--0 EC-0
4-J C3OtOC!;Oe3O ^i
oreo4-J-p-rep oo jz
re r i m .*-> i 01 o 4- QJ
4-J -p- -p- -p- 4-J > -r- JO -O
~& QJ O X ^3 QJ QJ "^ O O'
at 3 at e 3 o oj i ^ r^
IM J^ O O i V) O
r-rOOT3 O4-JOI 3re3p-
t_ 3C O>-OEEOt
O £_ in ro "O OJ re C t_ >
JZTOI i QJ4--c-p-o-c;ai
4-J > t- 4-9 O 4 1 C C "^
3OO!QJ3at4_JC= ro
re "O3TJ aire i 4-9
3 re ^O ro 'r ro J^ QJ ^^
r- i jr 4-> -o 4-> 3
" i- 4-JC4JOC 4-J
QJQJ 'Ora C(O3reO
p-4-J>>CEin O e
cxrecn c>ivicin
P- f- O £ ~*3 o re 4-J re in
re'p oc-r-ecai re
X i O ro 4J QJ i- cnjc
air s-t- «re>rec
p- T3 O) ^~~ 3 O! O) -p- 4-1
t_ 4- >>jz t- 4-> t- 4-J c re
o jn4_ja>'p-rci reojr
LL!_ O)>in roJZ-p-4-9
O t- r ro QJ i 4-J 4-J
ai3QJr-C:3 O-
"O 4-9 JO rO 4-J 4-J in C c
toaii a> o rea'3O
4-i cn re e ^> *i ** e cn 4 -p-
C "O *P- JO O_ t_ C 4-J
atcu>iE >>ai »re3re
> C p^ c c_ 4_j > r o Cn
ai-o4-> Qja'reat OJOCT-
C 4-J 4-9 3 £-
M- re airaco-r-cint-
re O O T3 3 >- 3" "r- -i -r-
V)
p.-
.p-
o
V!
(j
.,
s_
~^
>^
jr
in
re
cn
c
.,_
e
o
4_J
O
C
3
4-
0)
re
i \
re
[ S
to
,_-
P-
O
10
r
Q)
3
in
re
4-J
c
0
VI
QJ
r_
O-
QJ
JO
^*!
re
c j
^ ^
^
O
c£
Lu
J-
C
^
~C
C
re
o
cC
U-
*
^
C-}
cC
U-
% ^
to
a1
r
O
at
O-
10
Ol
p»
r-
4-J
re
4-3
p
3
O
re
(t_
4_3
C
re
c
'i
^
o
-c
c
o
c
f_
o
~*^
-c
c
re
m
a'
o
a>
a.
in
c
C
ro
r
O.
3
I
CC
C
4_3
C
re
cr
t
E
C
c
t
c
o
z.
~-^
a
E
3
in 4-
10 C
re
a>
« 0
4-> C
r- QJ
C ~O
3 -i-
^>
01 ai
jc
4-J in
in
c Ol
p- r
C
T; 3
O)
4-J *^^
3 in
/**» C
p- C
C. 'p-
4-! V)
in 3
r- p
T3 O
1 C
p *r
P
Ol i.
3 re
P
at -P-
t- E
re -r-
in
4-J
re i_
f~ QJ
4-j cn
L_
in re
at P-
r
0 t-
O' O
Cl. .
in x;
c
o re
c
re m
p QJ
4-1 4-9
QJ -r-
3 io
o
QJ 1-
4-9 O
ro -r-
cn e
r ~^
jo e
o re
,
4-1 Q-
C 3
re
c «-
p- O
E 4-
O
1 C-
C OJ
o o
C X
QJ
QJ v * QJ
t- in
O 4-J -r-
E c 3
Ol f_
t- vi a1
o QJ jr
ai a. o
c
O to in
p- 4-J
4- V)
o >, at
cn cn
a: O cn
O p 3
e o io
O' J-
in -o O>
O) >> O
t- jr c
C5. 03
QJ C £_
-c re 3
4-9 i 4-J
4-J to
C QJ -i-
i-> 3 TJ
_
4_1
C
QJ
10
O)
(_
Q-
ai
JO
4.^
in
3
C
V)
Ol
O
O)
Q_
in
^^
O
<£
U.
C.
O
- ^
TJ
c
re
>
r^ >
e^
U_
*
3
O
C
re
c:
g=
0
-o
c:
o
c
A
V)
a
0
c
ra
4_j
in
E
3
O
t_
P
0
at
in
a>
jr
4-9
t-
Ol
^s
CJ~
^
~~^
I CVJ
-------
1 in
O t? &'
t- 4-3 >,
o re CD re
r- cn.c E
e cn-r- -u
1 r- -C O
C QJ J3 O O 4->
O ' O 4-> -r-
C _c~ >.,
>,-C QJ 3 i
C- r C > 0-
QJ i re -r- « Q.
T3 re i 4-> re
e: <- 4-3 re oo
3 3 QJ C 0> >>
u 3 t- c re
4-3 re QJ !- e
r- C JZ -(-> r
C 4-> I O- QJ
3 «- -r- re re >
QJ 3 oo -
c JT c 4->
o +-> -o *£ "o re
- -r- C C C
4-3 QJ re re t.
re i QJ
4-3 ** 4-3 X' 00 4-3
QJ V) QJ QJ Oil
CD4J 3-1 c re
QJ !- r -i-
> C T3 CL i 00
3 QJ 0-T3 -r-
QJ £1 re QJ £
E TD O QJ 1
re QJ 4-> a; oo
00 J3 v- JO
t- -c «
QJ 3 -O QJ
jz 4-> re i cn4->
4-3 00 3 -i-
r- « O QJ OO
C T3 -C >
r- cn 00 t.
c co
oo -i a; Q) O
Q) -^i -r- 4-3
r- >, 3 4J !-
O i >i t- 0 C
QJ C r- 3 =
Q. O r *5- "O
oo re c; o QJ
x i_ un t_ jr
XI C 3 0-4->
c re 4-> re QJ
re re <- 4->
i >, c re
1C CLr- C «- £-
1 34-333OQJ
3 o o o re
re cr cn jz:
en QJ , oo .1- o
i- S_ QJ QJ >
r- >*- 00 O C
JO CI -i- TT QJ O
O -I- t_ QJ !-
1 » {_ 40
-o s- r v- +J re
C QJ QJ 4-3
re jz > c QJ oi
4-> QJ a: cr en
in re i jr ! QJ
QJ £- 3 E >
r- re re
O t- OJ X <-
QJ 3 oo o; o
Q. 0 ^~-
oo o o cn o c
O -|_J C 4-> O
Q *^ *r
C -O QJ "C QJ +->
re r 3 re _c o
r 3 "C > QJ
4-> O C -o *-
<1) J= 4-> -r- ^- -.-
3 oo in 3 T3
QJ in o
x-* QJ -~. t_ O) 3 QJ
T3 +J 00 O 4-> JC
0) re QJ u- re m -i->
3 cn o cn a;
c c QJ < 4_> t-
i- r re C I -^ O e
C O 00 O- O C Q]
0 E T3 0 3
o jr 3 re -c QJ -
~ - jj (J c 4J -P OO
o t- cn re co re re
CO JO i- C i OJ O
O -r- Q- I_ ! OO
4-> "C 3 O T5 Q)
t_ c c re it- c 4->
re o o > ^ !-!-
Q. -I -r C C t_ OO
+j IT -r re o T3
t- re 3 4- o in
O 3 n- jn: 4-> 03
M 4JOoo3Qjcno
i- C t- C i Q)
! re 3 re o
QJ \ E cn i_ ro
4J 00 Q) 4_> d QJ _C
0 -1- -P r- -i- 3* > «-
c jr -i- re >i o - CD
4-> 1 t/>oo~CLf}cnjr:
O
O ^.
) i v^ |
4-J
*r
+-> C
C7 3
41
00 C QJ
Q) Q) jr
C- Q.1 [ *
Q-J3
4_)
>> co o
> re c
r JT
re s_
C. QJ O
3 4-J
JJ !- t.
re oo as
c jr
QJ 4->
a; _c ai
t- (-> jc
re 3
<4-
oo i cn
t- c
C !-
-P T3
re oo -f-
0X0
r- c a;
T3 re x^
c; i
r- Q. C
3 -r
O
i OO -c
cn-r- aj
o «_
1 J-' QJ
o - -a
S- C -t-
X 3 00
>> c
_C QJ O
JT o
XI !->
C QJ
re * j2
i +->
-|.. i Q | *
a.1 c m
3 3
, "*" E
O Q)
C > 0
oo c
i- x re
o c ja
re u
5- r- 3
jr: QJ oo
!-> 3 T-
QJ X
_c oo
3-^ QJ
QJ 4-J 4_>
X^ *r
i- C 14-
O 3 O
QJ
-c c -r- C
oo (-> re
3 re o
^ ^_> >^
O) M_
t- cn.r-
O OJ c
+-» > en
re -r- >,
cn QJ t/i i
i- jz: i
4-> -i-> Q) re
00 _c O
QJ ^_J -i
> 4j cn
c c « O
r- Q; ~O r-~
00 QJ O
X QJ _C ^~
r t. t_ "O
QJ Q. 3 >-,
r- -p JT
t- aj oo
t- .1- 00
re re 13 xi
c
aj >, re
-U t- r
C 0 r- +->
f- & re QJ
0 0 3
a. (~ -r-
C cn '
in o i
r- QJ , -i
jr c o 4->
j-> C i- oo
XI
"Ct * H _f~ !
*^^
1 1
C
re
r
Q. QJ
3 0
C
QJ re
F JO
3 t-
00 3
00 J_>
re oo
r-
"X
4_J
r~ 4
C O
3
QJ
QJ O
-C C
4-J QJ
X
C -r-
i- >
QJ
X
Q) oo
4-J 00
3 QJ
JO i
r- C
1- 3
00 .
r- OO
XI C
1 0
i in
QJ 3
3 r-
o
QJ C
C- -r-
re
^
4-3 QJ
re en
jr (.
4-> re
in
QJ C-
r- re
O i
a; -r-
a. e
00 -r-
00
XI
C C-
re o
r **-^_
Q-X
3 C
re
QJ
4-> OO
re QJ in
Cn 4J 4->
r- <- C
r 00 !-
JO O O
O t- CL
0
4-3-r- C
c e o
re -r-
C. XI 4J
r- c re
E re c
O i -
X 4-> H
1 QJ £-
c: 3 QJ
O 4->
c «- QJ
O X
QJ <*-
^ ^3
O 4-> C
e a. re
QJ i
t- 0 4->
OX QJ
QJ 3
C ' QJ
O 4-> t-
c re
M- QJ QJ
O OO O" ^~*
QJ .r- ^
QJ t- 3 «-H
O O. S_
C OJ
QJ oo jr i
00 ! 4J
a) o - -
i. >, i
CL CD oo
O 4->
QJ i oo
JT O QJ
4-> £- cn QJ
x en -u
C >, 3 O
i i -C in ZT
s^
CO |
QJ
X >
C -r- X
re 4-> c
r re re
4_> 4_> r
QJ r O.
333
O
QJ re QJ
^ 14 >
r 'r-
d) 4-> 4-> 4-3
4_> re jr re
re 4-3 cn 4-3
Cn r «r r
i- 3 re 3
i O C_ O
f) (Q 4_> (O
O 4- 00 <4-
II II II II
rs =
_J 0 0 0
pQ ^J| ^f ^^
o u- u. u.
-------
APPENDIX B
JURISDICTION!. DECISION
DIAGNOSTIC KEY
-------
APPENDIX B: JURISDICTIONS.
DECISION DIAGNOSTIC KEY V
la. Vegetation units are dominated by one or more plant species. Non-dominant
species may also be present.
2a. One or more dominant obligate wetland plant species are present in the
vegetation unit (or site if it is a monotypic site). Facultative species
(facultative wetland, straight facultative and/or facultative upland) may
occur as dominants as well ._£/
3a. Obligate upland dominants (one or more) are present.
4a. Dominant obligate upland species occur on relatively dry
microsites (e.g., live tree bases, decaying tree stumps,
mosquito ditch spoil piles, small earth hummocks) and/or
on larger similar inclusions occurring in an otherwise
topographically uniform unit containing dominant obligate
wetland species. Under such circumstances, you should check
to see if you correctly horizontally stratified the site and
adjust accordingly by either: (a) showing these microsites
and inclusions as local UPLANDS in a WETLANDS matrix or by
(b) considering the unit to be all WETLANDS, but acknowledging
the presence of the local UPLANDS in a written description
of the site.(1)2.7
4b. Dominant obligate upland species do not occur on relatively
dry microsites and/or larger simi1ar inclusions; they occur
rather uniformly intermixed with the dominant obligate wetland
species. Under such circumstances, the unit and/or site is
probably significantly hydrologically disturbed (naturally or
by man) and successional vegetation changes are occurring.^;/
5a. 50% or more of the total dominant obligate species (both
obligate wetland species and obligate upland species) are
obligate wetland species WETLANDS (2)
5b. Less than 50% of the total dominant obligate species are
obligate wetland species UPLANDS (3)
3b. Obligate upland dominants are jiot present WETLANDS (4)
2b. One or more dominant obligate wetland plant species are not_ present in
the vegetation unit (or site if it is a monotypic site). Facultative
species (facultative wetland, straight facultative and/or facultative
upland) may occur as dominants as well.
6a. Obligate upland dominants (one or more) are present.
7a. One or more dominant facultative species (facultative wetland,
straight facultative and/or facultative upland) are present.
-------
8-2
8a. Dominant obligate upland species occur on relatively dry
microsites and/or larger similar inclusions. Under such
circumstances, you should check to see if you correctly
horizontally stratified the site and determine whether
the vegetation unit matrix (the area dominated by the
facultative species in this instance) is wetlands by
examining soils.^/
9a. Vegetation unit matrix has hydric soils.
lOa. Hydrology of vegetation unit matrix is indicative
of wetlands ......... Microsites and inclusions are
UPLANDS; matrix is WETLANDS
lOb. Hydrology of vegetation unit matrix is nojt^ indica-
tive of wetlands... .Microsites, inclusions and
matrix are UPLANDS (6).
9b. Vegetation unit matrix does not have hydric soils.. .Micro-
sites, inclusions, and matrix are UPLANDS (7).
8b. Dominant obligate upland species do not occur on relatively dry
microsites and/or larger similar inclusions ..... UPLANDS
7b. One or more facultative species are not^ present ...... UPLANDS (9).£/
6b. Obligate upland dominants are not present; one or more dominant
facultative species (facultative wetland, straight facultative
and/or facultative upland) are present.^/
lla. Hydric soils are present
8a. Hydrology is indicative of wetlands ...... WETLANDS (10).V
8b. Hydrology is not indicative of wetlands... UPLANDS (11).
lib. Hydric soils are mrt present ...... UPLANDS (12).
Ib. Vegetation units are not dominated by one or more plant speciesJV
12a. One or more obligate wetland species are present.
13a. Obligate wetland species are well -distributed in unit.£/
14a. One or more obligate upland species are present.
15a. Obligate upland species occur on relatively dry
microsites and/or larger similar inclusions. Under
these circumstances, the microsites and inclusions
are UPLANDS and the vegetation unit matrix is
WETLANDS (13).
-------
B-3
15b. Obligate upland species do not occur on relatively dry
microsites and/or larger similar inclusions; they occur
rather uniformly intermixed with the obligate wetland
species. Under such circumstances, the unit and/or
entire site is probably significantly hydrologically
disturbed (naturally or by man) and successional changes
are occurring.V
16a. 50% or more of the total obligate species (both
obligate upland and obligate wetland) are obligate
wetland species ..... WETLANDS (14).
16b. Less than 50% of the total obligate species are
obligate wetland species.. .UPLANDS (15).
14b. One or more obligate upland species are not present... WETLANDS (16)
13b. Obligate wetland species are not^ well-distributed in unit.
17a. Hydric soils are present.
18a. Hydrology is indicative of wetlands ...... WETLANDS (17).£/
18b. Hydrology is not^ indicative of wetlands... UPLANDS (18).
17b. Hydric soils are jiot present.. .UPLANDS (19).
12b. One or more obligate wetland species are not present.
19a. One or more obligate upland species are present.
20a. Facultative species (facultative wetland, straight facultative
and/or facultative upland) are present.
21a. Obligate upland species occur on relatively dry microsites
and/or larger similar inclusions.
22a. Vegetation unit matrix has hydric soils. ..Microsites
and inclusions are UPLANDS; matrix is WETLANDS (20).
22b. Vegetation unit matrix does not have hydric soils...
...Microsites, inclusions and matrix are UPLANDS (21).
21b. Obligate upland species do not occur on relatively dry micro-
sites and/or larger similar inclusions ...... UPLANDS (22) .^/
20b. Facultative species are JTOJ^ present ............ ..UPLANDS (23) J£/
19b. One or more obligate upland species are not present; one or more
facultative species (facultative wetland, straight facultative
and/or facultative upland) are present.^/
23a. Hydric soils are present.,
-------
24a. Hydrology is indicative of wetlands WETLANDS (24).V
24b. Hydrology is not indicative of wetlands...UPLANDS (25).
23b. Hydric soils are jip_t present UPLANDS (26).
Footnotes for Key
V The methodology presented in this diagnostic key relies hierarchically on
vegetation, soils and hydrology. As pointed out by the Corps of Engineers
(Environmental Laboratory, 1987), there are certain wetland types and/or
conditions that may make application of indicators of one or more of the
parameters difficult, at least at certain times of the year. This should
not be considered atypical. Rather, it is due to normal seasonal or annual
variations in environmental conditions that result from causes other than
human activities or catastrophic natural events. The Corps gives four
examples of this situation (wetlands in drumlins, seasonal wetlands, prairie
potholes, and vegetated flats). For example, vegetated flats dominated by
annual plants may appear only as unvegetated mudflats during the nongrowing
season. Under such circumstances, an indicator of hydrophytic vegetation
would not be evident. Likewise, a prairie pothole may not have inundated or
saturated soils during most of the growing season in years of below normal
precipitation. Thus, a hydrology indicator would be absent. Under these
circumstances, a field investigator making a jurisdictional determination must
decide whether or not wetland indicators are normally present during a portion
of the growing season.
The Corps further points out that atypical situations may also exist in
which one or more indicators of hydrophytic vegetation, hydric soils and/or
wetland hydrology cannot be found due to the effects of recent human activities
or natural events. For example, unauthorized activities such as (1) the altera-
tion or removal of vegetation, (2) the placement of dredged or fill material
over a wetland, and (3) the construction of levees, drainage systems, or dams
that significantly alter hydrology. Under such circumstances, an investigation
of the preexisting conditions is necessary to determine whether or not a wetland
existed prior to the disturbance. Recent natural events (e.g., impoundment of
water by beaver) and man-induced conditions (e.g., inadvertent impoundment due
to highway construction) may also result in atypical situations that effect
wetland vegetation and hydrology in an area which was uplands prior to flooding.
However, the area may not yet have developed hydric soil indicators. It is
important in the latter two circumstances (i.e., natural events and man-induced
conditions) to determine whether or not the alterations to the area have resulted
in changes that are now the "normal circumstances." The relative permanence of
the change and whether or not the area is now functioning as a wetland must be
considered. A site with wetland vegetation and hydrology (other than from
irrigation) that has not yet developed hydric soil characteristics due to
recent flooding should be considered to have soils that are functioning as
hydric soils. ^
-------
B-5
Footnotes for Key (continued)
£/ In the presence of one or more dominant obligate wetland species, assume wetland
hydrology is present (except for upland microsites and/or larger similar inclusions)
unless evidence of disturbance suggests otherwise.
jV Numbers in parentheses represent jurisdictional decision points in the key.
V Where significant drainage has occurred, soils usually will not be diagnostic
either since soil wetness characteristics (e.g., gleying and mottling) generally
take many years to respond to hydrologic changes. Therefore, a 50% rule should
be applied to the vegetation. An alternative to this 50% rule for forested sites
would be to examine tree vigor and reproduction (e.g., seedlings and saplings),
which may give a good indication of the direction of vegetation change at the
unit or site. This alternative may apply to herbaceous sites as well.
^J At this point, a field investigator must decide whether or not wetland hydrologic
indicators are naturally present. If one or more are present, the vegetation unit
is wetlands; if not, the unit is uplands. If the site has been hydrologically
disturbed, the significance of the disturbance must be considered in deciding
whether or not the unit is still wetlands hydrologically.
£/ In the presence of one or more dominant obligate upland species, assume upland
hydrology is present (except for wetland microsites and/or larger, similar
inclusions) unless evidence of disturbance suggests otherwise.
]_/ Because facultative species are not diagnostic of wetlands or uplands, an examina-
tion of soil and hydrologic parameters is necessary to help determine whether the
vegetation unit is a wetland.
£/ A situation without one or more dominants will seldom occur. Consequently, this
part of the key should seldom be used.
jV In the presence of one or more non-dominant obligate wetland species that are
well-distributed in the vegetation unit, assume wetland hydrology is present
(except for upland microsites and/or larger similar inclusions) unless evidence
of disturbance suggests otherwise.
In the presence of one or more non-dominant obligate upland species that are
well-distributed in the vegetation unit, assume upland hydrology is present
(except for wetland microsites and/or larger similar inclusions) unless evidence
of disturbance suggests otherwise.
-------
APPENDIX C
DATA FORMS FOR
SIMPLE JURISDICTIONAL DETERMINATIONS
-------
DATA FORM C-l: HERBACEOUS SPECIES DATA
FOR SIMPLE JURISDICTION DETERMINATION
EPA Region: Recorder: Date:
Project/Site: State: ^ County:
Applicant/Owner: Vegetation Unit #/Name:
"r*********************J
Percent Mi dpoi nt
Indicator Area!Cover of Cover
Species Status Cover Class Class Rank
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
s. ; zzzzz zzzz
9.
10.
11.
12. '
13.
14.
5.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
Sum of Midpoints
50% X Sum of Midpoints
IT***********************
1. Note: Herbaceous species include all graminoids, forbs, ferns, fern allies,
bryophytes, woody seedings, and herbaceous vines.
2. Cover classes (midpoints): T<1% (none); 1=1-5% (3.0); 2=6-15% (10.5); 3=16-25% (20.5);
4=26-50% (38.0); 5=51-75% (63.0); 6=76-95% (85.5); 7=96-100% (98.0).
3. To determine the dominants, first rank the species by their midpoints. Then cumula-
tively sum the midpoints of the ranked species until 50% of the total for all species
midpoints is reached or initially exceeded. All species contributing to that cumula-
tive total should be considered dominants and indicated with an asterisk above.
4. Do the dominant herbaceous species indicate that the vegetation unit supports
hydrophytic vegetation? Yes No Inconlusive .
Note; Inconclusive should be checked when only facultative (i .e., facultative
wetland, straight facultative, and/or facultative upland) species dominate.
6. Comments:
-------
DATA FORM C-2: SHRUB AND WOODY VINE DATA
FOR SIMPLE JURISDICTIONAL DETERMINATION
EPA Region: Recorder: Date:
Project/Site: State: County: __3ZZZZZII
Applicant/Owner: Vegetation Unit #/Name: ~~
**********************************************************
SHRUBS
Percent Midpoint
Indicator Areal Cover of Cover
Species Status Cover Class Class Rank
1.
2. Z~~ ~~ ~~
3. nzm --
4. ZZZZ I~~
5. nzm
6. zmuz
7.
Sum of Midpoints
50% X Sum of Midpoints
t****<
WOODY VINES
Percent Midpoint
Indicator Areal Cover of Cover
Species Status Cover Class Class Rank
1.
2- ~ "" ~~~~ "" ~
3. nzm zzzz nmz
4. nzm
5.
6.
7.
Sum of Midpoints
50% X Sum of Midpoints
v**********************j
1. Note: A shrub is usually less than 6.1 meters (20 feet) tall and generally exhibits
several erect, spreading or prostrate stems and has a bushy appearance. Percent cover
of woody vines should be estimated independent of strata and exclusive of seedlings.
2. Cover classes (midpoints): T<1% (none); 1=1-5% (3.0); 2=6-15% (10.5); 3=16-25% (20.5);
4=26-50% (38.0); 5=51-75% (63.0); 6=76-95% (85.5); 7=96-100% (98.0).
3. To determine the dominants, first rank the shrub species by their midpoints. Then
cumulatively sum the midpoints of the ranked shrub species until 50% of the total
for all shrub species midpoints is reached or initially exceeded. Do the same for
woody vines. All species contributing to these cumulative totals should be con-
sidered dominants and marked with an asterisk above.
4. Do the dominant shrub species indicate that the vegetation unit supports hydrophytic
vegetation? Yes ___^ No Inconlusive .
5. Do the dominant woody vine species indicate that th~e vegetation unit supports hydro-
phytic vegetation? Yes No Inconclusive .
6. Note: Inconclusive should be checked when only facultative (i .e., facultative wet-
1 and, straight facultative, and/or facultative upland) species dominate.
7. Comments:
-------
, »
EPA Region: _
Project/Site:
Applicant/Owner:
Species
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
DATA FORM C-3: TREE AND SAPLING DATA
FOR SIMPLE OURISOICTIONAL DETERMINATION
Recorder:
Date:
State: County:
Vegetation Unit #/Name:
TREES
Indicator
Status
Relative
Basal
Area (%)
Rank
Total Relative Basal Area Equals 100%
t*********
SAPLINGS
Species
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Indicator
Status
Percent
Area!
Cover
Midpoint
of Cover
Class
Rank
7.
Sum of Midpoints
50% X Sum of Midpoints
lr*********************JH
Note: A tree is greater than 10 centimeters (4 inches) diameter breast height (dbh).
A sapling is from 1-10 centimeters (0.4-4 inches) dbh.
Cover classes (midpoints): T<1% (none); 1=1-5% (3.0); 2=6-15% (10.5); 3=16-25% (20.5]
4=26-50% (38.0); 5=51-75% (63.0); 6=76-95% (85.5); 7=96-100% (98.0).
To determine the dominants, first rank the tree species by relative basal area.
Then cumulatively sum the relative basal area of the ranked tree species until 50%
of the total relative basal area for all tree species is reached or initially exceedec
Do the same for saplings using the sum of midpoints. All species contributing to the?
cumulative totals should be considered dominants and marked with an asterisk above.
Do the dominant trees indicate that the vegetation unit supports hydrophytic vegetatic
Yes No Inconlusive .
Do the dominant saplings indicate that the vegetation unit supports hydrophytic
vegetation? Yes ___^ No Inconclusive
Note: Inconclusive should be checked when only facultative (i.e., facultative wetlanr
straight facultative, and/or facultative upland) species dominate.
Comments:
-------
DATA FORM C-4: SOIL/HYDROLOGY DATA
FOR SIMPLE JURISOICTIONAL DETERMINATION
EPA Region: Recorder: Date:
Project/Site: : State: County:
Applicant/Owner: Vegetation Unit #/Name:
SOILS
Is the soil on the national or state hydric soils list? Yes No
Series/phase: Subgroup:
Is the soil a Histosol or is a histic epipedon present?Yes No
Is the soil:
Mottled? Yes No Matrix Color: Mottle Color:
Gleyed? Yes No
Other Indicators
Note: Soils should be sample at about 25 centimeters (10 inches) or immediately
below the A horizon, whichever comes first. If desired, use the back of the form
to diagram or describe the soil profile.
Does the sampling indicate that the vegetation unit has hydric soils?
Yes No Inconclusive .
Rationale:
Comments:
HYDROLOGY
1. Is the ground surface inundated? Yes No Depth of water:
2. Is the soil saturated? Yes No Depth to free-standing water:
3. List other field evidence of surface inundation or soil saturation
4. Are hydrology indicators present in the vegetation unit?
Yes No Inconclusive .
Note; It may be necessary to rely on supplemental historical data (e.g., soil
surveys) during a dry season or drought year as long as a site has not been
significantly modified hydrologically since data collection.
Rationale:
5. Comments:
-------
DATA FORM C-5: SUMMARY OF DATA
FOR SIMPLE JURISDICTION DETERMINATION
EPA Region: Recorder: Date:
Project/Site: State: County: _
Applicant/Owner: Vegetation Unit #/Name:
Dominant Species Indicator Status
1.
2.
3.
4. ^^^^^
5.
6.
7.
8.
9. ta
10. ' -
11.
12. ^^^^^^^^^
13.
14. ~^^^^^^^~~~~~^^
15.
16. ^^^^^
17.
18- ZZZZZZZZZZZZZIZZZIZZZZZI
19.
20.
1. Is hydrophytic vegetation present? Yes No Inconclusive
2. Are hydric soils present? Yes No Inconclusive
3. Are hydrology indicators present? Yes No Inconclusive
4. Overall, is the vegetation unit wetland? Yes No Inconclusive
5. Comments:
-------
APPENDIX D
DATA FORMS FOR
DETAILED JURISDICTION DETERMINATIONS
-------
DATA FORM D-l: HERBACEOUS SPECIES DATA
FOR DETAILED JURISDICTION DETERMINATION
A Region: Recorder: Hate:
Project/Site: State: County:
Applicant/Owner: Transect #: Plot #:
PERCENT AREAL COVER
Species Status Ql Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 07 Q8 X" Rank
1. _ _ __________ _
2. _ _ __ _________ _
*
5.
6.
s.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Total of Averages (X's) of Percent Area! Cover
50% X Total of Averages (X's) of Percent Area! Cover
Note: Herbaceous species include all graminoids, forbs, ferns, fern allies,
bryophytes, woody seedlings, and herbaceous vines.
To determine the dominants, first rank the species by their average percent area!
cover. Then cumulatively sum the percent area! cover averages (X's) of the
ranked species until 50% of the total of all the species averages is reached or
initially exceeded. All species contributing to that cumulative total should be
considered dominants and indicated with an asterisk above.
Do the dominant herbaceous species indicate that the vegetation unit supports
hydrophytic vegetation? Yes No Inconclusive .
Note: Inconclusive should be checked when only facultative (facultative wetland,
straight facultative, and/or facultative upland) species dominate.
Comments:
-------
DATA FORM D-2: SHRUB AND WOODY VINE
DATA FOR DETAILED JURISDICTIONAL DETERMINATION
EPA Region: _ Recorder: _ Date:
Project/Site: _ State: _ County:
_ _
Applicant/Owner: _ Transects #: _ Plot #:
SHRUBS
Indicator Percent Area! Cover Midpoint of
Species Status Cover Class Cover Class Rank
1. _ ' _ _
2. muzz ~
3. zzzzzzzzzzzzzzz zzzzz '
4. _ '
5. _ _ "
6.
8-
9.
Sum of Midpoints
50% X Sum of Midpoints
WOODY VINES
Indicator Percent Area! Cover Midpoint of
Speci es Status Cover Class Cover Class Rank
1.
2.
4
5
6
7.
8.
9.
Sum of Midpoints
50% X Sum of Midpoints
1. Note; A shrub usually is less than 6.1 meters (20 feet) tall and generally exhibits
several erect, spreading or prostrate stems and has a bushy appearance. Percent cover
of woody vines should be estimated independent of strata and exclusive of seedlings.
2. Cover classes (midpoints): T=<1% (none); 1=1-5% (3.0); 2=6-15% (10.5); 3=16-25% (20.5)
4=26-50% (38.0); 5=51-75% (63.0); 6=76-95% (85.5); 7=96-100% (98.0).
3. To determine dominants, first rank the shrub species by their midpoints. Then
cumulatively sum the midpoints of the ranked shrub species until 50% of the total
for all shrub species midpoints is reached or initially exceeded. Do the same for
woody vines. All species contributing to these cumulative totals should be considered
dominants and marked with an asterisk above.
4. Do the dominant shrubs indicate that the vegetation unit supports hydrophytic
vegetation? Yes _ No _ Inconclusive _ .
5. Do the dominant woody vine species indicate that the vegetation unit supports
hydrophytic vegetation? Yes _ No _ Inconclusive .
6. Note: Inconclusive should be checked when only facultative (i .e., facultative
wetland, straight facultative, and/or facultative upland) species dominate.
7. Comments: __ ___
-------
DATA FORM D-3: TREE AND SAPLING DATA
FOR DETAILED JURISDICTIONAL DETERMINATION
A Region:
oject/Site:
Recorder:
Date:
State:
Applicant/Owner:
County:
Individual Tree
(Species Name)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Transect #:
F***********~
TREES (Bitter!ich Method)
Indicator DBH
Status Ton/ft)
PTot #:
(sq ft)
Basal Area
Per Species
(sq ft)
Rank
Total Basal Area of All Species Combined
50% X Total Basal Area of All Species Combined
SAPLINGS
Species
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Indicator
Status
Percent
Areal Cover
Midpoint
of Cover
Class
Rank
50%
Sum of Midpoints
X Sum of Midpoints
7.
Note: A tree is greater than 10 centimeters (4 inches) diameter breast height (dbh).
A sapling is from 1-10 centimeters (0.4-4 inches) dbh.
Cover classes (midpoints): T<1% (none); 1=1-5% (3.0); 2=6-15% (10.5); 3=16-25% (20.5);
4=26-50% (38.0); 5=51-75% (63.0); 6=76-95 (85.5); 7=96-100% (98.0).
To determine the dominants, first rank the tree species by their basal areas. Then
cumulatively sum the basal areas of the ranked tree species until 50% of the total
basal area for all tree species is reached or initially exceeded. Do the same for
saplings using the sum of midpoints. All species contributing to these cumulative
totals should be considered dominants and marked with an asterisk above.
Do the dominant trees indicate that the vegetation unit supports hydrophytic vegetation?
Yes No Inconlusive .
Do the dominant samplings indicate that the vegetation unit supports hydrophytic
vegetation? Yes No Inconclusive .
Note: Inconclusive should be checked when only facultative (i.e., facultative wetland,
straight facultative, and/or facultative upland) species dominate.
Comments:
-------
EPA Region:
Project/Site: __]
Applicant/Owner:
DATA FORM D-4: SOIL/HYDROLOGY DATA FOR
DETAILED JURISDICTIONAL DETERMINATION
Recorder:
Date:
State:
Transect I:
County:
Plot #:
SOILS
Is the soil on the national or state hydric soils list?
Series/phase: Subgroup:
Is the soil
Yes
No
a Histosol
Is the soil:
Mottled? Yes No
Gleyed? Yes No
Other Indicators
or is a histic epipedon present? Yes
Matrix Color:
Mottle Color:
Note: Soils should be sampled at about 25 centimeters (10 inches) or immediately
below the A horizon, whichever comes first. If desired, use the back of the
form to diagram or describe the soil profile.
Does the sampling indicate that the vegetation unit has hydric soils?
Yes No Inconclusive
Rationale:
3.
1.
2.
3.
4. Comments:
HYDROLOGY
Is the ground surface inundated?
Is the soil saturated? Yes
Depth of water:
of free-standing water:
List other field evidence of surface inundation of soil saturation
Are hydrology indicators present in the vegetation unit?
Yes No Inconclusive
Note: It may be necessary to rely on supplemental historical data (e.g., soil
surveys) during a dry season or drought year as long as a site has not been
significantly modified hydrologically since data collection.
Rationale:
Comments:
-------
-. *
DATA FORM 0-5: SUMMARY OF DATA
FOR DETAILED JURISDICTIONAL DETERMINATION
EPA Region: Recorder: Date:
Project/Site: State: County:
Applicant/Owner: Transect #: Plot #:
Dominant Species Indicator
Status
1. _ _
2. _ _
3.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
114.
15.
****<
1. Is hydrophytic vegetation present? Yes No Inconclusive
2. Are hydric soils present? Yes No Inconclusive
3. Are hydrology indicators present? Yes No Inconclusive
4. Overall, is the vegetation unit wetland? Yes No Inconclusive
5. Comments:
-------
APPENDIX E
EQUIPMENT NECESSARY FOR
MAKING WETLAND JURISDICTIONAL
DETERMINATIONS
-------
APPENDIX E
EQUIPMENT NECESSARY FOR MAKING WETLAND
JURISDICTIONAL DETERMINATIONS
Jurisdictional
Item Approach V
National or regional list of plants 1,2
that occur in wetlands
National or state hydric soils list 1,2
Key to Soil Taxonomy (optional)2/ 2
NationaTTTst of Scientific Plant Names (optional) 1,2
State or regional plant identification manuals 1,2
Plant field guides 1,2
Spencer tape 2
Diameter tape or basal area tape 2
Two O.lm2 quadrat frames 2
Prism or angle gauge 2
Vasculum or plastic bags 1,2
Sighting compass 2
Pens or pencils 1,2
Clip board and data sheets 1,2
Notebook 1,2
Flagging tape 1,2
Wooden stakes or wire flagging stakes (optional) 1,2
Increment borer (optional) 2
10X hand lens 1,2
Dissecting kit 1,2
Calculator 2
Aerial photographs or topographic map 1,2
Shovel 1,2
Bucket auger and/or soil probe 1,2
Munsel Color Soil Charts 1,2
Colorimetric field test kit (optional) 1,2
V 1 refers to equipment needed for simple Jurisdictional approach.
2 refers to equipment needed for detailed Jurisdictional approach.
2/ Optional items are not necessary, but may be useful in certain situations.
-------
WETLANDS RESEARCH PROGRAM
TECHNICAL REPORT Y-8"-i
CORPS OF ENGINEERS WETLANDS
DELINEATION MANUAL
by
Environmental Laboratory
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Waterways Experiment Station, Corps of Engineers
PO Box 631, Vicksburg, Mississippi 39180-0631
January 1987
Final Report
d feu DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
US Army Corps of Engineers
Washington, DC 20314-1000
-------
Destroy this teport when no longei reeded Do not return
it to tr>,> originator.
The findings m this report are not to be construed as an official
Department of the Army position unless so designated
by other authorized documents.
The contents of this report are not to be used for
advertising, publication, or promotional purposes.
Citation of trade names does not constitute an
official endorsement or approval of the use of
such commercial products.
-------
Line 1 as s if i ed
SECURITY CLASSIFICATION OF THIS PAGE
REPORT DOCUMENTATION PAGE
la REPORT SECURITY CLASSIFICATION
Unclassified
2a. SECURITY CLASSIFICATION AUTHORITY
2b. DECLASSIFICATION / DOWNGRADING SCHEDULE
4 PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT NUMBER(S)
Technical Report Y-87-1
6a. NAME OF PERFORMING ORGANIZATION 6b OFFICE SYMBOL
USAEWES (lf WMWf)
Environmental Laboratory
6c. ADDRESS (Ofy, State, and //P Code)
PO Box 631
Vicksburg, MS 39180-0631
Ba. NAME OF FUNDING /SPONSORING Bb. OFFICE SYMBOL
ORGANIZATION (If applicable)
US Army Corps of Engineers
8c. ADDRESS (City, State, and ZIP Code)
Washington, DC 20314-1000
1b RESTRICTIVE MARKINGS
3 DISTRIBUTION /AVAILABILITY OF REPORT
Approved for public release; distribution
unlimited.
5. MONITORING ORGANIZATION REPORT NUMBER(S)
7a NAME OF MONITORING ORGANIZATION
7b. ADDRESS (City, State, and ZIP Code)
9 PROCUREMENT INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
10 SOURCE OF FUNDING NUMBERS
PROGRAM PROJECT TASK WORK UNIT
ELEMENT NO NO. NO. ACCESSION NO
1 1 TITLE (/nc/ude Security C/assift'cat/on)
Corps of Engineers Wetlands Delineation Manual
12 PERSONAL AUTHOR(S)
13a TYPE OF REPORT 13b TIME COVERED
Final report FROM TO
4. DATE OF REPORT (Yeir, Month, Day) |l5 PAGE COUNT
January 1987 | 169
16 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTATION
Available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield,
VA 22161.
17 COSATI CODES 18 SUBJECT TERMS (Continue on reverse if necessary and identify by block number)
FIELD GROUP SUB-GROUP r>-u ~--
Manual Plant communities Vegetation
Methods Soil Wetlands
<9 ABSTRACT (Continue on reverse if necessary and identify by block number)
This document presents approaches and methods for identifying and delineating wet-
lands for purposes of Section 404 of the Clean Water Act. It is designed to assist users
in making wetland determinations using a multiparameter approach. Except where noted in
the manual, this approach requires positive evidence of hydrophytic vegetation, hydric
soils, and wetland hydrology for a determination that an area is a wetland. The multi-
parameter approach provides a logical, easily defensible, and technical basis for wetland
determinations. Technical guidelines are presented for wetlands, deepwater aquatic habi-
tats, and nonwetlands (uplands).
Hydrophytic vegetation, hydric soils, and wetland hydrology are also characterized,
and wetland indicators of each parameter are listed.
(Continued)
20 DISTRIBUTION /AVAILABILITY OF ABSTRACT
SI UNCLASSIFIED/UNLIMITED D SAME AS RPT D OTIC USERS
22a NAME OF RESPONSIBLE INDIVIDUAL
21 ABSTRACT SECURITY CLASSIFICATION
Unclassified
22b TELEPHONE (/nc/ude Area Code) 22c. OFFICE SYMBOL
DO FORM 1 473. 84 MAR 83 APR edition may be used until exhausted. SECURITY CLASSIFICATION OF THIS PAGE
Unclassified
-------
Unclassified
fICUKITY CLAMIFICAT1ON OF THIS
19. ABSTRACT (Continued).
Methods for applying the multiparameter approach are described. Separate sections
are devoted to preliminary data gathering and analysis, method selection, routine deter-
minations, comprehensive determinations, atypical situations, and problem areas. Three
levels of routine determinations are described, thereby affording significant flexibility
in method selection.
Four appendices provide supporting information. Appendix A is a glossary of tech-
nical terms used in the manual. Appendix B contains data forms for use with the various
methods. Appendix C, developed by a Federal interagency panel, contains a list of all
plant species known to occur in wetlands of the region. Each species has been assigned an
indicator status that describes its estimated probability of occurring in wetlands. A
second list contains plant species that commonly occur in wetlands of the region. Morpho-
logical, physiological, and reproductive adaptations that enable a plant species to occur
in wetlands are also described, along with a listing of some species having such adapta-
tions. Appendix D describes the procedure for examining the soil for indicators of hydric
soil conditions, and includes a national list of hydric soils developed by the National
Technical Committee for Hydric Soils.
Unclassified
SCCJBITY CLASSIFICATION OF THIS PAGE
-------
PREFACE
This manual is a product of the Wetlands Research Program (WRP) of the
US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station (WES), Vicksburg, Miss. The
work was sponsored by the Office, Chief of Engineers (OCE), US Army. OCE
Technical Monitors for the WRP were Drs. John R. Hall and Robert J. Pierce,
and Mr. Phillip C. Pierce.
The manual has been reviewed and concurred in by the Office of the Chief
of Engineers and the Office of the Assistant Secretary of the Army (Civil
Works) as a method approved for voluntary use in the field for a trial period
of 1 year.
This manual is not intended to change appreciably the jurisdiction of
the Clean Water Act (CWA) as it is currently implemented. Should any District
find that use of this method appreciably contracts or expands jurisdiction in
their District as the District currently interprets CWA authority, the
District should immediately discontinue use of this method and furnish a full
report of the circumstances to the Office of the Chief of Engineers.
This manual describes technical guidelines and methods using a multi-
parameter approach to identify and delineate wetlands for purposes of Sec-
tion 404 of the Clean Water Act. Appendices of supporting technical infor-
mation are also provided.
The manual is presented in four parts. Part II was prepared by
Dr. Robert T. Huffman, formerly of the Environmental Laboratory (EL), WES, and
Dr. Dana R. Sanders, Sr., of the Wetland and Terrestrial Habitat Group (WTHG),
Environmental Resources Division (ERD), EL. Dr. Huffman prepared the original
version of Part II in 1980, entitled "Multiple Parameter Approach to the Field
Identification and Delineation of Wetlands." The original version was dis-
tributed to all Corps field elements, as well as other Federal resource and
environmental regulatory agencies, for review and comments. Dr. Sanders re-
vised the original version in 1982, incorporating review comments. Parts I,
III, and IV were prepared by Dr. Sanders, Mr. William B. Parker (formerly
detailed to WES by the US Department of Agriculture (USDA), Soil Conservation
Service (SCS)) and Mr. Stephen W. Forsythe (formerly detailed to WES by the US
Department of the Interior, Fish and Wildlife Service (FWS)). Dr. Sanders
also served as overall technical editor of the manual. The manual was edited
by Ms. Jamie W. Leach of the WES Information Products Division.
1
-------
The authors acknowledge technical assistance provided by:
Mr. Russell F. Theriot, Mr. Ellis J. Clairain, Jr., and Mr. Charles J.
Newling, all of WTHG, ERD; Mr. Phillip Jones, former SCS detail to WES;
Mr. Porter B. Reed, FWS, National Wetland Inventory, St. Petersburg, Fla.;
Dr. Dan K. Evans, Marshall University, Huntington, W. Va.; and the USDA-SCS.
The authors also express gratitude to Corps personnel who assisted in develop-
ing the regional lists of species that commonly occur in wetlands, including
Mr. Richard Macomber, Bureau of Rivers and Harbors; Ms. Kathy Mulder, Kansas
City District; Mr. Michael Gilbert, Omaha District; Ms. Vicki Goodnight,
Southwestern Division; Dr. Fred Weinmann, Seattle District; and Mr. Michael
Lee, Pacific Ocean Division. Special thanks are offered to the CE personnel
who reviewed and commented on the draft manual, and to those who participated
in a workshop that consolidated the field comments.
The work was monitored at WES under the direct supervision of
Dr. Hanley K. Smith, Chief, WTHG, and under the general supervision of
Dr. Conrad J. Kirby, Jr., Chief, ERD. Dr. Smith, Dr. Sanders, and Mr. Theriot
were Managers of the WRP. Dr. John Harrison was Chief, EL.
Director of WES during the preparation of this report was COL Allen F.
Grum, USA. During publication, COL Dwayne G. Lee, CE, was Commander and
Director. Technical Director was Dr. Robert W. Whalin.
This report should be cited as follows:
Environmental Laboratory. 1987. "Corps of Engineers Wetlands
Delineation Manual," Technical Report Y-87-1, US Army Engineer
Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, Miss.
-------
CONTENTS
Page
PREFACE 1
CONVERSION FACTORS, NON-SI TO SI (METRIC)
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT 4
PART I: INTRODUCTION 5
Background 5
Purpose and Objectives 5
Scope 6
Organization 7
Use 9
PART II: TECHNICAL GUIDELINES 13
Wetlands 13
Deepwater Aquatic Habitats 14
Nonwet lands 15
PART III: CHARACTERISTICS AND INDICATORS OF HYDROPHYTIC VEGETATION,
HYDRIC SOILS, AND WETLAND HYDROLOGY 16
Hydrophytic Vegetation 16
Hydric Soils 26
Wetland Hydrology 34
PART IV: METHODS 42
Section A. Introduction 42
Section B. Preliminary Data Gathering and Synthesis 43
Section C. Selection of Method 52
Section D. Routine Determinations 53
Section E. Comprehensive Determinations 70
Section F. Atypical Situations 83
Section G. Problem Areas 93
REFERENCES 96
BIBLIOGRAPHY 98
APPENDIX A: GLOSSARY Al
APPENDIX B: BLANK AND EXAMPLE DATA FORMS Bl
APPENDIX C: VEGETATION Cl
APPENDIX D: HYDRIC SOILS Dl
-------
CONVERSION FACTORS, NON-SI TO SI (METRIC)
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
Non-Si units of measurement used in this report can be converted to SI
(metric) units as follows:
Multiply By To Obtain
acres 0.4047 hectares
Fahrenheit degrees 5/9 Celsius degrees*
feet 0.3048 metres
inches 2.54 centimetres
miles (US statute) 1.6093 kilometres
square inches 6.4516 square centimetres
* To obtain Celsius (C) temperature readings from Fahrenheit (F) readings,
use the following formula: C = (5/9) (F - 32).
-------
CORPS OF ENGINEERS WETLANDS DELINEATION MANUAL
PART I: INTRODUCTION
Background
1. Recognizing the potential for continued or accelerated degradation
of the Nation's waters, the US Congress enacted the Clean Water Act (here-
after referred to as the Act), formerly known as the Federal Water Pollution
Control Act (33 U.S.C. 1344). The objective of the Act is to maintain and
restore the chemical, physical, and biological integrity of the waters of the
United States. Section 404 of the Act authorizes the Secretary of the Army,
acting through the Chief of Engineers, to issue permits for the discharge of
dredged or fill material into the waters of the United States, including
wetlands.
Purpose and Objectives
Purpose
2. The purpose of this manual is to provide users with guidelines and
methods to determine whether an area is a wetland for purposes of Section 404
of the Act.
Objectives
3. Specific objectives of the manual are to:
a. Present technical guidelines for identifying wetlands and
distinguishing then from aquatic habitats and other
nonwetlands.*
b_. Provide methods for applying the technical guidelines.
£. Provide supporting information useful in applying the technical
guidelines.
* Definitions of terms used in this manual are presented in the Glossary,
Appendix A.
-------
4. This manual is limited in scope to wetlands that are a subset of
"waters of the United States" and thus subject to Section 404. The term
"waters of the United States" has broad meaning and incorporates both deep-
water aquatic habitats and special aquatic sites, including wetlands (Federal
Register 1982), as follows:
a. The territorial seas with respect to the discharge of fill
material.
b_. Coastal and inland waters, lakes, rivers, and streams that are
navigable waters of the United States, including their adjacent
wetlands.
£. Tributaries to navigable waters of the United States, including
adjacent wetlands.
d. Interstate waters and their tributaries, including adjacent
wetlands.
£. All others waters of the United States not identified above,
such as isolated wetlands and lakes, intermittent streams,
prairie potholes, and other waters that are not a part of a
tributary system to interstate waters or navigable waters of the
United States, the degradation or destruction of which could
affect interstate commerce.
Determination that a water body or wetland is subject to interstate commerce
and therefore is a "water of the United States" shall be made independently of
procedures described in this manual.
Special aquatic sites
5. The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) identifies six categories
of special aquatic sites in their Section 404 b.(l) guidelines (Federal
Register 1980), including:
a. Sanctuaries and refuges.
b_. Wetlands.
c. Mudflats.
cl. Vegetated shallows.
£. Coral reefs.
f_. Riffle and pool complexes.
Although all of these special aquatic sites are subject to provisions of the
Clean Water Act, this manual considers only wetlands. By definition (see
paragraph 26a), wetlands are vegetated. Thus, unvegetated special aquatic
-------
sites (e.g. mudflats lacking macrophytic vegetation) are not covered in this
manual.
Relationship to wet-
land classification systems
6. The technical guideline for wetlands does not constitute a classifi-
cation system. It only provides a basis for determining whether a given area
is a wetland for purposes of Section 404, without attempting to classify it by
wetland type.
7. Consideration should be given to the relationship between the tech-
nical guideline for wetlands and the classification system developed for the
Fish and Wildlife Service (FWS), US Department of the Interior, by Cowardin et
al. (1979). The FWS classification system was developed as a basis for
identifying, classifying, and mapping wetlands, other special aquatic sites,
and deepwater aquatic habitats. Using this classification system, the National
Wetland Inventory (NWI) is mapping the wetlands, other special aquatic sites,
and deepwater aquatic habitats of the United States, and is also developing
both a list of plant species that occur in wetlands and an associated plant
database. These products should contribute significantly to application of
the technical guideline for wetlands. The technical guideline for wetlands as
presented in the manual includes most, but not all, wetlands identified in the
FWS system. The difference is due to two principal factors:
a. The FWS system includes all categories of special aquatic sites
identified in the EPA Section 404 b.(l) guidelines. All other
special aquatic sites are clearly within the purview of Sec-
tion 404; thus, special methods for their delineation are
unnecessary.
b. The FWS system requires that a positive indicator of wetlands be
present for any one of the three parameters, while the technical
guideline for wetlands requires that a positive wetland indi-
cator be present for each parameter (vegetation, soils, and
hydrology), except in limited instances identified in the
manual.
Organization
8. This manual consists of four parts and four appendices. PART I
presents the background, purpose and objectives, scope, organization, and use
of the manual.
-------
9. PART II focuses on the technical guideline for wetlands, and
stresses the need for considering all three parameters (vegetation, soils, and
hydrology) when making wetland determinations. Since wetlands occur in an
intermediate position along the hydrologic gradient, comparative technical
guidelines are also presented for deepwater aquatic sites and nonwetlands.
10. PART III contains general information on hydrophytic vegetation,
hydric soils, and wetland hydrology. Positive wetland indicators of each
parameter are included.
11. PART IV, which presents methods for applying the technical guide-
line for wetlands, is arranged in a format that leads to a logical determina-
tion of whether a given area is a wetland. Section A contains general infor-
mation related to application of methods. Section B outlines preliminary
data-gathering efforts. Section C discusses two approaches (routine and com-
prehensive) for making wetland determinations and presents criteria for decid-
ing the correct approach to use. Sections D and E describe detailed proce-
dures for making routine and comprehensive determinations, respectively. The
basic procedures are described in a series of steps that lead to a wetland
determination.
12. The manual also describes (PART IV, Section F) methods for delin-
eating wetlands in which the vegetation, soils, and/or hydrology have been
altered by recent human activities or natural events, as discussed below:
a.. The definition of wetlands (paragraph 26a) contains the phrase
"under normal circumstances," which was included because there
are instances in which the vegetation in a wetland has been
inadvertently or purposely removed or altered as a result of
recent natural events or human activities. Other examples of
human alterations that may affect wetlands are draining, ditch-
ing, levees, deposition of fill, irrigation, and impoundments.
When such activities occur, an area may fail to meet the
diagnostic criteria for a wetland. Likewise, positive hydric
soil indicators may be absent in some recently created wet-
lands. In such cases, an alternative method must be employed
in making wetland determinations.
b_. Natural events may also result in sufficient modification of an
area that indicators of one or more wetland parameters are
absent. For example, changes in river course may significantly
alter hydrology, or beaver dams may create new wetland areas
that lack hydric soil conditions. Catastrophic events (e.g.
fires, avalanches, mudslides, and volcanic activities) may also
alter or destroy wetland indicators on a site.
-------
Such atypical situations occur throughout the United States, and all of these
cannot be identified in this manual.
13. Certain wetland types, under the extremes of normal circumstances,
may not always meet all the wetland criteria defined in the manual. Examples
include prairie potholes during drought years and seasonal wetlands that may
lack hydrophytic vegetation during the dry season. Such areas are discussed
in PART IV, Section G, and guidance is provided for making wetland determina-
tions in these areas. However, such wetland areas may warrant additional
research to refine methods for their delineation.
14. Appendix A is a glossary of technical terms used in the manual.
Definitions of some terms were taken from other technical sources, but most
terms are defined according to the manner in which they are used in the
manual.
15. Data forms for methods presented in PART IV are included in
Appendix B. Examples of completed data forms are also provided.
16. Supporting information is presented in Appendices C and D.
Appendix C contains lists of plant species that occur in wetlands. Section 1
consists of regional lists developed by a Federal interagency panel. Sec-
tion 2 consists of shorter lists of plant species that commonly occur in wet-
lands of each region. Section 3 describes morphological, physiological, and
reproductive adaptations associated with hydrophytic species, as well as a
list of some species exhibiting such adaptations. Appendix D discusses proce-
dures for examining soils for hydric soil indicators, and also contains a list
of hydric soils of the United States.
Use
17. Although this manual was prepared primarily for use by Corps of
Engineers (CE) field inspectors, it should be useful to anyone who makes wet-
land determinations for purposes of Section 404 of the Clean Water Act. The
user is directed through a series of steps that involve gathering of informa-
tion and decisionmaking, ultimately leading to a wetland determination. A
general flow diagram of activities leading to a determination is presented in
Figure 1. However, not all activities identified in Figure 1 will be required
for each wetland determination. For example, if a decision is made to use a
-------
PRELIMINARY DATA
GATHERING AND SYNTHESIS
PART IV, SECTION B
SELECT METHOD
PART IV, SECTION C
ROUTINE
DETERMINATION
PART IV, SECTION D
COMPREHENSIVE
DETERMINATION
PART IV, SECTION E
JURISDICTIONAL
DETERMINATION
Figure 1. General schematic diagram of activities leading
to a wetland/nonwetland determination
routine determination procedure, comprehensive determination procedures will
not be employed.
Premise for use of the manual
18. Three key provisions of the CE/EPA definition of wetlands (see
paragraph 26a) include:
a. Inundated or saturated soil conditions resulting from permanent
or periodic inundation by ground water or surface water.
b_. A prevalence of vegetation typically adapted for life in
saturated soil conditions (hydrophytic vegetation).
£. The presence of "normal circumstances."
19. Explicit in the definition is the consideration of three environ-
mental parameters: hydrology, soil, and vegetation. Positive wetland indi-
cators of all three parameters are normally present in wetlands. Although
vegetation is often the most readily observed parameter, sole reliance on
vegetation or either of the other parameters as the determinant of wetlands
can sometimes be misleading. Many plant species can grow successfully in both
10
-------
wetlands and nonwetlands, and hydrophytic vegetation and hydric soils may
persist for decades following alteration of hydrology that will render an area
a nonwetland. The presence of hydric soils and wetland hydrology indicators
in addition to vegetation indicators will provide a logical, easily defen-
sible, and technical basis for the presence of wetlands. The combined use of
indicators for all three parameters will enhance the technical accuracy, con-
sistency, and credibility of wetland determinations. Therefore, all three
parameters were used in developing the technical guideline for wetlands and
all approaches for applying the technical guideline embody the multiparameter
concept.
Approaches
20. The approach used for wetland delineations will vary, based pri-
marily on the complexity of the area in question. Two basic approaches
described in the manual are (a) routine and (b) comprehensive.
21. Routine approach. The routine approach normally will be used in
the vast majority of determinations. The routine approach requires minimal
level of effort, using primarily qualitative procedures. This approach can be
further subdivided into three levels of required effort, depending on the
complexity of the area and the amount and quality of preliminary data avail-
able. The following levels of effort may be used for routine determinations:
a. Level 1 - Onsite inspection unnecessary. (PART IV, Section D,
Subsection 1).
b. Level 2 - Onsite inspection necessary. (PART IV, Section D,
Subsection 2).
£. Level 3 - Combination of Levels 1 and 2. (PART IV, Section D,
Subsection 3).
22. Comprehensive approach. The comprehensive approach requires appli-
cation of quantitative procedures for making wetland determinations. It
should seldom be necessary, and its use should be restricted to situations in
which the wetland is very complex and/or is the subject of likely or pending
litigation. Application of the comprehensive approach (PART IV, Section E)
requires a greater level of expertise than application of the routine ap-
proach, and only experienced field personnel with sufficient training should
use this approach.
Flexibility
23. Procedures described for both routine and comprehensive wetland
determinations have been tested and found to be reliable. However,
11
-------
site-specific conditions may require modification of field procedures. For
example, slope configuration in a complex area may necessitate modification of
the baseline and transect positions. Since specific characteristics (e.g.
plant density) of a given plant community may necessitate the use of alternate
methods for determining the dominant species, the user has the flexibility to
employ sampling procedures other than those described. However, the basic
approach for making wetland determinations should not be altered (i.e. the
determination should be based on the dominant plant species, soil characteris-
tics, and hydrologic characteristics of the area in question). The user
should document reasons for using a different characterization procedure than
described in the manual. CAUTION: Application of methods described in the
manual or the modified sampling procedures requires that the user be familiar
with wetlands of the area and use his training, experience, and good judgment
in making wetland determinations.
12
-------
PART II: TECHNICAL GUIDELINES
24. The interaction of hydrology, vegetation, and soil results in the
development of characteristics unique to wetlands. Therefore, the following
technical guideline for wetlands is based on these three parameters, and diag-
nostic environmental characteristics used in applying the technical guideline
are represented by various indicators of these parameters.
25. Because wetlands may be bordered by both wetter areas (aquatic
habitats) and by drier areas (nonwetlands), guidelines are presented for wet-
lands, deepwater aquatic habitats, and nonwetlands. However, procedures for
applying the technical guidelines for deepwater aquatic habitats and nonwet-
lands are not included in the manual.
Wetlands
26. The following definition, diagnostic environmental characteristics,
and technical approach comprise a guideline for the identification and deline-
ation of wetlands:
a. Definition. The CE (Federal Register 1982) and the EPA
(Federal Register 1980) jointly define wetlands as: Those
areas that are inundated or saturated by surface or ground
water at a frequency and duration sufficient to support, and
that under normal circumstances do support, a prevalence of
vegetation typically adapted for life in saturated soil condi-
tions. Wetlands generally include swamps, marshes, bogs, and
similar areas.
b_. Diagnostic environmental characteristics. Wetlands have the
following general diagnostic environmental characteristics:
(1) Vegetation. The prevalent vegetation consists of macro-
phytes that are typically adapted to areas having hydro-
logic and soil conditions described in a. above. Hydro-
phytic species, due to morphological, physiological,
and/or reproductive adaptation(s), have the ability to
grow, effectively compete, reproduce, and/or persist in
anaerobic soil conditions.* Indicators of vegetation
associated with wetlands are listed in paragraph 35.
Species (e.g. Acer rubpum) having broad ecological tolerances occur in both
wetlands and nonwetlands.
13
-------
Soil. Soils are present and have been classified as
hydric, or they possess characteristics that are asso-
ciated with reducing soil conditions. Indicators of soils
developed under reducing conditions are listed in
paragraphs 44 and 45.
(3) Hydrology. The area is inundated either permanently or
periodically at mean water depths ^6.6 ft, or the soil is
saturated to the surface at some time during the growing
season of the prevalent vegetation.* Indicators of hydro-
logic conditions that occur in wetlands are listed in
paragraph 49.
£. Technical approach for the identification and delineation of
wetlands. Except in certain situations defined in this manual,
evidence of a minimum of one positive wetland indicator from
each parameter (hydrology, soil, and vegetation) must be found
in order to make a positive wetland determination.
Deepwater Aquatic Habitats
27. The following definition, diagnostic environmental characteristics,
and technical approach comprise a guideline for deepwater aquatic habitats:
a. Definition. Deepwater aquatic habitats are areas that are
permanently inundated at mean annual water depths >6.6 ft or
permanently inundated areas <6.6 ft in depth that do not sup-
port rooted-emergent or woody plant species.**
b_. Diagnostic environmental characteristics. Deepwater aquatic
habitats have the following diagnostic environmental
characteristics:
(1) Vegetation. No rooted-emergent or woody plant species are
present in these permanently inundated areas.
(2) Soil. The substrate technically is not defined as a soil
if the mean water depth is >6.6 ft or if it will not sup-
port rooted emergent or woody plants.
(3) Hydrology. The area is permanently inundated at mean
water depths >6.6 ft.
£. Technical approach for the identification and delineation of
deepwater aquatic habitats. When any one of the diagnostic
characteristics identified in b above is present, the area is a
deepwater aquatic habitat.
* The period of inundation or soil saturation varies according to the
hydrologic/soil moisture regime and occurs in both tidal and nontidal
situations.
** Areas <6.6 ft mean annual depth that support only submergent aquatic
plants are vegetated shallows, not wetlands.
14
-------
Ngnwetlands
28. The following definition, diagnostic environmental characteristics,
and technical approach comprise a guideline for the identification and deline-
ation of nonwetlands:
a. Definition. Nonwetlands include uplands and lowland areas that
are neither deepwater aquatic habitats, wetlands, nor other
special aquatic sites. They are seldom or never inundated, or
if frequently inundated, they have saturated soils for only
brief periods during the growing season, and, if vegetated,
they normally support a prevalence of vegetation typically
adapted for life only in aerobic soil conditions.
b. Diagnostic environmental characteristics. Nonwetlands have the
following general diagnostic environmental characteristics:
(1) Vegetation. The prevalent vegetation consists of plant
species that are typically adapted for life only in
aerobic soils. These mesophytic and/or xerophytic
macrophytes cannot persist in predominantly anaerobic soil
conditions.*
(2) Soil. Soils, when present, are not classified as hydric,
and possess characteristics associated with aerobic
conditions.
(3) Hydrology. Although the soil may be inundated or
saturated by surface water or ground water periodically
during the growing season of the prevalent vegetation, the
average annual duration of inundation or soil saturation
does not preclude the occurrence of plant species
typically adapted for life in aerobic soil conditions.
£. Technical approach for the identification and delineation of
nonwetlands. When any one of the diagnostic characteristics
identified in b above is present, the area is a nonwetland.
Some species, due to their broad ecological tolerances, occur in both
wetlands and nonwetlands (e.g. Acer rubrwn').
15
-------
PART III: CHARACTERISTICS AND INDICATORS OF HYDROPHYTIC
VEGETATION, HYDRIC SOILS, AND WETLAND HYDROLOGY
Hydrophytic Vegetation
Definition
29. Hydrophytic vegetation. Hydrophytic vegetation is defined herein
as the sum total of macrophytic plant life that occurs in areas where the
frequency and duration of inundation or soil saturation produce permanently or
periodically saturated soils of sufficient duration to exert a controlling
influence on the plant species present. The vegetation occurring in a wetland
may consist of more than one plant community (species association). The plant
community concept is followed throughout the manual. Emphasis is placed on
the assemblage of plant species that exert a controlling influence on the
character of the plant community, rather than on indicator species. Thus, the
presence of scattered individuals of an upland plant species in a community
dominated by hydrophytic species is not a sufficient basis for concluding that
the area is an upland community. Likewise, the presence of a few individuals
of a hydrophytic species in a community dominated by upland species is not a
sufficient basis for concluding that the area has hydrophytic vegetation.
CAUTION: In determining whether an area is "vegetated" for the purpose of
Section 404 jurisdiction, users must consider the density of vegetation at the
site being evaluated. While it is not possible to develop a numerical method
to determine how many plants or how much biomass is needed to establish an
area as being vegetated or unvegetated, it is intended that the predominant
condition of the site be used to make that characterization. This concept
applies to areas grading from wetland to upland, and from wetland to other
waters. This limitation would not necessarily apply to areas which have been
disturbed by man or recent natural events.
30. Prevalence of vegetation. The definition of wetlands (para-
graph 26ai) includes the phrase "prevalence of vegetation." Prevalence, as
applied to vegetation, is an imprecise, seldom-used ecological term. As used
in the wetlands definition, prevalence refers to the plant community or com-
munities that occur in an area at some point in time. Prevalent vegetation is
characterized by the dominant species comprising the plant community or com-
munities. Dominant plant species are those that contribute more to the char-
acter of a plant community than other species present, as estimated or
16
-------
measured in terms of some ecological parameter or parameters. The two most
commonly used estimates of dominance are basal area (trees) and percent areal
cover (herbs). Hydrophytic vegetation is prevalent in an area when the domi-
nant species comprising the plant community or communities are typically
adapted for life in saturated soil conditions.
31. Typically adapted. The term "typically adapted" refers to a spe-
cies being normally or commonly suited to a given set of environmental condi-
tions, due to some morphological, physiological, or reproductive adaptation
(Appendix C, Section 3). As used in the CE wetlands definition, the governing
environmental conditions for hydrophytic vegetation are saturated soils re-
sulting from periodic inundation or saturation by surface or ground water.
These periodic events must occur for sufficient duration to result in
anaerobic soil conditions. When the dominant species in a plant community are
typically adapted for life in anaerobic soil conditions, hydrophytic vegeta-
tion is present. Species listed in Appendix C, Section 1 or 2, that have an
indicator status of OBL, FACW, or FAC* (Table 1) are considered to be
typically adapted for life in anaerobic soil conditions (see paragraph 35a).
Influencing factors
32. Many factors (e.g. light, temperature, soil texture and permeabil-
ity, man-induced disturbance, etc.) influence the character of hydrophytic
vegetation. However, hydrologic factors exert an overriding influence on spe-
cies that can occur in wetlands. Plants lacking morphological, physiological,
and/or reproductive adaptations cannot grow, effectively compete, reproduce,
and/or persist in areas that are subject to prolonged inundation or saturated
soil conditions.
Geographic diversity
33. Many hydrophytic vegetation types occur in the United States due to
the diversity of interactions among various factors that influence the distri-
bution of hydrophytic species. General climate and flora contribute greatly
to regional variations in hydrophytic vegetation. Consequently, the same as-
sociations of hydrophytic species occurring in the southeastern United States
are not found in the Pacific Northwest. In addition, local environmental con-
ditions (e.g. local climate, hydrologic regimes, soil series, salinity, etc.)
* Species having a FAC- indicator status are not considered to be typically
adapted for life in anaerobic soil conditions.
17
-------
Table 1
Plant Indicator Status Categories*
Indicator Category
OBLIGATE WETLAND
PLANTS
Indicator
Symbol
OBL
FACULTATIVE WETLAND FACW
PLANTS
FACULTATIVE PLANTS
FAC
FACULTATIVE UPLAND
PLANTS
FACU
OBLIGATE UPLAND
PLANTS
UPL
Definition
Plants that occur almost always (estimated
probability >99%) in wetlands under natural
conditions, but which may also occur rarely
(estimated probability <1%) in nonwetlands.
Examples: Spartina alterniflora, Taxodium
distichum.
Plants that occur usually (estimated probabil-
ity >67% to 99%) in wetlands, but also occur
(estimated probability 1% to 33% in nonwet-
lands). Examples: Fraxinus pennsylvaniaa,
Cornus stolonifera.
Plants with a similar likelihood (estimated
probability 33% to 67%) of occurring in both
wetlands and nonwetlands. Examples:
Gleditsia tviaoanthos, Smilax rotundifolia.
Plants that occur sometimes (estimated prob-
ability 1% to <33%) in wetlands, but occur
more often (estimated probability >67% to
99%) in nonwetlands. Examples: Quevous
rubra, Potentilla arguta.
Plants that occur rarely (estimated probabil-
ity <1%) in wetlands, but occur almost
always (estimated probability >99%) in
nonwetlands under natural conditions.
Examples: Pinus echinata, Bvomus mollis.
* Categories were originally developed and defined by the USFWS National
Wetlands Inventory and subsequently modified by the National Plant List
Panel. The three facultative categories are subdivided by (+) and (-)
modifiers (see Appendix C, Section 1).
18
-------
may result in broad variations in hydrophytic associations within a given
region. For example, a coastal saltwater marsh will consist of different spe-
cies than an inland freshwater marsh in the same region. An overview of
hydrophytic vegetation occurring in each region of the Nation has been pub-
lished by the CE in a series of eight preliminary wetland guides (Table 2),
and a group of wetland and estuarine ecological profiles (Table 3) has been
published by FWS.
Classification
34. Numerous efforts have been made to classify hydrophytic vegetation.
Most systems are based on general characteristics of the dominant species oc-
curring in each vegetation type. These range from the use of general physiog-
nomic categories (e.g. overstory, subcanopy, ground cover, vines) to specific
vegetation types (e.g. forest type numbers as developed by the Society of Amer-
ican Foresters). In other cases, vegetational characteristics are combined
with hydrologic features to produce more elaborate systems. The most recent
example of such a system was developed for the FWS by Cowardin et al. (1979).
Indicators of hydrophytic vegetation
35. Several indicators may be used to determine whether hydrophytic
vegetation is present on a site. However, the presence of a single individual
of a hydrophytic species does not mean that hydrophytic vegetation is present.
The strongest case for the presence of hydrophytic vegetation can be made when
several indicators, such as those in the following list, are present. However,
any one of the following is indicative that hydrophytic vegetation is present:*
a. More than 50 percent of the dominant species are OBL, FACW, or
FAG** (Table 1) on lists of plant species that occur in wet-
lands. A national interagency panel has prepared a National
List of Plant Species that occur in wetlands. This list cate-
gorizes species according to their affinity for occurrence in
wetlands. Regional subset lists of the national list, includ-
ing only species having an indicator status of OBL, FACW, or
FAC, are presented in Appendix C, Section 1. The CE has also
developed regional lists of plant species that commonly occur
* Indicators are listed in order of decreasing reliability. Although all
are valid indicators, some are stronger than others. When a decision is
based on an indicator appearing in the lower portion of the list,
re-evaluate the parameter to ensure that the proper decision was reached.
** FAC+ species are considered to be wetter (i.e., have a greater estimated
probability of occurring in wetlands) than FAC species, while FAC- species
are considered to be drier (i.e., have a lesser estimated probability of
occurring in wetlands) than FAC species.
19
-------
Table 2
List of CE Preliminary Wetland Guides
Region
Peninsular Florida
Puerto Rico
West Coast States
Gulf Coastal Plain
Interior
South Atlantic States
North Atlantic States
Alaska
Publication
Date
February 1978
April 1978
April 1978
May 1978
May 1982
May 1982
May 1982
February 1984
WES
Report No.
TR Y-78-2
TR Y-78-3
TR-Y-78-4
TR Y-78-5
TR Y-78-6
TR Y-78-7
TR Y-78-8
TR Y-78-9
20
-------
Table 3
List of Ecological Profiles Produced by the FWS Biological
Services Program
Title
"The Ecology of Intertidal Flats of North Carolina"
"The Ecology of New England Tidal Flats"
"The Ecology of the Mangroves of South Florida"
"The Ecology of Bottomland Hardwood Swamps of
the Southeast"
"The Ecology of Southern California Coastal Salt
Marshes"
"The Ecology of New England High Salt Marshes"
"The Ecology of Southeastern Shrub Bogs (Pocosins)
and Carolina Bays"
"The Ecology of the Apalachicola Bay System"
"The Ecology of the Pamlico River, North Carolina"
"The Ecology of the South Florida Coral Reefs"
"The Ecology of the Sea Grasses of South Florida"
"The Ecology of Tidal Marshes of the Pacific
Northwest Coast"
"The Ecology of Tidal Freshwater Marshes of the
U.S. East Coast"
"The Ecology of San Francisco Bay Tidal Marshes"
"The Ecology of Tundra Ponds of the Arctic Coastal
Plain"
"The Ecology of Eelgrass Meadows of the Atlantic
Coast"
"The Ecology of Delta Marshes of Louisiana"
Publication
Date
1979
1982
1982
1982
1982
1982
1982
1984
1984
1984
1982
1983
1984
1983
1984
1984
1984
FWS
Publication
No.
79/39
81/01
81/24
81/37
81/54
81/55
82/04
82/05
82/06
82/08
82/25
82/32
83/17
83/23
83/25
84/02
84/09
(Continued)
21
-------
Table 3 (Concluded)
FWS
Publication Publication
Title Date No.
"The Ecology of Eelgrass Meadows in the Pacific 1984 84/24
Northwest"
"The Ecology of Irregularly Flooded Marshes of (In press) 85(7.1)
Northeastern Gulf of Mexico"
"The Ecology of Giant Kelp Forests in California" 1985 85(7.2)
i
22
-------
in wetlands (Appendix C, Section 2). Either list may be used.
Note: A District that, on a subregional basis, questions the
indicator status of FAC species may use the following option:
When FAC species occur as dominants along with other dominants
that are not FAC (either wetter or drier than FAC), the FAC
species can be considered as neutral, and the vegetation deci-
sion can be based on the number of dominant species wetter than
FAC as compared to the number of dominant species drier than
FAC. When a tie occurs or all dominant species are FAC, the
nondominant species must be considered. The area has hydrophy-
tic vegetation when more than 50 percent of all considered spe-
cies are wetter than FAC. When either all considered species
are FAC or the number of species wetter than FAC equals the
number of species drier than FAC, the wetland determination
will be based on the soil and hydrology parameters. Districts
adopting this option should provide documented support to the
Corps representative on the regional plant list panel, so that
a change in indicator status of FAC species of concern can be
pursued. Corps representatives on the regional and national
plant list panels will continually strive to ensure that plant
species are properly designated on both a regional and subre-
gional basis.
Other indicators. Although there are several other indicators
of hydrophytic vegetation, it will seldom be necessary to use
them. However, they may provide additional useful information
to strengthen a case for the presence of hydrophytic vegeta-
tion. Additional training and/or experience may be required to
employ these indicators.
(1) Visual observation of plant species growing in areas of
prolonged inundation and/or soil saturation. This indi-
cator can only be applied by experienced personnel who
have accumulated information through several years of
field experience and written documentation (field notes)
that certain species commonly occur in areas of prolonged
(>10 percent) inundation and/or soil saturation during the
growing season. Species such as Taxodium distichum, Typha
latifolia, and Spartina alterniflora normally occur in
such areas. Thus, occurrence of species commonly observed
in other wetland areas provides a strong indication that
hydrophytic vegetation is present. CAUTION: The presence
of standing water or saturated soil on a site is insuffi-
cient evidence that the species present are able to tole-
rate long periods of inundation. The user must relate the
observed species to other similar situations and determine
whether they are normally found in wet areas, taking into
consideration the season and immediately preceding weather
conditions.
(2) Morphological adaptations. Some hydrophytic species have
easily recognized physical characteristics that indicate
their ability to occur in wetlands. A given species may
exhibit several of these characteristics, but not all
hydrophytic species have evident morphological
23
-------
adaptations. A list of such morphological adaptations and
a partial list of plant species with known morphological
adaptations for occurrence in wetlands are provided in
Appendix C, Section 3.
(3) Technical literature. The technical literature may
provide a strong indication that plant species comprising
the prevalent vegetation are commonly found in areas where
soils are periodically saturated for long periods.
Sources of available literature include:
(a) Taxonomic references. Such references usually contain
at least a general description of the habitat in which
a species occurs. A habitat description such as,
"Occurs in water of streams and lakes and in alluvial
floodplains subject to periodic flooding," supports
a conclusion that the species typically occurs in
wetlands. Examples of some useful taxonomic refer-
ences are provided in Table 4.
(b) Botanical journals. Some botanical journals contain
studies that define species occurrence in various hy-
drologic regimes. Examples of such journals include:
Ecology, Ecological Monographs, American Journal of
Botany, Journal of American Forestry, and Wetlands:
The Journal of the Society of Wetland Scientists.
(c) Technical reports. Governmental agencies periodically
publish reports (e.g. literature reviews) that contain
information on plant species occurrence in relation to
hydrologic regimes. Examples of such publications
include the CE preliminary regional wetland guides
(Table 2) published by the US Army Engineer Waterways
Experiment Station (WES) and the wetland community and
estuarine profiles of various habitat types (Table 3)
published by the FWS.
(d) Technical workshops, conferences, and symposia.
Publications resulting from periodic scientific meet-
ings contain valuable information that can be used to
support a decision regarding the presence of hydro-
phytic vegetation. These usually address specific
regions or wetland types. For example, distribution
of bottomland hardwood forest species in relation to
hydrologic regimes was examined at a workshop on
bottomland hardwood forest wetlands of the South-
eastern United States (Clark and Benforado 1981).
(e) Wetland plant database. The NWI is producing a Plant
Database that contains habitat information on approxi-
mately 5,200 plant species that occur at some esti-
mated probability in wetlands, as compiled from the
technical literature. When completed, this computer-
ized database will be available to all governmental
agencies.
24
-------
Table 4
List of Some Useful Taxonomic References
Title
Author(s)
Manual of Vascular Plants of Northeastern United
States and Adjacent Canada
Gray's Manual of Botany, 8th edition
Manual of the Southeastern Flora
Manual of the Vascular Flora of the Carolinas
A Flora of Tropical Florida
Aquatic and Wetland Plants of the Southwestern
United States
Arizona Flora
Flora of the Pacific Northwest
A California Flora
Flora of Missouri
Manual of the Plants of Colorado
Intermountain Flora - Vascular Plants of the
Intermountain West, USA - Vols I and II
Flora of Idaho
Aquatic and Wetland Plants of the Southeastern
United States - Vols I and II
Manual of Grasses of the United States
Gleason and Cronquist
(1963)
Fernald (1950)
Small (1933)
Radford, Ahles, and Bell
(1968)
Long and Lakela (1976)
Correll and Correll (1972)
Kearney and Peebles (1960)
Hitchcock and Cronquist
(1973)
Munz and Keck (1959)
Steyermark (1963)
Harrington (1979)
Cronquist et al. (1972)
Davis (1952)
Godfrey and Wooten (1979)
Hitchcock (1950)
25
-------
(4) Physiological adaptations. Physiological adaptations
include any features of the metabolic processes of plants
that make them particularly fitted for life in saturated
soil conditions. NOTE: It is impossible to detect the
presence of physiological adaptations in plant species
during onsite visits. Physiological adaptations known for
hydrophytic species and species known to exhibit these
adaptations are listed and discussed in Appendix C,
Section 3.
(5) Reproductive adaptations. Some plant species have repro-
ductive features that enable them to become established
and grow in saturated soil conditions. Reproductive adap-
tations known for hydrophytic species are presented in
Appendix C, Section 3.
Hydric Soils
Definition
36. A hydric soil is a soil that is saturated, flooded, or ponded long
enough during the growing season to develop anaerobic conditions that favor
the growth and regeneration of hydrophytic vegetation (US Department of
Agriculture (USDA) Soil Conservation Service (SCS) 1985, as amended by the
National Technical Committee for Hydric Soils (NTCHS) in December 1986).
Criteria for hydric soils
37. Based on the above definition, the NTCHS developed the following
criteria for hydric soils:
a.. "All Histosols* except Folists;
]j. Soils in Aquic suborders, Aquic subgroups, Albolls suborder,
Salorthids great group, or Pell great groups of Vertisols that
are:
(1) Somewhat poorly drained and have a water table less than
0.5 ft** from the surface for a significant period
(usually a week or more) during the growing season, or
(2) Poorly drained or very poorly drained and have either:
(a) A water table at less than 1.0 ft from the surface
for a significant period (usually a week or more)
during the growing season if permeability is equal to
or greater than 6.0 in/hr in all layers within
20 inches; or
* Soil nomenclature follows USDA-SCS (1975).
** A table of factors for converting non-Si units of measurement to SI
(metric) units is presented on page 4.
26
-------
(b) A water table at less than 1.5 ft from the surface
for a significant period (usually a week or more)
during the growing season if permeability is less
than 6.0 in/hr in any layer within 20 inches; or
c. Soils that are ponded for long or very long duration during the
growing season; or
d_. Soils that are frequently flooded for long duration or very
long duration during the growing season."
A hydric soil may be either drained or undrained, and a drained hydric soil
may not continue to support hydrophytic vegetation. Therefore, not all areas
having hydric soils will qualify as wetlands. Only when a hydric soil sup-
ports hydrophytic vegetation and the area has indicators of wetland hydrology
may the soil be referred to as a "wetland" soil.
38. A drained hydric soil is one in which sufficient ground or surface
water has been removed by artificial means such that the area will no longer
support hydrophyte vegetation. Onsite evidence of drained soils includes:
a. Presence of ditches or canals of sufficient depth to lower the
water table below the major portion of the root zone of the
prevalent vegetation.
b_. Presence of dikes, levees, or similar structures that obstruct
normal inundation of an area.
c_. Presence of a tile system to promote subsurface drainage.
d. Diversion of upland surface runoff from an area.
Although it is important to record such evidence of drainage of an area, a
hydric soil that has been drained or partially drained still allows the soil
parameter to be met. However, the area will not qualify as a wetland if the
degree of drainage has been sufficient to preclude the presence of either
hydrophytic vegetation or a hydrologic regime that occurs in wetlands. NOTE:
the mere presence of drainage structures -in an area is not sufficient basis
for concluding that a hydric soil has been drained; such areas may continue to
have wetland hydrology.
General information
39. Soils consist of unconsolidated, natural material that supports, or
is capable of supporting, plant life. The upper limit is air and the lower
limit is either bedrock or the limit of biological activity. Some soils have
very little organic matter (mineral soils), while others are composed pri-
marily of organic matter (Histosols). The relative proportions of particles
(sand, silt, clay, and organic matter) in a soil are influenced by many
27
-------
interacting environmental factors. As normally defined, a soil must support
plant life. The concept is expanded to include substrates that could support
plant life. For various reasons, plants may be absent from areas that have
well-defined soils.
40. A soil profile (Figure 2) consists of various soil layers described
from the surface downward. Most soils have two or more identifiable horizons.
A soil horizon is a layer oriented approximately parallel to the soil surface,
and usually is differentiated from contiguous horizons by characteristics that
can be seen or measured in the field (e.g., color, structure, texture, etc.).
Most mineral soils have A-, B-, and C-horizons, and many have surficial
organic layers (0-horizon). The A-horizon, the surface soil or topsoil, is a
ORGANIC
HORIZONS
MINERAL
HORIZONS
01
02
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
B3
DESCRIPTION
ORGANIC MATTER CONSISTING OF VISIBLE VEGETATIVE MATTER.
ORGANIC MATTER IN A FORM WHERE INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS
ARE UNRECOGNIZABLE TO THE NAKED EYE.
DECOMPOSED ORGANIC MATTER MIXED WITH MINERAL MATTER
AND COATING MINERAL PARTICLES, RESULTING IN DARKER COLOR
OF THE SOIL MASS. USUALLY THIN IN FOREST SOILS AND THICK
IN GRASSLAND SOILS.
ZONE WHERE CLAY, IRON, OR ALUMINUM IS LOST. GENERALLY
LIGHTER IN COLOR AND LOWER IN ORGANIC MATTER CONTENT
THAN THE A1 HORIZON.
I THESE HORIZONS ARE TRANSITIONAL BETWEEN THE A AND B
IHORIZONS.
[THE A3 HORIZON HAS PROPERTIES MORE LIKE A THAN B. THE
J B1 HORIZON HAS PROPERTIES MORE LIKE B THAN A.
ZONE WHERE THE SOIL LACKS PROPERTIES OF THE OVERLYING A AND
UNDERLYING C HORIZONS. GENERALLY THE ZONE OF MAXIMUM CLAY
CONTENT AND SOIL STRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT.
ZONE OF TRANSITION BETWEEN THE B AND C OR R HORIZONS,
BUT WITH PREDOMINANT CHARACTERISTICS OF THE B HORIZON.
A MINERAL LAYER, EXCLUSIVE OF BEDROCK, THAT HAS BEEN
RELATIVELY LITTLE AFFECTED BY SOIL-FORMING PROCESSES
AND LACKS PROPERTIES OF EITHER THE A OR B HORIZONS,
BUT WHICH CONSISTS OF MATERIALS WEATHERED BELOW
THE ZONE OF BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY.
CONSOLIDATED BEDROCK, WHICH IS NOT NECESSARILY THE
SOURCE OF MINERAL MATTER FROM WHICH THE SOIL FORMED.
Figure 2. Generalized soil profile
28
-------
zone in which organic matter is usually being added to the mineral soil. It
is also the zone from which both mineral and organic matter are being moved
slowly downward. The next major horizon is the B-horizon, often referred to
as the subsoil. The B-horizon is the zone of maximum accumulation of mate-
rials. It is usually characterized by higher clay content and/or more pro-
nounced soil structure development and lower organic matter than the
A-horizon. The next major horizon is usually the C-horizon, which consists of
unconsolidated parent material that has not been sufficiently weathered to
exhibit characteristics of the B-horizon. Clay content and degree of soil
structure development in the C-horizon are usually less than in the B-horizon.
The lowest major horizon, the R-horizon, consists of consolidated bedrock. In
many situations, this horizon occurs at such depths that it has no significant
influence on soil characteristics.
Influencing factors
41. Although all soil-forming factors (climate, parent material,
relief, organisms, and time) affect the characteristics of a hydric soil, the
overriding influence is the hydrologic regime. The unique characteristics of
hydric soils result from the influence of periodic or permanent inundation or
soil saturation for sufficient duration to effect anaerobic conditions. Pro-
longed anaerobic soil conditions lead to a reducing environment, thereby
lowering the soil redox potential. This results in chemical reduction of some
soil components (e.g. iron and manganese oxides), which leads to development
of soil colors and other physical characteristics that usually are indicative
of hydric soils.
Classification
42. Hydric soils occur in several categories of the current soil clas-
sification system, which is published in Soil Taxonomy (USDA-SCS 1975). This
classification system is based on physical and chemical properties of soils
that can be seen, felt, or measured. Lower taxonomic categories of the system
(e.g. soil series and soil phases) remain relatively unchanged from earlier
classification systems.
43. Hydric soils may be classified into two broad categories: organic
and mineral. Organic soils (Histosols) develop under conditions of nearly
continuous saturation and/or inundation. All organic soils are hydric soils
except Folists, which are freely drained soils occurring on dry slopes where
excess litter accumulates over bedrock. Organic hydric soils are commonly
29
-------
known as peats and mucks. All other hydric soils are mineral soils. Mineral
soils have a wide range of textures (sandy to clayey) and colors (red to
gray). Mineral hydric soils are those periodically saturated for sufficient
duration to produce chemical and physical soil properties associated with a
reducing environment. They are usually gray and/or mottled immediately below
the surface horizon (see paragraph 44d), or they have thick, dark-colored
surface layers overlying gray or mottled subsurface horizons.
Wetland indicators (nonsandy soils)
44. Several indicators are available for determining whether a given
soil meets the definition and criteria for hydric soils. Any one of the
following indicates that hydric soils are present:*
a. Organic soils (Histosols). A soil is an organic soil when:
(1) more than 50 percent (by volume) of the upper 32 inches of
soil is composed of organic soil material;** or (2) organic
soil material of any thickness rests on bedrock. Organic soils
(Figure 3) are saturated for long periods and are commonly
called peats or mucks.
b_. Histic epipedons. A histic epipedon is an 8- to 16-inch layer
at or near the surface of a mineral hydric soil that is satu-
rated with water for 30 consecutive days or more in most years
and contains a minimum of 20 percent organic matter when no
clay is present or a minimum of 30 percent organic matter when
clay content is 60 percent or greater. Soils with histic
epipedons are inundated or saturated for sufficient periods to
greatly retard aerobic decomposition of the organic surface,
and are considered to be hydric soils.
£. Sulfidic material. When mineral soils emit an odor of rotten
eggs, hydrogen sulfide is present. Such odors are only
detected in waterlogged soils that are permanently saturated
and have sulfidic material within a few centimetres of the soil
surface. Sulfides are produced only in a reducing environment.
d. Aquic or peraquic moisture regime. An aquic moisture regime is
a reducing one; i.e., it is virtually free of dissolved oxygen
because the soil is saturated by ground water or by water of
the capillary fringe (USDA-SCS 1975). Because dissolved oxygen
is removed from ground water by respiration of microorganisms,
roots, and soil fauna, it is also implicit that the soil tem-
perature is above biologic zero (5° C) at some time while the
* Indicators are listed in order of decreasing reliability. Although all
are valid indicators, some are stronger indicators than others. When a
decision is based on an indicator appearing in the lower portion of the
list, re-evaluate the parameter to ensure that the proper decision was
reached.
** A detailed definition of organic soil material is available in USDA-SCS
(1975).
30
-------
soil is saturated. Soils with peraquic moisture regimes are
characterized by the presence of ground water always at or near
the soil surface. Examples include soils of tidal marshes and
soils of closed, landlocked depressions that are fed by perma-
nent streams.
Reducing soil conditions. Soils saturated for long or very
long duration will usually exhibit reducing conditions. Under
such conditions, ions of iron are transformed from a ferric
valence state to a ferrous valence state. This condition can
often be detected in the field by a ferrous iron test. A
simple colorimetric field test kit has been developed for this
purpose. When a soil extract changes to a pink color upon
addition of a-a-dipyridil, ferrous iron is present, which
indicates a reducing soil environment. NOTE: This test cannot
be used in mineral hydric soils having low iron content,
organic soils, and soils that have been desaturated for signif-
icant periods of the growing season.
Soil colors. The colors of various soil components are often
the most diagnostic indicator of hydric soils. Colors of these
components are strongly influenced by the frequency and dura-
tion of soil saturation, which leads to reducing soil condi-
tions. Mineral hydric soils will be either gleyed or will have
bright mottles and/or low matrix chroma. These are discussed
below:
(1) Gleyed soils (gray colors). Gleyed soils develop when
anaerobic soil conditions result in pronounced chemical
reduction of iron, manganese, and other elements, thereby
producing gray soil colors. Anaerobic conditions that oc-
cur in waterlogged soils result in the predominance of re-
duction processes, and such soils are greatly reduced.
Iron is one of the most abundant elements in soils. Under
anaerobic conditions, iron in converted from the oxidized
(ferric) state to the reduced (ferrous) state, which re-
sults in the bluish, greenish, or grayish colors asso-
ciated with the gleying effect (Figure 4). Gleying imme-
diately below the A-horizon or 10 inches (whichever is
shallower) is an indication of a markedly reduced soil,
and gleyed soils are hydric soils. Gleyed soil conditions
can be determined by using the gley page of the Munsell
Color Book (Munsell Color 1975).
(2) Soils with bright mottles and/or low matrix chroma.
Mineral hydric soils that are saturated for substantial
periods of the growing season (but not long enough to
produce gleyed soils) will either have bright mottles and
a low matrix chroma or will lack mottles but have a low
matrix chroma (see Appendix D, Section 1, for a definition
and discussion of "chroma" and other components of soil
color). Mottled means "marked with spots of contrasting
color." Soils that have brightly colored mottles and a
low matrix chroma are indicative of a fluctuating water
table. The soil matrix is the portion (usually more than
50 percent) of a given soil layer that has the predominant
31
-------
color (Figure 5). Mineral hydric soils usually have one
of the following color features in the horizon immediately
below the A-horizon or 10 inches (whichever is shallower):
(a) Matrix chroma of 2 or less* in mottled soils.
(b) Matrix chroma of 1 or less* in unmottled soils.
NOTE: The matrix chroma of some dark (black) mineral hydric
soils will not conform to the criteria described in (a) and (b)
above; in such soils, gray mottles occurring at 10 inches or
less are indicative of hydric conditions.
CAUTION: Soils with significant coloration due to the nature
of the parent material (e.g. red soils of the Fed River Valley)
may not exhibit the above characteristics. In such cases, this
indicator cannot be used.
£. Soil appearing on hydric soils list. Using the criteria for
hydric soils (paragraph 37), the NTCHS has developed a list of
hydric soils. Listed soils have reducing conditions for a
significant portion of the growing season in a manor portion of
the root zone and are frequently saturated within 12 inches of
the soil surface. The NTCHS list of hydric soils is presented
in Appendix D, Section 2. CAUTION: Be sure that the profile
description of the mapping unit conforms to that of the sampled
soil.
h. Iron and manganese concretions. During the oxidation-reduction
process, iron and manganese in suspension are sometimes segre-
gated as oxides into concretions or soft masses (Figure 6).
These accumulations are usually black or dark brown. Concre-
tions >2 mm in diameter occurring within 7.5 cm of the surface
are evidence that the soil is saturated for long periods near
the surface.
Wetland indicators (sandy soils)
45. Not all indicators listed in paragraph 44 can be applied to sandy
soils. In particular, soil color should not be used as an indicator in most
sandy soils. However, three additional soil features may be used as indica-
tors of sandy hydric soils, including:
a. High organic matter content in the surface horizon. Organic
matter tends to accumulate above or in the surface horizon of
sandy soils that are inundated or saturated to the surface for
a significant portion of the growing season. Prolonged inunda-
tion or saturation creates anaerobic conditions that greatly
reduce oxidation of organic matter.
b. Streaking of subsurface horizons by organic matter. Organic
~~ matter is moved downward through sand as the water table
* Colors should be determined in soils that have been moistened; otherwise,
state that colors are for dry soils.
32
-------
Figure 3. Organic soil
Figure 5. Soil showing
matrix (brown) and mottles
(reddish-brown)
Figure 4. Gleyed soil
Figure 6. Iron and manganese
concretions
33
-------
fluctuates. This often occurs more rapidly and to a greater
degree in some vertical sections of a sandy soil containing
high content of organic matter than in others. Thus, the sandy
soil appears vertically streaked with darker areas. When soil
from a darker area is rubbed between the fingers, the organic
matter stains the fingers.
£. Organic pans. As organic matter is moved downward through
sandy soils, it tends to accumulate at the point representing
the most commonly occurring depth to the water table. This
organic matter tends to become slightly cemented with aluminum,
forming a thin layer of hardened soil (spodic horizon). These
horizons often occur at depths of 12 to 30 inches below the
mineral surface. Wet spodic soils usually have thick dark sur-
face horizons that are high in organic matter with dull, gray
horizons above the spodic horizon.
CAUTION: In recently deposited sandy material (e.g. accreting sandbars), it
may be impossible to find any of these indicators. In such cases, consider
this as a natural atypical situation.
Wetland Hydrology
Definition
46. The term "wetland hydrology" encompasses all hydrologic character-
istics of areas that are periodically inundated or have soils saturated to the
surface at some time during the growing season. Areas with evident character-
istics of wetland hydrology are those where the presence of water has an over-
riding influence on characteristics of vegetation and soils due to anaerobic
and reducing conditions, respectively. Such characteristics are usually
present in areas that are inundated or have soils that are saturated to the
surface for sufficient duration to develop hydric soils and support vegetation
typically adapted for life in periodically anaerobic soil conditions. Hydrol-
ogy is often the least exact of the parameters, and indicators of wetland
hydrology are sometimes difficult to find in the field. However, it is essen-
tial to establish that a wetland area is periodically inundated or has satu-
rated soils during the growing season.
Influencing factors
47. Numerous factors (e.g., precipitation, stratigraphy, topography,
soil permeability, and plant cover) influence the wetness of an area. Regard-
less, the characteristic common to all wetlands is the presence of an abundant
supply of water. The water source may be runoff from direct precipitation,
34
-------
headwater or backwater flooding, tidal influence, ground water, or some com-
bination of these sources. The frequency and duration of inundation or soil
saturation varies from nearly permanently inundated or saturated to irregu-
larly inundated or saturated. Topographic position, stratigraphy, and soil
permeability influence both the frequency and duration of inundation and soil
saturation. Areas of lower elevation in a floodplain or marsh have more fre-
quent periods of inundation and/or greater duration than most areas at higher
elevations. Floodplain configuration may significantly affect duration of
inundation. When the floodplain configuration is conducive to rapid runoff,
the influence of frequent periods of inundation on vegetation and soils may be
reduced. Soil permeability also influences duration of inundation and soil
saturation. For example, clayey soils absorb water more slowly than sandy or
loamy soils, and therefore have slower permeability and remain saturated much
longer. Type and amount of plant cover affect both degree of inundation and
duration of saturated soil conditions. Excess water drains more slowly in
areas of abundant plant cover, thereby increasing frequency and duration of
inundation and/or soil saturation. On the other hand, transpiration rates are
higher in areas of abundant plant cover, which may reduce the duration of soil
saturation.
Classification
48. Although the interactive effects of all hydrologic factors produce
a continuum of wetland hydrologic regimes, efforts have been made to classify
wetland hydrologic regimes into functional categories. These efforts have
focused on the use of frequency, timing, and duration of inundation or soil
saturation as a basis for classification. A classification system developed
for nontidal areas is presented in Table 5. This classification system was
slightly modified from the system developed by the Workshop on Bottomland
Hardwood Forest Wetlands of the Southeastern United States (Clark and
Benforado 1981). Recent research indicates that duration of inundation and/or
soil saturation during the growing season is more influential on the plant
community than frequency of inundation/saturation during the growing season
(Theriot, in press). Thus, frequency of inundation and soil saturation are
not included in Table 5. The WES has developed a computer program that can be
used to transform stream gage data to mean sea level elevations representing
35
-------
Table 5
Hydrologic Zones* - Nontidal Areas
Zone
Name
it Permanently inundated
II Semipermanently to nearly
permanently inundated or
saturated
III Regularly inundated or
saturated
IV Seasonally inundated or
saturated
V Irregularly inundated or
saturated
VI Intermittently or never
inundated or saturated
Duration**
100%
Comments
Inundation >6.6 ft mean
water depth
>75% - <100% Inundation defined as
<6.6 ft mean water depth
>25% - 75%
>12.5% - 25%
>5% - 12.5% Many areas having these
hydrologic characteristics
are not wetlands
<5% Areas with these hydrologic
characteristics are not
wetlands
* Zones adapted from Clark and Benforado (1981).
** Refers to duration of inundation and/or soil saturation during the growing
season.
t This defines an aquatic habitat zone.
the upper limit of each hydrologic zone shown in Table 5. This program is
available upon request.*
Wetland indicators
49. Indicators of wetland hydrology may include, but are not neces-
sarily limited to: drainage patterns, drift lines, sediment deposition,
watermarks, stream gage data and flood predictions, historic records, visual
observation of saturated soils, and visual observation of inundation. Any of
these indicators may be evidence of wetland hydrologic characteristics.
Methods for determining hydrologic indicators can be categorized according to
the type of indicator. Recorded data include stream gage data, lake gage
data, tidal gage data, flood predictions, and historical records. Use of
these data is commonly limited to areas adjacent to streams or other similar
* R. F. Theriot, Environmental Laboratory, US Army Engineer Waterways
Experiment Station, P.O. Box 631, Vicksburg, Miss. 39180.
36
-------
areas. Recorded data usually provide both short
about frequency and duration of inundation, but
tion about soil saturation, which must be gained
similar sources. The remaining indicators requi
indicators are evidence of present or past hydro
and height of flooding). Indicators for recorded
include:*
a. Recorded data. Stream gage data,
- and long-term information
contain little or no informa-
from soil surveys or other
re field observations. Field
Logic events (e.g. location
data and field observations
data, flood predictions, and
from the following sources:
historical
(1) CE District Offices. Most C
lake, and tidal gage records
their area. In addition, CE
often contain valuable hydro
pie, a General Design Memora
flooding frequencies and
durations
Furthermore, the extent of f
is sometimes indicated in th
(height) of certain flood fr
10-year, etc.).
(2) US Geological Survey (USGS).
are available from the USGS
and the latter are also avai
Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
often have such records.
(3) State, county, and local ageicies. These agencies often
have responsibility for floop
insurance.
(4) Soil Conservation Service Smill Watershed Projects. Plan-
ning documents from this
be obtained from the SCS dis
(5) Planning documents of developers
b. Field data. The following field
assessed quickly, and although softe
indicative of hydrologic events
growing season, they do provide e
soil saturation has occurred:
(1) Visual observation of inunda
indicator
revealing hydrologic
areal extent of inundation.
lake gage data, tidal gage
,>--!^oi data may be available
E Districts maintain stream,
for major water bodies in
planning and design documents
logic information. For exam-
ndum (GDM) usually describes
for a project area.
looding within a project area
e GDM according to elevation
equencies (1-, 2-, 5-,
Stream and tidal gage data
Dffices throughout the Nation,
able from the National
CE Districts
control/relief and flood
ageticy are often helpful, and can
:rict office in the county.
lydrologic indicators can be
of them are not necessarily
occur only during the
ridence that inundation and/or
that
:ion. The most obvious and
may be simply observing the
However, because seasonal
Indicators are listed in order of decreasing reliability. Although all are
valid indicators, some are stronger indicators than others. When a decision
is based on an indicator appearing in the lower portion of the list,
re-evaluate the parameter to ensure that the proper decision was reached.
37
-------
conditions and recent weather conditions can contribute to
surface water being present on a nonwetland site, both
should be considered when applying this indicator.
(2) Visual observation of soil saturation. Examination of
this indicator requires digging a soil pit (Appendix D,
Section 1) to a depth of 16 inches and observing the level
at which water stands in the hole after sufficient time
has been allowed for water to drain into the hole. The
required time will vary depending on soil texture. In
some cases, the upper level at which water is flowing into
the pit can be observed by examining the wall of the hole.
This level represents the depth to the water table. The
depth to saturated soils will always be nearer the surface
due to the capillary fringe. For soil saturation to im-
pact vegetation, it must occur within a major portion of
the root zone (usually within 12 inches of the surface) of
the prevalent vegetation. The major portion of the root
zone is that portion of the soil profile in which more
than one half of the plant roots occur. CAUTION: In some
heavy clay soils, water may not rapidly accumulate in the
hole even when the soil is saturated. If water is
observed at the bottom of the hole but has not filled to
the 12-inch depth, examine the sides of the hole and de-
termine the shallowest depth at which water is entering
the hole. When applying this indicator, both the season
of the year and preceding weather conditions must be
considered.
(3) Watermarks. Watermarks are most common on woody vegeta-
tion. They occur as stains on bark (Figure 7) or other
fixed objects (e.g. bridge pillars, buildings, fences,
etc.). When several watermarks are present, the
highest reflects the maximum extent of recent inundation.
(4) Drift lines. This indicator is most likely to be found
adjacent to streams or other sources of water flow in
wetlands, but also often occurs in tidal marshes. Evi-
dence consists of deposition of debris in a line on the
surface (Figure 8) or debris entangled in aboveground
vegetation or other fixed objects. Debris usually con-
sists of remnants of vegetation (branches, stems, and
leaves), sediment, litter, and other waterborne materials
deposited parallel to the direction of water flow. Drift
lines provide an indication of the minimum portion of the
area inundated during a flooding event; the maximum level
of inundation is generally at a higher elevation than that
indicated by a drift line.
(5) Sediment deposits. Plants and other vertical objects
often have thin layers, coatings, or depositions of min-
eral or organic matter on them after inundation (Fig-
ure 9). This evidence may remain for a considerable
period before it is removed by precipitation or subsequent
inundation. Sediment deposition on vegetation and other
38
-------
Figure 7. Watermark on
trees
Figure 8. Absence of leaf
litter and drift line
(extreme left)
Figure 9. Sediment deposit on
plants
Figure 10. Encrusted detritus
39
-------
Figure 11. Drainage pattern
Figure 12. Debris deposited
in stream channel
40
-------
objects provides an indication of the minimum inundation
level. When sediments are primarily organic (e.g. fine
organic material, algae), the detritus may become
encrusted on or slightly above the soil surface after
dewatering occurs (Figure 10).
(6) Drainage patterns within wetlands. This indicator, which
occurs primarily in wetlands adjacent to streams, consists
of surface evidence of drainage flow into or through an
area (Figure 11). In some wetlands, this evidence may
exist as a drainage pattern eroded into the soil, vegeta-
tive matter (debris) piled against thick vegetation or
woody stems oriented perpendicular to the direction of
water flow, or the absence of leaf litter (Figure 8).
Scouring is often evident around roots of persistent vege-
tation. Debris may be deposited in or along the drainage
pattern (Figure 12). CAUTION: Drainage patterns also
occur in upland areas after periods of considerable pre-
cipitation; therefore, topographic position must also be
considered when applying this indicator.
41
-------
PART IV: METHODS
Section A. Introduction
50. PART IV contains sections on preliminary data gathering, method
selection, routine determination procedures, comprehensive determination
procedures, methods for determinations in atypical situations, and guidance
for wetland determinations in natural situations where the three-parameter
approach may not always apply.
51. Significant flexibility has been incorporated into PART IV. The
user is presented in Section B with various potential sources of information
that may be helpful in making a determination, but not all identified sources
of information may be applicable to a given situation. Note: The user is not
required to obtain information from all identified sources. Flexibility is
also provided in method selection (Section C). Three levels of routine deter-
minations are available, depending on the complexity of the required determi-
nation and the quantity and quality of existing information. Application of
methods presented in both Section D (routine determinations) and Section E
(comprehensive determinations) may be tailored to meet site-specific require-
ments, especially with respect to sampling design.
52. Methods presented in Sections D and E vary with respect to the
required level of technical knowledge and experience of the user. Application
of the qualitative methods presented in Section D (routine determinations)
requires considerably less technical knowledge and experience than does appli-
cation of the quantitative methods presented in Section E (comprehensive
determinations). The user must at least be able to identify the dominant
plant species in the project area when making a routine determination
(Section D), and should have some basic knowledge of hydric soils when employ-
ing routine methods that require soils examination. Comprehensive determina-
tions require a basic understanding of sampling principles and the ability to
identify all commonly occurring plant species in a project area, as well as a
good understanding of indicators of hydric soils and wetland hydrology. The
comprehensive method should only be employed by experienced field inspectors.
42
-------
Section B. Preliminary Data Gathering and Synthesis
53. This section discusses potential sources of information that may be
helpful in making a wetland determination. When the routine approach is used,
it may often be possible to make a wetland determination based on available
vegetation, soils, and hydrology data for the area. However, this section
deals only with identifying potential information sources, extracting perti-
nent data, and synthesizing the data for use in making a determination. Based
on the quantity and quality of available information and the approach selected
for use (Section C), the user is referred to either Section D or Section E for
the actual determination. Completion of Section B is not required, but is
recommended because the available information may reduce or eliminate the need
for field effort and decrease the time and cost of making a determination.
However, there are instances in small project areas in which the time required
to obtain the information may be prohibitive. In such cases PROCEED to
paragraph 55, complete STEPS 1 through 3, and PROCEED to Section D or E.
Data sources
54. Obtain the following information, when available and applicable:
a. USGS quadrangle maps. USGS quadrangle maps are available at
different scales. When possible, obtain maps at a scale of
1:24,000; otherwise, use maps at a scale of 1:62,500. Such
maps are available from USGS in Reston, Va., and Menlo Park,
Calif., but they may already be available in the CE District
Office. These maps provide several types of information:
(1) Assistance in locating field sites. Towns, minor roads,
bridges, streams, and other landmark features (e.g.
buildings, cemeteries, water bodies, etc.) not commonly
found on road maps are shown on these maps.
(2) Topographic details, including contour lines (usually at
5- or 10-ft contour intervals).
(3) General delineation of wet areas (swamps and marshes).
Note: The actual wet area may be greater than that shown
on the map because USGS generally maps these areas based
on the driest season of the year.
(4) Latitude, longitude, townships, ranges, and sections.
These provide legal descriptions of the area.
(5) Directions, including both true and magnetic north.
(6) Drainage patterns.
43
-------
(7) General land uses, such as cleared (agriculture or
pasture), forested, or urban.
CAUTION: Obtain the most recent USGS maps. Older maps may
show features that no longer exist and will not show new fea-
tures that have developed since the map was constructed. Also,
USGS is currently changing the mapping scale from 1:24,000 to
1:25,000.
b. National Wetlands Inventory products.
(1) Wetland maps. The standard NWI maps are at a scale of
1:24,000 or, where USGS base maps at this scale are not
available, they are at 1:62,500 (1:63,350 in Alaska).
Smaller scale maps ranging from 1:100,000 to 1:500,000 are
also available for certain areas. Wetlands on NWI maps
are classified in accordance with Cowardin et al. (1979).
CAUTION: Since not all delineated areas on NWI maps are
wetlands under Department of Army jurisdiction, NWI maps
should not be used as the sole basis for determining
whether wetland vegetation is present. NWI "User Notes"
are available that correlate the classification system
with local wetland community types. An important feature
of this classification system is the water regime modi-
fier, which describes the flooding or soil saturation
characteristics. Wetlands classified as having a tempo-
rarily flooded or intermittently flooded water regime
should be viewed with particular caution since this
designation is indicative of plant communities that are
transitional between wetland and nonwetland. These are
among the most difficult plant communities to map accur-
ately from aerial photography. For wetlands "wetter" than
temporarily flooded and intermittently flooded, the prob-
ability of a designated map unit on recent NWI maps being
a wetland (according to Cowardin et al. 1979) at the time
of the photography is in excess of 90 percent. CAUTION:
Due to the scale of o.erial photography used and other
factors, all NWI map boundaries are approximate. The
optimum use of NWI maps is to plan field review (i.e. how
wet, big, or diverse is the area?) and to assist during
field review, particularly by showing the approximate
areal extent of the wetland and its association with other
communities. NWI maps are available either as a composite
with, or an overlay for, USGS base maps and may be
obtained from the NWI Central Office in St. Petersburg,
Fla., the Wetland Coordinator at each FWS regional
office, or the USGS.
(2) Plant database. This database of approximately
5,200 plant species that occur in wetlands provides infor-
mation (e.g., ranges, habitat, etc.) about each plant
species from the technical literature. The database
served as a focal point for development of a national list
of plants that occur in wetlands (Appendix C, Section 1).
44
-------
c. Soil surveys. Soil surveys are prepared by the SCS for politi-
cal units (county, parish, etc.) in a state. Soil surveys
contain several types of information:
(1) General information (e.g. climate, settlement, natural
resources, farming, geology, general vegetation types).
(2) Soil maps for general and detailed planning purposes.
These maps are usually generated from fairly recent aerial
photography. CAUTION: The smallest mapping unit is
Z acres, and a given soil series as mapped may contain
small inclusions of other series.
(3) Uses and management of soils. Any wetness characteristics
of soils will be mentioned here.
(4) Soil properties. Soil and water features are provided
that may be very helpful for wetland investigations. Fre-
quency, duration, and timing of inundation (when present)
are described for each soil type. Water table character-
istics that provide valuable information about soil satu-
ration are also described. Soil permeability coefficients
may also be available.
(5) Soil classification. Soil series and phases are usually
provided. Published soil surveys will not always be
available for the area. If not, contact the county SCS
office and determine whether the soils have been mapped.
d_. Stream and tidal gage data. These documents provide records of
tidal and stream flow events. They are available from either
the USGS or CE District office.
£. Environmental impact assessments (EIAs), environmental impact
statements (EISs), general design memoranda (GDM), and other
similar publications. These documents may be available from
Federal agencies for an area that includes the project area.
They may contain some indication of the location and character-
istics of wetlands consistent with the required criteria (vege-
tation, soils, and hydrology), and often contain flood fre-
quency and duration data.
f_. Documents and maps from State, county, or local governments.
Regional maps that characterize certain areas (e.g., potholes,
coastal areas, or basins) may be helpful because they indicate
the type and character of wetlands.
j>. Remote sensing. Remote sensing is one of the most useful
information sources available for wetland identification and
delineation. Recent aerial photography, particularly color
infrared, provides a detailed view of an area; thus, recent
land use and other features (e.g. general type and areal extent
of plant communities and degree of inundation of the area when
the photography was taken) can be determined. The multiagency
cooperative National High Altitude Aerial Photography Program
(HAP) has l:59,000-scale color infrared photography for approx-
imately 85 percent (December 1985) of the coterminous United
States from 1980 to 1985. This photography has excellent
45
-------
resolution and can be ordered enlarged to 1:24,000 scale from
USGS. Satellite images provide similar information as aerial
photography, although the much smaller scale makes observation
of detail more difficult without sophisticated equipment and
extensive training. Satellite images provide more recent
coverage than aerial photography (usually at 18-day intervals).
Individual satellite images are more expensive than aerial
photography, but are not as expensive as having an area flown
and photographed at low altitudes. However, better resolution
imagery is now available with remote sensing equipment mounted
on fixed-wing aircraft.
h. Local individuals and experts. Individuals having personal
knowledge of an area may sometimes provide a reliable and
readily available source of information about the area, partic-
ularly information on the wetness of the area.
i.. USGS land use and land cover maps. Maps created by USGS using
remotely sensed data and a geographical information system
provide a systematic and comprehensive collection and analysis
of land use and land cover on a national basis. Maps at a
scale of 1:250,000 are available as overlays that show land use
and land cover according to nine basic levels. One level is
wetlands (as determined by the FWS), which is further sub-
divided into forested and nonforested areas. Five other sets
of maps show political units, hydrologic units, census sub-
divisions of counties, Federal land ownership, and State land
ownership. These maps can be obtained from any USGS mapping
center.
j_. Applicant's survey plans and engineering designs. In many
cases, the permit applicant will already have had the area sur-
veyed (often at 1-ft contours or less) and will also have engi-
neering designs for the proposed activity.
Data synthesis
55. When employing Section B procedures, use the above sources of
information to complete the following steps:
STEP 1 - Identify the Project Area on a Map. Obtain a USGS qua-
drangle map (1:24,000) or other appropriate map, and locate the area
identified in the permit application. PROCEED TO STEP 2.
STEP 2 - Prepare a Base Map. Mark the project area boundaries on the
map. Either use the selected map as the base map or trace the area on
a mylar overlay, including prominent landscape features (e.g., roads,
buildings, drainage patterns, etc.). If possible, obtain diazo copies
of the resulting base map. PROCEED TO STEP 3.
STEP 3 - Determine Size of the Project Area. Measure the area
boundaries and calculate the size of the area. PROCEED TO STEP 4 OR TO
SECTION D OR E IF SECTION B IS NOT USED.
46
-------
STEP 4 - Summarize Available Information on Vegetation. Examine
available sources that contain information about the area vegetation.
Consider the following:
a, USGS quadrangle maps. Is the area shown as a marsh or swamp?
CAUTION: Do not use this as the sole basis for determining
that hydrophytic vegetation is present.
b_. NWI overlays or maps. Do the overlays or maps indicate that
hydrophytic vegetation occurs in the area? If so, identify the
vegetation type(s).
£. EIAs, EISs, or GDMs that include the project area. Extract any
vegetation data that pertain to the area.
ci. Federal, State, or local government documents that contain
information about the area vegetation. Extract appropriate
data.
£. Recent (within last 5 years) aerial photography of the area.
Can the area plant community type(s) be determined from the
photography? Extract appropriate data.
£. Individuals or experts having knowledge of the area vegetation.
Contact them and obtain any appropriate information. CAUTION:
Ensure that the individual providing the information has
firsthand knowledge of the area.
£. Any published scientific studies of the area plant communities.
Extract any appropriate data.
h. Previous wetland determinations made for the area. Extract any
pertinent vegetation data.
When the above have been considered, PROCEED TO STEP 5.
STEP 5 - Determine Whether the Vegetation in the Project Area Is Ade-
quately Characterized. Examine the summarized data (STEP 4) and deter-
mine whether the area plant communities are adequately characterized.
For routine determinations, the plant community type(s) and the domi-
nant species in each vegetation layer of each community type must be
known. Dominant species are those that have the largest relative basal
area (overstory),* height (woody understory), number of stems (woody
vines), or greatest areal cover (herbaceous understory). For compre-
hensive determinations, each plant community type present in the
* This term is used because species having the largest individuals may not be
dominant when only a few are present. To use relative basal area, consider
both the size and number of individuals of a species and subjectively
compare with other species present.
47
-------
project area area must have been quantitatively described within the
past 5 years using accepted sampling and analytical procedures, and
boundaries between community types must be known. Record information
on DATA FORM 1.* In either case, PROCEED TO Section F if there is
evidence of recent significant vegetation alteration due to human
activities or natural events. Otherwise, PROCEED TO STEP 6.
STEP 6 - Summarize Available Information on Area Soils. Examine
available information and describe the area soils. Consider the
following:
a.. County soil surveys. Determine the soil series present and
extract characteristics for each. CAUTION: Soil mapping units
sometimes include more than one soil series.
b_. Unpublished county soil maps. Contact the local SCS office and
determine whether soil maps are available for the area. Deter-
mine the soil series of the area, and obtain any available
information about possible hydric soil indicators (paragraph 44
or 45) for each soil series.
£. Published EIAs, EISs, or GDMs that include soils information.
Extract any pertinent information.
d_. Federal, State, and/or local government documents that contain
descriptions of the area soils. Summarize these data.
£. Published scientific studies that include area soils data.
Summarize these data.
f_. Previous wetland determinations for the area. Extract any
pertinent soils data.
When the above have been considered, PROCEED TO STEP 7.
STEP 7 - Determine Whether Soils of the Project Area Have Been Ade-
quately Characterized. Examine the summarized soils data and determine
whether the soils have been adequately characterized. For routine
determinations, the soil series must be known. For comprehensive
determinations, both the soil series and the boundary of each soil
series must be known. Record information on DATA FORM 1. In either
case, if there is evidence of recent significant soils alteration due
to human activities or natural events, PROCEED TO Section F. Other-
wise, PROCEED TO STEP 8.
STEP 8 - Summarize Available Hydrology Data. Examine available in-
formation and describe the area hydrology. Consider the following:
* A separate DATA FORM 1 must be used for each plant community type,
48
-------
a_. USGS quadrangle maps. Is there a significant, well-defined
drainage through the area? Is the area within a major flood-
plain or tidal area? What range of elevations occur in the
area, especially in relation to the elevation of the nearest
perennial watercourse?
b. NWI overlays or maps. Is the area shown as a wetland or
deepwater aquatic habitat? What is the water regime modifier?
£. EIAs, EISs, or GDMs that describe the project area. Extract
any pertinent hydrologic data.
cl. Floodplain management maps. These maps may be used to extrap-
olate elevations that can be expected to be inundated on a 1-,
2-, 3-year, etc., basis. Compare the elevations of these fea-
tures with the elevation range of the project area to determine
the frequency of inundation.
£. Federal, State, and local government documents (e.g. CE
floodplain management maps and profiles) that contain
hydrologic data. Summarize these data.
f_. Recent (within past 5 years) aerial photography that shows the
area to be inundated. Record the date of the photographic
mission.
£. Newspaper accounts of flooding events that indicate periodic
inundation of the area.
h. SCS County Soil Surveys that indicate the frequency and
duration of inundation and soil saturation for area soils.
CAUTION: Data provided only represent average conditions for a
particular soil series in its natural undrained state, and can-
not be used as a positive hydrologic indicator in areas that
have significantly altered hydrology.
i^ Tidal or stream gage data for a nearby water body that
apparently influences the area. Obtain the gage data and
complete (1) below if the routine approach is used, or
(2) below if the comprehensive approach is used (OMIT IF GAGING
STATION DATA ARE UNAVAILABLE):
(1) Routine approach. Determine the highest water level
elevation reached during the growing season for each of
the most recent 10 years of gage data. Rank these eleva-
tions in descending order and select the fifth highest
elevation. Combine this elevation with the mean sea level
elevation of the gaging station to produce a mean sea
level elevation for the highest water level reached every
other year. NOTE: Stream gage data are often presented
as flow rates in cubic feet per second. In these cases,
ask the CE District's Hydrology Branch to convert flow
rates to corresponding mean sea level elevations and
adjust gage data to the site. Compare the resulting ele-
vations reached biennially with the project area eleva-
tions. If the water level elevation exceeds the area
49
-------
elevation, the area is inundated during the growing season
on average at least biennially.
(2) Comprehensive approach. Complete the following:
(a) Decide whether hydrologic data reflect the apparent
hydrology. Data available from the gaging station
may or may not accurately reflect the area hydrology.
Answer the following questions:
Does the water level of the area appear to fluctu-
ate in a manner that differs from that of the water
body on which the gaging station is located? (In
ponded situations, the water level of the area is
usually higher than the water level at the gaging
station.)
Are less than 10 years of daily readings available
for the gaging station?
Do other water sources that would not be reflected
by readings at the gaging station appear to signif-
icantly affect the area? For example, do major
tributaries enter the stream or tidal area between
the area and gaging station?
If the answer to any of the above questions is YES,
the area hydrology cannot be determined from the
gaging station data. If the answer to all of the
above questions is NO, PROCEED TO (b).
(b) Analyze hydrologic data. Subject the hydrologic data
to appropriate analytical procedures. Either use
duration curves or a computer program developed by
WES (available from the Environmental Laboratory upon
request) for determining the mean sea level elevation
representing the upper limits of wetland hydrology.
In the latter case, when the site elevation is lower
than the mean sea level elevation representing a
5-percent duration of inundation and saturation dur-
ing the growing season, the area has a hydrologic
regime that may occur in wetlands. NOTE: Duration
curves do not reflect the period of soil saturation
following dewatering.
When all of the above have been considered, PROCEED TO STEP 9.
STEP 9 - Determine Whether Hydrology Is Adequately Characterized.
Examine the summarized data and determine whether the hydrology of the
project area is adequately characterized. For routine determinations,
there must be documented evidence of frequent inundation or soil sat-
uration during the growing season. For comprehensive determinations,
there must be documented quantitative evidence of frequent inundation
or soil saturation during the growing season, based on at least
50
-------
10 years of stream or tidal gage data. Record information on DATA
FORM 1. In either case, if there is evidence of recent significant
hydrologic alteration due to human activities or natural events, PRO-
CEED TO Section F. Otherwise, PROCEED TO Section C.
51
-------
Section C. Selection of Method
56. All wetland delineation methods described in this manual can be
grouped into two general types: routine and comprehensive. Routine deter-
minations (Section D) involve simple, rapidly applied methods that result in
sufficient qualitative data for making a determination. Comprehensive methods
(Section E) usually require significant time and effort to obtain the needed
quantitative data. The primary factor influencing method selection will
usually be the complexity of the required determination. However, comprehen-
sive methods may sometimes be selected for use in relatively simple determina-
tions when rigorous documentation is required.
57. Three levels of routine wetland determinations are described below.
Complexity of the project area and the quality and quantity of available
information will influence the level selected for use.
a.. Level 1 - Onsite Inspection Unnecessary. This level may be
employed when the information already obtained (Section B) is
sufficient for making a determination for the entire project
area (see Section D, Subsection 1).
b. Level 2 - Onsite Inspection Necessary. This level must be
employed when there is insufficient information already avail-
able to characterize the vegetation, soils, and hydrology
of the entire project area (see Section D, Subsection 2).
£. Level 3 - Combination of Levels 1 and 2. This level should be
used when there is sufficient information already available to
characterize the vegetation, soils, and hydrology of a portion,
but not all, of the project area. Methods described for
Level 1 may be applied to portions of the area for which ade-
quate information already exists, and onsite methods (Level 2)
must be applied to the remainder of the area (see Section D,
Subsection 3).
58. After considering all available information, select a tentative
method (see above) for use, and PROCEED TO EITHER Section D or E, as appropri-
ate. NOTE: Sometimes it may be necessary to change to another method de-
scribed in the manual, depending on the quality of available information
and/or recent changes in the project area.
52
-------
Section D. Routine Determinations
59. This section describes general procedures for making routine wet-
land determinations. It is assumed that the user has already completed all
applicable steps in Section B,* and a routine method has been tentatively
selected for use (Section C). Subsections 1-3 describe steps to be followed
when making a routine determination using one of the three levels described in
Section C. Each subsection contains a flowchart that defines the relationship
of steps to be used for that level of routine determinations. NOTE: The
selected method must be considered tentative because the user may be required
to change methods during the determination.
Subsection 1 - Onsite Inspection Unnecessary
60. This subsection describes procedures for making wetland determina-
tions when sufficient information is already available (Section B) on which to
base the determination. A flowchart of required steps to be completed is pre-
sented in Figure 13, and each step is described below.
Equipment and materials
61. No special equipment is needed for applying this method. The
following materials will be needed:
a. Map of project area (Section B, STEP 2).
b. Copies of DATA FORM 1 (Appendix B).
£. Appendices C and D to this manual.
Procedure
62. Complete the following steps, as necessary:
STEP 1 - Determine Whether Available Data Are Sufficient for Entire
Project Area. Examine the summarized data (Section B, STEPS 5, 7, and
9) and determine whether the vegetation, soils, and hydrology of the
entire project area are adequately characterized. If so, PROCEED TO
STEP 2. If all three parameters are adequately characterized for a
portion, but not all, of the project area, PROCEED TO Subsection 3. If
* If it has been determined that it is more expedient to conduct an onsite
inspection than to search for available information, complete STEPS 1
through 3 of Section B, and PROCEED TO Subsection 2.
53
-------
STEP 1 - DETERMINE WHETHER
AVAILABLE DATA ARE SUFFICIENT
FOR ENTIRE PROJECT AREA
ONE OR MORE PARAMETERS
MUST BE CHARACTERIZED
OVER ENTIRE PROJECT AREA
ALL PARAMETERS ADEQUATELY
CHARACTERIZED IN PART,
BUT NOT ALL OF AREA
STEP 2-DETERMINE
WHETHER HYDROPHYTIC
VEGETATION IS PRESENT
^ XAREANOT
^\A WETLAND
)/
STEP 3- DETERMINE
WHETHER WETLAND
HYDROLOGY IS PRESENT
-------
the vegetation, soils, and hydrology are not adequately characterized
for any portion of the area, PROCEED TO Subsection 2.
STEP 2 - Determine Whether Hydrophytic Vegetation Is Present.
Examine the vegetation data and list on DATA FORM 1 the dominant plant
species found in each vegetation layer of each community type. NOTE:
A separate DATA FORM 1 will be required for each community type.
Record the indicator status for each dominant species (Appendix C,
Section 1 or 2) . When more than 50 percent of the dominant species in
a plant community have an indicator status of OBL, FACW, and/or FAC,*
hydrophytic vegetation is present. If one or more plant communities
comprise of hydrophytic vegetation, PROCEED TO STEP 3. If none of the
plant communities comprise hydrophytic vegetation, none of the area is
a wetland. Complete the vegetation section for each DATA FORM 1.
STEP 3 - Determine Whether Wetland Hydrology Is Present. When one of
the following conditions applies (STEP 2), it is only necessary to
confirm that there has been no recent hydrologic alteration of the
area:
a. The entire project area is occupied by a plant community or
communities in which all dominant species are OBL (Appendix C,
Section 1 or 2).
b_. The project area contains two or more plant communities, all of
which are dominated by OBL and/or FACW species, and the
wetland-nonwetland boundary is abrupt** (e.g. a Spartina
alterniflora marsh bordered by a road embankment).
If either a. or b applies, look for recorded evidence of recently con-
structed dikes, levees, impoundments, and drainage systems, or recent
avalanches, mudslides, beaver dams, etc., that have significantly al-
tered the area hydrology. If any significant hydrologic alteration is
found, determine whether the area is still periodically inundated or
* For the FAC-neutral option, see paragraph 35a.
** There must be documented evidence of periodic inundation or saturated
soils when the project area:
a. Has plant communities dominated by one or more FAC species;
b. Has vegetation dominated by FACW species but no adjacent community
dominated by OBL species;
£. Has a gradual, nondistinct boundary between wetlands and nonwetlands;
and/or
<1. Is known to have or is suspected of having significantly altered
hydrology.
55
-------
has saturated soils for sufficient duration to support the documented
vegetation (a or b above) . When a. or b_ applies and there is no
evidence of recent hydrologic alteration, or when a_ or b do not apply
and there is documented evidence that the area is periodically
inundated or has saturated soils, wetland hydrology is present. Other-
wise, wetland hydrology does not occur on the area. Complete the
hydrology section of DATA FORM 1 and PROCEED TO STEP 4.
STEP 4 - Determine Whether the Soils Parameter Must Be Considered.
When either a or b of STEP 3 applies and there is either no evidence of
recent hydrologic alteration of the project area or if wetland hydrol-
ogy presently occurs on the area, hydric soils can be assumed to be
present. If so, PROCEED TO STEP 6. Otherwise PROCEED TO STEP 5.
STEP 5 - Determine Whether Hydric Soils Are Present. Examine the
soils data (Section B, STEP 7) and record the soil series or soil phase
on DATA FORM 1 for each community type. Determine whether the soil is
listed as a hydric soil (Appendix D, Section 2). If all community
types have hydric soils, the entire project area has hydric soils.
(CAUTION: If the soil series description mokes reference to inclusions
of other soil types, data must be field verified). Any portion of the
area that lacks hydric soils is a nonwetland. Complete the soils sec-
tion of each DATA FORM 1 and PROCEED TO STEP 6.
STEP 6 - Wetland Determination. Examine the DATA FORM 1 for each
community type. Any portion of the project area is a wetland that has:
a. Hydrophytic vegetation that conforms to one of the conditions
identified in STEP 3a_ or 31? and has either no evidence of
altered hydrology or confirmed wetland hydrology.
b_. Hydrophytic vegetation that does not conform to STEP 3a_ or 3b,
has hydric soils, and has confirmed wetland hydrology.
If STEP 6a or 6b_ applies to the entire project area, the entire area is
a wetland. Complete a DATA FORM 1 for all plant community types. Por-
tions of the area not qualifying as a wetland based on an office deter-
mination might or might not be wetlands. If the data used for the
determination are considered to be highly reliable, portions of the
area not qualifying as wetlands may properly be considered nonwetlands.
PROCEED TO STEP 7. If the available data are incomplete or question-
able, an onsite inspection (Subsection 2) will be required.
56
-------
STEP 7 - Determine Wetland Boundary. Mark on the base map all com-
munity types determined to be wetlands with a W and those determined to
be nonwetlands with an N. Combine all wetland community types into a
single mapping unit. The boundary of these community types is the
interface between wetlands and nonwetlands.
Subsection 2 - Onsite Inspection Necessary
63. This subsection describes procedures for routine determinations in
which the available information (Section B) is insufficient for one or more
parameters. If only one or two parameters must be characterized, apply the
appropriate steps and return to Subsection 1 and complete the determination.
A flowchart of steps required for using this method is presented in Figure 14,
and each step is described below.
Equipment and materials
64. The following equipment and materials will be needed:
a. Base map (Section B, STEP 2).
b. Copies of DATA FORM 1 (one for each community type and
additional copies for boundary determinations).
£. Appendices C and D.
<1. Compass.
£. Soil auger or spade (soils only).
_f. Tape (300 ft).
g. Munsell Color Charts (Munsell Color 1975) (soils only).
Procedure
65. Complete the following steps, as necessary:
STEP 1 - Locate the Project Area. Determine the spatial boundaries
of the project area using information from a USGS quadrangle map or
other appropriate map, aerial photography, and/or the project survey
plan (when available). PROCEED TO STEP 2.
STEP 2 - Determine Whether an Atypical Situation Exists. Examine the
area and determine whether there is evidence of sufficient natural or
human-induced alteration to significantly alter the area vegetation,
soils, and/or hydrology. NOTE: Include possible offsite modifications
that may affect the area hydrology. If not, PROCEED TO STEP 3.
57
-------
STEP 1 - LOCATE THE
PROJECT AREA
STEP 2 - DETERMINE WHETHER
AN ATYPICAL SITUATION EXISTS
STEP 3 - DETERMINE THE FIELD
CHARACTERIZATION APPROACH TO BE USED
AREA EQUAL TO OR
LESS THAN FIVE ACRES IN SIZE
AREA GREATER THAN FIVE
ACRES IN SIZE
STEP 4- IDENTIFY THE
PLANT COMMUNITY TYPEISI
STEP 18 - ESTABLISH A BASELINE
STEP 5- DETERMINE WHETHER
NORMAL ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
ARE PRESENT
STEP 19- DETERMINE THE REQUIRED
NUMBER AND POSITIONS OF TRANSECTS
STEP 6 - SELECT REPRESENTATIVE
OBSERVATION POINTS
STEP? -CHARACTERIZE EACH
PLANT COMMUNITY TYPE
STEP 8 - RECORD INDICATOR
STATUS OF DOMINANT SPECIES
STEPS- DETERMINE
WHETHER HYDROPHYTIC
VEGETATION IS PRESENT
TO STEP 20
TO STEP 10
Figure 14. Flowchart of steps involved in making a routine wetland
determination when an onsite visit is necessary (Continued)
58
-------
(CONT FROM STEP 9)
(CONT. FROM STEP 19 )
STEP 10 -APPLY WETLAND
HYDROLOGY INDICATORS
STEP 11 - DETERMINE WHETHER
WETLAND HYDROLOGY IS PRESENT
STEP 12 - DETERMINE WHETHER
SOILS MUST BE CHARACTERIZED
STEP 13- DIG A SOIL PIT
STEP 14 - APPLY HYDRIC
SOIL INDICATORS
STEP 15 - DETERMINE WHETHER
HYDRIC SOILS ARE PRESENT
STEP 16 - MAKE WETLAND
DETERMINATION
STEP 20, SAMPLE OBSERVATION
POINTS ALONG THE FIRST TRANSECT BY
a DETERMINING WHETHER NORMAL
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
ARE PRESENT
b ESTABLISHING OBSERVATION POINT
IN FIRST PLANT COMMUNITY TYPE
ENCOUNTERED
c CHARACTERIZING PARAMETERS
VEGETATION
SOILS (WHEN NECESSARY)
HYDROLOGY
d MAKING WETLAND
DETERMINATION FOR FIRST
COMMUNITY TYPE
e SAMPLING OTHER OBSERVATION
POINTS ALONG FIRST TRANSECT
f DETERMINING WETLAND -
NONWETLAND BOUNDARY
STEP 21 - SAMPLE OTHER
TRANSECTS
STEP 22 - SYNTHESIZE DATA
STEP 17 - DETERMINE WETLAND
BOUNDARY (IF NECESSARY)
Figure 14. (Concluded)
59
-------
If one or more parameters have been significantly altered by an activ-
ity that would normally require a permit, PROCEED TO Section F and
determine whether there is sufficient evidence that hydrophytic vegeta-
tion, hydric soils, and/or wetland hydrology were present prior to this
alteration. Then, return to this subsection and characterize param-
eters not significantly influenced by human activities. PROCEED TO
STEP 3.
STEP 3 - Determine the Field Characterization Approach to be Used.
Considering the size and complexity of the area, determine the field
characterization approach to be used. When the area is equal to or
less than 5 acres in size (Section B, STEP 3) and the area is thought
to be relatively homogeneous with respect to vegetation, soils, and/or
hydrologic regime, PROCEED TO STEP 4. When the area is greater than
5 acres in size (Section B, STEP 3) or appears to be highly diverse
with respect to vegetation, PROCEED TO STEP 18.
Areas Equal to or Less Than 5 Acres in Size
STEP 4 - Identify the Plant Community Type(s). Traverse the area and
determine the number and locations of plant community types. Sketch
the location of each on the base map (Section B, STEP 2), and give each
community type a name. PROCEED TO STEP 5.
STEP 5 - Determine Whether Normal Environmental Conditions Are
Present. Determine whether normal environmental conditions are present
by considering the following:
a. Is the area presently lacking hydrophytic vegetation or
hydrologic indicators due to annual or seasonal fluctuations in
precipitation or ground-water levels?
b. Are hydrophytic vegetation indicators lacking due to seasonal
fluctuations in temperature?
If the answer to either of these questions is thought to be YES,
PROCEED TO Section G. If the answer to both questions is NO, PROCEED
TO STEP 6.
STEP 6 - Select Representative Observation Points. Select a repre-
sentative observation point in each community type. A representative
observation point is one in which the apparent characteristics (deter-
mine visually) best represent characteristics of the entire community.
60
-------
Mark on the base map the approximate location of the observation point.
PROCEED TO STEP 7.
STEP 7 - Characterize Each Plant Community Type. Visually determine
the dominant plant species in each vegetation layer of each community
type and record them on DATA FORM 1 (use a separate DATA FORM 1 for
each community type). Dominant species are those having the greatest
relative basal area (woody overstory),* greatest height (woody under-
story), greatest percentage of areal cover (herbaceous understory),
and/or greatest number of stems (woody vines). PROCEED TO STEP 8.
STEP 8 - Record Indicator Status of Dominant Species. Record on DATA
FORM 1 the indicator status (Appendix C, Section 1 or 2) of each
dominant species in each community type. PROCEED TO STEP 9.
STEP 9 - Determine Whether Hydrophytic Vegetation Is Present.
Examine each DATA FORM 1. When more than 50 percent of the dominant
species in a community type have an indicator status (STEP 8) of OBL,
FACW, and/or FAC,** hydrophytic vegetation is present. Complete the
vegetation section of each DATA FORM 1. Portions of the area failing
this test are not wetlands. PROCEED TO STEP 10.
STEP 10 - Apply Wetland Hydrologic Indicators. Examine the portion
of the area occupied by each plant community type for positive indica-
tors of wetland hydrology (PART III, paragraph 49). Record findings on
the appropriate DATA FORM 1. PROCEED TO STEP 11.
STEP 11 - Determine Whether Wetland Hydrology Is Present. Examine
the hydrologic information on DATA FORM 1 for each plant community
type. Any portion of the area having a positive wetland hydrology
indicator has wetland hydrology. If positive wetland hydrology indi-
cators are present in all community types, the entire area has wetland
hydrology. If no plant community type has a wetland hydrology indi-
cator, none of the area has wetland hydrology. Complete the hydrology
portion of each DATA FORM 1. PROCEED TO STEP 12.
* This term is used because species having the largest individuals may not
be dominant when only a few are present. To determine relative basal area,
consider both the size and number of individuals of a species and subjec-
tively compare with other species present.
** For the FAC-neutral option, see paragraph 35a.
61
-------
STEP 12 - Determine Whether Soils Must Be Characterized. Examine the
vegetation section of each DATA FORM 1. Hydric soils are assumed to be
present in any plant community type in which:
£. All dominant species have an indicator status of OBL.
b_. All dominant species have an indicator status of OBL or FACW,
and the wetland boundary (when present) is abrupt.*
When either a_ or b occurs and wetland hydrology is present, check the
hydric soils blank as positive on DATA FORM 1 and PROCEED TO STEP 16.
If neither a nor b applies, PROCEED TO STEP 13.
STEP 13 - Dig a Soil Pit. Using a soil auger or spade, dig a soil
pit at the representative location in each community type. The
procedure for digging a soil pit is described in Appendix D, Section 1.
When completed, approximately 16 inches of the soil profile will be
available for examination. PROCEED TO STEP 14.
STEP 14 - Apply Hydric Soil Indicators. Examine the soil at each
location and compare its characteristics immediately below the
A-horizon or 10 inches (whichever is shallower) with the hydric soil
indicators described in PART III, paragraphs 44 and/or 45. Record
findings on the appropriate DATA FORM 1's. PROCEED TO STEP 15.
STEP 15 - Determine Whether Hydric Soils Are Present. Examine each
DATA FORM 1 and determine whether a positive hydric soil indicator was
found. If so, the area at that location has hydric soil. If soils at
all sampling locations have positive hydric soil indicators, the entire
area has hydric soils. If soils at all sampling locations lack posi-
tive hydric soil indicators, none of the area is a wetland. Complete
the soil section of each DATA FORM 1. PROCEED TO STEP 16.
STEP 16 - Make Wetland Determination. Examine DATA FORM 1. If the
entire area presently or normally has wetland indicators of all three
parameters (STEPS 9, 11, and 15), the entire area is a wetland. If the
entire area presently or normally lacks wetland indicators of one or
* The soils parameter must be considered in any plant community in which:
a. The community is dominated by one or more FAC species.
b. No community type dominated by OBL species is present.
c. The boundary between wetlands and nonwetlands is gradual or
nondistinct.
d. The area is known to or is suspected of having significantly altered
hydrology.
62
-------
more parameters, the entire area is a nonwetland. If only a portion of
the area presently or normally has wetland indicators for all three
parameters, PROCEED TO STEP 17.
STEP 17 - Determine Wetland-Nonwetland Boundary. Mark each plant
community type on the base map with a W if wetland or an N if nonwet-
land. Combine all wetland plant communities into one mapping unit and
all nonwetland plant communities into another mapping unit. The
wetland-nonwetland boundary will be represented by the interface of
these two mapping units.
Areas Greater Than 5 Acres in Size
STEP 18 - Establish a Baseline. Select one project boundary as a
baseline. The baseline should parallel the major watercourse through
the area or should be perpendicular to the hydrologic gradient (Fig-
ure 15). Determine the approximate baseline length. PROCEED TO
STEP 19.
STEP 19 - Determine the Required Number and Position of Transects.
Use the following to determine the required number and position of
transects (specific site conditions may necessitate changes in
intervals):
Number of
Baseline length, miles Required Transects
^0.25 3
>0.25-0.50 3
>0.50-0.75 3
>0.75-1.00 3
>1.00-2.00 3-5
>2.00-4.00 5-8
>4.00 8 or more*
* Transect intervals should not exceed 0.5 mile.
Divide the baseline length by the number of required transects. Estab-
lish one transect in each resulting baseline increment. Use the
63
-------
BASELINE
SEGMENT
TRANSECT I
STARTING POINT OF
BASELINE
TREAM
Figure 15. General orientation of baseline and transects (dotted lines)
in a hypothetical project area. Alpha characters represent different
plant communities. All transects start at the midpoint of a baseline
segment except the first, which was repositioned to include community
type A
midpoint of each baseline increment as a transect starting point. For
example, if the baseline is 1,200 ft in length, three transects would
be establishedone at 200 ft, one at 600 ft, and one at 1,000 ft from
the baseline starting point. CAUTION: All plant community types must
be included. This may necessitate relocation of one or more transect
lines. PROCEED TO STEP 20.
STEP 20 - Sample Observation Points Along the First Transect. Begin-
ning at the starting point of the first transect, extend the transect
at a 90-deg angle to the baseline. Use the following procedure as
appropriate to simultaneously characterize the parameters at each
observation point. Combine field-collected data with information
already available and make a wetland determination at each observation
point. A DATA FORM 1 must be completed for each observation point.
64
-------
a. Determine whether normal environmental conditions are present.
Determine whether normal environmental conditions are present
by considering the following:
(1) Is the area presently lacking hydrophytic vegetation
and/or hydrologic indicators due to annual or seasonal
fluctuations in precipitation or ground-water levels?
(2) Are hydrophytic vegetation indicators lacking due to
seasonal fluctuations in temperature?
If the answer to either of these questions is thought to be
YES, PROCEED TO Section G. If the answer to both questions is
NO, PROCEED TO STEP 20b.
b_. Establish an observation point in the first plant community
type encountered. Select a representative location along the
transect in the first plant community type encountered. When
the first plant community type is large and covers a signifi-
cant distance along the transect, select an area that is no
closer than 300 ft to a perceptible change in plant community
type. PROCEED TO STEP 20c.
£. Characterize parameters. Characterize the parameters at the
observation point by completing (1), (2), and (3) below:
(1) Vegetation. Record on DATA FORM 1 the dominant plant spe-
cies in each vegetation layer occurring in the immediate
vicinity of the observation point. Use a 5-ft radius for
herbs and saplings/shrubs, and a 30-ft radius for trees
and woody vines (when present). Subjectively determine
the dominant species by estimating those having the
largest relative basal area* (woody overstory), greatest
height (woody understory), greatest percentage of areal
cover (herbaceous understory), and/or greatest number of
stems (woody vines). NOTE: Plot size may be estimated,
and plot size may also be varied when site conditions war-
rant . Record on DATA FORM 1 any dominant species observed
to have morphological adaptations (Appendix C, Section 3)
for occurrence in wetlands, and determine and record domi-
nant species that have known physiological adaptations for
occurrence in wetlands (Appendix C, Section 3). Record on
DATA FORM 1 the indicator status (Appendix C, Section 1 or
2) of each dominant species. Hydrophytic vegetation is
present at the observation point when more than 50 percent
of the dominant species have an indicator status of OBL,
FACW, and/or FAC**; when two or more dominant species have
observed morphological or known physiological adaptations
for occurrence in wetlands; or when other indicators of
hydrophytic vegetation (PART III, paragraph 35) are
* This term is used because species having the largest individuals may not
be dominant when only a few are present. To use relative basal area, con-
sider both the size and number of individuals of a species and subjectively
compare with other species present.
** For the FAC-neutral option, see paragraph 35a.
65
-------
present. Complete the vegetation section of DATA FORM 1.
PROCEED TO (2).
(2) Soils. In some cases, it is not necessary to characterize
the soils. Examine the vegetation of DATA FORM 1. Hydric
soils can be assumed to be present when:
(a) All dominant plant species have an indicator status
of OBL.
(b) All dominant plant species have an indicator status
of OBL and/or FACW (at least one dominant species
must be OBL).*
When either (a) or (b) applies, check the hydric soils
blank as positive and PROCEED TO (3). If neither (a) nor
(b) applies but the vegetation qualifies as hydrophytic,
dig a soil pit at the observation point using the proce-
dure described in Appendix D, Section 1. Examine the soil
immediately below the A-horizon or 10-inches (whichever is
shallower) and compare its characteristics (Appendix D,
Section 1) with the hydric soil indicators described in
PART III, paragraphs 44 and/or 45. Record findings on
DATA FORM 1. If a positive hydric soil indicator is pres-
ent, the soil at the observation point is a hydric soil.
If no positive hydric soil indicator is found, the area at
the observation point does not have hydric soils and the
area at the observation point is not a wetland. Complete
the soils section of DATA FORM 1 for the observation
point. PROCEED TO (3) if hydrophytic vegetation (1) and
hydric soils (2) are present. Otherwise, PROCEED TO
STEP 20d_.
(3) Hydrology. Examine the observation point for indicators
of wetland hydrology (PART III, paragraph 49), and record
observations on DATA FORM 1. Consider the indicators in
the same sequence as presented in PART III, paragraph 49.
If a positive wetland hydrology indicator is present, the
area at the observation point has wetland hydrology. If
no positive wetland hydrologic indicator is present, the
area at the observation point is not a wetland. Complete
the hydrology section of DATA FORM 1 for the observation
point. PROCEED TO STEP 20d.
Wetland determination. Examine DATA FORM 1 for the observation
point. Determine whether wetland indicators of all three
parameters are or would normally be present during a signifi-
cant portion of the growing season. If so, the area at the
observation point is a wetland. If no evidence can be found
that the area at the observation point normally has wetland
indicators for all three parameters, the area is a nonwetland.
PROCEED TO STEP 20e.
* Soils must be characterized when any dominant species has an indicator
status of FAC.
66
-------
e_. Sample other observation points along the first transect.
Continue along the first transect until a different community
type is encountered. Establish a representative observation
point within this community type and repeat STEP 20£ - 20d_. If
the areas at both observation points are either wetlands or
nonwetlands, continue along the transect and repeat STEP 2Qc_ -
20d_ for the next community type encountered. Repeat for all
other community types along the first transect. If the area at
one observation point is wetlands and the next observation
point is nonwetlands (or vice versa) , PROCEED TO STEP 20.f.
f_. Determine wetland-nonwetland boundary. Proceed along the tran-
sect from the wetland observation point toward the nonwetland
observation point. Look for subtle changes in the plant com-
munity (e.g. the first appearance of upland species, disappear-
ance of apparent hydrology indicators, or slight changes in
topography). When such features are noted, establish an obser-
vation point and repeat the procedures described in STEP 20£ -
20d. NOTE: A new DATA FORM 1 must be completed for- this
observation point, and all three parameters must be character-
ized by field observation. If the area at this observation
point is a wetland, proceed along the transect toward the non-
wetland observation point until upland indicators are more ap-
parent. Repeat the procedures described in STEP 20£ - 20d. If
the area at this observation point is a nonwetland, move half-
way back along the transect toward the last documented wetland
observation point and repeat the procedure described in
STEP 20£ - 20d. Continue this procedure until the wetland-
nonwetland boundary is found. It is not necessary to complete
a DATA FORM 1 for all intermediate points, but a DATA FORM 1
should be completed for the wetland-nonwetland boundary. Mark
the position of the wetland boundary on the base map, and con-
tinue along the first transect until all community types have
been sampled and all wetland boundaries located. CAUTION: In
areas where wetlands are interspersed among nonwetlands (or
vice versa), several boundary determinations will be required.
When all necessary wetland determinations have been completed
for the first transect, PROCEED TO STEP 21.
STEP 21 - Sample Other Transects. Repeat procedures described in
STEP 21 for all other transects. When completed, a wetland determi-
nation will have been made for one observation point in each community
type along each transect, and all wetland-nonwetland boundaries along
each transect will have been determined. PROCEED TO STEP 22.
STEP 22 - Synthesize Data. Examine all completed copies of DATA
FORM 1, and mark each plant community type on the base map. Identify
each plant community type as either a wetland (W) or nonwetland (N).
If all plant community types are identified as wetlands, the entire
area is wetlands. If all plant community types are identified as
67
-------
nonwetlands, the entire area is nonwetlands. If both wetlands and non-
wetlands are present, identify observation points that represent wet-
land boundaries on the base map. Connect these points on the map by
generally following contour lines to separate wetlands from nonwet-
lands. Walk the contour line between transects to confirm the wetland
boundary. Should anomalies be encountered, it will be necessary to
establish short transects in these areas, apply the procedures de-
scribed in STEP 20f_, and make any necessary adjustments on the base
map.
Subsection 3 - Combination of Levels 1 and 2
66. In some cases, especially for large projects, adequate information
may already be available (Section B) to enable a wetland determination for a
portion of the project area, while an onsite visit will be required for the
remainder of the area. Since procedures for each situation have already been
described in Subsections 1 and 2, they will not be repeated. Apply the
following steps:
STEP 1 - Make Wetland Determination for Portions of the Project Area
That Are Already Adequately Characterized. Apply procedures described
in Subsection 1. When completed, a DATA FORM 1 will have been com-
pleted for each community type, and a map will have been prepared
identifying each community type as wetland or nonwetland and showing
any wetland boundary occurring in this portion of the project area.
PROCEED TO STEP 2.
STEP 2 - Make Wetland Determination for Portions of the Project Area
That Require an Onsite Visit. Apply procedures described in Subsec-
tion 2. When completed, a DATA FORM 1 will have been completed for
each plant community type or for a number of observation points (in-
cluding wetland boundary determinations). A map of the wetland (if
present) will also be available. PROCEED TO STEP 3.
STEP 3 - Synthesize Data. Using the maps resulting from STEPS 1
and 2, prepare a summary map that shows the wetlands of the entire
project area. CAUTION: Wetland boundaries for the two maps will not
always match exactly. When this occurs, an additional site visit will
be required to refine the wetland boundaries. Since the degree of
68
-------
resolution of wetland boundaries will be greater when determined on-
site, it may be necessary to employ procedures described in Subsec-
tion 2 in the vicinity of the boundaries determined from Subsection 1
to refine these boundaries -
69
-------
Section E. Comprehensive Determinations
67. This section describes procedures for making comprehensive wetland
determinations. Unlike procedures for making routine determinations (Sec-
tion D), application of procedures described in this section will result in
maximum information for use in making determinations, and the information usu-
ally will be quantitatively expressed. Comprehensive determinations should
only be used when the project area is very complex and/or when the determina-
tion requires rigorous documentation. This type of determination may be re-
quired in areas of any size, but will be especially useful in large areas.
There may be instances in which only one parameter (vegetation, soil, or hy-
drology) is disputed. In such cases, only procedures described in this sec-
tion that pertain to the disputed parameter need be completed. It is assumed
that the user has already completed all applicable steps in Section B. NOTE:
Depending on site characteristics, it may be necessary to alter the sampling
design and/or data collection procedures-
68. This section is divided into five basic types of activities. The
first consists of preliminary field activities that must be completed prior to
making a determination (STEPS 1-5). The second outlines procedures for deter-
mining the number and locations of required determinations (STEPS 6-8). The
third describes the basic procedure for making a comprehensive wetland deter-
mination at any given point (STEPS 9-17). The fourth describes a procedure
for determining wetland boundaries (STEP 18). The fifth describes a procedure
for synthesizing the collected data to determine the extent of wetlands in the
area (STEPS 20-21). A flowchart showing the relationship of various steps
required for making a comprehensive determination is presented in Figure 16.
Equipment and material
69. Equipment and materials needed for making a comprehensive deter-
mination include:
a. Base map (Section B, STEP 2).
b. Copies of DATA FORMS 1 and 2.
£. Appendices C and D.
d. Compass.
e. Tape (300 ft).
f. Soil auger or spade.
£. Munsell Color Charts (Munsell Color 1975).
70
-------
STEP 2 - DETERMINE WHETHER
AN ATYPICAL SITUATION EXISTS
STEP 3 - DETERMINE HOMOGENEITY
OF VEGETATION
STEP 4 - DETERMINE THE TYPE AND
NUMBER OF LAYERS IN EACH
PLANT COMMUNITY
STEP 5 - DETERMINE WHETHER
NORMAL ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
ARE PRESENT
STEP 6 - ESTABLISH BASELINE
STEP 7 - ESTABLISH TRANSECT LOCATIONS
.
STEP 8 - DETERMINE THE NUMBER OF
REQUIRED OBSERVATION POINTS ALONG
TRANSECTS
STEPS 9 AND 10 - CHARACTERIZE AND
SYNTHESIZE VEGETATION DATA FOR
FIRST OBSERVATION POINT
STEP 11 -CHARACTERIZE SOIL FOR
FIRST OBSERVATION POINT
STEP 12 -CHARACTERIZE HYDROLOGY
FOR FIRST OBSERVATION POINT
STEP 13- DETERMINE
WHETHER HYOROPHYTIC
VEGETATION IS PRESENT
AREA AT FIRST \
OBSERVATION POINT y
IS NOT A WETLAND
TO STEP 14
Figure 16. Flowchart of steps involved in
making a comprehensive wetland determina-
tion (Section E) (Continued)
71
-------
(CONT FROM STEP 13|
STEP 14 - DETERMINE WHETHER
HYDRIC SOILS ARE PRESENT
AREA AT FIRST
OBSERVATION POINT
IS NOT A WETLAND
STEP 15 - DETERMINE WHETHER
WETLAND HYDROLOGY IS PRESENT
AREA AT FIRST \
OBSERVATION POINT )
». IS NOT A WETLAND/
STEP 16 - MAKE WETLAND DETERMINATION
FOR FIRST OBSERVATION POINT
STEP 17 - MAKE WETLAND DETERMINATION
AT SECOND OBSERVATION POINT
AREAS AT THE TWO
OBSERVATION POINTS ARE
BOTH WETLANDS OR BOTH
NONWETLANDS
AREAS THE TWO
OBSERVATION POINTS
DIFFERENT d.e ONE A
WETLAND, THE OTHER A
NONWETLANDI
STEP 18 - DETERMINE WETLAND
BOUNDARY BETWEEN THE
OBSERVATION POINTS
STEP 19 - MAKE WETLAND DETERMINATIONS
AT ALL OTHER REQUIRED OBSERVATION
POINTS ALONG ALL TRANSECTS
AREAS ALL OBSERVATION
POINTS ARE WETLANDS OR
ALL ARE NONWETLANDS
AREAS ONE OR MORE, BUT NOT ALL,
OBSERVATION POINTS ARE NONWETLANDS
STEP 21 - DETERMINE WETLAND BOUNDARY
BETWEEN TRANSECTS
Figure 16. (Concluded)
72
-------
h. Quadrat (3.28 ft by 3.28 ft).
±. Diameter or basal area tape (for woody overstory).
Field procedures
70. Complete the following steps:
STEP 1 - Identify the Project Area. Using information from the USGS
quadrangle or other appropriate map (Section B), locate and measure the
spatial boundaries of the project area. Determine the compass heading
of each boundary and record on the base map (Section B, STEP 2). The
applicant's survey plan may be helpful in locating the project bound-
aries. PROCEED TO STEP 2.
STEP 2 - Determine Whether an Atypical Situation Exists. Examine the
area and determine whether there is sufficient natural or human-induced
alteration to significantly change the area vegetation, soils, and/or
hydrology. If not, PROCEED TO STEP 3. If one or more parameters have
been recently altered significantly, PROCEED TO Section F and determine
whether there is sufficient evidence that hydrophytic vegetation,
hydric soils, and/or wetland hydrology were present on the area prior
to alteration. Then return to this section and characterize parameters
not significantly influenced by human activities. PROCEED TO STEP 3.
STEP 3 - Determine Homogeneity of Vegetation. While completing
STEP 2, determine the number of plant community types present. Mark
the approximate location of each community type on the base map. The
number and locations of required wetland determinations will be
strongly influenced by both the size of the area and the number and
distribution of plant community types; the larger the area and greater
the number of plant community types, the greater the number of required
wetland determinations. It is imperative that all plant community
types occurring in all portions of the area be included in the investi-
gation. PROCEED TO STEP 4.
STEP 4 - Determine the Type and Number of Layers in Each Plant
Community. Examine each identified plant community type and determine
the type(s) and number of layers in each community. Potential layers
include trees (woody overstory), saplings/shrubs (woody understory),
herbs (herbaceous understory), and/or woody vines. PROCEED TO STEP 5.
STEP 5 - Determine Whether Normal Environmental Conditions Are
Present. Determine whether normal environmental conditions are present
73
-------
at the observation point by considering the following:
a. Is the area at the observation point presently lacking
hydrophytic vegetation and/or hydrologic indicators due to
annual or seasonal fluctuations in precipitation or ground-
water levels?
b_. Are hydrophytic vegetation indicators lacking due to seasonal
fluctuations in temperature?
If the answer to either of these questions is thought to be YES,
PROCEED TO Section G. If the answer to both questions is NO, PROCEED
TO STEP 6.
STEP 6 - Establish a Baseline. Select one project boundary area as a
baseline. The baseline should extend parallel to any major watercourse
and/or perpendicular to a topographic gradient (see Figure 17). Deter-
mine the baseline length and record on the base map both the baseline
length and its compass heading. PROCEED TO STEP 7.
STEP 7. Establish Transect Locations. Divide the baseline into a
number of equal segments (Figure 17). Use the following as a guide to
determine the appropriate number of baseline segments:
Length of
Baseline Length, ft Number of Segments Baseline Segment, ft
>50 - 500 3 18 - 167
>500 - 1,000 3 167 - 333
>1,000 - 5,000 5 200 - 1,000
>5,000 - 10,000 7 700 - 1,400
>10,000* variable 2,000
* If the baseline exceeds 5 miles, baseline segments should be
0.5 mile in length.
Use a random numbers table or a calculator with a random numbers gener-
ation feature to determine the position of a transect starting point
within each baseline segment. For example, when the baseline is
4,000 ft, the number of baseline segments will be five, and the base-
line segment length will be 4,000/5 = 800 ft. Locate the first tran-
sect within the first 800 ft of the baseline. If the random numbers
table yields 264 as the distance from the baseline starting point, mea-
sure 264 ft from the baseline starting point and establish the starting
point of the first transect. If the second random number selected is
74
-------
BASELINE
SEGMENT
TRANSECT STARTING POINT
BASELINE STARTING POINT
STREAM
Figure 17. General orientation of baseline and transects in a
hypothetical project area. Alpha characters represent different
plant communities. Transect positions were determined using a
random numbers table
530, the starting point of the second transect will be located at a
distance of 1,330 ft (800 + 530 ft) from the baseline starting point.
CAUTION: Make sure that each plant community type is included in at
least one transect. If not, modify the sampling design accordingly.
When the starting point locations for all required transects have been
determined, PROCEED TO STEP 8.
STEP 8 - Determine the Number of Required Observation Points Along
Transects. The number of required observation points along each
transect will be largely dependent on transect length. Establish
observation points along each transect using the following as a guide:
75
-------
Transect Number of Interval Between
Length, ft Observation Points Observation Points, ft
<1,000 2-10 100
1,000 - <5,000 10 100 - 500
5,000 - <10,000 10 500 - 1,000
>10,000 >10 1,000
Establish the first observation point at a distance of 50 ft from the
baseline (Figure 17). When obvious nonwetlands occupy a long portion
of the transect trom the baseline starting point, establish the first
observation point in the obvious nonwetland at a distance of approxi-
mately 300 ft from the point that the obvious nonwetland begins to
intergrade into a potential wetland community type. Additional obser-
vation points must also be established to determine the wetland bound-
ary between successive regular observation points when one of the
points is a wetland and the other is a nonwetland. CAUTIOUS: In large
areas having a mosaic of plant community types, several wetland bound-
aries may occur along the same transect. PROCEED TO STEP 9 and apply
the comprehensive wetland determination procedure at each required ob-
servation point. Use the described procedure to simultaneously charac-
terize the vegetation, soil, and hydrology at each required observation
point along each transect, and use the resulting characterization to
make a wetland determination at each point. NOTE: All required wet-
land boundary determinations should be made while proceeding along a
transect.
STEP 9 - Characterize the Vegetation at the First Observation Point
Along the First Transect.* Record on DATA FORM 2 the vegetation
occurring at the first observation point along the first transect by
completing the following (as appropriate):
a. Trees. Identify each tree occurring within a 30-ft radius** of
the observation point, measure its basal area (square inches)
or diameter at breast height (DBH) using a basal area tape or
* There is no single best procedure for characterizing vegetation. Methods
described in STEP 9 afford standardization of the procedure. However, plot
size and descriptors for determining dominance may vary.
** A larger sampling plot may be necessary when trees are large and widely
spaced.
76
-------
diameter tape, respectively, and record. NOTE: If DBH is
measured, convert values to basal area by applying the formula
A = i\rz. This must be done on an individual basis. A tree is
any nonclimbing, woody plant that has a DBH of >^3.0 in.,
regardless of height.
Saplings/shrubs. Identify each sapling/shrub occurring within
a 10-ft radius of the observation point, estimate its height,
and record the midpoint of its class range using the following
height classes (height is used as an indication of dominance;
taller individuals exert a greater influence on the plant
community):
Height Height Class Midpoint of
Class Range, ft Range, ft
1 1-3 2
2 3-5 4
3 5-7 6
4 7-9 8
5 9-11 10
6 >11 12
A sapling/shrub is any woody plant having a height >3.2 ft but
a stem diameter of <3.0 in., exclusive of woody vines.
Herbs. Place a 3.28- by 3.28-ft quadrat with one corner touch-
ing the observation point and one edge adjacent to the transect
line. As an alternative, a 1.64-ft-radius plot with the center
of the plot representing the observation point position may be
used. Identify each plant species with foliage extending into
the quadrat and estimate its percent cover by applying the fol-
lowing cover classes:
Cover Class Midpoint of
Class Range, % Class Range, %
1 0-5 2.5
2 >5 - 25 15.0
3 >25 - 50 37.5
4 >50 - 75 62.5
5 >75 - 95 85.0
6 >95 - 100 97.5
Include all nonwoody plants and woody plants <3.2 ft in height.
NOTE: Total percent cover for all species will often exceed
100 percent.
77
-------
-------
look for indicators of hydric soils immediately below the A-horizon or
10 inches (whichever is shallower) (PART III, paragraphs 44 and/or 45).
Record findings on DATA FORM 1. PROCEED TO STEP 12.
STEP 12 - Characterize Hydrology. Examine the observation point for
indicators of wetland hydrology (PART III, paragraph 49), and record
observations on DATA FORM 1. Consider indicators in the same sequence
as listed in paragraph 49. PROCEED TO STEP 13.
STEP 13 - Determine Whether Hydrophytic Vegetation Is Present.
Record the three dominant species from each vegetation layer (five
species if only one or two layers are present) on DATA FORM 1.* Deter-
mine whether these species occur in wetlands by considering the
following:
a. More than 50 percent of the dominant plant species are OBL,
FACW, and/or FAC** on lists of plant species that occur in wet-
lands. Record the indicator status of all dominant species
(Appendix C, Section 1 or 2) on DATA FORM 1. Hydrophytic vege-
tation is present when the majority of the dominant species
have an indicator status of OBL, FACW, or FAC. CAUTION: Not
necessarily all plant communities composed of only FAC species
are hydrophytic communities. They are hydrophytic communities
only when positive indicators of hydric soils and wetland
hydrology are also found. If this indicator is satisfied, com-
plete the vegetation portion of DATA FORM 1 and PROCEED TO
STEP 14. If not, consider other indicators of hydrophytic
vegetation.
b_. Presence of adaptations for occurrence in wetlands. Do any of
the species listed on DATA FORM 1 have observed morphological
or known physiological adaptations (Appendix C, Section 3) for
occurrence in wetlands? If so, record species having such
adaptations on DATA FORM 1. When two or more dominant species
have observed morphological adaptations or known physiological
adaptations for occurrence in wetlands, hydrophytic vegetation
is present. If so, complete the vegetation portion of DATA
FORM 1 and PROCEED TO STEP 14. If not, consider other indica-
tors of hydrophytic vegetation.
£. Other indicators of hydrophytic vegetation. Consider other
indicators (see PART III, paragraph 35) that the species listed
on DATA FORM 1 are commonly found in wetlands. If so, complete
the vegetation portion of DATA FORM 1 by recording sources of
supporting information, and PROCEED TO STEP 14. If no indica-
tor of hydrophytic vegetation is present, the area at the ob-
servation point is not a wetland. In such cases, it is
* Record all dominant species when less than three are present in a vegeta-
tion layer.
** For the FAC-neutral option, see paragraph 35a.
79
-------
unnecessary to consider soil and hydrology at that observation
point. PROCEED TO STEP 17.
-STEP 14 - Determine Whether Hydric Soils Are Present. Examine DATA
FORM 1 and determine whether any indicator of hydric soils is present.
If so, complete the soils portion of DATA FORM 1 and PROCEED TO
STEP 15. If not, the area at the observation point is not a wetland.
PROCEED TO STEP 17.
STEP 15 - Determine Whether Wetland Hydrology Is Present. Examine
DATA FORM 1 and determine whether any indicator of wetland hydrology is
present. Complete the hydrology portion of DATA FORM 1 and PROCEED TO
STEP 16.
STEP 16 - Make Wetland Determination. When the area at the observa-
tion point presently or normally has wetland indicators of all three
parameters, it is a wetland. When the area at the observation point
presently or normally lacks wetland indicators of one or more param-
eters, it is a nonwetland. PROCEED TO STEP 17.
STEP 17 - Make Wetland Determination at Second Observation Point.
Locate the second observation point along the first transect and make a
wetland determination by repeating procedures described in STEPS 9-16.
When the area at the second observation point is the same as the area
at the first observation point (i.e. both wetlands or both nonwet-
lands), PROCEED TO STEP 19. When the areas at the two observation
points are different (i.e. one wetlands, the other nonwetlands), PRO-
CEED TO STEP 18.
STEP 18 - Determine the Wetland Boundary Between Observation Points.
Determine the position of the wetland boundary by applying the
following procedure:
a. Look for a change in vegetation or topography. NOTE: The
changes may sometimes be very subtle. If a change is noted,
establish an observation point and repeat STEPS 9-16. Complete
a DATA FORM 1. If the area at this point is a wetland, proceed
toward the nonwetland observation point until a more obvious
change in vegetation or topography is noted and repeat the pro-
cedure. If there is no obvious change, establish the next
observation point approximately halfway between the last obser-
vation point and the nonwetland observation point and repeat
STEPS 9-16.
b. Make as many additional wetland determinations as necessary to
~ find the wetland boundary. NOTE: The completed DATA FORM 1 's
80
-------
for the original two observation points often will provide a
clue as to the parameter(s) that change between the two points.
£. When the wetland boundary is found, mark the boundary location
on the base map and indicate on the DATA FORM 1 that this
represents a wetland boundary. Record the distance of the
boundary from one of the two regular observation points. Since
the regular observation points represent known distances from
the baseline, it will be possible to accurately pinpoint the
boundary location on the base map. PROCEED TO STEP 19.
STEP 19 - Make Wetland Determinations at All Other Required Observa-
tion Points Along All Transects. Continue to locate and sample all
required observation points along all transects. NOTE: The procedure
described in STEP 18 must be applied at every position where a wetland
boundary occurs between successive observation points. Complete a DATA
FORM 1 for each observation point and PROCEED TO STEP 20.
STEP 20 - Synthesize Data to Determine the Portion of the Area Con-
taining Wetlands. Examine all completed copies of DATA FORM 1
(STEP 19), and mark on a copy of the base map the locations of all ob-
servation points that are wetlands with a W and all observation points
that are nonwetlands with an N. Also, mark all wetland boundaries
occurring along transects with an X. If all the observation points are
wetlands, the entire area is wetlands. If all observation points are
nonwetlands, none of the area is wetlands. If some wetlands and some
nonwetlands are present, connect the wetland boundaries (X) by follow-
ing contour lines between transects. CAUTION: If the determination is
considered to be highly controversial, it may be necessary to be more
precise in determining the wetland boundary between transects. This is
also true for very large areas where the distance between transects is
greater. If this is necessary, PROCEED TO STEP 22.
STEP 21 - Determine Wetland Boundary Between Transects. Two proce-
dures may be used to determine the wetland boundary between transects,
both of which involve surveying:
a. Survey contour from wetland boundary along transects. The
first method involves surveying the elevation of the wetland
boundaries along transects and then extending the survey to
determine the same contour between transects. This procedure
will be adequate in areas where there is no significant eleva-
tional change between transects. However, if a significant
elevational change occurs between transects, either the sur-
veyor must adjust elevational readings to accommodate such
changes or the second method must be used. NOTE: The surveyed
81
-------
wetland boundary must be examined to ensure that no anomalies
exist. If these occur, additional wetland determinations will
be required in the portion of the area where the anomalies
occur, and the wetland boundary must be adjusted accordingly.
Additional wetland determinations between transects. This
procedure consists of traversing the area between transects and
making additional wetland determinations to locate the wetland
boundary at sufficiently close intervals (not necessarily
standard intervals) so that the area can be surveyed. Place
surveyor flags at each wetland boundary location. Enlist a
surveyor to survey the points between transects. From the
resulting survey data, produce a map that separates wetlands
from nonwetlands.
82
-------
Section F. Atypical Situations
71. Methods described in this section should be used only when a deter-
mination has already been made in Section D or E that positive indicators of
hydrophytic vegetation, hydric soils, and/or wetland hydrology could not be
found due to effects of recent human activities or natural events. This sec-
tion is applicable to delineations made in the following types of situations:
a. Unauthorized activities. Unauthorized discharges requiring
enforcement actions may result in removal or covering of indi-
cators of one or more wetland parameters. Examples include,
but are not limited to: (1) alteration or removal of vegeta-
tion; (2) placement of dredged or fill material over hydric
soils; and/or (3) construction of levees, drainage systems, or
dams that significantly alter the area hydrology. NOTE: This
section should not be used for activities that have been previ-
ously authorized or those that are exempted from CE regulation.
For example, this section is not applicable to areas that have
been drained under CE authorization or that did not require CE
authorization. Some of these areas may still be wetlands, but
procedures described in Section D or E must be
used in these cases.
b_. Natural events. Naturally occurring events may result in
either creation or alteration of wetlands. For example, recent
beaver dams may impound water, thereby resulting in a shift of
hydrology and vegetation to wetlands. However, hydric soil
indicators may not have developed due to insufficient time
having passed to allow their development. Fire, avalanches,
volcanic activity, and changing river courses are other exam-
ples. NOTE: It is necessary to determine whether alterations
to an area have resulted in changes that are now the "normal
circumstances." The relative permanence of the change and
whether the area is now functioning as a wetland must be
considered.
£. Man-induced wetlands. Procedures described in Subsection 4 are
for use in delineating wetlands that have been purposely or
incidentally created by human activities, but in which wetland
indicators of one or more parameters are absent. For example,
road construction may have resulted in impoundment of water in
an area that previously was nonwetland, thereby effecting
hydrophytic vegetation and wetland hydrology in the area. How-
ever, the area may lack hydric soil indicators. NOTE: Subsec-
tion D is not intended to bring into CE jurisdiction those man-
made wetlands that are exempted under CE regulations or policy.
It is also important to consider whether the man-induced
changes are now the "normal circumstances" for the area. Both
the relative permanence of the change and the functioning of
the area as a wetland are implied.
83
-------
72. When any of the three types of situations described in paragraph 71
occurs, application of methods described in Sections D and/or E will lead to
the conclusion that the area is not a wetland because positive wetland indi-
cators for at least one of the three parameters will be absent. Therefore,
apply procedures described in one of the following subsections (as appropri-
ate) to determine whether positive indicators of hydrophytic vegetation,
hydric soils, and/or wetland hydrology existed prior to alteration of the
area. Once these procedures have been employed, RETURN TO Section D or E to
make a wetland determination. PROCEED TO the appropriate subsection.
Subsection 1 - Vegetation
73. Employ the following steps to determine whether hydrophytic
vegetation previously occurred:
STEP 1 - Describe the Type of Alteration. Examine the area and de-
scribe the type of alteration that occurred. Look for evidence of
selective harvesting, clear cutting, bulldozing, recent conversion to
agriculture, or other activities (e.g., burning, discing, or presence
of buildings, dams, levees, roads, parking lots, etc.). Determine the
approximate date* when the alteration occurred. Record observations on
DATA FORM 3, and PROCEED TO STEP 2.
STEP 2 - Describe Effects on Vegetation. Record on DATA FORM 3 a
general description of how the activities (STEP 1) have affected the
plant communities. Consider the following:
a_. Has all or a portion of the area been cleared of vegetation?
b. Has only one layer of the plant community (e.g. trees) been
removed?
c_. Has selective harvesting resulted in removal of some species?
d. Has all vegetation been covered by fill, dredged material, or
structures?
e_. Have increased water levels resulted in the death of some
individuals?
* It is especially important to determine whether the alteration occurred
prior to implementation of Section 404.
84
-------
PROCEED TO STEP 3.
STEP 3 - Determine the Type of Vegetation That Previously Occurred.
Obtain all possible evidence of the type of plant communities that
occurred in the area prior to alteration. Potential sources of such
evidence include:
£. Aerial photography. Recent (within 5 years) aerial photography
can often be used to document the type of previous vegetation.
The general type of plant communities formerly present can
usually be determined, and species identification is sometimes
possible.
b_. Onsite inspection. Many types of activities result in only
partial removal of the previous plant communities, and remain-
ing species may be indicative of hydrophytic vegetation. In
other cases, plant fragments (e.g. stumps, roots) may be used
to reconstruct the plant community types that occurred prior to
site alteration. Sometimes, this can be determined by examin-
ing piles of debris resulting from land-clearing operations or
excavation to uncover identifiable remains of the previous
plant community.
£. Previous site inspections. Documented evidence from previous
inspections of the area may describe the previous plant com-
munities, particularly in cases where the area was altered
after a permit application was denied.
d. Adjacent vegetation. Circumstantial evidence of the type of
plant communities that previously occurred may sometimes be
obtained by examining the vegetation in adjacent areas. If
adjacent areas have the same topographic position, soils, and
hydrology as the altered area, the plant community types on the
altered area were probably similar to those of the adjacent
areas.
e. SCS records. Most SCS soil surveys include a description of
the plant community types associated with each soil type. If
the soil type on the altered area can be determined, it may be
possible to generally determine the type of plant communities
that previously occurred.
£_ Permit applicant. In some cases, the permit applicant may pro-
vide important information about the type of plant communities
that occurred prior to alteration.
£ Public. Individuals familiar with the area may provide a good
general description of the previously occurring plant
communities.
h. NWI wetland maps. The NWI has developed wetland type maps for
many areas. These may be useful in determining the type of
plant communities that occurred prior to alteration.
To develop the strongest possible record, all of the above sources
should be considered. If the plant community types that occurred prior
85
-------
to alteration can be determined, record them on DATA FORM 3 and also
record the basis used for the determination. PROCEED TO STEP 4. If it
is impossible to determine the plant community types that occurred on
the area prior to alteration, a determination cannot be made using all
three parameters. In such cases, the determination must be based on
the other two parameters. PROCEED TO Subsection 2 or 3 if one of the
other parameters has been altered, or return to the appropriate
Subsection of Section D or to Section E, as appropriate.
STEP 4 - Determine Whether Plant Community Types Constitute Hydro-
phytic Vegetation. Develop a list of species that previously occurred
on the site (DATA FORM 3). Subject the species list to applicable
indicators of hydrophytic vegetation (PART III, paragraph 35). If
none of the indicators are met, the plant communities that previously
occurred did not constitute hydrophytic vegetation. If hydrophytic
vegetation was present and no other parameter was in question, record
appropriate data on the vegetation portion of DATA FORM 3, and return
to either the appropriate subsection of Section D or to Section E. If
either of the other parameters was also in question, PROCEED TO
Subsection 2 or 3.
Subsection 2 - Soils
74. Employ the following steps to determine whether hydric soils previ-
ously occurred:
STEP 1 - Describe the Type of Alteration. Examine the area and
describe the type of alteration that occurred. Look for evidence of:
a. Deposition of dredged or fill material or natural sedimenta-
tion. In many cases the presence of fill material will be
obvious. If so, it will be necessary to dig a hole to reach
the original soil (sometimes several feet deep). Fill material
will usually be a different color or texture than the original
soil (except when fill material has been obtained from like
areas onsite). Look for decomposing vegetation between soil
layers and the presence of buried organic or hydric soil
layers. In accreting or recently formed sandbars in riverine
situations, the soils may support hydrophytic vegetation but
lack hydric soil characteristics.
b. Presence of nonwoody debris at the surface. This can only be
applied in areas where the original soils do not contain rocks.
86
-------
Nonwoody debris includes items such as rocks, bricks, and con-
crete fragments.
c. Sabsurface plowing. Has the area recently been plowed below
the A-horizon or to depths of greater than 10 in.?
d. Removal of surface layers. Has the surface soil layer been
removed by scraping or natural landslides? Look for bare soil
surfaces with exposed plant roots or scrape scars on the
surface.
e_. Presence of man-made structures. Are buildings, dams, levees,
roads, or parking lots present?
Determine the approximate date* when the alteration occurred. This may
require checking aerial photography, examining building permits, etc.
Record on DATA FORM 3, and PROCEED TO STEP 2.
Step 2 - Describe Effects on Soils. Record on DATA FORM 3 a general
description of how identified activities in STEP 1 have affected the
soils. Consider the following:
at. Has the soil been buried? If so, record the depth of fill
material and determine whether the original soil is intact.
b_. Has the soil been mixed at a depth below the A-horizon or
greater than 10 inches? If so, it will be necessary to examine
the original soil at a depth immediately below the plowed zone.
Record supporting evidence.
£. Has the soil been sufficiently altered to change the soil
phase? Describe these changes.
PROCEED TO STEP 3.
STEP 3 - Characterize Soils That Previously Occurred. Obtain all
possible evidence that may be used to characterize soils that pre-
viously occurred on the area. Consider the following potential sources
of information:
a_. Soil surveys. In many cases, recent soil surveys will be
available. If so, determine the soil series that were mapped
for the area, and compare these soil series with the list of
hydric soils (Appendix D, Section 2). If all soil series are
listed as hydric soils, the entire area had hydric soils prior
to alteration.
b. Characterization of buried soils. When fill material has been
placed over the original soil without physically disturbing the
soil, examine and characterize the buried soils. To accomplish
this, dig a hole through the fill material until the original
soil is encountered. Determine the point at which the original
* It is especially important to determine whether the alteration occurred
prior to implementation of Section 404.
87
-------
soil material begins. Remove 12 inches of the original soil
from the hole and look for indicators of hydric soils
(PART III, paragraphs 44 and/or 45) immediately below the
A-horizon or 10 inches (whichever is shallower). Record on
DATA FORM 3 the color of the soil matrix, presence of an or-
ganic layer, presence of mottles or gleying, and/or presence of
iron and manganese concretions. If the original soil is mot-
tled and the chroma of the soil matrix is 2 or less,* a hydric
soil was formerly present on the site. If any of these indica-
tors are found, the original soil was a hydric soil. (NOTE:
When the fill material is a thick layer, it might be necessary
to use a backhoe or pesthole digger to excavate the soil pit.')
If USGS quadrangle maps indicate distinct variation in area
topography, this procedure must be applied in each portion of
the area that originally had a different surface elevation.
Record findings on DATA FORM 3.
£. Characterization of plowed soils. Determine the depth to which
the soil has been disturbed by plowing. Look for hydric soil
characteristics (PART III, paragraphs 44 and/or 45) immediately
below this depth. Record findings on DATA FORM 3.
d_. Removal of surface layers. Dig a hole (Appendix D, Section 1)
and determine whether the entire surface layer (A-horizon) has
been removed. If so, examine the soil immediately below the
top of the subsurface layer (B-horizon) for hydric soil char-
acteristics. As an alternative, examine an undisturbed soil of
the same soil series occurring in the same topographic position
in an immediately adjacent area that has not been altered.
Look for hydric soil indicators immediately below the A-horizon
or 10 inches (whichever is shallower), and record findings on
DATA FORM 3.
If sufficient data on soils that existed prior to alteration can be
obtained to determine whether a hydric soil was present, PROCEED TO
STEP 4. If not, a determination cannot be made using soils. Use the
other parameters (Subsections 1 and 3) for the determination.
STEP 4 - Determine Whether Hydric Soils Were Formerly Present.
Examine the available data and determine whether indicators of hydric
soils (PART III, paragraphs 44 and/or 45) were formerly present. If no
indicators of hydric soils were found, the original soils were not
hydric soils. If indicators of hydric soils were found, record the
appropriate indicators on DATA FORM 3 and PROCEED TO Subsection 3 if
the hydrology of the area has been significantly altered or return
either to the appropriate subsection of Section D or to Section E and
characterize the area hydrology.
The matrix chroma must be 1 or less if no mottles are present (see para-
graph 44). The soil must be moist when colors are determined.
88
-------
Subsection 3 - Hydrology
75. Apply the following steps to determine whether wetland hydrology
previously occurred:
STEP 1 - Describe the Type of Alteration. Examine the area and
describe the type of alteration that occurred. Look for evidence of:
a. Dams. Has recent construction of a dam or some natural event
(e.g. beaver activity or landslide) caused the area to become
increasingly wetter or drier? NOTE: This activity could have
occurred a considerable distance away from the site in
question.
b. Levees, dikes, and similar structures. Have levees or dikes
recently been constructed that prevent the area from becoming
periodically inundated by overbank flooding?
£. Ditching. Have ditches been constructed recently that cause
the area to drain more rapidly following inundation?
d. Filling of channels or depressions (land-leveling). Have natu-
ral channels or depressions been recently filled?
e_. Diversion of water. Has an upstream drainage pattern been
altered that results in water being diverted from the area?
f_. Ground-water extraction. Has prolonged and intensive pumping
of ground water for irrigation or other purposes significantly
lowered the water table and/or altered drainage patterns?
g. Channe1ization. Have feeder streams recently been channelized
sufficiently to alter the frequency and/or duration of
inundation?
Determine the approximate date* when the alteration occurred. Record
observations on DATA FORM 3 and PROCEED TO STEP 2.
STEP 2 - Describe Effects of Alteration on Area Hydrology. Record on
DATA FORM 3 a general description of how the observed alteration
(STEP 1) has affected the area. Consider the following:
a. Is the area more frequently or less frequently inundated than
prior to alteration? To what degree and why?
b. Is the duration of inundation and soil saturation different
than prior to alteration? How much different and why?
PROCEED TO STEP 3.
STEP 3 - Characterize the Hydrology That Previously Existed in the
Area. Obtain all possible evidence that may be used to characterize
* It is especially important to determine whether the alteration occurred
prior to implementation of Section 404.
89
-------
the hydrology that previously occurred. Potential sources of informa-
tion include:
a. Stream or tidal gage data. If a stream or tidal gaging station
is located near the area, it may be possible to calculate
elevations representing the upper limit of wetlands hydrology
based on duration of inundation. Consult hydrologists from the
local CE District Office for assistance. The resulting mean
sea level elevation will represent the upper limit of inunda-
tion for the area in the absence of any alteration. If fill
material has not been placed on the area, survey this elevation
from the nearest USGS benchmark. Record elevations represent-
ing zone boundaries on DATA FORM 3. If fill material has been
placed on the area, compare the calculated elevation with
elevations shown on a USGS quadrangle or any other survey map
that predated site alteration.
b_. Field hydrologic indicators. Certain field indicators of wet-
land hydrology (PART III, paragraph 49) may still be present.
Look for watermarks on trees or other structures, drift lines,
and debris deposits. Record these on DATA FORM 3. If adjacent
undisturbed areas are in the same topographic position and are
similarly influenced by the same sources of inundation, look
for wetland indicators in these areas.
£. Aerial photography. Examine any available aerial photography
and determine whether the area was inundated at the time of the
photographic mission. Consider the time of the year that the
aerial photography was taken and use only photography taken
during the growing season and prior to site alteration.
d_. Historical records. Examine any available historical records
for evidence that the area has been periodically inundated.
Obtain copies of any such information and record findings on
DATA FORM 3.
£. Floodplain Management Maps. Determine the previous frequency
of inundation of the area from Floodplain Management Maps (if
available). Record flood frequency on DATA FORM 3.
f_. Public or local government officials. Contact individuals who
might have knowledge that the area was periodically inundated.
If sufficient data on hydrology that existed prior to site alteration
can be obtained to determine whether wetland hydrology was previously
present, PROCEED TO STEP 4. If not, a determination involving hydrol-
ogy cannot be made. Use other parameters (Subsections 1 and 2) for the
wetland determination. Return to either the appropriate subsection of
Section D or to Section E and complete the necessary data forms.
PROCEED TO STEP 4 if the previous hydrology can be characterized.
STEP 4 - Determine Whether Wetland Hydrology Previously Occurred.
Examine the available data and determine whether indicators of wetland
90
-------
hydrology (PART III, paragraph 49) were present prior to site altera-
tion. If no indicators of wetland hydrology were found, the original
hydrology of the area was not wetland hydrology. If indicators of
wetland hydrology were found, record the appropriate indicators on DATA
FORM 3 and return either to the appropriate subsection of Section D or
to Section E and complete the wetland determination.
Subsection 4 - Man-Induced Wetlands
76. A man-induced wetland is an area that has developed at least some
characteristics of naturally occurring wetlands due to either intentional or
incidental human activities. Examples of man-induced wetlands include irri-
gated wetlands, wetlands resulting from impoundment (e.g. reservoir shore-
lines), wetlands resulting from filling of formerly deepwater habitats,
dredged material disposal areas, and wetlands resulting from stream channel
realignment. Some man-induced wetlands may be subject to Section 404. In
virtually all cases, man-induced wetlands involve a significant change in the
hydrologic regime, which may either increase or decrease the wetness of the
area. Although wetland indicators of all three parameters (i.e. vegetation,
soils, and hydrology) may be found in some man-induced wetlands, indicators of
hydric soils are usually absent. Hydric soils require long periods (hundreds
of years) for development of wetness characteristics, and most man-induced
wetlands have not been in existence for a sufficient period to allow develop-
ment of hydric soil characteristics. Therefore, application of the multi-
parameter approach in making wetland determinations in man-induced wetlands
must be based on the presence of hydrophytic vegetation and wetland hydrol-
ogy.* There must also be documented evidence that the wetland resulted from
human activities. Employ the following steps to determine whether an area
consists of wetlands resulting from human activities:
STEP 1 - Determine Whether the Area Represents a Potential
Man-Induced Wetland. Consider the following questions:
a. Has a recent man-induced change in hydrology occurred that
caused the area to become significantly wetter?
* Uplands that support hydrophytic vegetation due to agricultural irrigation
and that have an obvious hydrologic connection to other "waters of the
United States" should not be delineated as wetlands under this subsection.
91
-------
b. Has a major man-induced change in hydrology that occurred in
the past caused a former deepwater aquatic habitat to become
significantly drier?
£. Has man-induced stream channel realignment significantly
altered the area hydrology?
cl. Has the area been subjected to long-term irrigation practices?
If the answer to any of the above questions is YES, document the
approximate time during which the change in hydrology occurred, and
PROCEED TO STEP 2. If the answer to all of the questions is NO, proce-
dures described in Section D or E must be used.
STEP 2 - Determine Whether a Permit Will be Needed if the Area is
Found to be a Wetland. Consider the current CE regulations and policy
regarding man-induced wetlands. If the type of activity resulting in
the area being a potential man-induced wetland is exempted by regula-
tion or policy, no further action is needed. If not exempt, PROCEED TO
STEP 3.
STEP 3 - Characterize the Area Vegetation, Soils, and Hydrology.
Apply procedures described in Section D (routine determinations) or
Section E (comprehensive determinations) to the area. Complete the
appropriate data forms and PROCEED TO STEP 4.
STEP 4 - Wetland Determination. Based on information resulting from
STEP 3, determine whether the area is a wetland. When wetland indi-
cators of all three parameters are found, the area is a wetland. When
indicators of hydrophytic vegetation and wetland hydrology are found
and there is documented evidence that the change in hydrology occurred
so recently that soils could not have developed hydric characteristics,
the area is a wetland. In such cases, it is assumed that the soils are
functioning as hydric soils. CAUTION: If hydrophytic vegetation is
being maintained only because of man-induced wetland hydrology that
would no longer exist if the activity (e.g. irrigation) were to be
terminated, the area should not be considered a wetland.
92
-------
Section G - Problem Areas
77. There are certain wetland types and/or conditions that may make
application of indicators of one or more parameters difficult, at least at
certain times of the year. These are not considered to be atypical situa-
tions. Instead, they are wetland types in which wetland indicators of one or
more parameters may be periodically lacking due to normal seasonal or annual
variations in environmental conditions that result from causes other than
human activities or catastrophic natural events.
Types of problem areas
78. Representative examples of potential problem areas, types of varia-
tions that occur, and their effects on wetland indicators are presented in the
following subparagraphs. Similar situations may sometimes occur in other wet-
land types. Note: This section is not intended to bring nonwetland areas
having wetland indicators of two, but not all three, "parameters into Sec-
tion 404 jurisdiction.
a. Wetlands on drumlins. Slope wetlands occur in glaciated areas
in which thin soils cover relatively impermeable glacial till
or in which layers of glacial till have different hydraulic
conditions that produce a broad zone of ground-water seepage.
Such areas are seldom, if ever, flooded, but downslope ground-
water movement keeps the soils saturated for a sufficient por-
tion of the growing season to produce anaerobic and reducing
soil conditions. This fosters development of hydric soil char-
acteristics and selects for hydrophytic vegetation. Indicators
of wetland hydrology may be lacking during the drier portion of
the growing season.
b. Seasonal wetlands. In many regions (especially in western
states), depression areas occur that have wetland indicators of
all three parameters during the wetter portion of the growing
season, but normally lack wetland indicators of hydrology
and/or vegetation during the drier portion of the growing sea-
son. Obligate hydrophytes and facultative wetland plant spe-
cies (Appendix C, Section 1 or 2) normally are dominant during
the wetter portion of the growing season, while upland species
(annuals) may be dominant during the drier portion of the grow-
ing season. These areas may be inundated during the wetter
portion of the growing season, but wetland hydrology indicators
may be totally lacking during the drier portion of the growing
season. It is important to establish that an area truly is a
water body. Water in a depression normally must be suffi-
ciently persistent to exhibit an ordinary high-water mark or
the presence of wetland characteristics before it can be con-
sidered as a water body potentially subject to Clean Water Act
jurisdiction. The determination that an area exhibits wetland
93
-------
characteristics for a sufficient portion of the growing season
to qualify as a wetland under the Clean Water Act must be made
on a case-by-case basis. Such determinations should consider
the respective length of time that the area exhibits upland and
wetland characteristics, and the manner in which the area fits
into the overall ecological system as a wetland. Evidence con-
cerning the persistence of an area's wetness can be obtained
from its history, vegetation, soil, drainage characteristics,
uses to which it has been subjected, and weather or hydrologic
records.
£. Prairie potholes. Prairie potholes normally occur as shallow
depressions in glaciated portions of the north-central United
States. Many are landlocked, while others have a drainage out-
let to streams or other potholes. Most have standing water for
much of the growing season in years of normal or above normal
precipitation, but are neither inundated nor have saturated
soils during most of the growing season in years of below nor-
mal precipitation. During dry years, potholes often become
incorporated into farming plans, and are either planted to row
crops (e.g. soybeans) or are mowed as part of a haying opera-
tion. When this occurs, wetland indicators of one or more
parameters may be lacking. For example, tillage would elimi-
nate any onsite hydrologic indicator, and would make detection
of soil and vegetation indicators much more difficult.
d_. Vegetated flats. In both coastal and interior areas throughout
the Nation, vegetated flats are often dominated by annual spe-
cies that are categorized as OBL. Application of procedures
described in Sections D and E during the growing season will
clearly result in a positive wetland determination. However,
these areas will appear to be unvegetated mudflats when exam-
ined during the nongrowing season, and the area would not
qualify at that time as a wetland due to an apparent lack of
vegetation.
Wetland determi-
nations in problem areas
79. Procedures for making wetland determinations in problem areas are
presented below. Application of these procedures is appropriate only when a
decision has been made in Section D or E that wetland indicators of one or
more parameters were lacking, probably due to normal seasonal or annual vari-
ations in environmental conditions. Specific procedures to be used will vary
according to the nature of the area, site conditions, and parameter(s)
affected by the variations in environmental conditions. A determination must
be based on the best evidence available to the field inspector, including:
a. Available information (Section B).
b. Field data resulting from an onsite inspection.
94
-------
£. Basic knowledge of the ecology of the particular community
type(s) and environmental conditions associated with the
community type.
NOTE: The procedures described below should only be applied to
parameters not adequately characterized in Section D or E. Complete
the following steps:
STEP 1 - Identify the Parameter(s) to be Considered. Examine the
DATA FORM 1 (Section D or E) and identify the parameter(s) that must be
given additional consideration. PROCEED TO STEP 2.
STEP 2 - Determine the Reason for Further Consideration. Determine
the reason why the parameter(s) identified in STEP L should be given
further consideration. This will require a consideration and
documentation of:
£. Environmental condition(s) that have impacted the parameter(s).
b. Impacts of the identified environmental condition(s) on the
parameter(s) in question.
Record findings in the comments section of DATA FORM 1. PROCEED TO
STEP 3.
STEP 3 - Document Available Information for Parameter(s) in Question.
Examine the available information and consider personal ecological
knowledge of the range of normal environmental conditions of the area.
Local experts (e.g. university personnel) may provide additional
information. Record information on DATA FORM 1. PROCEED TO STEP 4.
STEP 4 - Determine Whether Wetland Indicators are Normally Present
During a Portion of the Growing Season. Examine the information
resulting from STEP 3 and determine whether wetland indicators are
normally present during part of the growing season. If so, record on
DATA FORM 1 the indicators normally present and return to Section D or
Section E and make a wetland determination. If no information can be
found that wetland indicators of all three parameters are normally
present during part of the growing season, the determination must be
made using procedures described in Section D or Section E.
95
-------
REFERENCES
Clark, J. R., and Benforado, J., eds. 1981. Wetlands of Bottomland Hardwood
Forests, Proceedings of a Workshop on Bottomland Hardwood Forest Wetlands of
the Southeastern United States, Elsevier Scientific Publishing Company, New
York.
Correll, D. S., and Correll, H. B. 1972. Aquatic and Wetland Plants of the
Southwestern United States, Publ. No. 16030 DNL 01/72, Environmental Protec-
tion Agency, Washington, B.C.
Cowardin, L. M., Carter, V., Golet, F. C., and LaRoe, E. T. 1979. "Classifi-
cation of Wetlands and Deepwater Habitats of the United States," FWS/OBS-
79/31, US Fish and Wildlife Service, Office of Biological Services,
Washington, D.C.
Cronquist, A., Holmgren, A. H., Holmgren, N. H., and Reveal, J. L. 1972.
Intermountain Flora - Vascular Plants of the Intermountain West, USA, Vols I
and II, Hafner Publishing Company, New York.
Davis, R. J. 1952. Flora of Idaho, William C. Brown Company, Dubuque, Iowa.
Federal Register. 1980. "40 CFR Part 230: Section 404(b)(l) Guidelines for
Specification of Disposal Sites for Dredged or Fill Material," Vol 45,
No. 249, pp 85352-85353, US Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
. 1982. "Title 33: Navigation and Navigable Waters; Chapter II,
Regulatory Programs of the Corps of Engineers," Vol 47, No. 138, p 31810, US
Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
Fernald, M. L. 1950. Gray's Manual of Botany, 8th ed., American Book Com-
pany, New York.
Gleason, H. A., and Cronquist, A. 1963. Manual of Vascular Plants of North-
eastern United States and Adjacent Canada, Van Nostrand, Princeton, N. J.
Godfrey, R. K., and Wooten, J. W. 1979. Aquatic and Wetland Plants of the
Southeastern United States, Vols I and II, University of Georgia Press,
Athens, Ga.
Harrington, H. D. 1979. Manual of the Plants of Colorado, 2nd ed., Sage
Books, Denver, Colo.
Hitchcock, A. S. 1950. Manual of Grasses of the United States, US Department
of Agriculture Miscellaneous Publication No. 200, US Government Printing
Office, Washington, D.C.
Hitchcock, C. L., and Cronquist, A. 1973. Flora of the Pacific Northwest,
University of Washington Press, Seattle, Wash.
Kearney, T. H., and Peebles, R. H. 1960. Arizona Flora, 2nd ed., University
of California Press, Berkeley, Calif.
96
-------
Long, R. W., and Lakela, 0. 1976. A Flora of Tropical Florida, Banyan Books,
Miami, Fla.
Munsell Color. 1975. Munsell Soil Color Charts, Kollmorgen Corporation,
Baltimore, Md.
Munz, P. A., and Keck, D. D. 1959. A California Flora. University of
California Press, Berkeley, Calif.
Radford, A. E., Abies, H. E., and Bell, C. R. 1968. Manual of the Vascular
Flora of the Carolinas, The University of North Carolina Press, Chapel Hill,
N. C.
Small, J. K. 1933. Manual of the Southeastern Flora, The University of North
Carolina Press, Chapel Hill, N. C.
Steyermark, J. A. 1963. Flora of Missouri, The Iowa State University Press,
Ames, Iowa.
Theriot, R. F. In Review. "Flood Tolerance Indices of Plant Species of
Southeastern Bottomland Forests," Technical Report, US Army Engineer Waterways
Experiment Station, Vicksburg, Miss.
US Department of Agriculture - Soil Conservation Service. 1975. Soil
Taxonomy, Agriculture Handbook No. 436, US Government Printing Office,
Washington, D.C.
. 1983. "List of Soils with Actual or High Potential for Hydric
Conditions," National Bulletin No. 430-3-10, Washington, D.C.
. 1985. "Hydric Soils of the United States," USDA-SCS National
Bulletin No. 430-5-9, Washington, D.C.
US Department of the Interior. 1970. National Atlas of the United States, US
Geological Survey, US Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.,
pp 110-111.
97
-------
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Copeland, B. J., Hodson, R. G., and Riggs, S. R. 1984. "The Ecology of the
Pamlico River, North Carolina: An Estuarine Profile," FWS/OBS-82/06, US Fish
and Wildlife Service, Washington, B.C.
Foster, M. S., and Schiel, D. R. 1985. "The Ecology of Giant Kelp Forests in
California: A Community Profile," FWS/OBS-85(7.2), US Fish and Wildlife Ser-
vice, Washington, D.C.
Gosselink, J. G. 1984. "The Ecology of Delta Marshes of Coastal Louisiana:
A Community Profile," FWS/OBS-84/09, US Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington,
D.C.
Hobbie, J. E. 1984. "The Ecology of Tundra Ponds of the Arctic Coastal
Plain: A Community Profile," FWS/OBS-83/25, US Fish and Wildlife Service,
Washington, D.C.
Huffman, R. T., and Tucker, G. E. 1984. "Preliminary Guide to the Onsite
Identification and Delineation of the Wetlands of Alaska," Technical
Report Y-78-9, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, Miss.
Huffman, R. T., Tucker, G. E, Wooten, J. W., Kilmas, C. V., Freel, M. W.,
Forsythe, S. W., and Wilson, J. S. 1982. "Preliminary Guide to the Onsite
Identification and Delineation of the Wetlands of the South Atlantic United
States," Technical Report Y-78-7, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment
Station, Vicksburg, Miss.
. 1982. "Preliminary Guide to the Onsite Identification and
Delineation of the Wetlands of the North Atlantic United States," Technical
Report Y-78-8, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, Miss.
Japp, W. C. 1984. "The Ecology of the South Florida Coral Reefs: A
Community Profile," FWS/OBS-82/08, US Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington,
D.C.
Josselyn, M. 1983. "The Ecology of San Francisco Bay Tidal Marshes: A
Community Profile," FWS/OBS-83/23, US Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington,
D.C.
Livingston, R. J. 1984. "The Ecology of the Apalachicola Bay System: An
Estuarine Profile," FWS/OBS-82/05, US Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington,
D.C.
Nixon, S. W. 1982. "The Ecology of New England High Salt Marshes: A
Community Profile," FWS/OBS-81/55, US Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington,
D.C.
Odum, W. E., Mclvor, C. C., and Smith, T. J., III. 1982. "The Ecology of the
Mangroves of South Florida: A Community Profile," FWS/OBS-81/24, US Fish and
Wildlife Service, Washington, D.C.
98
-------
Odum, W. E., Smith, T. J., Ill, Hoover, J. K., and Mclvor, C. C. 1984. "The
Ecology of Tidal Freshwater Marshes of the United States East Coast: A
Community Profile," FWS/OBS-83/17, US Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington,
D.C.
Peterson, C. H., and Peterson, N. M. 1979. "The Ecology of Intertidal Flats
of North Carolina: A Community Profile," FWS/OBS-79/39, US Fish and Wildlife
Service, Washington, D.C.
Phillips, R. C. 1984. "The Ecology of Eelgrass Meadows in the Pacific
Northwest: A Community Profile," FWS/OBS-84/24, US Fish and Wildlife Service,
Washington, D.C.
Seliskar, D. M., and Gallagher, J. L. 1983. "The Ecology of Tidal Marshes of
the Pacific Northwest Coast: A Community Profile," FWS/OBS-82/32, US Fish and
Wildlife Service, Washington, D.C.
Sharitz, R. R., and Gibbons, J. W. 1982. "The Ecology of Southeastern Shrub
Bogs (Pocosins) and Carolina Bays: A Community Profile," FWS/OBS-82/04, US
Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington, D.C.
Thayer, G. W., Kenworthy, W. J., and Fonseca, M. S. 1984. "The Ecology of
Eelgrass Meadows of the Atlantic Coast: A Community Profile," FWS/OBS-84/02,
US Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington, D.C.
US Army Corps of Engineers. 1978. "Preliminary Guide to Wetlands of
Peninsular Florida," Technical Report Y-78-2, US Army Engineer Waterways
Experiment Station, Vicksburg, Miss.
. 1978. "Preliminary Guide to Wetlands of Puerto Rico," Technical
Report Y-78-3, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, Miss.
. 1978. "Preliminary Guide to Wetlands of the West Coast States,"
Technical Report Y-78-4, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station,
Vicksburg, Miss.
. 1978. "Preliminary Guide to Wetlands of the Gulf Coastal Plain,"
Technical Report Y-78-5, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station,
Vicksburg, Miss.
. 1982. "Preliminary Guide to the Onsite Identification and
Delineation of the Wetlands of the Interior United States," Technical
Report Y-78-6, US Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, Miss.
Witlatch, R. B. 1982. "The Ecology of New England Tidal Flats: A Community
Profile," FWS/OBS-81/01, US Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington, D.C.
Wharton, C. H., Kitchens, W. M., and Sipe, T. W. 1982. "The Ecology of
Bottomland Hardwood Swamps of the Southeast: A Community Profile,"
FWS/OBS-81/37, US Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington, D.C.
99
-------
Zedler, J. B. 1984. "The Ecology of Southern California Coastal Salt
Marshes: A Community Profile," FWS/OBS-81/54, US Fish and Wildlife Service,
Washington, D.C.
Zieman, J. C. 1982. "The Ecology of the Seagrasses of South Florida: A
Community Profile," FWS/OBS-82/25, US Fish and Wildlife Service, Washington,
D.C.
100
-------
APPENDIX A: GLOSSARY
-------
Active water table - A condition in which the zone of soil saturation
fluctuates, resulting in periodic anaerobic soil conditions. Soils with an
active water table often contain bright mottles and matrix chromas of 2 or
less.
Adaptation - A modification of a species that makes it more fit for existence
under the conditions of its environment. These modifications are the result
of genetic selection processes.
Adventitious roots - Roots found on plant stems in positions where they nor-
mally do not occur.
Aerenchymous tissue - A type of plant tissue in which cells are unusually
large and arranged in a manner that results in air spaces in the plant organ.
Such tissues are often referred to as spongy and usually provide increased
buoyancy.
Aerobic - A situation in which molecular oxygen is a part of the environment.
Anaerobic - A situation in which molecular oxygen is absent (or effectively
so) from the environment.
Aquatic roots - Roots that develop on stems above the normal position occupied
by roots in response to prolonged inundation.
Aquic moisture regime - A mostly reducing soil moisture regime nearly free of
dissolved oxygen due to saturation by ground water or its capillary fringe and
occurring at periods when the soil temperature at 19.7 in. is greater than
5° C.
Arched roots - Roots produced on plant stems in a position above the normal
position of roots, which serve to brace the plant during and following periods
of prolonged inundation.
Areal cover - A measure of dominance that defines the degree to which above-
ground portions of plants (not limited to those rooted in a sample plot) cover
the ground surface. It is possible for the total areal cover in a community
to exceed 100 percent because (a) most plant communities consist of two or
more vegetative strata; (b) areal cover is estimated by vegetative layer; and
(c) foliage within a single layer may overlap.
Atypical situation - As used herein, this term refers to areas in which one or
more parameters (vegetation, soil, and/or hydrology) have been sufficiently
altered by recent human activities or natural events to preclude the presence
of wetland indicators of the parameter.
Backwater flooding - Situations in which the source of inundation is overbank
flooding from a nearby stream.
I
4
A2
-------
Basal area - The cross-sectional area of a tree trunk measured in square
inches, square centimetres, etc. Basal area is normally measured at 4.5 ft
above the ground level and is used as a measure of dominance. The most easily
used tool for measuring basal area is a tape marked in square inches. When
plotless methods are used, an angle gauge or prism will provide a means for
rapidly determining basal area. This term is also applicable to the cross-
sectional area of a clumped herbaceous plant, measured at 1.0 in. above the
soil surface.
Bench mark - A fixed, more or less permanent reference point or object, the
elevation of which is known. The US Geological Survey (USGS) installs brass
caps in bridge abutments or otherwise permanently sets bench marks at conveni-
ent locations nationwide. The elevations on these marks are referenced to the
National Geodetic Vertical Datum (NGVD), also commonly known as mean sea
level (MSL). Locations of these bench marks on USGS quadrangle maps are shown
as small triangles. However, the marks are sometimes destroyed by construc-
tion or vandalism. The existence of any bench mark should be field verified
before planning work that relies on a particular reference point. The USGS
and/or local state surveyor's office can provide information on the existence,
exact location, and exact elevation of bench marks.
Biennial - An event that occurs at 2-year intervals.
Buried soil - A once-exposed soil now covered by an alluvial, loessal, or
other deposit (including man-made).
Canopy layer - The uppermost layer of vegetation in a plant community. In
forested areas, mature trees comprise the canopy layer, while the tallest
herbaceous species constitute the canopy layer in a marsh.
Capillary fringe - A zone immediately above the water table (zero gauge
pressure) in which water is drawn upward from the water table by capillary
action.
Chemical reduction - Any process by which one compound or ion acts as an elec-
tron donor. In such cases, the valence state of the electron donor is
decreased.
Chroma - The relative purity or saturation of a color; intensity of distinc-
tive hue as related to grayness; one of the three variables of color.
Comprehensive wetland determination - A type of wetland determination that is
based on the strongest possible evidence, requiring the collection of quanti-
tative data.
Concretion - A local concentration of chemical compounds (e.g. calcium carbon-
ate, iron oxide) in the form of a grain or nodule of varying size, shape,
hardness, and color. Concretions of significance in hydric soils are usually
iron and/or manganese oxides occurring at or near the soil surface, which
develop under conditions of prolonged soil saturation.
A3
-------
Contour - An imaginary line of constant elevation on the ground surface. The
corresponding line on a map is called a "contour line."
Criteria - Standards, rules, or tests on which a judgment or decision may be
based.
Deepwater aquatic habitat - Any open water area that has a mean annual water
depth >6.6 ft, lacks soil, and/or is either unvegetated or supports only
floating or submersed macrophytes.
Density - The number of individuals of a species per unit area.
Detritus - Minute fragments of plant parts found on the soil surface. When
fused together by algae or soil particles, this is an indicator that surface
water was recently present.
Diameter at breast height (DBH) - The width of a plant stem as measured at
4.5 ft above the ground surface.
Dike - A bank (usually earthen) constructed to control or confine water.
Dominance - As used herein, a descriptor of vegetation that is related to the
standing crop of a species in an area, usually measured by height, areal cover,
or basal area (for trees).
Dominant species - As used herein, a plant species that exerts a controlling
influence on or defines the character of a community.
Drained - A condition in which ground or surface water has been reduced or
eliminated from an area by artificial means.
Drift line - An accumulation of debris along a contour (parallel to the water
flow) that represents the height of an inundation event.
Duration (inundation/soil saturation) - The length of time during which water
stands at or above the soil surface (inundation), or during which the soil is
saturated. As used herein, duration refers to a period during the growing
season.
Ecological tolerance - The range of environmental conditions in which a plant
species can grow.
Emergent plant - A rooted herbaceous plant species that has parts extending
above a water surface.
Field capacity - The percentage of water remaining in a soil after it has been
saturated and after free drainage is negligible.
Fill material - Any material placed in an area to increase surface elevation.
A4
-------
Flooded - A condition in which the soil surface is temporarily covered with
flowing water from any source, such as streams overflowing their banks, runoff
from adjacent or surrounding slopes, inflow from high tides, or any combina-
tion of sources.
Flora - A list of all plant species that occur in an area.
Frequency (inundation or soil saturation) - The periodicity of coverage of an
area by surface water or soil saturation. It is usually expressed as the
number of years (e.g. 50 years) the soil is inundated or saturated at least
once each year during part of the growing season per 100 years or as a 1-, 2-,
5-year, etc., inundation frequency.
Frequency (vegetation) - The distribution of individuals of a species in an
area. It is quantitatively expressed as
Number of samples containing species A .. _
Total number of samples
More than one species may have a frequency of 100 percent within the same
area.
Frequently flooded - A flooding class in which flooding is likely to occur
often under normal weather conditions (more than 50-percent chance of flooding
in any year or more than 50 times in 100 years).
Gleyed - A soil condition resulting from prolonged soil saturation, which is
manifested by the presence of bluish or greenish colors through the soil mass
or in mottles (spots or streaks) among other colors. Gleying occurs under
reducing soil conditions resulting from soil saturation, by which iron is
reduced predominantly to the ferrous state.
Ground water - That portion of the water below the ground surface that is
under greater pressure than atmospheric pressure.
Growing season - The portion of the year when soil temperatures at 19.7 inches
below the soil surface are higher than biologic zero (5° C) (US Department of
Agriculture - Soil Conservation Service 1985).* For ease of determination
this period can be approximated by the number of frost-free days (US Depart-
ment of the Interior 1970).
Habitat - The environment occupied by individuals of a particular species,
population, or community.
Headwater flooding - A situation in which an area becomes inundated directly
by surface runoff from upland areas.
Herb - A nonwoody individual of a macrophytic species. In this manual,
seedlings of woody plants (including vines) that are less than 3.2 ft in
height are considered to be herbs.
* See references at the end of the main text.
A5
-------
Herbaceous layer - Any vegetative stratum of a plant community that is
composed predominantly of herbs.
Histic epipedon - An 8- to 16-in. soil layer at or near the surface that is
saturated for 30 consecutive days or more during the growing season in most
years and contains a minimum of 20 percent organic matter when no clay is
present or a minimum of 30 percent organic matter when 60 percent or greater
clay is present.
Histosols - An order in soil taxonomy composed of organic soils that have
organic soil materials in more than half of the upper 80 cm or that are of any
thickness if directly overlying bedrock.
Homogeneous vegetation - A situation in which the same plant species associa-
tion occurs throughout an area.
Hue - A characteristic of color that denotes a color in relation to red, yel-
low, blue, etc; one of the three variables of color. Each color chart in the
Munsell Color Book (Munsell Color 1975) consists of a specific hue.
Hydric soil - A soil that is saturated, flooded, or ponded long enough during
the growing season to develop anaerobic conditions that favor the growth and
regeneration of hydrophytic vegetation (US Department of Agriculture-Soil
Conservation Service 1985). Hydric soils that occur in areas having positive
indicators of hydrophytic vegetation and wetland hydrology are wetland soils.
Hydric soil condition - A situation in which characteristics exist that are
associated with soil development under reducing conditions.
Hydrologic regime - The sum total of water that occurs in an area on average
during a given period.
Hydrologic zone - An area that is inundated or has saturated soils within a
specified range of frequency and duration of inundation and soil saturation.
Hydrology - The science dealing with the properties, distribution, and circu-
lation of water.
Hydrophyte - Any macrophyte that grows in water or on a substrate that is at
least periodically deficient in oxygen as a result of excessive water content;
plants typically found in wet habitats.
Hydrophytic vegetation - The sum total of macrophytic plant life growing in
water or on a substrate that is at least periodically deficient in oxygen as a
result of excessive water content. When hydrophytic vegetation comprises a
community where indicators of hydric soils and wetland hydrology also occur,
the area has wetland vegetation.
Hypertrophied lenticels - An exaggerated (oversized) pore on the surface of
stems of woody plants through which gases are exchanged between the plant and
the atmosphere. The enlarged lenticels serve as a mechanism for increasing
oxygen to plant roots during periods of inundation and/or saturated soils.
A6
-------
Importance value - A quantitative term describing the relative influence of a
plant species in a plant community, obtained by summing any combination of
relative frequency, relative density, and relative dominance.
Indicator - As used in this manual, an event, entity, or condition that
typically characterizes a prescribed environment or situation; indicators
determine or aid in determining whether or not certain stated circumstances
exist.
Indicator status - One of the categories (e.g. OBL) that describes the esti-
mated probability of a plant species occurring in wetlands.
Intercellular air space - A cavity between cells in plant tissues, resulting
from variations in cell shape and configuration. Aerenchymous tissue (a
morphological adaptation found in many hydrophytes) often has large inter-
cellular air spaces.
Inundation - A condition in which water from any source temporarily or perma-
nently covers a land surface.
Levee - A natural or man-made feature of the landscape that restricts movement
of water into or through an area.
Liana - As used in this manual, a layer of vegetation in forested plant com-
munities that consists of woody vines. The term may also be applied to a
given species.
Limit of biological activity - With reference to soils, the zone below which
conditions preclude normal growth of soil organisms. This term often is used
to refer to the temperature (5° C) in a soil below which metabolic processes
of soil microorganisms, plant roots, and animals are negligible.
Long duration (flooding) - A flooding class in which the period of inundation
for a single event ranges from 7 days to 1 month.
Macrophyte - Any plant species that can be readily observed without the aid of
optical magnification. This includes all vascular plant species and mosses
(e.g., Sphagnum spp.), as well as large algae (e.g. Chara spp., kelp).
Macrophytic - A term referring to a plant species that is a macrophyte.
Major portion of the root zone. The portion of the soil profile in which more
than 50 percent of plant roots occur. In wetlands, this usually constitutes
the upper 12 in. of the profile.
Man-induced wetland - Any area that develops wetland characteristics due to
some activity (e.g., irrigation) of man.
Mapping unit - As used in this manual, some common characteristic of soil,
vegetation, and/or hydrology that can be shown at the scale of mapping for the
defined purpose and objectives of a survey.
A7
-------
Mean sea level - A datum, or "plane of zero elevation," established by aver-
aging all stages of oceanic tides over a 19-year tidal cycle or "epoch." This
plane is corrected for curvature of the earth and is the standard reference
for elevations on the earth's surface. The correct term for mean sea level is
the National Geodetic Vertical Datum (NGVD).
Mesophytic - Any plant species growing where soil moisture and aeration condi-
tions lie between extremes. These species are typically found in habitats
with average moisture conditions, neither very dry nor very wet.
Metabolic processes - The complex of internal chemical reactions associated
with life-sustaining functions of an organism.
Method - A particular procedure or set of procedures to be followed.
Mineral soil - A soil consisting predominantly of, and having its properties
determined predominantly by, mineral matter usually containing less than
20-percent organic matter.
Morphological adaptation - A feature of structure and form that aids in fit-
ting a species to its particular environment (e.g. buttressed base, adventi-
tious roots, aerenchymous tissue).
Mottles - Spots or blotches of different color or shades of color interspersed
within the dominant color in a soil layer, usually resulting from the presence
of periodic reducing soil conditions.
Muck - Highly decomposed organic material in which the original plant parts
are not recognizable.
Multitrunk - A situation in which a single individual of a woody plant species
has several stems.
Nonhydric soil - A soil that has developed under predominantly aerobic soil
conditions. These soils normally support mesophytic or xerophytic species.
Nonwetland - Any area that has sufficiently dry conditions that indicators of
hydrophytic vegetation, hydric soils, and/or wetland hydrology are lacking.
As used in this manual, any area that is neither a wetland, a deepwater
aquatic habitat, nor other special aquatic site.
Organic pan - A layer usually occurring at 12 to 30 inches below the soil sur-
face in coarse-textured soils, in which organic matter and aluminum (with or
without iron) accumulate at the point where the top of the water table most
often occurs. Cementing of the organic matter slightly reduces permeability
of this layer.
Organic soil - A soil is classified as an organic soil when it is: (1) sat-
urated for prolonged periods (unless artificially drained) and has more than
30-percent organic matter if the mineral fraction is more than 50-percent
clay, or more than 20-percent organic matter if the mineral fraction has no
clay; or (2) never saturated with water for more than a few days and having
more than 34-percent organic matter.
A8
-------
Overbank flooding - Any situation in which inundation occurs as a result of
the water level of a stream rising above bank level.
Oxidation-reduction process - A complex of biochemical reactions in soil that
influences the valence state of component elements and their ions. Prolonged
soil saturation during the growing season elicits anaerobic conditions that
shift the overall process to a reducing condition.
Oxygen pathway - The sequence of cells, intercellular spaces, tissues, and
organs, through which molecular oxygen is transported in plants. Plant
species having pathways for oxygen transport to the root system are often
adapted for life in saturated soils.
Parameter - A characteristic component of a unit that can be defined. Vegeta-
tion, soil, and hydrology are three parameters that may be used to define
wetlands.
Parent material - The unconsolidated and more or less weathered mineral or
organic matter from which a soil profile develops.
Ped - A unit of soil structure (e.g. aggregate, crumb, prism, block, or
granule) formed by natural processes.
Peraquic moisture regime - A soil condition in which a reducing environment
always occurs due to the presence of ground water at or near the soil surface.
Periodically - Used herein to define detectable regular or irregular saturated
soil conditions or inundation, resulting from ponding of ground water, precip-
itation, overland flow, stream flooding, or tidal influences that occur(s)
with hours, days, weeks, months, or even years between events.
Permeability - A soil characteristic that enables water or air to move through
the profile, measured as the number of inches per hour that water moves
downward through the saturated soil. The rate at which water moves through
the least permeable layer governs soil permeability.
Physiognomy - A term used to describe a plant community based on the growth
habit (e.g., trees, herbs, liaras) of the dominant species.
Physiological adaptation - A feature of the basic physical and chemical
activities that occurs in cells and tissues of a species, which results in it
being better fitted to its environment (e.g. ability to absorb nutrients under
low oxygen tensions).
Plant community - All of the plant populations occurring in a shared habitat
or environment.
Plant cover - See areal cover.
Pneumatophore - Modified roots that may function as a respiratory organ in
species subjected to frequent inundation or soil saturation (e.g., cypress
knees).
A9
-------
Ponded - A condition in which water stands in a closed depression. Water may
be removed only by percolation, evaporation, and/or transpiration.
Poorly drained - Soils that commonly are wet at or near the surface during a
sufficient part of the year that field crops cannot be grown under natural
conditions. Poorly drained conditions are caused by a saturated zone, a layer
with low hydraulic conductivity, seepage, or a combination of these
conditions.
Population - A group of individuals of the same species that occurs in a given
area.
Positive wetland indicator - Any evidence of the presence of hydrophytic
vegetation, hydric soil, and/or wetland hydrology in an area.
Prevalent vegetation - The plant community or communities that occur in an
area during a given period. The prevalent vegetation is characterized by the
dominant macrophytic species that comprise the plant community.
Quantitative - A precise measurement or determination expressed numerically.
Range - As used herein, the geographical area in which a plant species is
known to occur.
Redox potential - A measure of the tendency of a system to donate or accept
electrons, which is governed by the nature and proportions of the oxidizing
and reducing substances contained in the system.
Reducing environment - An environment conducive to the removal of oxygen and
chemical reduction of ions in the soils.
Relative density - A quantitative descriptor, expressed as a percent, of the
relative number of individuals of a species in an area; it is calculated by
_ Number of individuals of species A
Total number of individuals of all species
Relative dominance - A quantitative descriptor, expressed as a percent, of the
relative size or cover of individuals of a species in an area; it is
calculated by
Amount* of species A
I uu
Total amount of all species
Relative frequency - A quantitative descriptor, expressed as a percent, of the
relative distribution of individuals of a species in an area; it is calculated
by
Frequency of species A
lUU
Total frequency of all species
* The "amount" of a species may be based on percent areal cover, basal area,
or height.
A10
-------
Relief - The change in elevation of a land surface between two points; collec-
tively, the configuration of the earth's surface, including such features as
hills and valleys.
Reproductive adaptation - A feature of the reproductive mechanism of a species
that results in it being better fitted to its environment (e.g. ability for
seed germination under water).
Respiration - The sum total of metabolic processes associated with conversion
of stored (chemical) energy into kinetic (physical) energy for use by an
organism.
Rhizosphere - The zone of soil in which interactions between living plant roots
and microorganisms occur.
Root zone - The portion of a soil profile in which plant roots occur.
Routine wetland determination - A type of wetland determination in which
office data and/or relatively simple, rapidly applied onsite methods are
employed to determine whether or not an area is a wetland. Most wetland
determinations are of this type, which usually does not require collection of
quantitative data.
Sample plot - An area of land used for measuring or observing existing
conditions.
Sapling/shrub - A layer of vegetation composed of woody plants <3.0 in. in
diameter at breast height but greater than 3.2 ft in height, exclusive of
woody vines.
Saturated soil conditions - A condition in which all easily drained voids
(pores) between soil particles in the root zone are temporarily or permanently
filled with water to the soil surface at pressures greater than atmospheric.
Soil - Unconsolidated mineral and organic material that supports, or is cap-
able of supporting, plants, and which has recognizable properties due to the
integrated effect of climate and living matter acting upon parent material, as
conditioned by relief over time.
Soil horizon - A layer of soil or soil material approximately parallel to the
land surface and differing from adjacent genetically related layers in physi-
cal, chemical, and biological properties or characteristics (e.g. color,
structure, texture, etc.).
Soil matrix - The portion of a given soil having the dominant color. In most
cases, the matrix will be the portion of the soil having more than 50 percent
of the same color.
Soil permeability - The ease with which gases, liquids, or plant roots pene-
trate or pass through a layer of soil.
All
-------
Soil phase - A subdivision of a soil series having features (e.g. slope, sur-
face texture, and stoniness) that affect the use and management of the soil,
but which do not vary sufficiently to differentiate it as a separate series.
These are usually the basic mapping units on detailed soil maps produced by
the Soil Conservation Service.
Soil pore - An area within soil occupied by either air or water, resulting
from the arrangement of individual soil particles or peds.
Soil profile - A vertical section of a soil through all its horizons and
extending into the parent material.
Soil series - A group of soils having horizons similar in differentiating char-
acteristics and arrangement in the soil profile, except for texture of the
surface horizon.
Soil structure - The combination or arrangement of primary soil particles into
secondary particles, units, or peds.
Soil surface - The upper limits of the soil profile. For mineral soils, this
is the upper limit of the highest (Al) mineral horizon. For organic soils, it
is the upper limit of undecomposed, dead organic matter.
Soil texture - The relative proportions of the various sizes of particles in a
soil.
Somewhat poorly drained - Soils that are wet near enough to the surface or
long enough that planting or harvesting operations or crop growth is markedly
restricted unless artificial drainage is provided. Somewhat poorly drained
soils commonly have a layer with low hydraulic conductivity, wet conditions
high in the profile, additions of water through seepage, or a combination of
these conditions.
Stilted roots - Aerial roots arising from stems (e.g., trunk and branches),
presumably providing plant support (e.g., Phizophora mangle}.
Stooling - A form of asexual reproduction in which new shoots are produced at
the base of senescing stems, often resulting in a multitrunk growth habit.
Stratigraphy - Features of geology dealing with the origin, composition,
distribution, and succession of geologic strata (layers).
Substrate - The base or substance on which an attached species is growing.
Surface water - Water present above the substrate or soil surface.
Tidal - A situation in which the water level periodically fluctuates due to
the action of lunar and solar forces upon the rotating earth.
Topography - The configuration of a surface, including its relief and the
position of its natural and man-made features.
A12
-------
Transect: - As used herein, a line on the ground along which observations are
made at some interval.
Transition zone - The area in which a change from wetlands to nonwetlands
occurs. The transition zone may he narrow or broad.
Transpiration - The process in plants by which water vapor is released into
the gaseous environment, primarily through stomata.
Tree - A woody plant >3.0 in. in diameter at breast height, regardless of
height (exclusive of woody vines).
Typical - That which normally, usually, or commonly occurs.
Typically adapted - A term that refers to a species being normally or commonly
suited to a given set of environmental conditions, due to some feature of its
morphology, physiology, or reproduction.
Unconsolidated parent material - Material from which a soil develops, usually
formed by weathering of rock or placement in an area by natural forces (e.g.
water, wind, or gravity).
Under normal circumstances - As used in the definition of wetlands, this term
refers to situations in which the vegetation has not been substantially
altered by man's activities.
Uniform vegetation - As used herein, a situation in which the same group of
dominant species generally occurs throughout a given area.
Upland - As used herein, any area that does not qualify as a wetland because
the associated hydrologic regime is not sufficiently wet to elicit development
of vegetation, soils, and/or hydrologic characteristics associated with
wetlands. Such areas occurring within floodplains are more appropriately
termed nonwetlands.
Value (soil color) - The relative lightness or intensity of color, approxi-
mately a function of the square root of the total amount of light reflected
from a surface; one of the three variables of color.
Vegetation - The sum total of macrophytes that occupy a given area.
Vegetation layer - A subunit of a plant community in which all component spe-
cies exhibit the same growth form (e.g., trees, saplings/shrubs, herbs).
Very long duration (flooding) - A duration class in which the length of a
single inundation event is greater than 1 month.
Very poorly drained - Soils that are wet to the surface most of the time.
These soils are wet enough to prevent the growth of important crops (except
rice) unless artificially drained.
Watermark - A line on a tree or other upright structure that represents the
maximum static water level reached during an inundation event.
A13
-------
Water table - The upper surface of ground water or that level below which the
soil is saturated with water. It is at least 6 in. thick and persists in the
soil for more than a few weeks.
Wetlands - Those areas that are inundated or saturated by surface or ground
water at a frequency and duration sufficient to support, and that under normal
circumstances do support, a prevalence of vegetation typically adapted for
life in saturated soil conditions. Wetlands generally include swamps,
marshes, bogs, and similar areas.
Wetland boundary - The point on the ground at which a shift from wetlands to
nonwetlands or aquatic habitats occurs. These boundaries usually follow
contours.
Wetland determination - The process or procedure by which an area is adjudged
a wetland or nonwetland.
Wetland hydrology - The sum total of wetness characteristics in areas that are
inundated or have saturated soils for a sufficient duration to support
hydrophytic vegetation.
Wetland plant association - Any grouping of plant species that recurs wherever
certain wetland conditions occur.
Wetland soil - A soil that has characteristics developed in a reducing atmo-
sphere, which exists when periods of prolonged soil saturation result in
anaerobic conditions. Hydric soils that are sufficiently wet to support
hydrophytic vegetation are wetland soils.
Wetland vegetation - The sum total of macrophytic plant life that occurs in
areas where the frequency and duration of inundation or soil saturation pro-
duce permanently or periodically saturated soils of sufficient duration to
exert a controlling influence on the plant species present. As used herein,
hydrophytic vegetation occurring in areas that also have hydric soils and
wetland hydrology may be properly referred to as wetland vegetation.
Woody vine - See liana.
Xerophytic - A plant species that is typically adapted for life in conditions
where a lack of water is a limiting factor for growth and/or reproduction.
These species are capable of growth in extremely dry conditions as a result of
morphological, physiological, and/or reproductive adaptations.
I
A14
-------
APPENDIX B: BLANK AND EXAMPLE DATA FORMS
-------
DATA FORM 1
WETLAND DETERMINATION
Applicant
Name:
State:
Date:
Application Project
Number: Name:
County: Legal Description: Township:
Plot No. : Section:
Range :
Vegetation [list the three dominant species in each vegetation layer (5 if
only 1 or 2 layers)]. Indicate species with observed morphological or known
physiological adaptations with an asterisk.
Species
Trees
1.
2.
3.
Saplings/shrubs
4.
5.
6.
Indicator
Status
Species
Herbs
7.
8.
9.
Woody vines
10.
11.
12.
Indicator
Status
% of species that are OBL, FACW, and/or FAC: .
Hydrophytic vegetation: Yes No . Basis:
Other indicators:
Soil
Series and phase:
Mottled: Yes
Gleyed: Yes
Hydr.ic soils: Yes
; No_
No
On hydric soils list? Yes_
No
Mottle color:
Matrix color:
Other indicators:
No ; Basis:
Hydrology
Inundated: Yes
; No
Saturated soils: Yes
Other indicators:
Depth of standing water:
; No
Depth to saturated soil:
Wetland hydrology: Yes
Atypical situation: Yes_
; No
; No
Normal Circumstances? Yes
No
Wetland Determination: Wetland_
Comments:
Basis:
; Nonwetland
Determined by:
B2
-------
CO
PK CO
o <
(J
H O
25
M Pd
O W
PH >
o o
fe
o
OS
PQ H
X co
4-1
O
111
r->
O
l-l
H
ia
Q
CO
25
W
0)
0)
Q
tu
u
§
2
O
M
s
W
o
O
H
4-1
IS
O
H co
O
-------
Applicant
Name:
DATA FORM 3
ATYPICAL SITUATIONS
Application
Number:
Location:
Plot Number:
Project
Name:
Date:
A. VEGETATION:
1. Type of Alteration:
2. Effect on Vegetation:
3. Previous Vegetation:
(Attach documentation)
4. Hydrophytic Vegetation? Yes
B. SOILS:
1. Type of Alteration:
2. Effect on Soils:
3. Previous Soils:
(Attach documentation)
4. Hydric Soils? Yes_
C. HYDROLOGY:
1. Type of Alteration:
2. Effect on Hydrology:
3. Previous Hydrology:
(Attach documentation)
4. Wetland Hydrology? Yes_
No
No
No
Characterized By:
B4
-------
Applicant
Name: John Doe
DATA FORM 1
WETLAND DETERMINATION
Application
Number: R-85-1421
Project
Name: Zena Acricultural Land
State: LA County: Choctaw Legal Description: Township: 7N Range: 2E
Date: 10/08/85 Plot No.: 1-1 Section: 32
Vegetation [list the three dominant species in each vegetation layer (5 if only
1 or 2 layers)]. Indicate species with observed morphological or known phys-
iological adaptations with an asterisk.
Species
Trees
1. Quercus lyrata
2. Carya aquatica
3. Gleditsia aquatica
Saplings/shurbs
4. Forestiera acwni-nata
5. Planera aquatiaa
6.
Indicator
Status
OBL
OBL
OBL
OBL
OBL
Species
Indicator
Status
Herbs
7. Polygonim hydropiperoides OBL
8. Boelmeria cylindrica FACW+
9. Brunnichia eirrhosa
Woody vines
10. Toxicodendron radicans FAC
11.
12.
Other indicators:
% of species that are OBL, FACW, and/or FAC: 100%
Hydrophytic vegetation: Yes X No . Basis: 50% of dominants are OBL,
FACW, and/or FAC on plant
list.
Soil
Series and phase:Sharkey, frequently flooded On hydric soils list? Yes_X; No .
Mottled: Yes X ; No . Mottle color:5YR4/6 ; Matrix color; 10YR4/1 .
Gleyed: Yes No X_
X
Hydric soils: Yes
Other indicators:
No ; Basis: On hydric soil list and matrix color
Hydrology
Inundated:
Yes
No_
X
Depth of standing water:
No
Depth to saturated soil:
Saturated soils: Yes
Other indicators: Drift lines and sediment deposits present on trees
Wetland hydrology: Yes X ; No . Basis: Saturated soils
Atypical situation: Yes ; No X
Normal Circumstances?: Yes X
Wetland Determination: Wetland
No
Nonwetland
Comments: No rain reported from area in previous two weeks.
Determined by: Zelda Schmell
B5
(Signed)
-------
CN
^
OS
o
Pu
M
CO
Z
W
S3
OS
Pu
y
0
CJ
1
Z
o
M
H
H
W
0
W
j>
u
C
CO
! 1
CO
3
4-1
D
O
H
)H
<
CO
G
0)
^i
cu
g
CO
J2
O
111
T->
O
|u
OH
lh-<
CN
^3-
i <
1
in
00
otf
.
O
z
G
O
H
4-1
CO
U
H
i 1
a
(X
<
CJ
O
CJ
^^
<
..
C
0
H
4J
CO
CJ
O
>_]
W
z
^J
ps1
co
Pu CO
0 <
HO1
P 0
M CJ
S3
CO
pa
PS
w
PC
*s^
z
<£
pc
I-J ij
<£ <( <£
H co w
o < PS
H CO <
1
<
z
o
M
H
<
H co
U U
O W
W OS
> H
CN ^u en
in in m in m
r-~ CN r~- CN CN
m vo en
^^
&c
c
H
CO tH
tS CO
t» eu
O M
« Si, ^
CJ CO
ti _Cu C
"X! EX. <3 'ri
g O -*-i 4^
<~> fi <3 <3
r-i rXj ^i rS
Sj Si O Cr C3
CJ rS^ C3 *£}
«3 r-i
<3 g -ri « (3
SH K O CO C3
CO O **-i 4^ H-i
JCr. K '^ fX
S> K "X! '^
O O S r-i CO
03 fX, CQ cjj tti
i-u CN en ^ m ^o
^H en CN
in en en
-3- vf in
r-H CN CM
r *
in o in o oo m
v£; oo oo CM en en
-cr vo i CM
Q
O
*^i
-)-i
O « (3 (3 C3 (3
"^ "« -^ -S -S §-
?H ?H 4-i +i +i Q
S~ S" C3 Q tS
^ ^ g- 1- §- .2
CO co C3 (3 (3 03
iS 3 4-i
CJ O (3 <3 (3 -^i
JL, f, Si 3-. S. 'Xi
CO CO ii, SH ?-, CO
S S <3 <3 G r-i
cS Q' c
rt ^f
<3
Q Q
^) *r^
^ s
^ »^
<3 CJj
S. ^
tr ^
<3 ^i
« W
r> O
co S^
4^ >j
'^ S-X,
^Q CO
Q) O
r-i «(ri
^3 Ci
r^ oo
H
Z
M
O
Pu
M
53
NUMBER OF
H
< C
H t-4
O W
EH U3
H
X
ft, O
O i '
w
S3
Z
<
CO
H
CO
w
z
I 1
>
>*
0
o
<
CO
CO
<
ij
CO
CO
2
CJ
CO
pa
&*
PC
CO
^
CO
0
Z
M
PH
LTl in
-J- Cfi Qi C
^ ^ SH ^H tS
O Q) O O ^
£tj Cc^ Pt| t-H P^i
-H CN CO -^ lO
m
CO
G
^
4^
a
cr
«
CO
§
BH
vO
in
f-H
in
_
«
_CJ
4^
(3
3
^-
e
«
g3
«
r
OO
B6
-------
DATA FORM 3
ATYPICAL SITUATIONS
Applicant Application Project
Name: Wetland Developers, Inc. Number: R-85-12 Name: Big Canal
Location; Joshua Co., MT Plot Number: 2 Date: 10/08/85
A. VEGETATION:
1. Type of Alteration: Vegetation totally removed or covered by place-
ment of fill from canal (1984)
2. Effect on Vegetation: None remaining
3. Previous Vegetation: Cares nebrascensis - Junous effusus freshwater
(Attach documentation) marsh (based on contiguous plant communities
and aerial photography predating fill)
4. Hydrophytic Vegetation? Yes X No .
SOILS;
1. Type of Alteration: Original soil covered by 4 feet of fill
material excavated from canal
2. Effect on Soils: Original soil buried in 1984
3. Previous Soils: Original soil examined at 10 inches below
(Attach documentation) original soil surface. Soil gleyed (color
notation 5Y2/0)
4, Hydric Soils? Yes X No .
C. HYDROLOGY:
1. Type of Alteration: 4 feet of fill material placed on original
surface
2. Effect on Hydrology: Area no longer is inundated
3. Previous Hydrology Examination of color IR photography taken on 6/5/84
(Attach documentation) showed the area to be inundated. Gaging
station data from gage 2 miles upstream
indicated the area has been inundated for as
much as 3 months of the growing season
during 8 of the past 12 years .
4. Wetland Hydrology? Yes X No
Characterized By: Joe Zook
B7
-------
APPENDIX C: VEGETATION
-------
1. This appendix contains three sections. Section 1 is a subset of the
regional list of plants that occur in wetlands, but includes only those spe-
cies having an indicator status of OBL, FACW, or FAC. Section 2 is a list of
plants that commonly occur in wetlands of a given region. Since many geo-
graphic areas of Section 404 responsibility include portions of two or more
plant list regions, users will often need more than one regional list; thus,
Sections 1 and 2 will be published separately from the remainder of the
manual. Users will be furnished all appropriate regional lists.
2. Section 3, which is presented herein, describes morphological,
physiological, and reproductive adaptations that can be observed or are known
to occur in plant species that are typically adapted for life in anaerobic
soil conditions.
Section 3 - Morphological, Physiological, and Reproductive
Adaptations of Plant Species for Occurrence in Areas
Having Anaerobic Soil Conditions
Morphological adaptations
3. Many plant species have morphological adaptations for occurrence in
wetlands. These structural modifications most often provide the plant with
increased buoyancy or support. In some cases (e.g. adventitious roots), the
adaptation may facilitate the uptake of nutrients and/or gases (particularly
oxygen). However, not all species occurring in areas having anaerobic soil
conditions exhibit morphological adaptations for such conditions. The
following is a list of morphological adaptations that a species occurring in
areas having anaerobic soil conditions may possess (a partial list of species
with such adaptations is presented in Table Cl) :
a. Buttressed tree trunks. Tree species (e.g. Taxodium distiahum)
may develop enlarged trunks (Figure Cl) in response to frequent
inundation. This adaptation is a strong indicator of hydro-
phytic vegetation in nontropical forested areas.
b. Pneumatophores . These modified roots may serve as respiratory
organs in species subjected to frequent inundation or soil
saturation. Cypress knees (Figure C2) are a classic example,
but other species (e.g., Nyssa aquatiea, Rhizophora mangle) may
also develop pneumatophores.
Adventitious roots. Sometimes referred to as "water roots,"
adventitious roots occur on plant stems in positions where roots
normally are not found. Small fibrous roots protruding from the
base of trees (e.g. Salix nigra*) or roots on stems of herbaceous
C2
-------
plants and tree seedlings in positions immediately above the
soil surface (e.g. Ludwigia spp.) occur in response to inunda-
tion or soil saturation (Figure C3). These usually develop
during periods of sufficiently prolonged soil saturation to
destroy most of the root system. CAUTION: Not all adventitious
roots develop as a result of inundation or soil saturation. For
example, aerial roots on woody vines are not normally produced
as a response to inundation or soil saturation.
Shallow root systems. When soils are inundated or saturated for
long periods during the growing season, anaerobic conditions
develop in the zone of root growth. Most species with deep root
systems cannot survive in such conditions. Most species capable
of growth during periods when soils are oxygenated only near the
surface have shallow root systems. In forested wetlands, wind-
thrown trees (Figure C4) are often indicative of shallow root
systems.
Inflated leaves, stems, or roots. Many hydrophytic species,
particularly herbs (e.g. Lirmobium spongia, Ludwigia spp.), have
or develop spongy (aerenchymous) tissues in leaves, stems,
and/or roots that provide buoyancy or support and serve as a
reservoir or passageway for oxygen needed for metabolic pro-
cesses. An example of inflated leaves is shown in Figure C5.
Polymorphic leaves. Some herbaceous species produce different
types of leaves, depending on the water level at the time of
leaf formation. For example, Alisma spp. produce strap-shaped
leaves when totally submerged, but produce broader, floating
leaves when plants are emergent. CAUTION: Many upland species
also produce polymorphic leaves.
Floating leaves. Some species (e.g. Nymphaea spp.) produce
leaves that are uniquely adapted for floating on a water surface
(Figure C6). These leaves have stomata primarily on the upper
surface and a thick waxy cuticle that restricts water penetra-
tion. The presence of species with floating leaves is strongly
indicative of hydrophytic vegetation.
Floating stems. A number of species (e.g., Alternanthera
philoxeroides) produce matted stems that have large internal air
spaces when occurring in inundated areas. Such species root in
shallow water and grow across the water surface into deeper
areas. Species with floating stems often produce adventitious
roots at leaf nodes.
Hypertrophied lenticels. Some plant species (e.g. Gleditsia
aquat^ca) produce enlarged lenticels on the stem in response to
prolonged inundation or soil saturation. These are thought to
increase oxygen uptake through the stem during such periods.
Multitrunks or stooling. Some woody hydrophytes characteris-
tically produce several trunks of different ages (Figure C7) or
produce new stems arising from the base of a senescing indivi-
dual (e.g. Forestiera acuminata, Nyssa ogechee) in response to
inundation.
C3
-------
Figure Cl. Buttressed tree
truck (bald cypress)
Figure C2. Pneumatophores
(bald cypress)
Figure C3. Adventitious
roots
Figure C4. Wind-thrown tree with
shallow root system
C4
-------
Figure C5. Inflated leaves
Figure C6. Floating leaves
Figure C7. Multitrunk plant
C5
-------
k. Oxygen pathway to roots. Some species (e.g. Spartina alterni-
flora) have a specialized cellular arrangement that facilitates
diffusion of gaseous oxygen from leaves and stems to the root
system.
Physiological adaptations
4. Most, if not all, hydrophytic species are thought to possess physio-
logical adaptations for occurrence in areas that have prolonged periods of
anaerobic soil conditions. However, relatively Jew species have actually been
proven to possess such adaptations, primarily due to the limited research that
has been conducted. Nevertheless, several types of physiological adaptations
known to occur in hydrophytic species are discussed below, and a list of spe-
cies having one or more of these adaptations is presented in Table C2. NOTE:
Since -it is impossible to detect these adaptations in the field, use of this
indicator will be limited to observing the species in the field and checking
the list in Table C2 to determine whether the species is known to have a
physiological adaptation for occurrence in areas having anaerobic soil
conditions')'
a. Accumulation of malate. Malate, a nontoxic metabolite, accumu-
lates in roots of many hydrophytic species (e.g. Glyceria
maxima, Nyssa sylvatica var. biflord} Nonwetland species con-
centrate ethanol, a toxic by-product of anaerobic respiration,
when growing in anaerobic soil conditions. Under such condi-
tions, many hydrophytic species produce high concentrations of
malate and unchanged concentrations of ethanol, thereby avoiding
accumulation of toxic materials. Thus, species having the
ability to concentrate malate instead of ethanol in the root
system under anaerobic soil conditions are adapted for life in
such conditions, while species that concentrate ethanol are
poorly adapted for life in anaerobic soil conditions.
b_. Increased levels of nitrate reductase. Nitrate reductase is an
enzyme involved in conversion of nitrate nitrogen to nitrite
nitrogen, an intermediate step in ammonium production. Ammonium
ions can accept electrons as a replacement for gaseous oxygen in
some species, thereby allowing continued functioning of
metabolic processes under low soil oxygen conditions. Species
that produce high levels of nitrate reductase (e.g. Larix
laricina) are adapted for life in anaerobic soil conditions.
c. Slight increases in metabolic rates. Anaerobic soil conditions
effect short-term increases in metabolic rates in most species.
However, the rate of metabolism often increases only slightly in
wetland species, while metabolic rates increase significantly in
nonwetland species. Species exhibiting only slight increases in
metabolic rates (e.g. Larix laricina, Senecio vulgaris) are
adapted for life in anaerobic soil conditions.
C6
-------
<1. Rhizosphere oxidation. Some hydrophytic species (e.g. Nyssa
aquatica, Myrioa gale) are capable of transferring gaseous oxy-
gen from the root system into soil pores immediately surrounding
the roots. This adaptation prevents root deterioration and
maintains the rates of water and nutrient absorption under
anaerobic soil conditions.
£. Ability for root growth in low oxygen tensions. Some species
(e.g. Typha angustifoHa, Juncus effusus) have the ability to
maintain root growth under soil oxygen concentrations as low as
0.5 percent. Although prolonged (>1 year) exposure to soil
oxygen concentrations lower than 0.5 percent generally results
in the death of most individuals, this adaptation enables some
species to survive extended periods of anaerobic soil
conditions.
f_. Absence of alcohol dehydrogenase (ADH) activity. ADH is an
enzyme associated with increased ethanol production. When the
enzyme is not functioning, ethanol production does not increase
significantly. Some hydrophytic species (e.g. Potentilla
anserina, Polygonum amphibium) show only slight increases in ADH
activity under anaerobic soil conditions. Therefore, ethanol
production occurs at a slower rate in species that have low
concentrations of ADH.
Reproductive adaptations
5. Some plant species have reproductive features that enable them to
become established and grow in saturated soil conditions. The following have
been identified in the technical literature as reproductive adaptations that
occur in hydrophytic species:
a. Prolonged seed viability. Some plant species produce seeds that
may remain viable for 20 years or more. Exposure of these seeds
to atmospheric oxygen usually triggers germination. Thus,
species (e.g., Taxodium distichum) that grow in very wet areas
may produce seeds that germinate only during infrequent periods
when the soil is dewatered. NOTE: Many upland species also
have prolonged seed viability, but the trigger mechanism for
germination is not exposure to atmospheric oxygen.
b. Seed germination under low oxygen concentrations. Seeds of some
hydrophytic species germinate when submerged. This enables
germination during periods of early-spring inundation, which may
provide resulting seedlings a competitive advantage over species
whose seeds germinate only when exposed to atmospheric oxygen.
£. Flood-tolerant seedlings. Seedlings of some hydrophytic species
(e.g. Fraxinus pennsylvanica) can survive moderate periods of
total or partial inundation. Seedlings of these species have a
competitive advantage over seedlings of flood-intolerant
species.
C7
-------
Table Cl
Partial List of Species With Known Morphological Adaptations for
Occurrence in Wetlands*
Species
Acer negundo
Acer Tubrum
Acer saccharinum
Alisma spp.
Alternanthera philoxeroides
Avicennia nitida
Brasenia schreberi
Cladium mavisoo-ides
Cyperus spp. (most species)
Eleocharis spp. (most
species)
Fovestiera acuminates.
Fraxinus pennsylvanica
Gleditsia aquatioa
Juncus spp.
Lirmobium spongia
Ludwigia spp.
Menyanthes trifoliata
Myrica gale
Nelwnbo spp.
Nuphar spp.
Common Name
Box elder
Red maple
Silver maple
Water plantain
Alligatorweed
Black mangrove
Watershield
Twig rush
Flat sedge
Spikerush
Swamp privet
Green ash
Water locust
Rush
Frogbit
Waterprimrose
Buckbean
Sweetgale
Lotus
Cowlily
Adaptation
Adventitious roots
Hypertrophied lenticels
Hypertrophied lenticels;
adventitious roots
(juvenile plants)
Polymorphic leaves
Adventitious roots; inflated,
floating stems
Pneumatophores; hypertrophied
lenticels
Inflated, floating leaves
Inflated stems
Inflated stems and leaves
Inflated stems and leaves
Multi-trunk, stooling
Buttressed trunks; adventi-
tious roots
Hypertrophied lenticels
Inflated stems and leaves
Inflated, floating leaves
Adventitious roots; inflated
floating stems
Inflated stems (rhizome)
Hypertrophied lenticels
Floating leaves
Floating leaves
(Continued)
* Many other species exhibit one or more morphological adaptations for
occurrence in wetlands. However, not all individuals of a species will
exhibit these adaptations under field conditions, and individuals occurring
in uplands characteristically may not exhibit them.
C8
-------
Table Cl (Concluded)
Species
Nymphaea spp.
Nyssa aquatica
Nyssa ogechee
Nyssa sylvatioa
var. hi flora
Platanus occidental's
Populus deltoides
Quercus lawcifolia
Quereus palustris
Ehizophora mangle
Sagittaria spp.
Salix spp.
Scirpus spp.
Spartina alterniflora
Taxodium distiahum
Common Name
Waterlily
Water tupelo
Ogechee tupelo
Swamp blackgum
Sycamore
Cottonwood
Laurel oak
Pin oak
Red mangrove
Arrowhead
Willow
Bulrush
Smooth
cordgrass
Bald cypress
Adaptation
Floating leaves
Buttressed trunks; pneuma-
tophores; adventitious
roots
Buttressed trunks; multi-
trunk; stooling
Buttressed trunks
Adventitious roots
Adventitious roots
Shallow root system
Adventitious roots
Pneumatophores
Polymorphic leaves
Hypertrophied lenticels;
adventitious roots; oxygen
pathway to roots
Inflated stems and leaves
Oxygen pathway to roots
Buttressed trunks;
pneumatophores
C9
-------
Table C2
Species Exhibiting Physiological Adaptations for
Occurrence in Wetlands
Species
Alnus incana
Alnus rubra
Baoaharis viminea
Betula pubescens
Cares: arenaria
Carex flaoea
Carex lasiooarpa
Deschampsia cespitosa
Filipendula ulmaria
Fraxinus pennsylvanioa
Glyoeria maxima
Juncus effusus
Larix laricina
Lobelia dortmanna
Ly thrum salioaria
Molinia eaerulea
Myrica gale
Nuphar lutea
Nyssa aquatica
Nyssa sylvatica var. bi,flora
Phalaris arundinacea
Phragmites australis
Pinus oontorta
Polygonum amphibiwn
Potent-ilia anserina
Physiological Adaptation
Increased levels of nitrate reductase; malate
accumulation
Increased levels of nitrate reductase
Ability for root growth in low oxygen tensions
Oxidizes the rhizosphere; malate accumulation
Malate accumulation
Absence of ADH activity
Malate accumulation
Absence of ADH activity
Absence of ADH activity
Oxidizes the rhizosphere
Malate accumulation; absence of ADH activity
Ability for root growth in low oxygen tensions;
absence of ADH activity
Slight increases in metabolic rates; increased
levels of nitrate reductase
Oxidizes the rhizosphere
Absence of ADH activity
Oxidizes the rhizosphere
Oxidizes the rhizosphere
Organic acid production
Oxidizes the rhizosphere
Oxidizes the rhizosphere; malate accumulation
Absence of ADH activity; ability for root
growth in low oxygen tensions
Malate accumulation
Slight increases in metabolic rates; increased
levels of nitrate reductase
Absence of ADH activity
Absence of ADH activity; ability for root
growth in low oxygen tensions
(Continued)
CIO
-------
Table C2 (Concluded)
Species
Ranunculus flammula
Salix cinerea
Salix fragilis
Salix lasiolepis
Scirpus maritimus
Senecio vulgaris
Spartina alterniflora
Trifolium subterraneum
Typha angustifolia
Physiological Adaptation
Malate accumulation; absence of ADH activity
Malate accumulation
Oxidizes the rhizosphere
Ability for root growth in low oxygen tensions
Ability for root growth in low oxygen tensions
Slight increases in metabolic rates
Oxidizes the rhizosphere
Low ADH activity
Ability for root growth in low oxygen tensions
Cll
-------
APPENDIX D: HYDRIC SOILS
-------
1. This appendix consists of two sections. Section 1 describes the
basic procedure for digging a soil pit and examining for hydric soil indica-
tors. Section 2 is a list of hydric soils of the United States.
Section 1 - Procedures for Digging a Soil Pit and Examining
for Hydric Soil Indicators
Digging a soil pit
2. Apply the following procedure: Circumscribe a 1-ft-diam area, pref-
erably with a tile spade (sharpshooter). Extend the blade vertically down-
ward, cut all roots to the depth of the blade, and lift the soil from the
hole. This should provide approximately 16 inches of the soil profile for
examination. Note: Observations are usually made immediately below the
A-horizon or 10 inches (whichever is shallower). In many cases, a soil auger
or probe can be used instead of a spade. If so, remove successive cores until
16 inches of the soil profile have been removed. Place successive cores in
the same sequence as removed from the hole. Note: An auger or probe cannot
be effectively used when the soil profile is loose3 rocky, or contains a large
volume of water (e.g. peraquic moisture regime).
Examining the soil
3. Examine the soil for hydric soils indicators (paragraphs 44
and/or 45 of main text (for sandy soils)). Note: It may not be necessary to
conduct a classical characterization (e.g. texture, structure, etc.) of the
soil. Consider the hydric soil indicators in the following sequence (Note:
TEE SOIL EXAMINATION CAN BE TERMINATED WHEN A POSITIVE HYDRIC SOIL INDICATOR
IS FOUND):
Nonsandy soils.
a. Determine whether an organic soil is present (see paragraph 44
of the main text). If so, the soil is hydric.
b_. Determine whether the soil has a histic epipedon (see
paragraph 44 of the main text). Record the thickness of the
histic epipedon on DATA FORM 1.
c. Determine whether sulfidic materials are present by smelling
the soil. The presence of a "rotten egg" odor is indicative of
hydrogen sulfide, which forms only under extreme reducing con-
ditions associated with prolonged inundation/soil saturation.
-------
e_. Conduct a ferrous iron test. A colorimetric field test kit has
been developed for this purpose. A reducing soil environment
is present when the soil extract turns pink upon addition of
oc_oc_dipyridil.
f_. Determine the color(s) of the matrix and any mottles that may
be present. Soil color is characterized by three features:
hue, value, and chroma. Hue refers to the soil color in rela-
tion to red, yellow, blue, etc. Value refers to the lightness
of the hue. Chroma refers to the strength of the color (or
departure from a neutral of the same lightness). Soil colors
are determined by use of a Munsell Color Book (Munsell Color
1975).* Each Munsell Color Book has color charts of different
hues, ranging from 10R to 5Y. Each page of hue has color chips
that show values and chromas. Values are shown in columns down
the page from as low as 0 to as much as 8, and chromas are
shown in rows across the page from as low as 0 to as much as 8.
In writing Munsell color notations, the sequence is always hue,
value, and chroma (e.g. 10YR5/2). To determine soil color,
place a small portion of soil** in the openings behind the
color page and match the soil color to the appropriate color
chip. Note: Match the soil to the nearest color chip. Record
on DATA FORM 1 the hue, value, and chroma of the best matching
color chip. CAUTION: Never place soil on the face or front of
the color page because this might smear the color chips. Min-
eral hydric soils usually have one of the following color fea-
tures immediately below the A-horizon or 10 inches (whichever
is shallower):
(1) Gleyed soil.
Determine whether the soil is gleyed. If the matrix color
best fits a color chip found on the gley page of the
Munsell soil color charts, the soil is gleyed. This indi-
cates prolonged soil saturation, and the soil is highly
reduced.
(2) Nongleyed soil.
(a) Matrix chroma of 2 or less in mottled soils.**
(b) Matrix chroma of 1 or less in unmottled soils.**
(c) Gray mottles within 10 inches of the soil surface in
dark (black) mineral soils (e.g., Mollisols) that do
not have characteristics of (a) or (b) above.
Soils having the above color characteristics are normally satu-
rated for significant duration during the growing season. How-
ever, hydric soils with significant coloration due to the
nature of the parent material (e.g. red soils of the Red River
Valley) may not exhibit chromas within the range indicated
above. In such cases, this indicator cannot be used.
* See references at the end of the main text.
** The soil must be moistened if dry at the time of examination.
D3
-------
£. Determine whether the mapped soil series or phase is on the
national list of hydric soils (Section 2). CAUTION: It will
often be necessary to compare the profile description of the
soil with that of the soil series or phase indicated on the
soil map to verify that the soil was correctly mapped. This is
especially true when the soil survey indicates the presence of
inclusions or when the soil is mapped as an association of two
or more soil series.
h. Look for iron and manganese concretions. Look for small
(>0.08-inch) aggregates within 3 inches of the soil surface.
These are usually black or dark brown and reflect prolonged
saturation near the soil surface.
Sandy soils.
Look for one of the following indicators in sandy soils:
a. A layer of organic material above the mineral surface or high
organic matter content in the surface horizon (see para-
graph 45a_ of the main text) . This is evidenced by a darker
color of the surface layer due to organic matter interspersed
among or adhering to the sand particles. This is not observed
in upland soils due to associated aerobic conditions.
b_. Streaking of subsurface horizons (see paragraph 45£ of the main
text). Look for dark vertical streaks in subsurface horizons.
These streaks represent organic matter being moved downward in
the profile. When soil is rubbed between the fingers, the
organic matter will leave a dark stain on the fingers.
c. Organic pans (see paragraph 45b_ of the main text). This is
evidenced by a thin layer of hardened soil at a depth of 12 to
30 inches below the mineral surface.
D4
-------
Section 2 - Hydric Soils of the United States
4. The list of hydric soils of the United States (Table Dl) was de-
veloped by the National Technical Committee for Hydric Soils (NTCHS), a panel
consisting of representatives of the Soil Conservation Service (SCS), Fish and
Wildlife Service, Environmental Protection Agency, Corps of Engineers, Auburn
University, University of Maryland, and Louisiana State University. Keith
Young of SCS was committee chairman.
5. The NTCHS developed the following definition of hydric soils:
A hydric soil is a soil that is saturated, flooded, or ponded long
enough during the growing season to develop anaerobic conditions that
favor the growth and regeneration of hydrophytic vegetation" (US Depart-
ment of Agriculture (USDA) Soil Conservation Service 1985, as amended by
the NTCHS in December 1986).
Criteria for hydric soils
6. Based on the above definition, the NTCHS developed the following
criteria for hydric soils, and all soils appearing on the list will meet at
least one criterion:
a. "All Histosols* except Folists;
b_. Soils in Aquic suborders, Aquic subgroups, Albolls suborder,
Salorthids great group, or Pell great groups of Vertisols
that are:
(1) Somewhat poorly drained and have water table less than
0.5 ft from the surface for a significant period (usually a
week or more) during the growing season, or
(2) Poorly drained or very poorly drained and have either:
(a) A water table at less than 1.0 ft from the surface for
a significant period (usually a week or more) during
the growing season if permeability is equal to or
greater than 6.0 in/hr in all layers within 20 inches;
or
(b) A water table at less than 1.5 ft from the surface for
a significant period (usually a week or more) during
the growing season if permeability is less than
6.0 in/hr in any layer within 20 inches; or
£. Soils that are ponded for long duration or very long duration
during part of the growing season; or
d. Soils that are frequently flooded for long duration or very long
duration during the growing season.
* Soil taxa conform to USDA-SCS (1975).
D5
-------
7. The hydric soils list was formulated by applying the above criteria
to soil properties documented in USDA-SCS (1975) and the SCS Soil Interpre-
tation Records (SOI-5).
Use of the list
8. The list of hydric soils of the United States (Table Dl) is arranged
alphabetically by soil series. Unless otherwise specified, all phases of a
listed soil series are hydric. In some cases, only those phases of a soil
series that are ponded, frequently flooded, or otherwise designated as wet are
hydric. Such phases are denoted in Table Dl by the following symbols in
parentheses after the series name:
F - flooded
FF - frequently flooded
P - ponded
W - wet
D - depressional
9. Drained phases of some soil series retain their hydric properties
even after drainage. Such phases are identified in Table Dl by the symbol
"DR" in parentheses following the soil series name. In such cases, both the
drained and undrained phases of the soil series are hydric.
CAUTION: Be sure that the profile description of the mapping unit conforms to
that of the sampled soil. Also, designation of a soil series or phase as
hydric does not necessarily mean that the area is a wetland. An area having a
hydric soil is a wetland only if positive indicators of hydrophytic vegetation
and wetland hydrology are also present.
4
D6
-------
Table Dl
Hydric Soils
Soil Phase
ABCAL
ACASCO
ACKERMAN (DR)
ACREDALE (DR)
ADATON
ADDICKS
ADEN
ADLER (FF)
ADOLPH (DR)
ADRIAN (DR)
AFTON
AGNAL
AGUIRRE
AHOLT
AHTANUM
AIRPORT
AKAN (DR)
ALAKAI
ALAMO
ALAMOSA
ALAPAHA
ALBANO
ALBATON
ALBURZ
ALDEN
ALGANSEE (FF)
ALGOMA
ALIKCHI
ALLANTON
ALLEMANDS
ALLIGATOR
ALLIS
ALMAVILLE
ALMO
ALMONT
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Argiaquolls
Aerie Ochraqualfs
Aquic Udifluvents
Typic Haplaquolls
Terric Medisaprists
Cumullc Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Udic Pellusterts
Vertic Haplaquolls
Typic Duraquolls
Typic Natraquolls
Typic Haplaquepts
Terric Troposaprists
Typic Duraquolls
Typic Argiaquolls
Arenic Plinthic
Typic Ochraqualfs
Vertic Fluvaquents
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Mollic Haplaquepts
Aquic Udipsamments
Mollic Halaquepts
Typic Glossaqualfs
Grossarenic Haplaquods
Terric Medisaprists
Vertic Haplaquepts
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Fragiaqualfs
Typic Fragiaqualfs
Pergelic Cryaquolls
ALTDORF (DR)
ALUSA
ALVISO
ALVOR
AMAGON
AMALU
AMBIA
AMBRAW (DR)
AMES
AMY
ANACOCO
ANCHOR POINT
ANCLOTE
ANDOVER
ANDRY (DR)
ANGELICA (DR)
ANGELINA
ANKONA
AN S GAR
ANTERO
APALACHEE
APISHAPA
APPANOOSE
ARANSAS
ARAPAHOE (DR)
ARAT
ARABE
ARBELA
ARENA
ARGENT (DR)
ARKABUTLA (FF)
ARLO
ARMAGH
ARMENIA
ARMIESBHRG
Aerie Glossaqualfs
Typic Albaqualfs
Tropic Fluvaquents
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Histic Placaquepts
Vertic Fluvaquents
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Typic Ochraquults
Vertic albaqualfs
Typic Cryaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Fragiaquults
Typic Argiaquolls
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Fluvaquents
Arenic Ultic Haplaquods
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Haplaquepts
Fluvaquentic Dystrochrepts
Vertic Fluvaquents
Mollic Albaqualfs
Vertic Haplaquolls
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Hydraquents
Aquic Natrustalfs
Argiaquic Argialbolls
Aquentic Durorthids
Typic Ochraqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Ochraquults
Typic Argiaquolls
Fluventic Hapludolls
(Continued)
(Sheet 1 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
ARMIJO
ARNHEIM
AROL
ARRADA
ARVESON (DR)
ASHFORD
ASHGROVE
ASHKUM (DR)
ASTOR
ATHERTON
ATKINS
ATLAS
ATMORE
ATSION (DR)
AUBURNDALE (DR)
AUFCO
AUGSBERG (DR)
AURELIE (DR)
AURELIHS (DR)
AUSMUS
AUSTWELL
AWBRIG
AXIS
BACH (DR)
BACKBAY
BACLIFF
BADO
BADUS (DR)
BAILE
BAJURA (DR)
BAKERSVILLE
BALDOCK
BALDWIN
BALLAHACK (DR)
BALM
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Typic Torrerts
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Albaqualfs
Typic Salorthids
Typic Calciaquolls
Vertic Ochraqualfs
Aerie Ochraqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Fluvaquents
Aerie Ochraqualfs
Plinthic Paleaquults
Aerie Haplaquods
Typic Glossaqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Calciaquolls
Aerie Haplaquepts
Histic Humaquepts
Aquic Natrargids
Typic Haplaquepts
Vertic Albaqualfs
Typic Sulfaquents
Mollic Haplaquepts
Histic Fluvaquents
Entic Pelluderts
Typic Fragiaqualfs
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraquults
Vertic Tropaquepts
Cumulic Humaquepts
Typic Haplaquepts
Vertic Ochraqualfs
Cumulic Humaquepts
Fluvaquentic Haploxerolls
BALMAN
BALSORA (FF)
BALTIC (DR)
BARATARI (DR)
BARBARY
BARBERT
BARBOUR (FF)
BARNEY
BARODA
BARRADA
BARRE
BARRONETT (DR)
BARRY (DR)
BASH
BASHAW
BASILE
BASINGER
BATZA
BAYBORO (DR)
BAYOU
BAYSHORE
BAYUCOS
BAYVI
BEAR LAKE
BEARVILLE (DR)
BEAUCOUP (DR)
BEAUFORD
BEAUMONT
BECKWITH
BELHAVEN (DR)
BELINDA
BELKNAP (FF)
BELLEVILLE (DR)
BELLINGHAM
BELLPASS
Aquic Calciorthids
Typic Ustifluvents
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Aerie Haplaquods
Typic Hydraquents
Typic Argialbolls
Fluventic Dystrochrepts
Mollic Fluvaquents
Typic Argiaquolls
Aquollic Salorthids
Udollic Orchraqualfs
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Argiaquolls
Fluvaquentic Dystrochrepts
Typic Pelloxererts
Typic Glossaqualfs
Spodic Psammaquents
Pergelic Cryaquents
Umbric Paleaquults
Typic Paleaquults
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Fluvaquents
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Entic Pelluderts
Typic Albaqualfs
Terric Medisaprists
Mollic Albaqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Mollic Haplaquepts
Terric Medisaprists
(Continued)
(Sheet 2 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
BELUGA (DR)
BENITO
BERGLAND (DR)
BERGSVIK
BERING (P)
BERNARD
BERRYLAND
BERVILLE (DR)
BESEMAN (DR)
BESSIE
BETHERA (DR)
BEZO
BIBB
BICKETT
BICONDOA
BIDDEFORD
BIG BLUE
BIGWINDER
BINGHAMVILLE
BIRCHFIELD
BIRDS (DR)
BIRDSALL (DR)
BISCAY (P.DR)
BISHOP
BIVANS
BLACK CANYON
BLACKFOOT (FF)
BLACKHOOF (DR)
BLACKLOCK
BLACKOAR
BLACKWELL
BLADEN (DR)
BLAGO
BLANCHESTER
BLEAKWOOD
Classification
Typic Cryaquents
Udorthentic Pellusterts
Aerie Haplaquepts
Terric Tropohemists
Typic Haplargids
Vertic Argiaquolls
Typic Haplaquods
Typic Argiaquolls
Terric Borosaprists
Terric Medisaprists
Typic Paleaquults
Aerie Halaquepts
Typic Fluvaquents
Histic Humaquepts
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquepts
Histic Haplaquolls
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Fluvaquentic Haploxerolls
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Sideraquuods
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Cryaquolls
Typic Albaquults
Typic Umbraquults
Typic Orchraqualfs
Typic Fluvaquents
Soil Phase
BLEND
BLICHTON
BLOMFORD (DR)
BLUE EARTH (DR)
BLUFF
BLUFFTON (DR)
BOARDMAN
BOASH
BOCA
BOGGY
BOHICKET
BOHNLY
BOLFAR (F)
BOLIO
BONAIR
BONN
BONNIE (DR)
BONO
BOOKER (DR)
BOOTJACK
BOOTS (DR)
BORGES
BORUP (DR)
BOSSBURG
BOSWORTH
BOULDER LAKE
BOWDOIN (P)
BOWDRE (F)
BOWMANSVILLE
BOWSTRING
BOYCE
BRADENTON
BRADWAY
BRALLIER
BRAND
Classification
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Arenic Plinthic Paleaquults
Arenic Ochraqualfs
Mollic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Arenic Ochraqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Sulfaquents
Mollic Fluvaquents
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Pergelic Cryohemists
Humic Haplaquepts
Glossic Natraqualfs
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Aerie Cryaquepts
Typic Medihemists
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Calciaquolls
Mollic Andaquepts
Vertic Haplaquolls
Aquic Chromoxererts
Udorthentic Chromusterts
Fluvaquentic Hapludolls
Aerie Fluvaquents
Fluvaquentic Borosaprists
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Pergelic Cryaquepts
Typic Tropohemists
Aerie Haplaquepts
(Continued)
(Sheet 3 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
BRAZORIA (D)
BRECKENRIDGE (DR)
BREMER
BRENNER
BREVORT (DR)
BRIDGESON
BRIGHTON
BRIMSTONE
BRINKERTON
BRINNUM
BRISCOT (FF)
BRITTO
BROCKTON
BROOKLYN (DR)
BROOKMAN (DR)
BROOKSTON (DR)
BROPHY (DR)
BROWNSDALE (DR)
BROWNTON
BRUCE (DR)
BRUIN (F)
BRUNEEL
BRYCE
BUCKLEY
BULLWINKLE
BUNKERHILL
BURKEVILLE
BURLEIGH (DR)
BURNHAM
BURR
BURSLEY
BURT
BUTTON
BUXIN (FF)
BYARS (DR)
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Typic Chromuderts
Mollic Haplaquepts
Typic Argiaquolls
Aerie Tropaquepts
Mollic Haplaquents
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Medifibrists
Glossic Natraqualfs
Typic Fragiaqualfs
Typic Halaquepts
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Natraqualfs
Humic Fragiaquepts
Mollic Albaqualfs
Typic Umbraqualfs
Typic Argiaquolls
Hemic Borofibrists
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Mollic Haplaquepts
Fluvaquentic Eutrochrepts
Aquic Haploxerolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Humaquepts
Terric Borosaprists
Typic Salorthids
Aquentic Chromuderts
Mollic Haplaquents
Typic Haplaquepts
Typic Calciaquolls
Aerie Glossaqualfs
Lithic Psammaquents
Aerie Haplaquents
Vertic Hapludolls
Umbric Paleaquults
CABARTON
CABLE (DR)
CADDO
CAIRO (DR)
CALAMINE (DR)
CALCO (DR)
CALCOUSTA (DR)
CALHOUN
GALLOWAY (F)
CANADICE
CANADAIGUA (DR)
CANBURN
CANISTEO (DR)
CANOVA
CANTEY (DR)
CAPAY (F)
CAPE
CAPE FEAR (DR)
CAPEHORN
CAPERS
CAPLEN
CAPLES
CAPTIVA
CARBONDALE (DR)
CARLIN
CARLISLE (DR)
CARLOS (DR)
CARLOW
CARON (DR)
CARTECAY (P)
CARTERET
CARUTHERSVILLE (FF)
CARWILE
CARYTOWN
CASCILLA (FF)
Typic Cryaquolls
Typic Haplaquepts
Typic Glossaqualfs
Vertic Haplaquolls
Typic Argiaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Glossaqualfs
Glossaquic Fragiudalfs
Typic Ochraqualfs
Mollic Haplaquepts
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Glossaqualfs
Typic Albaquults
Typic Chromoxererts
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Umbraquults
Aerie Cryaquepts
Typic Sulfaquents
Typic Hydraquents
Mollic Fluvaquents
Mollic Psammaquents
Hemic Borosaprists
Hydric Medihemists
Typic Medisaprists
Limnic Borohemists
Vertic Haplaquolls
Limnic Medihemists
Aquic Udifluvents
Typic Psammaquents
Typic Udifluvents
Typic Argiaquolls
Albic Natraqualfs
Fluventic Dystrochrepts
(Continued)
(Sheet 4 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
CATHRO (DR)
CAIMAN
CAYAGUA
CEBOYA
CERESCO (FF)
CHAIRES
CHALMERS (DR)
CHANCE
CHANCELLOR
CHARITON
CHARLES
CHARLOTTE
CHASTAIN
CHATEAU (P)
CHATUGE (DR)
CHAUNCEY
CHEEKTOWAGA
CHENNEBY (P)
CHEQUEST
CHEROKEE
CHETCO
CHI A
CHICKAHOMINY (DR)
CHICKREEK
CHILGREN
CHILKOOT
CHINCHALLO
CHINKOTEAGUE
CHIPPENY
CHIPPEWA
CHIVATO
CHOBEE
CHOCK
CHOCORUA (DR)
CHOWAN
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Terric Borosaprists
Vertic Ustifluvents
Aerie Tropaqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Fluvaquentic Hapludolls
Alfic Haplaquods
Typic Haplaquolls
Mollic Haplaquepts
Typic Argiaquolls
Mollic Albaqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Entic Sideraquods
Typic Fluvaquents
Aquic Xerochrepts
Typic Ochraquults
Typic Argialbolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Fluvaquentic Dystrochrepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Fluvaquentic Humaquepts
Terric Tropohemists
Typic Ochraquults
Andaqueptic Cryaquents
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Cryaquents
Andic Cryaquepts
Typic Sulfaquents
Lithic Borosaprists
Typic Fragiaquepts
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Argiaquolls
Andaqueptic Cryaquents
Terric Borohemists
Thapto-Histic Fluvaquents
CHUMMY
CIENO
CISNE
CLAM GULCH
CLAMO (DR)
CLARINDA
CLATSOP
CLEAR LAKE
CLEARBROOK
CLEARWATER
CLERMONT
CLODINE
CLOTHO
CLOVELLY
CLUNIE
CLYDE
COAL CREEK (DR)
COATSBURG
COBBSFORK
COCHINA (FF)
COCODRIE (FF)
COCOLALLA
COESSE (DR)
COHOCTAH (DR)
COKESBURY
COLAND
COLEMANTOWN (DR)
COLITA
COLLINS (FF)
COLO
COLUMBIA (FF)
COLUMBUS (FF)
COLVILLE
COLVIN (DR)
COLWOOD (DR)
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Ochraqualfs
Mollic Albaqualfs
Humic Cryaquepts
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Argiaquolls
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Pelloxererts
Aerie Ochraquults
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Terric Medisaprists
Terric Borofibrists
Typic Haplaquolls
Humic Cryaquepts
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Entic Chromusterts
Aquic Udifluvents
Mollic Andaquepts
Aerie Fluvaquents
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Fragiaquults
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraquults
Typic Glossaqualfs
Aquic Udifluvents
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Aquic Xerofluvents
Aquic Hapludults
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
(Continued)
(Sheet 5 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
COMFREY (DR)
COMMERCE (FF)
CONABY (DR)
CONBOY
CONCORD
CONDIT
CONNEAUT
CONRAD (DR)
CONSER
CONTEE
CONVENT (FF)
COOK
COPANO
COPELAND
COPPER RIVER
COPSEY
COQUAT
COQUILLE
CORDOVA
CORIFF
CORLEY
CORMANT (P,DR)
COROZAL
CORRIGAN
CORUNNA (DR)
COSUMNES (FF)
COUGARBAY
COURTNEY
COUSHATTA (F)
COVE
COVELAND
COVINGTON
COWDEN
COXVILLE (DR)
CRADLEBAUGH
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Aerie Fluvaquents
Histic Humaquepts
Aerie Mollic Andaquepts
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Ochraqualfs
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Psammaquents
Typic Argiaquolls
Vertic Haplaquepts
Aerie Fluvaquents
Mollic Haplaquents
Vertic Albaqualfs
Typic Argiaquolls
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Vertic Haplaquolls
Udorthentic Chromusterts
Aerie Tropic Fluvaquents
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Argiaquic Argialbolls
Mollic Psammaquents
Aquic Tropudults
Typic Albaqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Aquic Xerofluvents
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Abruptic Argiaquolls
Fluventic Eutrochrepts
Vertic Haplaquolls
Aquic Palexeralfs
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Mollic Albaqualfs
Typic Paleaquults
Duric Haplaquolls
CRAIGMILE (DR)
CREOLE
CRIMS
CROATAN (DR)
CROOKED CREEK
CROQUIB
CROSSPLAIN
CROTON
CROWCAMP
CROWTHER
CRUMP
CUDAHY
CUMM1NGS
CURRITUCK
CURTISVILLE
CUSTER
CYCLONE (DR)
DACOSTA
DADINA
DALEVILLE
DAMASCUS
DAMON
DANCY (DR)
DANGBURG (W)
DANIA
DANNEMORA
DARE (DR)
DARFUR
DARWIN (DR)
DASHER (DR)
DASSEL
DAWHOO (DR)
DAWSON
DAYTON
DEBORAH
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Terric Medihemists
Terric Medisaprists
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Tropaquepts
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Fragiaqualfs
Calcic Pachic Argixerolls
Typic Calciaquolls
Histic Humaquepts
Petrocalcic Calciaquolls
Mollic Andaquepts
Terric Medisaprists
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Sideraquods
Typic Argiaquolls
Vertic Ochraqualfs
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Typic Paleaquults
Typic Ochraqualfs
Cumulic Cryaquolls
Aerie Glossaqualfs
Aquic Haplic Nadurargids
Lithic Medisaprists
Typic Fragiaquepts
Typic Medisaprists
Typic Haplaquolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Typic Medihemists
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Humaquepts
Terric Borosaprists
Typic Albaqualfs
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
(Continued)
(Sheet 6 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
DECKEL
DECKERVILLE
DEERWOOD (DR)
DEFORD (DR)
DEKOVEN
DELCOMB
DELENA
DELEPLAIN
DELFT
DELKS
DELOSS (DR)
DELRAY
DENAUD
DENNY (DR)
DEPOE
DEPORT
DERLY
DESHA (FF)
DEVILSGAIT
DEVOIGNES
DEWEYVILLE
DIANOLA
DILMAN
DILTON
DIMMICK (DR)
DINGLISHNA
DIPMAN
DIREGO
DITHOD
DOBROW
DOCKERY (FF)
DOGIECREEK
DOLBEE
DORA (DR)
DOROSHIN
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Tropic Fluvaquents
Cumulic Humaquepts
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Psaramaquents
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Terric Medisaprists
Humic Fragiaquepts
Aerie Fluvaquents
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Ultic Haplaquods
Typic Umbraquults
Grossarenic Argiaquolls
Histic Humaquepts
Mollic Albaqualfs
Typic Tropaquods
Udorthentic Pellusterts
Typic Glossaqualfs
Vertic Hapludolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Medihemists
Typic Psammaquents
Typic Cryaquolls
Lithic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Cryaquods
Typic Cryaquolls
Terric Sulfihemists
Fluvaquentic Haploxerolls
Cumulic Cryaquolls
Aquic Udifluvents
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Terric Borosaprists
Terric Borohemists
DORAVAN
DOSPALOS (F)
DOTLAKE
DOUGCLIFF
DOVRAY (DR)
DOWELLTON
DOWNATA
DOYLESTOWN
DRIFTWOOD
DRUMMER (DR)
DUNNING
DUPONT
DURBIN
DURRSTEIN
DYLAN
EACHUSTON
EARLE
EARLMONT
EASBY
EASLEY
EASTON (DR)
EATON
EAUGALLIE
EBBERT (DR)
EBRO
EDGINGTON (DR)
EDINA
EDINBURG (DR)
EDMINSTER
EDMONDS
EDMORE (DR)
EDNA
EDROY
EDWARDS (DR)
EGAS
Typic Medisaprists
Vertic Haplaquolls
Pergalic Cryaquepts
Typic Borofibrists
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Vertic Ochraqualfs
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Fraqiaqualfs
Typic FLuvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Limnic Medisaprists
Typic Sulfihemists
Typic Natraquolls
Aquentic Chromuderts
Typic Cryaquents
Vertic Haplaquepts
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Calciaquolls
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Aerie Haplaquepts
Arenic Albaqualfs
Alfic Haplaquods
Argiaquic Argialbolls
Typic Medisaprists
Argiaquic Argialbolls
Typic Argialbolls
Typic Argiaquolls
Glossic Natraqualfs
Entic Sideraquods
Mollic Haplaquents
Vertic Albaqualfs
Vertic Haplaquolls
Liminic Medisaprists
Typic Haplaquolls
(Continued)
(Sheet 7 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
EGBERT
ELBERT
ELIZA
ELKINS
ELKTON
ELLABELLE (DR)
ELLOREE
ELLZEY
ELM LAKE (DR)
ELPAM
ELRED
ELRICK (FF)
ELVERS (DR)
ELVIRA
EMDENT
EMERALDA
EMORY (P)
ENGLEHARD (DR)
ENLOE (DR)
ENOCHVILLE
ENOREE (DR)
ENOSBURG (DR)
ENSLEY (DR)
EPOUFETTE (DR)
EQUIS
ERAMOSH
ESHAMY
ESPELIE
ESRO
ESSEXVILLE (DR)
ESTER
ESTERO
ESTES
ETTRICK (DR)
EUREKA
EUTAW
Classification
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Sulfic Fluvaquents
Humaqueptic Fluvaquents
Typic Ochraquults
Arenic Umbric Paleaquults.
Arenic Ochraqualfs
Arenic Ochraqualfs
Typic Haplaquents
Typic Haplaquepts
Alfic Sideraquods
Typic Hapludolls
Thapto-Histic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Mollic Halaquepts
Mollic Albaqualfs
Fluventic Umbric Dystrochrepts
Humaqueptic Fluvaquents
Argiaquic Argialbolls
Cumulic Cryaquolls
Aerie Fluvaquents
Mollic Haplaquents
Aerie Haplaquepts
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Halaquepts
Histic Haplaquolls
Typic Cryaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Typic Haplaquods
Aerie Haplaquepts
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Entic Pelluderts
Soil Phase
EVADALE
EVANSHAM (DR)
EVANSVILLE
EVART
EVERGLADES (DR)
EVERSON
EYAK
FALAYA (FF)
FALBA
FALLON (F)
FALLSINGTON
FALOMA
FARGO (DR)
FARMTON
FAUSSE
FAXON (DR)
FEATHERSTONE
FEDORA
FELDA
FELLOWSHIP
PERRON
FIELDON
FILION
FILLMORE
FISHTRAP
FLAGSTAFF
FLEER
FLEMINGTON
FLOM (DR)
FLORIDANA
FOLEY
FOLLET
FONDA
FORADA
FORD (DR)
Classification
Typic Glossaqualfs
Typic Pelluderts
Typic Haplaquepts
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Medihemists
Mollic Haplaquepts
Typic Cryaquents
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Albaqualfs
Aquic Xerofluvents
Typic Ochraquults
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Arenic Ultic Haplaquods
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Hydraquents
Typic Calciaquolls
Arenic Ochraqualfs
Typic Umbraqualfs
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquepts
Typic Argialbolls
Terric Medisaprists
Haploxerollic Durargids
Cumulic Cryaquolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Arenic Argiaquolls
Albic Glossic Natraqualfs
Typic Haplaquents
Mollic Haplaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Aerie Calciaquolls
(Continued)
(Sheet 8 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
FORDUM
FORELAND
FORESTDALE
FORNEY
FORTESCHE (DR)
FOSSUM (DR)
FOUNTAIN
FOURLOG
FOXCREEK
FRANC ITAS
FRANKFORT
FREDON
FREE (DR)
FREETOWN
FRENCHTOWN
FRIES
FROLIC (F)
FROST
FT. DRUM
FT. GREEN
FULDA (DR)
FULMER
FULTS
FUNTER
FURNISS
FURY
GALLION (FF)
GALT (F,P)
GANNETT
GANSNER (P)
GAPO
GARROCHALES
GARWIN
GAS CREEK
GATOR (DR)
Classification
Mollic Fluvaquents
Histic Cryaquepts
Typic Ochraqualfs
Vertic Fluvaquents
Cumulic Humaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Glossaqualfs
Typic Cryaquolls
Typic Cryaquolls
Typic Pelluderts
Udollic Ochraqualfs
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Medisaprists
Typic Fragiaqualfs
Typic Umbraquults
Cumulic Haploborolls
Typic Glossaqualfs
Aerie Haplaquepts
Arenic Ochraqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Terric Sphagnof ibrists
Typic Cryaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Hapludalfs
Typic Chromoxererts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Cryaquolls
Liminic Troposaprists
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Terric Medisaprists
Soil Phase
GAY (DR)
GAYLESVILLE
GAZELLE
GED
GENTILLY
GENTRY
GERRARD
GESSNER
GETZVILLE
GIDEON
GIFFORD
GILBERT
GILFORD (DR)
GILLSBURG (FF)
GINAT
GIRARD
GIRARDOT
GLADEWATER
GLENCOE (DR)
GLENDORA (DR)
GLENROSS
GLENSTED
GODFREY
GOLD CREEK
GOLDSTREAM
GOODPASTER
GOOSE LAKE
GOREEN
GORHAM (DR)
GOTHENBURG
GRADY
GRANBY (DR)
GRAND (DR)
GRANTHAM (DR)
GRAVELTON (DR)
Classification
Aerie Haplaquepts
Aerie Ochraqualfs
Aquic Durothids
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Hydraquents
Arenic Argiaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Glossaqualfs
Aerie Haplaquepts
Mollic Fluvaquents
Vertic Ochraqualfs
Typic Glossaqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Fragiaqualfs
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Cryaquepts
Vertic Haplaquepts
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Mollic Psammaquents
Typic Natraqualfs
Mollic Albaqualfs
Typic Fluvaquents
Verfic Haplaquolls
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Typic Argialbolls
Typic Albaquults
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Psammaquents
Typic Paleaquults
Typic Haplaquolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Typic Paleaquults
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
(Continued)
(Sheet 9 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
GRAYLAND
GREENWOOD (DR)
GRENADA (F)
GRIFTON (DR)
GRIVER
GROOM
GRULLA
GRYGLA (DR)
GUANICA
GUFFIN
GULF
GUMBOOT
GUTHRIE
GUYTON
HAGGA
HAGGERTY
HAIG
HALBERT
HALLANDALE
HALLECK
HALSEY (DR)
HAMAR
HAMEL
HAMRE (DR)
HANDS BORO
HANSKA
HAPUR
HARAHAN
HARCOT
HARJO
HARPS
HARPSTER (DR)
HARRIET
HARRIS
HARTSBURG (DR)
Classification
Hap lie Andaquepts
Typic Borohemists
Glossic Fragiudalfs
Typic Ochraqualfs
Aquic Xerofluvents
Aerie Ochraqualfs
Vertic Fluvaquents
Mollic Haplaquents
Hdic Pellusterts
Mollic Haplaquepts
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Fragiaquults
Typic Glossaqualfs
Typic Fluvaquents
Aerie Ochraquults
Typic Argiaquolls
Histic Placaquepts
Lithic Psammaquents
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Mollic Haplaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Argiaquolls
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Sulfihemists
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Calciaquolls
Vertic Haplaquepts
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Natraquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Soil Phase
HATBORO
HAUG (DR)
HAULINGS
HAVELOCK
HAVERHILL
HAYNIE (FF)
HAYSPUR
HAYTI
HEBO
HECETA
HEGNE (DR)
HEIGHTS
HEIL
HENCO
HENRIETTA (DR)
HENRY
HEROD
HERSHAL
HERTY
HESSEL (DR)
HETTINGER (DR)
HEWITT
HIGGINS
HILINE
HILLET
HILOLO
HOBCAW (DR)
HOBONNY
HOBUCKEN
HODGE
HODGINS (D)
HOFFLAND
HOLILLIPAH (FF)
HOLLOW
HOLLY
Classification
Typic Fluvaquents
Histic Humaquepts
Histic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Mollic Udifluvents
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Fluvaquents
Umbric Tropaquults
Typic Psammaquents
Typic Calciaquolls
Arenic Ochraqualfs
Typic Natraquolls
Grossarenic Paleaquults
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Fragiaqualfs
Typic Fluvaquents
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Vertic Albaqualfs
Mollic Haplaquepts
Mollic Haplaquepts
Terric Borohemists
Typic Haplaquepts
Typic Cryaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Umbraquults
Typic Medisaprists
Typic Hydraquents
Typic Udipsamments
Ustollic Camborthids
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Xerofluvents
Typic Cryofluvents
Typic Fluvaquents
(Continued)
(Sheet 10 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
HOLLY SPRINGS
HOLOPAW
HOMOS ASS A
HONTOON (DR)
HOODOO
HOOSIERVILLE
HOUGHTON (DR)
HOUK
HOULKA (FF)
HOVDE
HOVEN
HOVERT
HOYTVILLE
HUEY
HUICHICA (P)
HUMBOLDT
HUMESTON
HUNCHBACK
HUSSA
HYDABURG
HYDE (DR)
IBERIA
ICARIA (DR)
ICENE
ICESLEW
IGUALDAD
IJAM
ILACHETOMEL
ILION
IMMOKALEE
INCELL
INEZ
INKOM
INKOSR
INMACHUK
Classification
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Grossarenic Ochraqualfs
Typic Sulfaquents
Typic Medisaprists
Mollic Andaquepts
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Medisaprists
Arglaquic Xeric Argialbolls
Vertic Haplaquepts
Typic Psammaquents
Typic Natraquolls
Aquic Natrargids
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Natraqualfs
Abruptic Haplic Durixeralfs
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Argiaquic Argialbolls
Cumulic Cryaquolls
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Lithic Cryohemists
Typic Umbraquults
Vertic Haplaquolls
Typic Umbraquults
Aquic Camborthids
Typic Haplaquepts
Typic Tropaquepts
Vertic Fluvaquents
Typic Sulfihemists
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Arenic Haplaquods
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Tropaquepts
Pergelic Cryofibrists
Soil Phase
INSAK
IPSWICH
IRIM
IROQUOIS (DR)
ISAN (DR)
ISANTI (DR)
ISLES
ISTOKPOGA
IVIE
JACKPORT
JACOB
JACOBSEN
JAMES
JAMESTON
JAREALES
JAROLA
JARRON
JASCO
JEDDO (DR)
JEFFERS
JENA (FF)
JOENEY
JOHNSTON (DR)
JOICE
JOLIET
JOSEPH
JUBILEE
JUDICE
JUNTURA
JUPITER
JURVANNAH
KADE
KAIKLI
KALIFONSKY
KALIGA
Classification
Typic Tropaquents
Typic Sulfihemists
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Arenic Ochraqualfs
Typic Medihemists
Torriorthentic Haploxerolls
Vertic Ochraqualfs
Vertic Haplaquepts
Histic Cryaquepts
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Argiaquolls
Thapto-Histic Tropic Fluvaquents
Typic Argialbolls
Typic Natraqualfs
Typic Fragiaqualfs
Aerie Ochraqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Fluventic Dystrochrepts
Typic Sideraquods
Cumulic Humaquepts
Typic Medisaprists
Lithic Haplaquolls
Aquic Xerof luvents
Typic Haplaquolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Lithic Haplaquolls
Typic Cryaquents
Typic Cryaquents
Lithic Cryosaprists
Typic Cryaquepts
Terric Medisaprists
(Continued)
(Sheet 11 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
KALMARVILLE
KALOKO
KALONA
KAMAN
KANAPAHA
KANEBREAK
KANONA
KANTISHNA
KANUTCHAN
KANZA
KARANKAWA
KARHEEN
KARLUK
KARNAK
KARSHNER
KATO (DR)
KAUFMAN
REAL I A
KEANSBURG
KEECHI
KENNER
KENUSKY
KEOWNS (DR)
KERSTON (DR)
KESSON
KESTERSON
KETONA
KEYESPOINT (FF)
KEZAN
KIAN
KILGORE
K1LLBUCK
KILLEY
KILMANAGH (DR)
KILWINNING
Classification
Mollic Fluvaquents
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Pelluderts
Grossarenic Paleaquults
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Aerie Haplaquepts
Hydric Borofibrists
Typic Pelloxererts
Mollic Psammaquents
Typic Haplaquents
Typic Cryosaprists
Typic Cryaquepts
Vertic Haplaquepts
Pergelic Cryaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Pelluderts
Typic Salorthids
Typic Umbraquults
Typic Fluvaquents
Fluvaquentic Medisaprists
Umbric Paleaquults
Mollic Haplaquepts
Fluvaquentic Medisaprists
Typic Pasammaquents
Glossic Natraqualfs
Vertic Ochraqualfs
Vertic Haplaquepts
Mollic Fluvaquents
Aerie Fluvaquents
Cumulic Cryaquolls
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Cryaquents
Aerie Haplaquepts
Vertic Ochraqualfs
Soil Phase
KIMMERLING
KINA
KINDER
KINGILE
KINGMAN
KINGS (DR)
KINGSLAND
KINGSVILLE (DR)
KINKORA
KINROSS (DR)
KINSMAN (DR)
KINSTON (DR)
KIRK
KIZHUYAK
KJAR
KLABER
KLAMATH
KLANELNEECHENA
KLAWASI
KNIGHT
KNOKE (DR)
KOBEL
KOGISH
KOKOMO
ROLLS
KOLLUTUK
KOOLAU
KOSMOS
KOSSUTH
KOTO
KOURY (FF)
KOVICH
KRATKA (DR)
KUSKOKWIM
KUSLINA
Classification
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Cry chemists
Typic Glossaqualfs
Terric Medisaprists
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Typic Medihemists
Mollic Psammaquents
Typic Ochraquults
Typic Haplaquods
Aerie Haplaquods
Typic Fluvaquents
Andic Cryaquepts
Andaqueptic Cryaquents
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Glossaqualfs
Cumulic Cryaquolls
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Argiaquic Argialbolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Vertic Haplaquepts
Typic Sphagnofibrists
Typic Argiaquolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Pergelic Ruptic-Histic Cryaquepts
Plinthic Tropaquepts
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Natraquolls
Fluvaquentic Dystrochrepts
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
(Continued)
(Sheet 12 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
KYDAKA
LABISH
LABOUNTY
LACAMAS
LACERDA
LACHAPELLA
LACOOCHEE
LACOTA (DR)
LAFITTE
LAGRANGE
LAHRITY
LAJARA
LAKE CHARLES
LAKEMONT
LAKESHORE
LALLIE (DR)
LAM
LAMINGTON
LAMO
LAMOOSE
LAMOURE (DR)
LAMSON (DR)
LANEXA
LANG (FF)
LANGLOIS
LANTON (DR)
LANTZ
LANYON
LAROSE
LARRY
LATAHCO
LATHER
LATTY
LAUDERHILL (DR)
LAUGENOUR (FF)
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Typic Humaquepts
Cumulic Humaquepts
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Glossaqualfs
Aquentic Chromuderts
Typic Cryaquepts
Spodic Psammaquents
Mollic Haplaquepts
Typic Medisaprists
Typic Ochraqualfs
Mollic Haplaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Pelluderts
Udollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Salorthids
Typic Fluvaquents
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Fragiaquults
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Aerie Haplaquepts
Terric Medisaprists
Typic Psammaquents
Tropic Fluvaquents
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Umbraqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Hydraquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Argiaquic Xeric Argialbolls
Limnic Borohemists
Typic Haplaquepts
Lithic Medisaprists
Aerie Fluvaquents
LAWET
LAWNWOOD
LAWSON (FF)
LEAF
LEAGUEVILLE
LEAKSVILLE
LEBEAU
LEDWITH
LEE
LEICESTER
LEMETA
LEMOLO
LEMOND (DR)
LENA (DR)
LENAWEE (DR)
LENOIR (FF)
LEON
LEONARD
LEONARDTOWN
LETON
LETRI
LEVASY
LEVELTON
LEVY
LICKDALE
LIDDELL (DR)
LIGHTNING
LILBOURN
LIM (DR)
LIMERICK
LINDAAS (DR)
LINWOOD (DR)
LIPAN
LIPPINCOTT
LISCO
Typic Calciaquolls
Aerie Haplaquods
Cumulic Hapludolls
Typic Albaquults
Arenic Paleaquults
Typic Albaqualfs
Aquentic Chromuderts
Mollic Albaqualfs
Typic Fluvaquents
Aerie Haplaquepts
Pergelic Cryofibrists
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Medisaprists
Mollic Haplaquepts
Aerie Paleaquults
Aerie Haplaquods
Vertic Ochraqualfs
Typic Fragiaquults
Typic Glossaqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquepts
Typic Hydraquents
Humic Haplaquepts
Typic Haplaquepts
Typic Ochraqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Argiaquolls
Terric Medisaprists
Entic Pellusterts
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Halaquepts
(Continued)
(Sheet 13 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
LITRO
LIVIA
LIVINGSTON (DR)
LOBO
LOCODA
LOGAN
LOGY (FF)
LOKOSEE
LOLAK
LOMALTA
LORAIN (DR)
LOTUS
LOUGHBORO
LOU IN
LOUP
LOVELAND
LOVELOCK
LOWS (DR)
LOXLEY (DR)
LOYSVILLE
LUDDEN (DR)
LUFKIN
LUMBEE (DR)
LUMMI
LUNCH
LUPTON (DR)
LURA (DR)
LURAY
LUTE (P)
LUTON
LYLES
LYME (DR)
LYNN HAVEN
LYNNE
LYONS (DR)
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Vertic Haplaquepts
Typic Natraqualfs
Mollic Haplaquepts
Hemic Sphagnofibrists
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Calciaquolls
Torrifluventic Haploxerolls
Grossarenic Ochraqualfs
Typic Halaquepts
Udorthentic Pellusterts
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Aquic Quartzipsamments
Aerie Glossaqualfs
Aquentic Chromuderts
Typic Haplaquolls
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Mollic Haplaquepts
Typic Borosaprists
Typic Fragiaqualfs
Vertic Haplaquolls
Vertic Albaqualfs
Typic Ochraquults
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Terric Cryohemists
Typic Borosaprists
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Natraquolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Haplaquods
Ultic Haplaquods
Mollic Haplaquepts
MACKEN
MADALIN
MADELIA
MAGNA
MAGOTHA
MAHALASVILLE (DR)
MAHTOWA (DR)
MALABAR
MANAHAWKIN
MANATEE
MANFRED (DR)
MANN (DR)
MANSFIELD
MARCUS
MARCUS E
MARCY
MARENGO
MARGATE
MARIA (FF)
MARKES
MARKEY (DR)
MARLA
MARLAKE
MARNA
MARSHAN (DR)
MARSHBROOK
MARSHDALE
MARSHFIELD (DR)
MARTEL
MARTIN PENA
MARTISCO
MARYSLAND (DR)
MASCOTTE
MASHULAVILLE
MASONTOWN
Vertic Haplaquolls
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Natraqualfs
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Grossarenic Ochraqualfs
Terric Medisaprists
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Natraquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Fragiaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Vertic Haplaquepts
Typic Fraqiaquepts
Typic Argiaquolls
Mollic Psammaquents
Typic Haplaquepts
Typic Ochraqualfs
Terric Borosaprists
Aquic Cryumbrepts
Mollic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Umbraqualfs
Tropic Fluvaquents
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Calciaquolls
Ultic Haplaquods
Typic Fragiaquults
Cumulic Humaquepts
(Continued)
(Sheet 14 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
MASSENA
MASSIE
MATAGORDA
MATHISTON
MATTAMUSKEET (DR)
MATT AN
MATUNUCK
MAUMEE (DR)
MAUREPAS
MAURERTOWN
MAVIE
MAXCREEK
MAXFIELD
MAYBESO
MAYSID
MAYER (DR)
MAYHEW
MAZASKA
MCCLEARY
MCCOLL (DR)
MCCRORY
MCCUNE
MCDONALDSVILLE
MCFAIN (DR)
MCGEHEE
MCGIRK
MCGUFFEY
MCKEE
MCKENNA
MCKENSIE
MCMURRAY
MEDANO
MEDFRA
MEDOMAK
MEGGETT (DR)
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Argialbolls
Typic Natraqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Terric Medisaprists
Terric Medisaprists
Typic Sulfaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Medisaprists
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Terric Cryosaprists
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Vertic Ochraqualfs
Typic Argiaquolls
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Fragiaquults
Albic Glossic Natraqualfs
Aerie Glossaqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Aerie Ochraqualfs
Typic Ochraqualfs
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Hydraquents
Mollic Haplaquepts
Typic Haplaquepts
Typic Medihemists
Typic Haplaquolls
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Fluvaquentic Humaquepts
Typic Albaqualfs
MEIKLE
MELHOMES
MELTON
MELVIN
MENASHA (DR)
MENDELTNA
MENDENHALL
MENLO
MERCEDES (F)
MERDEN
MERMENTAU
MERMILL (DR)
MERWIN (DR)
MESEI
MHOON
MICCO
MIDLAND
MILFORD (DR)
MILLERVILLE (DR)
MILLGROVE
MILLINGTON (DR)
MILLSDALE
MINER
MINNETONKA (DR)
MINNEWAUKAN
MINNIECE
MINOCQUA (DR)
MINTER (FF)
MITCH (F)
MOAG
MOLAS
MOLLVILLE
MONARDA (DR)
MONEE
MONITEAU
Typic Albaqualfs
Humaqueptic Psanmaquents
Humic Cryaquepts
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Cumulic Cryaquolls
Histic Humaquepts
Udorthentic Pellusterts
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Aerie Haplaquepts
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Terric Borohemists
Terric Troposaprists
Typic Fluvaquents
Terric Medifibrists
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Limnic Borohemists
Typic Argiaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Argiaquolls
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Psammaquents
Typic Utnbraqualfs
Mollic Haplaquepts
Typic Ochraqualfs
Cumulic Haploborolls
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Argialbolls
Typic Glossaqualfs
Aerie Fragiaquepts
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Ochraqualfs
(Continued)
(Sheet 15 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
MONROEVILLE (DR)
MONTEOCHA
MONTGOMERY (DR)
MONTVERDE
MOOREVILLE (FF)
MOOSE RIVER
MOOSELAKE (DR)
MOOS1LAUKE (DR)
MORALES
MORELAND (FF)
MOREY
MORPH (DR)
MOSLANDER
MOULTRIE
MOUNDPRAIRIE
MOUNTAINVIEW
MOUNTMED
MOWATA
MOYINA
MUCKALEE
MUDSOCK
MUKILTEO
MULAT
MULDROW
MULLICA
MULUNS
MUNSET
MURVILLE
MUSKEGO (DR)
MUSSEY (DR)
MUSTANG
MYAKKA
MYATT (DR)
MYRICK (DR)
NABESNA
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Typlc Arglaquolls
Ultic Haplaquods
Typic Haplaquolls
Typlc Medlflbrlsts
Fluvaquentlc Dystrochrepts
Typic Cryaquents
Typic Borohemists
Aerie Haplaquepts
Aerie Glossaqualfs
Vertic Hapludolls
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Glossaqualfs
Typic Cryaquolls
Spodic Psammaquents
Molllc Fluvaquents
Fluvaquentic Medisaprists
Typic Glossaqualfs
Andic Cryaquepts
Typic Fluvaquents
Mollic Haplaquepts
Typic Medihemists
Arenic Ochraquults
Typic Argiaquolls
Typlc Humaquepts
Typic Fragiaquults
Ultic Haploxeralfs
Typlc Haplaquods
Limnic Medisaprists
Typic Argiaquolls
Typlc Psammaquents
Aerie Haplaquods
Typlc Ochraquults
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Histlc Pergelic Cryaquepts
NACLINA
NADA
NAHATCHE
NAHMA (DR)
NAKINA (DR)
NAKNEK
NANIAK
NAPA
NAPOLEON
NARROWS
NARTA
NASKEAG
NASS
NATAL
NATROY
NAVAJO
NAVAN (DR)
NAWNEY
NELSE (FF)
NEMAH
NESS
NETTLES
NEVERSINK
NEWALBIN
NEWARK (P)
NEWBERG
NEWBERRY
NEWELLTON (FF)
NEWSON (DR)
NEWTON (DR)
NGERUNGOR
NIKFUL
NIKOLAI (DR)
NIMMO (DR)
NIOTA
Aquentic Chromuderts
Typic Albaqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Hlstic Humaquepts
Typic Umbraqualfs
Hlstic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Typic Sulfaquents
Typic Natraquolls
Typic Medihemists
Calcic Cryaquolls
Typic Natraqualfs
Aerie Haplaquods
Typlc Haplaquents
Umbric Ochraqualfs
Aqulc Chromoxererts
Vertic Torrifluvents
Typic Argiaquolls
Typlc Fluvaquents
Humic Haplaquepts
Udic Pellusterts
Alfic Arenic Haplaquods
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Fluvaquents
Aerie Fluvaquents
Fluventlc Haploxerolls
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Humaqueptic Psammaquents
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Sulfihemists
Aquultic Hapludalfs
Terric Borosaprists
Typic Ochraquults
Mollic Albaqualfs
(Continued)
(Sheet 16 of 27)
I
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
NISHNA
NISHON (DR)
NITTAW
NOKASIPPI
NOLIN (FF)
NOLO
NOME
NOOKACHAMPS
NORMA
NORTHCOTE (DR)
NORTHWOOD (DR)
NORWELL (DR)
NORWICH
NOT I
NOVARY
NOVATO
NUBY
NUGENT (FF)
NUTALL
OAKHURST
OAKLIMETER (FF)
OBANION
OCHO
OCOEE
OCOSTA
ODENSON
ODNE
OGEECHEE (DR)
OGEMAW (DR)
OJATA
OKANOGAN (FF)
OKAW
OKEECHOBEE (DR)
OKEELANTA (DR)
OKLAWAHA
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Dystric Fluventic Eutrochrepts
Typic Fragiaquults
Pergelic Cryaquepts
Typic Fluvaquents
Mollic Haplaquepts
Vertic Haplaquolls
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Fragiaquepts
Typic Fragiaquepts
Typic Humaquepts
Cumulic Cryaquolls
Typic Hydraquents
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Udifluvents
Mollic Albaqualfs
Vertic Albaqualfs
Fluvaquentic Dystrochrepts
Aerie Halaquepts
Haplic Nadurargids
Terric Medifibrists
Typic Fluvaquents
Andaqueptic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Ochraquults
Aquic Haplorthids
Typic Calciaquolls
Fluventic Haploxerolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Hemic Medisaprists
Terric Medisaprists
Terric Medifibrists
OKOBOJI
CLASHES (FF)
OLBUT
OLDHAM (DR)
OLDS
OLDSMAR
OLENO
OLENTANGY (DR)
OLMSTED
OLHSTEE
OMNI
ONA
ONTKO
OPELIKA
OPENLAKE (FF)
ORCAS
ORELIA (P)
ORID1A
ORIO (DR)
ORWET (DR)
OSAGE
OSHAWA
OSIER (DR)
OSSIAN (DR)
OSSIPEE (DR)
OSWALD (FF)
OTHELLO
OTTER (DR)
OUACHITA (FF)
OVERTON
OWEGO
OZAMIS
OZAN
OZIAS
PAHOKEE
Cutnulic Haplaquolls
Mollic Haploxeralfs
Abruptic Argiaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Andic Cryaquepts
Alfic Arenic Haplaquods
Vertic Haplaquepts
Histic Humaquepts
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Ultic Haplaquods
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquods
Andic Cryaquepts
Mollic Albaqualfs
Vertic Haplaquepts
Typic Sphagnofibrists
Typic Ochraqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Calciaquolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Psammaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Terric Borohemists
Aquic Chromoxererts
Typic Ochraquults
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Fluventic Dystrochrepts
Aerie Haplaquepts
Mollic Fluvaquents
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Glossaqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Lithic Medisaprists
(Continued)
(Sheet 17 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
PAHRANAGAT
PAISLEY
PALMAR
PALMETTO
PALMS (DR)
PAMLICO (DR)
PANASOFFKEE
PANDORA
PANGBORN
PANSEY
PANTEGO (DR)
PANTHER
PAPAGUA
PARANAT
PAREHAT
PARENT (DR)
PARKHILL (DR)
PARKWOOD
PARNELL (DR)
PARSIPPANY
PARTLOW
PASCO
PASQDETTI
PASQUOTANK (DR)
PATCHIN
PATTERSON
PATTON (DR)
PAULDING
PAULINA
PAWCATUCK
PAXICO
PAXVILLE (DR)
PEACHAM (DR)
PECKISH
PEDIGO (FF)
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Typic Tropohemists
Grossarenic Paleaquults
Terrlc Medisaprists
Terric Medisaprists
Arenic Ochraqualfs
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Medisaprists
Plinthic Paleaquults
Umbric Paleaquults
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Fluvaquentic Haploxerolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Mollic Haplaquepts
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Argiaquolls
Aerie Ochraqualfs
Typic Ochraquults
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Andaqueptic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquepts
Aerie Haplaquepts
Aerie Ochraqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquepts
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Sulfihemists
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Umbraquults
Humic Fragiaquepts
Typic Sulfaquents
Cumulic Haploxerolls
PELHAM (DR)
PEL 1C
PELLA (DR)
PELLICER
PEMI (DR)
PENGILLY
PENNSUCO
PEOGA
PEOH
PEONE
PEORIA
PEOTONE (DR)
PEPPER
PERCILLA
PERCY (DR)
PERELLA (DR)
PERQUIMANS (DR)
PERRINE
PERRY
PESCADERO (FF)
PETEETNEET
PETROLIA (DR)
PETTIGREW (DR)
PEWAMO (DR)
PHILBON
PHOENIX
PI ASA
PICKFORD
PICKNEY (DR)
PILINE
PILLSBURY (DR)
PINCONNING (DR)
PINEDA
PINELLAS
PINHOOK (DR)
Arenic Paleaquults
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Sulfaquents
Typic Haplaquepts
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Ochraqualfs
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Andaqueptic Fluvaquents
Albic Glossic Natraqualfs
Cumullc Haplaquolls
Alfic Haplaquods
Aerie Ochraqualfs
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraquults
Typic Fluvaquents
Vertic Haplaquepts
Aquic Natrixeralfs
Typic Medisaprists
Typic Fluvaquents
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Argiaquolls
Terric Medisaprists
Entic Pelloxererts
Mollic Natraqualfs
Aerie Haplaquepts
Cumulic Humaquepts
Aquic Chromoxererts
Aerie Haplaquepts
Mollic Haplaquents
Arenic Glossaqualfs
Arenic Ochraqualfs
Mollic Ochraqualfs
i
(Continued)
(Sheet 18 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
PINNEBOG (DR)
PINONES
PIOPOLIS (DR)
PIT (FF)
PLACEBO
PLACID
PLANK
PLANKINTON (DR)
PLANTATION
PLATTE
PLAYMOOR
PLEASANT (P)
PLEINE
PLEVNA
PLUCK
PLUMMER (DR)
POCATY
POCOMOKE
POGANEAB
POLAWANA (DR)
POMONA
POMPANO
PONZER (DR)
POOLER (DR)
POPASH
POPHERS
POPLE
PORFIRIO
PORRETT
PORTAGE
PORTAGEVILLE (DR)
PORTLAND
PORTSMOUTH (DR)
POTTSBURG
POUJADE
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Hemic Medisaprists
Thapto-Histic Tropic Fluvaquents
Typic Fluvaquents
Chromic Pelloxererts
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Glossaqualfs
Typic Argialbolls
Histic Humaquepts
Mollic Fluvaquents
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Torrertic Argiustolls
Histic Humaquepts
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Fluvaquents
Grossarenic Paleaquults
Typic Sulfihemists
Typic Umbraquults
Typic Fluvaquents
Cumulic Humaquepts
Ultic Haplaquods
Typic Psammaquents
Terric Medisaprists
Typic Ochraquults
Typic Umbraqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Arenic Glossaqualfs
Aquic Calciustolls
Andaqueptic Ochraqualfs
Vertic Haplaquolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Vertic Haplaquepts
Typic Umbraquults
Grossarenic Haplaquods
Durixerollic Haplargids
POUNCEY
POVERTY
POY (DR)
POYGAN (DR)
PREAKNESS
PREBISH (DR)
PROCHASKA (DR)
PROVO BAY
PUERCO
PUGET
PUNGO (DR)
PUNTA
PURDY
PUSHMATAHA
PUTNAM
PYBURN
PYWELL
QUAM (DR)
QUARLES
QUINN
QUOSATANA
RACOMBES
RACOON (DR)
RAFAEL
RAFTON
RAGSDALE (DR)
RAHAL
RAINS
RALSEN
RAMELLI (FF)
RAMSDELL
RANDALL (DR)
RANDMAN
RANTOUL (DR)
RAPPAHANNOCK
Typic Albaquults
Typic Haplaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Torrerts
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Medisaprists
Grossarenic Haplaquods
Typic Ochraquults
Aquic Udifluvents
Mollic Albaqualfs
Typic Umbraquults
Typic Borosaprists
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Ochraqualfs
Fluvaquentic Humaquepts
Pachic Argiustolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Haplaquepts
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Argiaquolls
Arenic Albaqualfs
Typic Paleaquults
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquepts
Udic Pellusterts
Argic Cryaquolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Terric Sulfihemists
(Continued)
(Sheet 19 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
RAUVILLE
RAVENDALE
RAYLAKE
RAYNHAM (DR)
RAYPOL
REDCO
REDDICK (DR)
REDLODGE
REED
REESVILLE
REGAL
REGAN (DR)
REMBERT (DR)
RENNIE
RENSSELAER (DR)
RENTON
REPARADA
RETROP
REVERE
REXFORD
REYES (F)
RIB (DR)
RICCO
RICEBORO (DR)
RIDOTT
RIFLE (DR)
RIGOLETTE
RINDGE
RIO
RIPPOWAM (DR)
RITA
RITZ
RIVIERA
RIVRA (FF)
RIZ
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Entic Chromoxererts
Aquentic Chromuderts
Aerie Haplaquepts
Aerie Haplaquepts
Aquentic Chromuderts
Typic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Cryaquolls
Vertic Argiaquolls
Aerie Ochraqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Ochraquults
Mollic Fluvaquents
Typic Argiaquolls
Mollic Fluvaquents
Tropic Fluvaquents
Aquic Udifluvents
Typic Calciaquolls
Aerie Fragiaquepts
Sulfic Fluvaquents
Mollic Haplaquepts
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Arenic Paleaquults
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Borohemists
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Medisaprists
Typic Argiaquolls
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Fluvaquents
Arenic Glossaqualfs
Ustic Torrifluvents
Typic Natrixeralfs
ROANOKE (DR)
ROBERTSVILLE
ROBINSONVILLE (FF)
ROCKWELL
ROEBUCK (FF)
ROELLEN
ROEMER
ROETEX
ROLFE
ROLISS (DR)
ROMEO
ROMNELL
ROMULUS
RONDEAU (DR)
ROOT
ROPER (DR)
ROSANE
ROSCOE
ROSCOMMON (DR)
ROSE CREEK
ROSEBLOOM
ROSEDHU (DR)
ROSELLA
ROSEWOOD (DR)
ROSHE SPRINGS
ROUNDABOUT (DR)
ROUNDHEAD (DR)
ROUTON
ROWE
ROXANA (FF)
ROXTON
RUARK
RUBIO
RUMNEY
RUNEBERG (DR)
Typic Ochraquults
Typic Fragiaqualfs
Typic Udifluvents
Typic Calciaquolls
Vertic Hapludolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Arenic Ochraqualfs
Udertic Haplustolls
Typic Argialbolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Lithic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Udollic Ochraqualfs
Limnic Borosaprists
Mollic Fluvaquents
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Cryaquolls
Typic Pellusterts
Mollic Psatnmaquents
Fluvaquentic Haploxerolls
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquods
Albic Glossic Natraqualfs
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Calciaquolls
Aerie Haplaquepts
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Udifluents
Vertic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Mollic Albaqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
(Continued)
(Sheet 20 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
RUSCO (P)
RUSE
RUSHMORE (DR)
RUSHVILLE
RUTLEGE (DR)
RYAN
SABLE (DR)
SACO
SACRAMENTO (FF)
SAGANING (DR)
SAGE
SAGO (DR)
SALADAR
SALADON
SALAMATOF
SALERNO
SALINAS (FF)
SALMO
SALT LAKE
SALTAIR
SALTERY
SALTESE
SALZER
SAMBA
SAMISH
SAMMAMISH
SAMPSEL
SAMSULA (DR)
SANDUSKY
SANIBEL (DR)
SANTANELA
SANTAROSA (F)
SANTEE (DR)
SAPELO
SARANAC (DR)
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Aquic Argiustolls
Lithic Haplaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Natraquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Fluvaquents
Histic Humaquepts
Fluvaquentic Troposaprists
Typic Cryaquolls
Spagnic Borofibrists
Grossarenic Haplaquods
Pachic Haploxerolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Salorthids
Fluvaquentic Cryofibrists
Typic Medisaprlsts
Vertic Haplaquepts
Typic Umbraqualfs
Typic Fluvaquents
Fluvaquentic Humaquepts
Typic Argiaquolls
Terric Medisaprists
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Psammaquents
Typic Natraqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Argiaquolls
Ultic Haplaquods
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
SARPY
SATILLA
SAUCEL
SAUGATUCK (DR)
SAULICH
SAUNDERS
SAUVIE
SAWATCH
SAWMILL (DR)
SAWTELPEAK
SAYERS (FF)
SCANTIC (DR)
SCARBORO
SCATLAKE
SCHERRARD
SCHOOLEY
SCHRADER
SCITICO
SCOGGIN
SCOTT (DR)
SCUPPERNONG (DR)
SEARSPORT
SEASTRAND
SEATTLE
SEBAGO
SEBEWA (DR)
SEBRING
SEELYEVILLE (DR)
SEGIDAL
SEJITA
SEKIU
SELLERS
SELMA (DR)
SEMIAHMOO
SESSUM
Typic Udipsamments
Thapto-Histic Fluvaquents
Typic Salorthids
Aerie Haplaquods
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Aerie Calciaquolls
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Histic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Cryaquolls
Typic Ustifluvents
Typic Haplaquepts
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Hydraquents
Natric Duraquolls
Andaqueptic Fluvaquents
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquepts
Typic Ochraquults
Typic Argialbolls
Terric Medisaprists
Typic Psammaquents
Terric Medihemists
Typic Medihemists
Fibric Borohemists
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Borosaprists
Typic Sideraquods
Typic Salorthids
Humic Haplaquepts
Cumulic Humaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Medisaprists
Vertic Ochraqualfs
(Continued)
(Sheet 21 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
SETTLEMENT
SETTLEMEYER
SEVERN (FF)
SEXTON
SHAKER
SHAKOPEE
SHALBA
SHALCAR
SHANDEP (DR)
SHANGHAI (FF)
SHARKEY
SHEFFIELD
SHELMADINE
SHENKS
SHERRY (DR)
SHILOH (DR)
SHIMA
SHINKEE
SHONKIN
SHOOKER (DR)
SHREWSBURY (DR)
SHUMWAY
SICKLES (DR)
SIKESTON
SILVIES
SIMS (DR)
SKAGIT
SKAGWAY
SKOKOMISH
SLIKOK
SLOAN
SMILEY (DR)
SMILEYVILLE
SMITHTON
SMYRNA
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Aerie Halaquepts
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Udifluvents
Typic Ochraqualfs
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Calciaquolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Terric Medisaprists
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Aquic Xerofluvents
Vertic Haplaquepts
Typic Fragiaqualfs
Typic Fragiaquults
Terric Medisaprists
Udollic Ochraqualfs
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Terric Medisaprists
Terric Medisaprists
Typic Haplustalfs
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Ochraquults
Vertic Haplaquepts
Mollic Haplaquents
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Cryaquolls
Mollic Haplaquepts
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Cryopsamments
Mollic Fluvaquents
Histic Cryaquepts
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Argiaquolls
Mollic Albaqualfs
Typic Paleaquults
Aerie Haplaquods
SNIDER
SNOHOMISH
SOLIER
SOLOMON
SONOMA
SORTER
SOSTIEN
SOUTHAM
SPALDING
SPENARD (DR)
SPERRY
SPICER (DR)
SPOONER (DR)
SPRINGFIELD
ST. JOHNS
ST. NICHOLAS
STAMP
STANEY
STAPLES
STARICHKOF
STATELINE
STAVE
STEED
STENDAL
STERRETT
STIMSON
STIRUM (DR)
STOCKADE
STONO (DR)
STRANDQUIST
STREATOR (DR)
STROM
STUMPP
STURGILL
SUCARNOOCHEE (FF)
Aquic Hapludolls
Thapto-Histic Fluvaquents
Aerie Haplaquepts
Vertic Haplaquolls
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Ochraqualfs
Vertic Fluvaquents
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Borohemists
Sideric Cryaquods
Typic Argialbolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Aerie Albaqualfs
Typic Haplaquods
Lithic Cryaquods
Typic Cryochrepts
Fluvaquentic Cryofibrists
Arenic Ochraqualfs
Fluvaquentic Borohemists
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Cryaquents
Entic Haploxerolls
Aerie Fluvaquents
Aerie Ochraqualfs
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Natraquolls
Typic Umbraqualfs
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Pachic Argixerolls
Natric Cryoborolls
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Aquentic Chromuderts
(Continued)
(Sheet 22 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
SU1SUN
SUMAN (DR)
SUMAS
SUMPF (DR)
SUN
SUNNYHAY
SURFSIDE
SURRENCY
SUSANNA
SWALER
SWAN
SWANSEA
SWANTON (DR)
SWANVILLE (DR)
SWARTZ
SWEETWATER
SYCAMORE (FF)
SYRENE
TACOMA
TACOOSH (DR)
TAINTOR
TALCO
TALCOT (DR)
TALMOON (DR)
TALQUIN
TAMBA
TANAK
TANANA
TANDY
TANTILE
TANWAX
TAPPAN (DR)
TATLUM
TATTON
TAWAS (DR)
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Typic Medihemists
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Fluvaquents
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Aerie Haplaquepts
Lithic Cryosaprists
Vertic Haplaquolls
Arenic Umbric Paleaquults
Ultic Haplaquods
Xerollic Paleargids
Typic Haplaquolls
Terric Medisaprists
Aerie Haplaquepts
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Palexeralfs
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Calciaquolls
Andaqueptic Fluvaquents
Terric Borohemists
Typic Arglaquolls
Aerie Glossaqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Entic Haplaquods
Typic Haplaquepts
Pergelic Cryaquepts
Aquic Udifluvents
Ultic Haplaquods
Mollic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Hydraquents
Typic Psammaquents
Terric Borosaprists
TAWCAW (FF)
TEALWHIT
TEETERS
TELA (FF)
TELFERNER
TEMPLE (FF)
TENDOY
TENSAS (FF)
TEPETE
TEQUESTA
TERMO
TEROUGE
TERRA CEIA (DR)
TETONKA (DR)
TETONVIEW (DR)
TETONVILLE
TEXARK
THIEFRIVER (DR)
THOMAS (DR)
THORNDALE
THORNTON
THORP (DR)
TIBURONES
TICE (FF)
T1CHNOR
TIFFANY (DR)
TILFER
TIMBALIER
TINN
TIOCANO (DR)
TISCH
TISONIA
TITUS
TOBICO (DR)
TOCOI
Fluvaquentic Dystrochrepts
Aerie Haplaquepts
Mollic Halaquepts
Typic Argiustolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Borosaprists
Aerie Ochraqualfs
Terric Borohemists
Arenic Glossaqualfs
Xerollic Paleargids
Aquic Chromuderts
Typic Medisaprists
Argiaquic Argialbolls
Typic Calciaquolls
Mollic Cryofluvents
Typic Pelluderts
Typic Calciaquolls
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Fragiaqualfs
Aquic Xerorthents
Argiaquic Argialbolls
Typic Troposaprists
Fluvaquentic Hapludolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Medisaprists
Vertic Haplaquolls
Udic Pellusterts
Mollic Andaquepts
Typic Sulfihemists
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Mollic Psammaquents
Ultic Haplaquods
(Continued)
(Sheet 23 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
TODDSTAV
TOGUS
TOINE (FF)
TOISNOT (DR)
TOLEDO
TOLSONA
TOMAST
TOMOKA
TOMOTLEY (DR)
TONKA (DR)
TONKEY (DR)
TOOLES
TOOLESBORO
TOPPENISH
TOR
TORHUNTA (DR)
TORPEDO LAKE
TORRY
TORSIDO
TOTO (DR)
TOTTEN (DR)
TOWHEE
TOXAWAY (DR)
TRACK
TRACOSA
TRAER
TREATY (DR)
TREBLOC
TRIANGLE
TRINITY
TROSKY (DR)
TRUMBULL
TRUSSEL
TRYON
TSIRKU
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Typic Ochraquults
Terric Borofibrists
Ultic Hapludalfs
Typic Fragiaquults
Mollic Haplaquepts
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Aerie Paleaquults
Terric Medisaprists
Typic Ochraquults
Argiaquic Argialbolls
Mollic Haplaquepts
Arenic Albaqualfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Lithic Haplaquepts
Typic Humaquepts
Hisfic Cryaquepts
Typic Medisaprists
Typic Argiaquolls
Limnic Medisaprists
Typic Natraquolls
Typic Fragiaqualfs
Cumulic Humaquepts
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquents
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Paleaquults
Aquic Chromoxererts
Typic Pelluderts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Aerie Fragiaquepts
Typic Psammaquents
Typic Cryofluvents
TUCKER (FF)
TUCKERMAN
TUGHILL
TUKWILA
TULELAKE (F)
TULLAHASSEE (FF)
TUNICA (FF)
TUPUKNUK
TURLOCK
TURNBULL
TUSCAWILLA
TUSCUMBIA
TUSKEEGO
TWEBA
TWIG (DR)
TWOMILE
TYNDALL (FF)
TYONEK
UDOLPHO (DR)
UGAK
UMBERLAND (F,P)
UMIAT
UNA
UNAKWIK
UNCAS
URBO (FF)
ORICH
URNESS (DR)
UTABA
UTE
VACHERIE (FF)
VALDEZ (FF)
VALKARIA
VALLERS (DR)
VAMONT
Cumulic Haploxerolls
Typic Ochraqualfs
Histic Humaquepts
Limnic Medisaprists
Aerie Fluvaquents
Aquic Udifluvents
Vertic Haplaquepts
Pergelic Cryaquepts
Albic Natraqualfs
Typic Hydraquents
Typic Ochraqualfs
Vertic Haplaquepts
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Albaqualfs
Aerie Haplaquepts
Fluvaquentic Borosaprists
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Andic Cryaquepts
Aerie Halaquepts
Pergelic Cryaquepts
Typic Haplaquepts
Terric Cryohemists
Mollic Andaquepts
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Argiaquolls
Mollic Fluvaquents
Cumulic Haploxerolls
Argic Cryaquolls
Aerie Fluvaquents
Aerie Haplaquepts
Spodic Psammaquents
Typic Calciaquolls
Aquentic Chromuderts
i
(Continued)
(Sheet 24 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
VARICK
VASSALBORO
VASTINE
VAUGHAN
VEAZIE
VEEDUM (DR)
VELASCO
VENABLE
VENAPASS
VENICE
VENLO (DR)
VERBOORT
VERENDRYE
VERHALEN
VERO
VESPER (DR)
VESTABURG (DR)
VESTON
VICTORIA (P)
VIDAURI
VIGIA
VIKING
VILLY
VIMVILLE
VINCENNES
VIRDEN (DR)
VOATS (FF)
VOLTA
VOLTAIRE
WABASH
WABASHA
WABASSO
WACAHOOTA
WACOUSTA (DR)
WADLEIGH
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Borofibrists
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Curaulic Haploxerolls
Typic Humaquepts
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Cryaquolls
Cumulic Cryaquolls
Typic Medihemists
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Argialbolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Mollic Torrerts
Alfic Haplaquods
Humic Haplaquepts
Mollic Psammaquents
Typic Fluvaquents
Udic Pellusterts
Vertic Albaqualfs
Histic Tropaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Glossaqualfs
Typic Haplaquepts
Typic Argiaquolls
Fluventic Haploxerolls
Typic Natraqualfs
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Vertic Haplaquolls
Mollic Fluvaquents
Alfic Haplaquods
Arenic Paleaquults
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Cryaquods
WADMALAW (DR)
WAGNER (DR)
WAKELAND (FF)
WALDEN (FF)
WALDO
WALDORF
WALFORD
WALLER
WALLKILL (DR)
WALPOLE
WAMBA
WANSER
WAPATO
WARDELL (DR)
WAREHAM
WARM SPRINGS
WARMAN (DR)
WARNERS (DR)
WARRENTON
WASDA (DR)
WASHBURN (P)
WASHTENAW (DR)
WASILLA
WASKISH
WATCHUNG
WAUBERG
WAUCEDAH
WAUCHULA
WAUPACA (DR)
WAUSEON (DR)
WAUTOMA (DR)
WAVELAND
WAVERLY
WAXPOOL
WAYLAND (DR)
Umbric Ochraqualfs
Mollic Albaqualfs
Aerie Fluvaquents
Typic Cryaquolls
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Typic Glossaqualfs
Thapto Histic Fluvaquents
Aerie Haplaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Psammaquents
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Mollic Ochraqualfs
Humaqueptic Psammaquents
Aerie Calciaquolls
Histic Humaquepts
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Tropaquepts
Histic Humaquepts
Aerie Fluvaquents
Humic Cryaquepts
Typic Sphagnofibrists
Typic Ochraqualfs
Arenic Albaqualfs
Histic Humaquepts
Ultic Haplaquods
Mollic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Mollic Haplaquents
Arenic Haplaquods
Typic Fluvaquents
Albaquic Hapludalfs
Mollic Fluvaquents
(Continued)
(Sheet 25 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Continued)
Soil Phase
WEBILE
WEBSTER
WEEKIWACHEE
WEEKSVILLE (DR)
WEHADKEE (DR)
WEIMER
WEIR (DR)
WEIRMAN (FF)
WELCH
WELSUM
WENAS
WENDANE
WESCONNETT
WESTBROOK
WESTLAND (DR)
WESTON
WESTWEGO
WETZEL
WEYERS
WHATELY
WHEATLEY (DR)
WHITEHORN
WHITESON
WHITEWOOD (DR)
WHITMAN
WHITSON
WICHUP (FF)
WIERGATE
WILBANKS (DR)
WILBRAHAM
WILDWOOD (DR)
WILHITE
WILL (DR)
WILLAMAR
WILLANCH
Classification
Terric Medisaprists
Typic Haplaquolls
Typlc Sulfihemlsts
Typlc Humaquepts
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Pelloxererts
Typic Ochraqualfs
Torrifluventic Haploxerolls
Cumullc Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Cumullc Haplaquolls
Aerie Halaquepts
Typic Haplaquods
Typic Sulfihemists
Typic Argiaquolls
Typlc Ochraquults
Thapto-Histic Fluvaquents
Typic Ochraqualfs
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Mollic Haplaquepts
Mollic Psammaquents
Typlc Humaquepts
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Ochraqualfs
Histic Cryaquolls
Typic Pelluderts
Cumulic Humaquepts
Aquic Dystrochrepts
Histic Humaquepts
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Natraqualfs
Aerie Tropaquepts
Soil Phase
WILLETTE (DR)
WILLIMAN
WILLOWS
WILLWOOD
WILMINGTON
WILSON
WINDER
WINGER
WINGINAW (DR)
WINLO
WINTERSET
WISNER (DR)
WITBECK
WOCKLEY
WOLCOTT
WOLDALE
WOLFESON
WOLLENT
WOODINGTON (DR)
WOODINVILLE
WOODLYN
WOODS CROSS
WOOFUS
WORSHAM
WORTHING (DR)
WRANGELL
WRENCOE
WRIGHTSVILLE
WULFERT
WYALUSING
WYANDOTTE (DR)
WYARD
WYICK
WYNONA
WYNOOSE
Classification
Terric Medisaprists
Arenic Ochraquults
Typic Pelloxererts
Typic Torriorthents
Typic Haplaquods
Vertic Ochraqualfs
Typic Glossaqualfs
Typic Calciaquolls
Terric Borofibrists
Typic Duraquolls
Typic Argiaquolls
Typic Haplaquolls
Mollic Haplaquepts
Plinthaquic Paleudalfs
Typic Haplaquolls
Typlc Haplaquolls
Aqulc Xerochrepts
Typic Humaquepts
Typic Paleaquults
Typic Fluvaquents
Typlc Ochraqualfs
Cumullc Haplaquolls
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraquults
Typic Argiaquolls
Pergelic Cryohemists
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Glossaqualfs
Terric Sulfihemists
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Calciaquolls
Typlc Haplaquolls
Typic Albaqualfs
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typlc Albaqualfs
(Continued)
(Sheet 26 of 27)
-------
Table Dl (Concluded)
Soil Phase
WYSOCKING (DR)
XIPE
YAKIMA
YAMSAY
YAQUINA
YOBE
YONGES (DR)
YORKTOWN
YOST
YUKON
YULEE
YUVAS
ZACHARY
Classification
Soil Phase
Classification
Thapto-Histic Fluvaquents
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Cumulic Haploxerolls
Limnic Borosaprists
Aquic Haplorthids
Aerie Halaquepts
Typic Ochraqualfs
Typic Fluvaquents
Typic Pelloxererts
Histic Pergelic Cryaquepts
Typic Haplaquolls
Abruptic Durixeralfs
Typic Albaqualfs
ZADOG (DR)
ZEPHYR
ZIEGENFUSS (DR)
ZILABOY
ZILLAH
ZIPP
ZOE
ZOHNER
ZOLA (FF)
ZOOK
ZUMAN
ZWINGLE
ZYZZUG
Typic Haplaquolls
Typic Ochraquults
Mollic Haplaquepts
Aquic Chromuderts
Fluvaquentic Haplaquolls
Typic Halaquepts
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Calcic Cryaquolls
Cumulic Haploxerolls
Cumulic Haplaquolls
Typic Haplaquents
Typic Albaqualfs
Typic Humaquepts
(Sheet 27 of 27)
-------
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Region 5, Library (jrL-l(%)
230 S. BearMrn b't -eet, Room 1670
C*lc»fo, IL 60604
------- |